- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi
- Numerical Control
- E80
- Setup Manual
Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual PDF
Introduction
This manual covers the items required for installing, connecting and setting up the Mitsubishi Electric CNC. Supported models are as follows:
Abbreviations in this manual are as follows:
Read this manual thoroughly and understand the product's functions and performance before starting to use. This manual is written on the assumption that all optional functions are added, but the actually delivered device may not have all functions. The unit names, cable names and various specifications are subject to change without notice. Please confirm these before placing an order. Be sure to keep this manual always at hand.
This manual notes a reference chapter as "Chapter: Section: Paragraph". (Example) For "4.1.1 Environment Conditions inside the Control Panel" : "General Specifications: Environment Conditions: Environment Conditions inside the Operation" ("4.1.1 Environment Conditions inside the Operation" included in "4.1 Environment Conditions" of "4 General Specifications")
Notes on Reading This Manual
(1) This book is configured as follows. Refer to the following chapters as necessary. Installation and connection: Chapter 1 to 15 Setup: Chapter 16 to 36
(2) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC. For information about each machine tool, refer to manuals issued from the machine tool builder. If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.
(3) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations. The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered "impossible".
(4) This manual is for the machine tool builders who set up the NC system. (5) Do not connect to the pin described as "NC" on the pin assignment table of the connector. (6) The characteristic values and numerical values without tolerances mentioned in this manual are representative
values.
Supported models Abbreviations in this manual M800S Series M850S, M830S M80 Series M80 TypeA, M80 TypeB E80 Series E80 TypeA, E80 TypeB
Abbreviations Supported models M800, M800 Series M800S Series M80, M80 Series M80 Series M800/M80, M800/M80 Series M800S Series/M80 Series M8, M8 Series M800S Series/M80 Series/E80 Series
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.
Items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them, however, may not be available for your NC system. Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on each NC system (or version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before starting to use.
Refer to "Smart safety observation" (BNP-C3072-022) for details about the connection with safety observing I/O device.
To protect the availability, integrity and confidentiality of the NC system against cyber-attacks including unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) (*1) attack, and computer virus from external sources via a network, take security measures such as firewall, VPN, and anti-virus software. (*1) Denial-of-service (DoS) refers to a type of cyber-attack that disrupts services by overloading the system or by exploiting a vulnerability of the system.
Mitsubishi Electric assumes no responsibility for any problems caused to the NC system by any type of cyber-attacks including DoS attack, unauthorized access and computer virus.
The numerical control unit is configured of the control unit, display unit, operation board (operation panel I/O unit), servo drive unit, spindle drive unit, power supply unit + driver, servomotor, spindle motor, etc.
In this manual, the following items are generically called "controller". - Control unit - Display unit - Operation board (operation panel I/O unit) - Numerical control unit peripheral devices (input/output unit, safety unit)
In this manual, the following items are generically called "drive unit". - Servo drive unit - Spindle drive unit - Power supply unit + driver
In this manual, the following items are generically called "motor". - Servo motor - Spindle motor
Also refer to the manuals on "Manual List" as necessary.
CAUTION
Manual List
Manuals related to M800/M80/E80/C80 Series are listed as follows. These manuals are written on the assumption that all optional functions are added to the targeted model. Some functions or screens may not be available depending on the machine or specifications set by MTB. (Confirm the specifications before use.) The manuals issued by MTB take precedence over these manuals.
Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents M800/M80/E80 Series Instruction Manual IB-1501274
Operation guide for NC Explanation for screen operation, etc.
C80 Series Instruction Manual IB-1501453
Operation guide for NC Explanation for screen operation, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2)
IB-1501275 G code programming for lathe system Basic functions, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2)
IB-1501276 G code programming for lathe system Functions for multi-part system, high-accuracy function, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System) (1/2)
IB-1501277 G code programming for machining center system Basic functions, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System) (2/2)
IB-1501278 G code programming for machining center system Functions for multi-part system, high-accuracy function, etc.
M800/M80/E80 Series Alarm/Parameter Manual IB-1501279
Alarms Parameters
C80 Series Alarm/Parameter Manual IB-1501560
Alarms Parameters
Manuals for MTBs (NC)
Manuals for MTBs (drive section)
Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications Manual (Function) IB-1501505
Model selection Outline of various functions
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications Manual (Hardware) IB-1501506
Model selection Specifications of hardware unit
M800W/M80W Series Connection and Setup Manual IB-1501268
Detailed specifications of hardware unit Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual IB-1501269
Detailed specifications of hardware unit Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)
C80 Series Connection and Setup Manual IB-1501452
Detailed specifications of hardware unit Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)
M800/M80/E80 Series PLC Development Manual IB-1501270
Electrical design I/O relation (assignment, setting, connection), field network Development environment (PLC on-board, peripheral
development environment), etc.
M800/M80/E80 Series PLC Programming Manual IB-1501271
Electrical design Sequence programming PLC support functions, etc.
M800/M80/E80/C80 Series PLC Interface Manual IB-1501272
Electrical design Interface signals between NC and PLC
M800/M80/E80 Series Maintenance Manual IB-1501273
Cleaning and replacement for each unit Other items related to maintenance
C80 Series Maintenance Manual IB-1501454
Cleaning and replacement for each unit Other items related to maintenance
Manual IB No. Contents MDS-E/EH Series Specifications Manual IB-1501226 Specifications for power supply regeneration type
MDS-E/EH Series Instruction Manual IB-1501229 Instruction for power supply regeneration type
MDS-EJ/EJH Series Specifications Manual IB-1501232 Specifications for regenerative resistor type
MDS-EJ/EJH Series Instruction Manual IB-1501235 Instruction for regenerative resistor type
MDS-EM/EMH Series Specifications Manual IB-1501238 Specifications for multi-hybrid, power supply regeneration
type MDS-EM/EMH Series Instruction Manual IB-1501241 Instruction for multi-hybrid, power supply regeneration type
DATA BOOK IB-1501252 Specifications of servo drive unit, spindle drive unit, motor, etc.
Manuals for MTBs (Others)
For M800/M80/E80 Series
Manual No. Purpose and Contents GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG Outline of hardware such as part names, external dimensions,
installation, wiring, maintenance, etc. of GOTs GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG Outline of utilities such as screen display setting, operation
method, etc. of GOTs GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG Outline of each monitor function of GOTs
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products)
SH-081197ENG Outline of connection types and connection method between GOT and Mitsubishi Electric connection devices
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG Outline of screen design method using screen creation
software GT Designer3
Manual No. Purpose and Contents GOT2000/GOT1000 Series CC-Link Communication Unit User's Manual IB-0800351 Explanation for handling CC-Link communication unit (for
GOT2000 series/GOT1000 series) GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup) SH-080372E Explanation for system configuration, installation, etc. of PLC
development tool GX Developer GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual SH-080373E Explanation for operations using PLC development tool GX
Developer GX Converter Version 1 Operating Manual IB-0800004 Explanation for operations using data conversion tool GX
Converter
GX Works2 Installation Instructions BCN-P5999-0944 Explanation for the operating environment and installation method of GX Works2
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) SH-080779ENG
Explanation for the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to Simple project and Structured project such as parameter setting, operation method for the online function
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) SH-080780ENG Explanation for methods for such as creating and monitoring
programs in Simple project of GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
SH-080984ENG Explanation for methods for such as creating function blocks,
pasting function blocks to sequence programs, and operating FB library in Simple project of GX Works2
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) SH-080781ENG Explanation for methods for such as creating and monitoring
programs in Structured project of GX Works2
GX Works3 Installation Instructions BCN-P5999-0391 Explanation for the operating environment and installation method of GX Works3
MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/ Local Module Users Manual SH-080394E Explanation for system configuration, installation, wiring, etc.
of master/local modules for CC-Link system GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1)
SH-081198ENG Explanation for connection types and connection method
between GOT and other company's devicesGOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2)
SH-081199ENG
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/ Fieldbus Products, Peripherals)
SH-081200ENG Explanation for connection types and connection method
between GOT and microcomputers, MODBUS/fieldbus products, peripherals
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG
Explanation for system configuration, screen configuration and operation method of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000
For C80 Series
Reference Manual for MTBs
Manual No. Purpose and Contents MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual SH-081262 Outline of system configuration, specifications, installation,
wiring, maintenance, etc. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module Users Manual (Startup) SH-081263 Outline of specifications, procedures before operation,
troubleshooting, etc. for CPU module MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module Users Manual (Application) SH-081264 Outline of memory, functions, devices, parameters, etc. for
CPU module MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application) SH-081259 Explanation for functions, parameter settings, programming,
troubleshooting, etc. of the CC-Link IE Field Network function QCPU Users Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
SH-080483 Outline of specifications, necessary knowledge to configure
the system and maintenance-related descriptions for Q series CPU module, etc.
GX Works3 Operating Manual SH-081215 Outline of functions, programming, etc.
Manual No. Purpose and Contents M800/M80 Series Smart safety observation Specification manual BNP-C3072-022
Explanation for smart safety observation function C80 Series Smart safety observation Specification manual BNP-C3077-022
M800/M80 Series CC-Link (Master/ Local) Specification manual BNP-C3072-089 Explanation for CC-Link
M800/M80 Series PROFIBUS-DP Specification manual BNP-C3072-118 Explanation for PROFIBUS-DP communication function
M800/M80 Series Interactive cycle insertion (Customization) Specification manual
BNP-C3072-121- 0003 Explanation for interactive cycle insertion
M800/M80 Series EtherNet/IP Specifications manual BNP-C3072-263 Explanation for EtherNet/IP
M800/M80 Series CC-Link IE Field (Master/local) Specifications manual BNP-C3072-283 Explanation for CC-Link IE Field
M800/M80 Series GOT Connection Specifications manual BNP-C3072-314 Explanation for GOT connection
M800/M80 Series CC-Link IE Field Basic Specifications manual BNP-C3072-337 Explanation for CC-Link IE Field Basic
M800/M80 Series FL-net Specifications manual BNP-C3072-368 Explanation for FL-net
M800/M80 Series Synchronous Control Specifications manual BNP-C3072-074 Explanation for synchronous control
M800/M80 Series Multiple-Axis Synchronization Control Specifications manual
BNP-C3072-339 Explanation for multiple-axis synchronization control
Precautions for Safety
Always read this manual and enclosed documents before installation, operation, maintenance and inspection to ensure correct usage. Thoroughly understand the basics, safety information and precautions of the devices before using. This manual classifies the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Note that the items under " CAUTION" could lead to serious consequences as well depending on the situation. All the items are important and must always be observed.
The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.
The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.
DANGER When the user could be subject to imminent fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.
WARNING When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.
CAUTION When the user could be subject to injuries or the property could be damaged if handling is mistaken.
This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).
For example, indicates "Keep fire away".
This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).
For example, indicates "it must be grounded".
CAUTION
CAUTION
rotated object
CAUTION HOT
Danger
Electric shock risk
Danger
explosive
Prohibited
Disassembly is
prohibited
KEEP FIRE AWAY
General instruction
Earth ground
Mitsubishi CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial purposes. Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are substantially influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties.
1. Items related to prevention of electric shocks
For Safe Use
WARNING
Do not open or remove the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and this could result in electric shocks. Do not remove the front cover even when the power is OFF, except for the wiring works or periodic inspections. The inside of the controller and drive unit are charged, and this could result in electric shocks. Always wait at least 15 minutes after turning the power OFF. Then, check the voltage with a tester, etc., before wiring works, inspections or connecting with peripheral devices. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks. Earth ground the controller, drive unit and motor according to the local laws. (In Japan, ground the 200V Series input products with Class C or higher protective grounding and the 400V Series input with Class D or higher protective grounding.) All wiring works, maintenance and inspections must be carried out by a qualified technician. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearby Service Center for replacing parts and servicing. Wire the controller, drive unit and motor after installation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Insulate the power lead using a fixed terminal block. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Completely turn off the all lines of the power supply externally before wiring. Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product. When turning on the power supply or operating the module after wiring, be sure that the module's terminal covers are correctly attached. Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock.
2. Items related to prevention of fire
3. Items related to prevention of bodily injury or property damage
CAUTION
Install the controller, drive unit, motor and regenerative resistor on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible materials could result in fires. If any malfunction in the unit is observed, shut off the power at the units power supply side. Continuous flow of large current could result in fires. Install an appropriate no fuse breaker (NFB) and contactor (MC) on the power input section of the drive unit and configure the sequence that shuts the power off upon drive units emergency stop or alarm. When a breaker is shared for multiple power supply units, the breaker may not function upon short-circuit failure in a small capacity unit. Do not share a breaker for multiple units as this is dangerous.
Incorrect wiring and connections could cause the devices to damage or burn.
DANGER
When transporting or installing a built-in IPM spindle or linear servomotor, be careful so that your hand or property will not be trapped in the motors or other metal objects. Also keep the devices with low magnetic tolerance away from the product.
CAUTION
Do not apply voltages to the connectors or terminals other than voltages indicated in the connection and setup manual for the controller or specifications manual for the drive unit. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc. Incorrect connections could cause the devices to rupture or damage, etc. Always connect the cables to the indicated connectors or terminals.
Incorrect polarity (+ -) could cause the devices to rupture or damage, etc.
Persons wearing medical devices, such as pacemakers, must stay away from this unit. The electromagnetic waves could adversely affect the medical devices. Fins on the rear of the unit, regenerative resistor and motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a while after the power has been turned OFF. Do not touch or place the parts and cables, etc. close to these sections. Failure to observe this could result in burns. Do not enter the machines movable range during automatic operation. Keep your hands, feet or face away from the spindle during rotation.
4. General precautions Always follow the precautions below. Incorrect handling could result in faults, injuries or electric shocks, etc.
(1) Items related to product and manual
(2) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.
Items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them, however, may not be available for your NC system. Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on each NC system (or version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before starting to use. Refer to "Smart safety observation" (BNP-C3072-022) for details about the connection with safety observing I/O device. To protect the availability, integrity and confidentiality of the NC system against cyber-attacks including unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) (*1) attack, and computer virus from external sources via a network, take security measures such as firewall, VPN, and anti-virus software. (*1) Denial-of-service (DoS) refers to a type of cyber-attack that disrupts services by overloading the system or by exploiting a vulnerability of the system. Mitsubishi Electric assumes no responsibility for any problems caused to the NC system by any type of cyber-attacks including DoS attack, unauthorized access and computer virus.
CAUTION
Correctly transport the products according to the mass.
Use motors suspension bolts to transport the motor itself. Do not use it to transport the motor after installation onto the machine.
Do not stack the products exceeding the indicated limit.
Do not hold the cables, shaft or encoder when transporting the motor.
Do not transport the controller or drive unit by suspending or holding the connected wires or cables.
Do not hold the front cover when transporting the unit, or the front cover could come off, causing the unit to drop. Install on a non-combustible place where the units or motors mass can be withstood according to the instruction manual. The motor does not have a complete water-proof (oil-proof) structure. Do not allow oil or water to contact or enter the motor. Prevent the cutting chips from being accumulated on the motor as they easily soak up oil. When installing the motor facing upwards, take measures on the machine side so that gear oil, etc., will not enter the motor shaft.
Do not remove the encoder from the motor. (The encoder installation screw is treated with sealing.)
Do not allow foreign matters, especially, conductive foreign matters such as screws or metal chips, or combustible foreign matters such as oil, to enter the controller, drive unit or motor. Failure to observe this could result in rupture or damage.
Do not get on the product or place heavy objects on it.
Provide prescribed distance between the controller/drive unit and inner surface of the control panel/other devices.
Do not install or operate the controller, drive unit or motor that is damaged or has missing parts.
CAUTION
Take care not to cut hands, etc. with the heat radiating fins or metal edges.
Do not block the intake/outtake ports of the motor with the cooling fan.
Install the controllers display section and operation board section on the spot where cutting oil will not reach. The controller, drive unit and motor are precision devices, so do not drop or apply thumping vibration and strong impacts on them.
The controller and drive unit are precision devices, so do not drop or apply strong impacts on them.
Store and use the units according to the environment conditions indicated in each specifications manual.
When disinfectants or insecticides must be used to treat wood packaging materials, always use methods other than fumigation (for example, apply heat treatment at the minimum wood core temperature of 56 C for a minimum duration of 30 minutes (ISPM No. 15 (2009))). If products such as units are directly fumigated or packed with fumigated wooden materials, halogen substances (including fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine) contained in fumes may contribute to the erosion of the capacitors. When exporting the products, make sure to comply with the laws and regulations of each country. Do not use the products in conjunction with any components that contain halogenated flame retardants (bromine, etc). Failure to observe this may cause the erosion of the capacitors.
Securely fix the motor to the machine. The motor could come off during operation if insecurely fixed.
Always install the motor with reduction gear in the designated direction. Failure to observe this could result in oil leaks. Always install a cover, etc., over the shaft so that the rotary section of the motor cannot be touched during motor rotation. When installing a coupling to the servomotor shaft end, do not apply impacts by hammering, etc. The encoder could be damaged. Use a flexible coupling when connecting with a ball screw, etc., and keep the shaft core deviation smaller than the tolerable radial load of the shaft. Do not use a rigid coupling as an excessive bending load will be applied on the shaft and could cause the shaft to break. Do not apply a load exceeding the tolerable level onto the motor shaft. The shaft or bearing could be damaged.
Before using this product after a long period of storage, please contact the Service Center.
Following the UN recommendations, battery units and batteries should be transported based on the international regulations such as those determined by International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), International Air Transport Association (IATA), International Maritime Organization (IMO) and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT).
(3) Items related to wiring
CAUTION
Correctly wire this product. Failure to observe this could result in motor runaway, etc.
Incorrect terminal connections could cause the devices to rupture or damage, etc.
Do not install a phase advancing capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter on the output side of the drive unit. Correctly connect the output side (terminal U, V, W). The motor will not run properly if incorrectly connected.
Always install an AC reactor per each power supply unit.
Always install an appropriate breaker per each power supply unit. A breaker cannot be shared for multiple power supply units. Do not directly connect a commercial power supply to the motor. Failure to observe this could result in faults. When using an inductive load such as relays, always connect a diode in parallel to the load as a noise countermeasure. When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents. Do not mistake the direction of the surge absorption diode to be installed on the DC relay for the control output signal. If mistaken, the signal will not be output due to fault in the drive unit, and consequently the protective circuit, such as emergency stop, could be disabled.
Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting them.
Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screw or fixing mechanism. The motor could come off during operation if insecurely fixed. Always treat the shield cables indicated in the Connection Manual with grounding measures such as cable clamps.
RA RA
COM COM
Control output signal
Drive unit
Control output signal
Drive unit
(24VDC) (24VDC)
CAUTION
Separate the signal wire from the drive line or power line when wiring.
Carry out wiring so that there is no possibility of short circuit between wires, nor of dangerous state.
Use wires and cables whose wire diameter, heat resistance level and bending capacity are compatible with the system.
Ground the device according to the requirements of the country where the device is to be used.
Wire the heat radiating fins and wires so that they do not contact.
When using the RS-232C device as a peripheral device, caution must be paid for connector connection/ disconnection. Always use a double-OFF type AC power supply switch on the device side, and connect/ disconnect the connector with the AC power supply on the device side OFF.
Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of 24V. 12V, 5V, and 3.3V output from connectors are to supply the power for dedicated peripheral devices. Do not use for other equipment to supply the power since we do not guarantee the NC operation by voltage down or noise sneaking. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load to prevent a counter-electromotive force. When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents.
The wires from the surge absorber should be connected without extensions.
RS-232C
NC unit Device Switch AC socket
(4) Set up
(5) Operation and Adjustments
WARNING
Do not cancel the emergency stop before confirming the basic operation.
Always set the stroke end and stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.
CAUTION
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual. the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered "impossible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them, however, may not be available for your NC system. Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use. Some screens and functions may differ depending on each NC system (or version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before starting to use. If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an input/ output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining programs, tool data and parameters may have been destroyed. Replace the battery and then reload the data. Do not adjust the spindle when possible risks associated with adjustment procedures are not thoroughly taken into consideration.
Be careful when touching spindle's rotating section, or your hand may be caught in or cut.
CAUTION
If the operation start position is set in a block which is in the middle of the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. Please confirm that G and F modal and coordinate values are appropriate. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B commands before the block set as the start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. If the program is run from the set block without carrying out these operations, there is a danger of interference with the machine or of machine operation at an unexpected speed, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators. Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators. Check and adjust programs and each parameter before starting operation. Failure to observe this could result in unpredictable operations depending on the machine.
Do not make drastic adjustments or changes in the parameters as the operation could become unstable.
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
(6) Usage
CAUTION
Use this product within the range of environmental condition described in this manual. Using this product in an environment outside the range could result in electric shock, fire, operation failure, or damage to or deterioration of the product. Install an external emergency stop circuit so that the operation can be stopped and the power turns OFF immediately when unforeseen situation occurs. A contactor, etc., is required in addition to the shutoff function mounted in the controller. Turn OFF the power immediately if any smoke, abnormal noise or odor is generated from the controller, drive unit or motor.
Only a qualified technician may disassemble or repair this product.
Do not alter.
Use a noise filter, etc. to reduce the effect of electromagnetic disturbances in the case where electromagnetic disturbances could adversely affect the electronic devices used near the drive unit. Use the drive unit, motor and each regenerative resistor with the designated combination. Failure to observe this could result in fires or faults. The combination of the motor and drive unit that can be used is determined. Be sure to check the models of motor and drive unit before test operation. The brakes (electromagnetic brakes) mounted in the servomotor are used for the purpose of holding, and must not be used for normal braking. Also, do not run the motor with the motor brake applied. Motor brake is used for the purpose of holding.
For the system running via a timing belt, install a brake on the machine side so that safety can be ensured.
Be sure to confirm SERVO OFF (or READY OFF) when applying the electromagnetic brake. Also, be sure to confirm SERVO ON prior to releasing the brake. When using the DC OFF type electromagnetic brake, be sure to install a surge absorber on the brake terminal. Do not connect or disconnect the cannon plug while the electromagnetic brakes power is ON. The cannon plug pins could be damaged by sparks. After changing programs/parameters, or after maintenance/inspection, always carry out a test operation before starting actual operation. Use the power that are complied with the power specification conditions (input voltage, input frequency, tolerable time for instantaneous power interruption) indicated in each specifications manual. When making encoder cables, do not mistake connection. Failure to observe this could result in malfunction, runaway or fire.
Surge absorber to be selected varies depending on input power voltage.
(7) Troubleshooting
(8) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement
CAUTION
Use a motor with electromagnetic brakes or establish an external brake mechanism for the purpose of holding; this serves as countermeasures for possible hazardous situation caused by power failure or product fault.
Use a double circuit structure for the electromagnetic brakes operation circuit so that the brakes will activate even when the external emergency stop signal is issued.
The machine could suddenly restart when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure, so stay away from the machine. (Design the machine so that the operator safety can be ensured even if the machine restarts.) To secure the absolute position, do not shut off the servo drive units control power supply when its battery voltage drops (warning 9F) in the servo drive unit side. If the battery voltage drop warning alarm occurs in the controller side, make sure to back up the machining programs, tool data and parameters, etc. with the input/output device before replacing the battery. Depending on the level of voltage drop, memory loss could have happened. In that case, reload all the data backed up before the alarm occurrence.
CAUTION
Periodically back up the programs, tool data and parameters to avoid potential data loss. Also, back up those data before maintenance and inspections. When replacing the battery on the controller side, the machining programs, tool data and parameters should be backed up with the input/output device beforehand. In case the memory is damaged in replacing the batteries, reload all the data backed up before replacing the battery. The electrolytic capacitors capacity will drop due to deterioration. To prevent secondary damage due to capacitors faults, Mitsubishi recommends the electrolytic capacitor to be replaced approx. every five years even when used in a normal environment. Contact the Service Center for replacements.
Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspection.
Do not replace parts or devices while the power is ON.
Do not short-circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
There may be a unit filled with substitute Freon in the heat radiating fins of the 37kW or smaller unit. Be careful not to break the heat radiating fins during maintenance or replacement.
MBR EMGMotor
Electro- magnetic brake
Shut off with motor brake control output
Shut off with CNC brake control PLC output
24VDC
(9) Disposal
(10) General precautions
CAUTION
Take the batteries and backlights for LCD, etc., off from the controller, drive unit and motor, and dispose of them as general industrial wastes.
Do not alter or disassemble controller, drive unit, or motor.
Collect and dispose of the spent batteries and the backlights for LCD according to the local laws.
To explain the details, drawings given in the instruction manual, etc., may show the unit with the cover or safety partition removed. When operating the product, always place the cover or partitions back to their original position, and operate as indicated in the instruction manual, etc.
Treatment of waste
The following two laws will apply when disposing of this product. Considerations must be made to each law. The following laws are in effect in Japan. Thus, when using this product overseas, the local laws will have a priority. If necessary, indicate or notify these laws to the final user of the product.
(1) Requirements for "Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources" (a) Recycle as much of this product as possible when finished with use. (b) When recycling, often parts are sorted into steel scraps and electric parts, etc., and sold to scrap contractors.
Mitsubishi Electric recommends sorting the product and selling the members to appropriate contractors.
(2) Requirements for "Law for Treatment of Waste and Cleaning" (a) Mitsubishi Electric recommends recycling and selling the product when no longer needed according to item (1)
above. The user should make an effort to reduce waste in this manner. (b) When disposing a product that cannot be resold, it shall be treated as a waste product. (c) The treatment of industrial waste must be commissioned to a licensed industrial waste treatment contractor,
and appropriate measures, including a manifest control, must be taken. (d) Batteries correspond to "primary batteries", and must be disposed of according to local disposal laws.
Disposal
(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only. This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users and Annex II.
Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows: Hg: mercury (0.0005%), Cd: cadmium (0.002%), Pb: lead (0.004%) In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators. Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!
Trademarks
MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSEC iQ-R, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, CC-Link IE, CC-Link IE/field, EcoMonitorLight and SLMP are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, SQL Server and Access are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. SD logo and SDHC logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of LLC. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries. Intel and Pentium are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. MODBUS is either a trademark or a registered trademark of Schneider Electric USA, Inc. or the affiliated companies in Japan and/or other countries. EtherNet/IP is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,Inc. PROFIBUS-DP and PROFINET are either trademarks or registered trademarks of PROFIBUS User Organization. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation, the subsidiaries, or the affiliated companies in the United States and /or other countries. VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Punchtap is licensed by EMUGE. BiSS is a registered trademark of iC-Haus GmbH.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.
( /Japanese) ( A)
Handling of our product
(English) This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
( /Korean)
(A )
.
Contents
1 System Basic Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 System Basic Configuration Drawing........................................................................................................................ 2
2 General Connection Diagram...................................................................................................................... 3 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] ..................................................................................................................... 5 2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80].......................................................................................................................... 6 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] .......................................................................................................................... 7 2.4 Difference in Connection Depending on the Display Unit ......................................................................................... 8 2.5 Connecting an Operation Panel I/O Unit (FCU8-DX834).......................................................................................... 9 2.6 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80].................................................................................................. 10 2.7 Connecting a BiSS Encoder.................................................................................................................................... 10
3 List of Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 11 3.1 Control Unit [M800S]............................................................................................................................................... 12 3.2 Control Unit [M80] ................................................................................................................................................... 12 3.3 Control Unit [E80].................................................................................................................................................... 12 3.4 Display Unit [M800S]............................................................................................................................................... 13 3.5 Display Unit [M80] ................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.6 Display Unit [E80].................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.7 Keyboard Unit [M800S] ........................................................................................................................................... 14 3.8 Keyboard Unit [M80] ............................................................................................................................................... 14 3.9 Keyboard Unit [E80] ................................................................................................................................................ 14 3.10 Operation Panel I/O Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 15 3.11 Remote I/O Unit [M800S/M80] .............................................................................................................................. 16 3.12 Remote I/O Unit [E80] ........................................................................................................................................... 17 3.13 Functional Safety Expansion Unit [M80] ............................................................................................................... 17 3.14 Function Expansion Unit [M800S/M80]................................................................................................................. 17 3.15 Function Expansion Unit [E80].............................................................................................................................. 17 3.16 Manual Pulse Generator ....................................................................................................................................... 18 3.17 Synchronous Feed Encoder.................................................................................................................................. 18 3.18 Machine Operation Panel [M800S/M80] ............................................................................................................... 18 3.19 Machine Operation Panel [E80] ............................................................................................................................ 19 3.20 Handy Terminal..................................................................................................................................................... 19 3.21 Cable Connector Sets ........................................................................................................................................... 19 3.22 Thermistor Sets..................................................................................................................................................... 20 3.23 Genuine Memory Card.......................................................................................................................................... 20 3.24 Durable Parts ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 3.25 Replacements ....................................................................................................................................................... 20 3.26 List of Cables ........................................................................................................................................................ 21 3.27 System Type ......................................................................................................................................................... 22
4 General Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 23 4.1 Environment Conditions [M800S]............................................................................................................................ 24
4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions ............................................................................................................... 24 4.1.2 24VDC Stabilized Power Supply Selecting Conditions .................................................................................. 27
4.2 Environment Conditions [M80] ................................................................................................................................ 28 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions ............................................................................................................... 28 4.2.2 24VDC Stabilized Power Supply Selecting Conditions .................................................................................. 31
4.3 Environment Conditions [E80]................................................................................................................................. 32 4.3.1 Installation Environment Conditions ............................................................................................................... 32 4.3.2 24VDC Stabilized Power Supply Selecting Conditions .................................................................................. 35
4.4 Control Unit [M800S]............................................................................................................................................... 36 4.4.1 FCU8-MU542 / FCU8-MA542 / FCU8-MU541 / FCU8-MA541 ...................................................................... 36
4.5 Control Unit [M80] ................................................................................................................................................... 52 4.5.1 FCU8-MU511 / FCU8-MU512 / FCU8-MU501 / FCU8-MU502...................................................................... 52
4.6 Control Unit [E80].................................................................................................................................................... 55 4.6.1 FCU8-MU513 / FCU8-MU514 ........................................................................................................................ 55
4.7 Display Unit [M800S]............................................................................................................................................... 58 4.7.1 10.4-type (FCU8-DU142-31/FCU8-DU141-31) .............................................................................................. 58 4.7.2 15-type (FCU8-DU182-31/FCU8-DU181-31) ................................................................................................. 60 4.7.3 Precautions .................................................................................................................................................... 63
4.8 Display Unit [M80] ................................................................................................................................................... 64
4.8.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-12)............................................................................................................................ 64 4.8.2 10.4-type (FCU8-DU142-32/FCU8-DU141-32).............................................................................................. 66 4.8.3 15-type (FCU8-DU182-32/FCU8-DU181-32)................................................................................................. 68 4.8.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................................... 71
4.9 Display Unit [E80] ................................................................................................................................................... 72 4.9.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-13)............................................................................................................................ 72 4.9.2 Precautions .................................................................................................................................................... 73
4.10 Keyboard Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 74 4.10.1 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB026)...................................................................................... 75 4.10.2 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB028)...................................................................................... 76 4.10.3 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB029)...................................................................................... 77 4.10.4 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB041).................................................................................... 78 4.10.5 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB046).................................................................................... 79 4.10.6 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB047).................................................................................... 80 4.10.7 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB048).................................................................................... 81 4.10.8 Keyboard for 15-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB083)....................................................................................... 82 4.10.9 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB024)...................................................................................... 83 4.10.10 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB025).................................................................................... 84
4.11 Operation Panel I/O Unit....................................................................................................................................... 85 4.11.1 List of Units .................................................................................................................................................. 85 4.11.2 FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 / FCU8-DX834 ............................................. 86
4.12 Remote I/O Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 112 4.12.1 List of Units ................................................................................................................................................ 112 4.12.2 FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 /
FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX651/ FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409 ............... 113 4.13 Functional Safety Expansion Unit ....................................................................................................................... 153
4.13.1 Functional Safety Expansion Unit (FCU8-EX133) ..................................................................................... 153 4.14 Function Expansion Unit..................................................................................................................................... 154
4.14.1 CC-Link (FCU8-EX561) ............................................................................................................................. 154 4.14.2 PROFIBUS-DP (FCU8-EX563).................................................................................................................. 157 4.14.3 CC-Link IE Field (FCU8-EX564) ................................................................................................................ 160 4.14.4 EtherNet/IP (FCU8-EX565)........................................................................................................................ 163 4.14.5 FL-net (FCU8-EX568) ................................................................................................................................ 166 4.14.6 Vibration Cutting Expansion Unit (FCU8-EX744)....................................................................................... 169 4.14.7 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX702) .............................................................................................................. 170 4.14.8 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX703) .............................................................................................................. 171
4.15 Manual Pulse Generator..................................................................................................................................... 172 4.15.1 5V Manual Pulse Generator (UFO-01-2Z9) ............................................................................................... 172 4.15.2 12V Manual Pulse Generator (HD60C)...................................................................................................... 173
4.16 Synchronous Feed Encoder ............................................................................................................................... 174 4.16.1 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68)..................................................................................... 174
4.17 Machine Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................... 176 4.17.1 Main Panel A , B
(FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925 , FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926) ................... 176 4.17.2 Sub Panel A (FCU8-KB931 / FCU8-KB941) .............................................................................................. 182
4.18 Handy Terminal .................................................................................................................................................. 187 4.19 Thermistor........................................................................................................................................................... 191
4.19.1 Thermistor(PT3C-51F-M2)......................................................................................................................... 191 4.20 Exclusive SD Cards ............................................................................................................................................ 192 4.21 Specifications and Precautions of USB/SD/LAN Interface ................................................................................. 193
4.21.1 USB Interface (Memory I/F card) ............................................................................................................... 193 4.21.2 SD Interface (Memory I/F card).................................................................................................................. 194 4.21.3 LAN Interface (Control Unit)....................................................................................................................... 194
5 Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 195 5.1 Heat Radiation Countermeasures ........................................................................................................................ 196 5.2 Noise Countermeasures ....................................................................................................................................... 199
5.2.1 Connection of Frame Ground (FG) .............................................................................................................. 199 5.2.2 Shield Clamping of Cables........................................................................................................................... 200 5.2.3 Connecting Spark Killers.............................................................................................................................. 201 5.2.4 Lightning Surge Protection Countermeasure ............................................................................................... 202
5.3 Unit Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 203 5.3.1 Display Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 203 5.3.2 Keyboard Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 206 5.3.3 Operation Panel I/O Unit .............................................................................................................................. 212 5.3.4 Remote I/O Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 213
5.3.5 Functional Safety Expansion Unit ................................................................................................................ 215 5.3.6 Function Expansion Unit .............................................................................................................................. 216 5.3.7 Machine Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................. 218
6 Precautions for Connecting .................................................................................................................... 221 6.1 Precautions for Wiring........................................................................................................................................... 222
6.1.1 Precautions when Connecting/Disconnecting Cables.................................................................................. 222 6.1.2 Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable................................................................................... 225 6.1.3 Precautions for Connecting 24V Power Supply ........................................................................................... 226
6.2 Turning the Power ON/OFF .................................................................................................................................. 227
7 Connection of Control Unit ..................................................................................................................... 229 7.1 Control Unit Connection System Drawing............................................................................................................. 230 7.2 Connecting with Power Supply ............................................................................................................................. 231 7.3 Connecting with Emergency Stop Signal .............................................................................................................. 232 7.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit ............................................................................................................ 235 7.5 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit.......................................................................................................................... 236 7.6 Connecting with Drive Unit.................................................................................................................................... 237
7.6.1 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-E/EH Series ............................................................................................. 238 7.6.1.1 Connection of Optical Communication Cables .................................................................................... 238 7.6.1.2 Drive Unit Arrangement ....................................................................................................................... 241
7.6.2 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EM/EMH Series ....................................................................................... 242 7.6.3 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EJ/EJH Series.......................................................................................... 244
7.7 Connecting with Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] ........................................................................................... 245 7.8 Connecting with a BiSS Encoder .......................................................................................................................... 247 7.9 Connecting with RS-232C Device......................................................................................................................... 248 7.10 Connecting with Skip Signal (Sensor)................................................................................................................. 249 7.11 Connecting with Manual Pulse Generator........................................................................................................... 251
7.11.1 Handle Numbers ........................................................................................................................................ 252 7.12 Connecting with Synchronous Feed Encoder ..................................................................................................... 253 7.13 Connecting I/O Device via Function Expansion Unit........................................................................................... 254
7.13.1 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link............................................................................................................ 255 7.13.2 Connecting I/O Device via PROFIBUS-DP ................................................................................................ 258 7.13.3 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link IE Field............................................................................................... 260 7.13.4 Connecting I/O Device via EtherNet/IP ...................................................................................................... 261 7.13.5 Connecting I/O Device via FL-net .............................................................................................................. 262
8 Connection of Keyboard Unit ................................................................................................................. 263 8.1 Keyboard Unit Connection System Drawing ......................................................................................................... 264 8.2 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit ............................................................................................................ 264
9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit................................................................................................. 265 9.1 Operation Panel I/O Unit Connection System Drawing......................................................................................... 266 9.2 Connecting with Power Supply ............................................................................................................................. 267 9.3 Connecting with Frame Ground ............................................................................................................................ 268 9.4 Connecting with Control Unit................................................................................................................................. 270 9.5 Connecting with Keyboard Unit............................................................................................................................. 270 9.6 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit.......................................................................................................................... 271 9.7 Connecting with Manual Pulse Generator (MPG) ................................................................................................. 272
9.7.1 Handle Numbers .......................................................................................................................................... 274 9.8 Connecting with Machine Operation Panel ........................................................................................................... 275
9.8.1 Wiring for 24V Common Input ...................................................................................................................... 276 9.8.2 Wiring for 0V Common Input ........................................................................................................................ 278 9.8.3 Wiring for Source Type Output..................................................................................................................... 280 9.8.4 Example of Wiring CJ42 (FCU8-DX760) ...................................................................................................... 283 9.8.5 Connection with the scan input signal (FCU8-DX834) ................................................................................. 284 9.8.6 Connection with the scan output signal (FCU8-DX834)............................................................................... 285
9.9 Connecting with Analog Output Signal (FCU8-DX731)......................................................................................... 286 9.10 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX761)............................................................................................. 287
10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit ............................................................................................................. 289 10.1 Remote I/O Unit Connection System Drawing .................................................................................................... 290 10.2 Connecting with Power Supply ........................................................................................................................... 291 10.3 Connecting with Frame Ground .......................................................................................................................... 293 10.4 Connecting with Control Unit............................................................................................................................... 294
10.5 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit .......................................................................................................... 295 10.6 Connecting with Machine Control Signal
(FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX651) ............................................................................ 296 10.7 Connecting with Machine Control Signal
(FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1) ...................................................................... 301 10.8 Connecting with Safety Machine Control Signal (FCU8-DX651)........................................................................ 309 10.9 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX202) ............................................................................................ 311 10.10 Connecting with Thermistor (FCU8-DX408) ..................................................................................................... 313 10.11 Connecting with Multi-analog Input Signal (FCU8-DX409)............................................................................... 316
11 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator............................................................................................... 325 11.1 Manual Pulse Generator Connection System Drawing ...................................................................................... 326 11.2 Connecting with Control Unit .............................................................................................................................. 327 11.3 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit .......................................................................................................... 327
12 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder ........................................................................................ 329 12.1 Synchronous Feed Encoder Connection System Drawing................................................................................. 330 12.2 Connecting with Control Unit .............................................................................................................................. 330
13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 331 13.1 Machine Operation Panel Connection System Drawing..................................................................................... 332 13.2 Connecting with Power Supply ........................................................................................................................... 333 13.3 Connecting with Frame Ground.......................................................................................................................... 334 13.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit .......................................................................................................... 334 13.5 Connecting Emergency Stop Switch .................................................................................................................. 335 13.6 Connecting with Sub Panel................................................................................................................................. 335 13.7 Software Interface............................................................................................................................................... 338
14 Connection of Handy Terminal ............................................................................................................. 343 14.1 Handy Terminal Connection System Drawing .................................................................................................... 344 14.2 Connecting with Control Unit .............................................................................................................................. 344
15 Cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 345 15.1 Symbols for Writing Cable Drawings .................................................................................................................. 346 15.2 Cable Relating to NC .......................................................................................................................................... 347
15.2.1 FCUA-R050/R054 Cable............................................................................................................................ 347 15.2.2 G071 Cable ................................................................................................................................................ 348 15.2.3 G123 Cable ................................................................................................................................................ 348 15.2.4 G430 Cable ................................................................................................................................................ 349 15.2.5 G460 Cable ................................................................................................................................................ 350 15.2.6 J010 Cable................................................................................................................................................. 351 15.2.7 J012 Cable................................................................................................................................................. 351 15.2.8 J020/J021/J022 Cable ............................................................................................................................... 352 15.2.9 J023/J024/J025 Cable ............................................................................................................................... 353 15.2.10 J026/J027 Cable ...................................................................................................................................... 354 15.2.11 J030/J031 Cable ...................................................................................................................................... 355 15.2.12 J070/J071 Cable ...................................................................................................................................... 356 15.2.13 J100 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 357 15.2.14 J120 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 358 15.2.15 J121 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 358 15.2.16 J210 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 359 15.2.17 J221 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 360 15.2.18 J224 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 361 15.2.19 J225 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 362 15.2.20 J303 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 362 15.2.21 J350 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 363 15.2.22 J351 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 363 15.2.23 J460 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 364 15.2.24 J461 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 364 15.2.25 R2-TM Terminator Connector .................................................................................................................. 365
15.3 Cable Relating to Drive Unit ............................................................................................................................... 366 15.3.1 Cable Wire and Assembly.......................................................................................................................... 366 15.3.2 CNP2E-1 Cable.......................................................................................................................................... 367 15.3.3 CNP3EZ-2P/CNP3EZ-3P Cable ................................................................................................................ 368 15.3.4 CNV2E-8P/CNV2E-9P Cable..................................................................................................................... 369
15.3.5 CNV2E-D Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 370 15.3.6 CNV2E-HP Cable....................................................................................................................................... 370 15.3.7 DG30 Cable................................................................................................................................................ 371 15.3.8 G380 Cable ................................................................................................................................................ 371 15.3.9 J395 Cable ................................................................................................................................................. 372 15.3.10 J396 Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 373 15.3.11 MR-BKS1CBL-A1-H / MR-BKS1CBL-A2-H Cable ................................................................................... 374 15.3.12 MR-BT6V2CBL Cable .............................................................................................................................. 374 15.3.13 MR-D05UDL3M-B Cable.......................................................................................................................... 375 15.3.14 MR-PWS1CBL-A1-H / MR-PWS1CBL-A2-H Cable ................................................................................. 375 15.3.15 SH21 Cable .............................................................................................................................................. 376
15.4 List of Cable Connector Sets .............................................................................................................................. 377
16 Setup Outline.......................................................................................................................................... 379 16.1 Hardware Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 380 16.2 Flow of Initial Setup............................................................................................................................................. 382
17 Setting the Hardware ............................................................................................................................. 385 17.1 Setting Drive Unit MDS-E/EH Series .................................................................................................................. 386
17.1.1 Setting the Rotary Switch ........................................................................................................................... 386 17.1.2 Setting DIP Switch...................................................................................................................................... 387
17.2 Setting Drive Unit MDS-EM/EMH Series ............................................................................................................ 388 17.2.1 Setting the Rotary Switch ........................................................................................................................... 388
17.3 Setting Drive Unit MDS-EJ/EJH Series............................................................................................................... 389 17.3.1 Setting the Rotary Switch ........................................................................................................................... 389 17.3.2 Setting the DIP Switch................................................................................................................................ 390
17.4 Setting Up without Connecting to the Motor/Drive Units at the Setup of Drive Unit............................................ 391 17.5 Connecting the Batteries..................................................................................................................................... 392
17.5.1 Control Unit Battery .................................................................................................................................... 392 17.5.2 Servo Drive Unit Battery ............................................................................................................................. 394
17.6 Connecting and Setting the Remote I/O Unit ...................................................................................................... 397 17.6.1 Outline of the Remote I/O Unit ................................................................................................................... 397 17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit ........................................................................... 399 17.6.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units........................................................................ 402 17.6.4 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) ..................................................................................... 406
17.6.4.1 Fixed Device Assignment .................................................................................................................. 407 17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment ............................................................................................................. 408
17.6.5 Thermistor Input Interface .......................................................................................................................... 412 17.7 Initializing the NC Internal Data (SRAM)............................................................................................................. 413
18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER ................................................................................... 415 18.1 Activate M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER ............................................................................................................ 417 18.2 Install Custom Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 419 18.3 Install Start-up Screen......................................................................................................................................... 420 18.4 Install APLC C Language Module ....................................................................................................................... 421 18.5 Install User Cycle ................................................................................................................................................ 422
19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time ................................................................................................ 423 19.1 Selecting the NC System Type and Displayed Language .................................................................................. 424 19.2 Setting the Parameters for the System Specifications ........................................................................................ 425 19.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications ...................................................................................... 426 19.4 Setting Date and Time ........................................................................................................................................ 428
20 Sequence Program Writing ................................................................................................................... 429 20.1 Writing Sequence Program using the SD Card................................................................................................... 430 20.2 Setting the Ethernet Communication .................................................................................................................. 430
20.2.1 Confirming the IP Address for CNC ........................................................................................................... 430 20.2.2 Setting the IP Address for PC Side ............................................................................................................ 430
20.3 Connecting the Control Unit and a Personal Computer ...................................................................................... 432 20.4 Setting the Communication with GX Developer .................................................................................................. 433 20.5 Setting the Parameters on GX Developer........................................................................................................... 435
20.5.1 Parameter Setting Screen .......................................................................................................................... 435 20.5.2 Setting the Number of Device Points ......................................................................................................... 436 20.5.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points ......................................................................................... 437 20.5.4 Setting the Program Execution Order ........................................................................................................ 438
20.6 Writing a Sequence Program with GX Developer............................................................................................... 439 20.7 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Developer ................................................................................. 441 20.8 Setting the Communication with GX Works2...................................................................................................... 442 20.9 Setting the Parameters on GX Works2............................................................................................................... 444
20.9.1 Parameter Setting Screen.......................................................................................................................... 444 20.9.2 Setting Device Points ................................................................................................................................. 445 20.9.3 Setting Common Pointer No. ..................................................................................................................... 446 20.9.4 Setting Program Executing Order .............................................................................................................. 447
20.10 Writing a Sequence Program with GX Works2................................................................................................. 448 20.11 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Works2 ................................................................................... 451 20.12 Setting the PLC Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 452
21 Confirming the Basic Operation ........................................................................................................... 453 21.1 Checking Inputs/Outputs and Alarms ................................................................................................................. 454 21.2 Confirming Manual Operation............................................................................................................................. 455
21.2.1 Using the Manual Pulse Generator ............................................................................................................ 455 21.2.2 Using JOG Feed ........................................................................................................................................ 455
21.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment............................................................................................................................... 456 21.3.1 First Measure Against Vibration ................................................................................................................. 456 21.3.2 NC Analyzer2 ............................................................................................................................................. 457
22 Setting the Position Detection System ................................................................................................ 459 22.1 Adjusting the Absolute Position Detection System ............................................................................................. 460
22.1.1 Marked Point Alignment Method I .............................................................................................................. 461 22.1.2 Marked Point Alignment Method II ............................................................................................................. 463 22.1.3 Machine End Stopper Method: Automatic Initialization.............................................................................. 465 22.1.4 Machine End Stopper Method: Manual Initialization .................................................................................. 469 22.1.5 Dog-type..................................................................................................................................................... 471 22.1.6 Setting the Grid Interval and the Reference Encoder for Grid Interval....................................................... 472 22.1.7 Precautions Common for the Initialization Operation................................................................................. 472 22.1.8 Precautions Common for the Dogless-type Absolute Position Encoder .................................................... 473
22.2 Adjustment of Reference Position Return in Relative Position Detection System.............................................. 474 22.2.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation......................................................................................... 474 22.2.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures ................................................................... 475
23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range ............................................................................................. 481 23.1 Stroke End .......................................................................................................................................................... 482 23.2 Stored Stroke Limit ............................................................................................................................................. 483
23.2.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 483 23.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit I................................................................................................................................... 486 23.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit II.................................................................................................................................. 487 23.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IB ................................................................................................................................ 489 23.2.5 Stored Stroke Limit IC................................................................................................................................ 490 23.2.6 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control ............................................................................................. 491 23.2.7 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis ......................................................................................................... 492 23.2.8 Changing the Area for the Stored Stroke Limit I ........................................................................................ 492 23.2.9 Behavior in Prohibited Area ....................................................................................................................... 493
23.2.9.1 Stored stroke limits I, IC, and II ......................................................................................................... 493 23.2.9.2 Stored stroke limits IB and IIB ........................................................................................................... 493
23.2.10 Precautions .............................................................................................................................................. 495
24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation ........................................................................................... 497 24.1 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation/Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation.......................... 498
24.1.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 498 24.1.2 Setting Compensation Data ....................................................................................................................... 500 24.1.3 Setting Method ........................................................................................................................................... 502
24.1.3.1 Using a Linear Axis as Basic Axis ..................................................................................................... 502 24.1.3.2 Using a Rotary Axis as Basic Axis .................................................................................................... 504
24.2 Bidirectional pitch error compensation................................................................................................................ 505 24.2.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 505 24.2.2 Setting Method ........................................................................................................................................... 506
24.2.2.1 When the basic axis is a linear axis .................................................................................................. 506 24.2.2.2 When the basic axis is a rotary axis .................................................................................................. 509
24.3 Cyclic Error Compensation ................................................................................................................................. 510 24.3.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 510
24.3.2 Setting Method ........................................................................................................................................... 511 24.3.3 Error Measurement .................................................................................................................................... 513 24.3.4 Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 513 24.3.5 Relation with Other Functions .................................................................................................................... 514
25 Setting the Position Switches............................................................................................................... 515 25.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................. 516 25.2 Setting and Operation Examples of dog1 and dog2 ........................................................................................... 517 25.3 Canceling the Position Switch............................................................................................................................. 518
26 Setting the Backlash Compensation.................................................................................................... 519 26.1 Backlash Compensation ..................................................................................................................................... 520 26.2 Backlash Compensation II .................................................................................................................................. 521
26.2.1 Enabling Conditions for Backlash Compensation II ................................................................................... 522 26.2.2 Procedure of Setting Backlash Compensation II ........................................................................................ 522
26.2.2.1 Setting the backlash compensation II acceleration rate .................................................................... 522 26.2.2.2 Setting compensation amount of backlash compensation II.............................................................. 523 26.2.2.3 Precautions for setting parameters.................................................................................................... 524
27 Confirming the Spindle Operation........................................................................................................ 527 27.1 In Manual Operation (with Manual Numerical Command) .................................................................................. 528 27.2 In MDI Operation................................................................................................................................................. 529 27.3 Confirming the Rotation Speed........................................................................................................................... 529
28 Setting the Handy Terminal................................................................................................................... 531 28.1 Inputting the Data from a Personal Computer..................................................................................................... 532 28.2 Inputting the Data from NC ................................................................................................................................. 535
29 Setting the Deceleration Check ............................................................................................................ 537 29.1 Function .............................................................................................................................................................. 538 29.2 Deceleration Check Method................................................................................................................................ 540 29.3 Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal ........................................................................ 542 29.4 Parameter ........................................................................................................................................................... 544 29.5 Relation with Other Functions ............................................................................................................................. 546 29.6 Precautions ......................................................................................................................................................... 547
30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control ................................................... 549 30.1 Synchronous Control........................................................................................................................................... 550
30.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 550 30.1.1.1 Synchronous control mode ................................................................................................................ 553 30.1.1.2 Correction mode ................................................................................................................................ 553
30.1.2 Reference Position Establishment in Synchronous Operation................................................................... 554 30.1.2.1 Zero Point Establishment
in Relative Position Detection System/Dog-type Absolute Position Detection System ........................ 554 30.1.2.2 Zero Point Establishment in Dogless-type Absolute Position Detection System............................... 557
30.1.3 Simple Synchronous Control ...................................................................................................................... 563 30.1.3.1 Zero Point Establishment During Simple Synchronous Control ........................................................ 563
30.1.4 Parameter Setting for Synchronous Control............................................................................................... 563 30.2 Multiple-axis Synchronization Control ................................................................................................................. 564
30.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 564 30.2.2 Synchronous Operation and Independent Operation................................................................................. 564
31 OMR Control ........................................................................................................................................... 565 31.1 OMR II................................................................................................................................................................. 566
31.1.1 Adjustment Procedure................................................................................................................................ 567 31.2 OMR-FF .............................................................................................................................................................. 568
31.2.1 OMR-FF Enabling Procedure (Servo) ........................................................................................................ 569 31.2.2 OMR-FF Enabling Procedure (Spindle) ..................................................................................................... 569 31.2.3 Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 569
31.3 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD).................................................................................................... 570 31.3.1 Enabling Conditions of the Function........................................................................................................... 571 31.3.2 Restrictions................................................................................................................................................. 571
32 Variable Torsion Compensation ........................................................................................................... 573 32.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................ 574 32.2 Enabling Conditions............................................................................................................................................ 575 32.3 Parameter Setting Procedure ............................................................................................................................. 575
32.3.1 Setting the Acceleration Rate..................................................................................................................... 576 32.3.2 Setting the Torsion Compensation Amount ............................................................................................... 577 32.3.3 Setting the Time Constant.......................................................................................................................... 578
32.4 Relation with Other Functions............................................................................................................................. 579
33 Adjust S-analog Screen......................................................................................................................... 581 33.1 Adjustment Preparations .................................................................................................................................... 583 33.2 Performing Automatic Adjustments .................................................................................................................... 583 33.3 Performing Manual Adjustments......................................................................................................................... 584
34 Device Open Parameter Screen............................................................................................................ 587
35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen............................................................................................................. 593
36 Data Backup and Restoration ............................................................................................................... 599 36.1 All Backup........................................................................................................................................................... 601 36.2 All Restoration .................................................................................................................................................... 603
37 Appx.1: Setting the System Lock ......................................................................................................... 605 37.1 Setting the Encryption Key ................................................................................................................................. 606 37.2 Setting of Expiration Date ................................................................................................................................... 607 37.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification........................................................................................ 608 37.4 Caution ............................................................................................................................................................... 608
38 Appx.2: Protection Setting .................................................................................................................... 609 38.1 Protect Setting Screen........................................................................................................................................ 610 38.2 Returning the Password to the Non-input State (Operation level 0 to 3)............................................................ 613 38.3 Changing the Operation Level to One of 4 to 6 .................................................................................................. 613 38.4 Changing the Password...................................................................................................................................... 614 38.5 Clearing the Password........................................................................................................................................ 615 38.6 Changing the Protection Level............................................................................................................................ 616 38.7 Saving the Protection Level Setting.................................................................................................................... 616
39 Appx.3: Displaying Original Logo On Standard Screen..................................................................... 617
40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines.................................................................................................... 619 40.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 620 40.2 EMC Directives ................................................................................................................................................... 620 40.3 EMC Measures ................................................................................................................................................... 621 40.4 Panel Structure ................................................................................................................................................... 621
40.4.1 Measures for Control Panel Body .............................................................................................................. 621 40.4.2 Measures for Door ..................................................................................................................................... 622 40.4.3 Measures for Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 622
40.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel.............................................................................................................................. 623 40.5.1 Precautions for Wiring in Panel.................................................................................................................. 623 40.5.2 Shield Treatment of Cables........................................................................................................................ 624
40.6 EMC Countermeasure Parts............................................................................................................................... 627 40.6.1 Shield Clamp Fitting ................................................................................................................................... 627 40.6.2 Ferrite Core ................................................................................................................................................ 628 40.6.3 Surge Absorber .......................................................................................................................................... 629 40.6.4 Selection of Stabilized Power Supply......................................................................................................... 631
41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries .......................................................................................... 633 41.1 Restriction for Packing........................................................................................................................................ 634
41.1.1 Target Products.......................................................................................................................................... 634 41.1.2 Handling by User........................................................................................................................................ 635 41.1.3 Reference................................................................................................................................................... 635
41.2 Products Information Data Sheet (ER Battery)................................................................................................... 636 41.3 Forbiddance of Transporting Lithium Battery
by Passenger Aircraft Provided in the Code of Federal Regulation...................................................................... 638
41.4 California Code of Regulation "Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials" .................................... 638 41.5 Restriction Related to EU Battery Directive ........................................................................................................ 639
41.5.1 Important Notes.......................................................................................................................................... 639 41.5.2 Information for End-user............................................................................................................................. 639
42 Appx.6: Precautions for Compliance to UL/c-UL Standards ............................................................. 641
1 IB-1501269-P
1 System Basic Configuration
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 1 System Basic Configuration
2IB-1501269-P
1.1 System Basic Configuration Drawing
(Note) For the drive unit configuration, refer to the Instruction Manual of the drive unit you use.
(Control unit is added onto back of display unit.)
Motor group
Servo/Spindle drive unit
Manual pulse generator
Manual pulse penerator
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O unit
Display unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Control unit
(Operation panel I/O unit is added onto back of keyboard unit.)
Keyboard unit
Synchronous feed encoder
3 IB-1501269-P
2 General Connection Diagram
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
4IB-1501269-P
Typical general connection diagrams for respective models are described. Refer to the following chapters for parts where the connection differs depending on the unit configuration.
2.4 Difference in Connection Depending on the Display Unit 2.5 Connecting an Operation Panel I/O Unit (FCU8-DX834) 2.6 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] 2.7 Connecting a BiSS Encoder
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
5 IB-1501269-P
2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] When the display unit is FCU8-DU142-31/FCU8-DU182-31, refer to "2.4 Difference in Connection Depending on the Display Unit" for connection of the display unit.
(Note 1) For information on how to connect the drive unit, refer to the drive unit's manual. (Note 2) For details on connecting to the machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric, refer to the
chapter "Connection of Machine Operation Panel".
J395/ J396/ G380
FCUA-R050/054
(1ch)
Field Network
L1 L2 L3
D-AL
MC
DCOUT
FG ACIN
CP/NFB
MC
ON OFF
MC
MC
CP/NFB
FG
Max. 8 points
EMG J120
J303
J070/071
J303
J100
J030(1ch) J031(2ch)
EMG
LAN1
SKIP
DCIN
SIO LAN2
FCU8-EX56x
FCU8-EX70x
FRONT
RIO2ENC CJ71
BL
< J09x>
RIO1
USB_F SDC_F USB_B SDC_B
< J08x>
NCKB
3ch
J210
RIO3EXT MPG
5V : J023(1ch)/024(2ch)/025(3ch) 12V : J020(1ch)/021(2ch)/022(3ch)
J350/351
LCD
MENUKEY
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
(R2-TM)
J210
FCU8-KB92x FCU8-KB941/KB931
G460
J026(1ch) J027(2ch)
J070/071
J070/071
J210
J210
J070/071 DI:CJ31/33
DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
J070/071 DI:CJ31/33
DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
(R2-TM)
(R2-TM)
J010 CJ71
FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761
DI : CJ37/39 DO : CJ38/40
J460/461
Machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
(Note 1)
Drive unit
Control unit
Synchronous feed encoder
No-fuse breaker (NFB)
AC reactor
Circuit protector (CP)
Ethernet device
Ethernet device
24VDC
RS-232C device
Function expansion unit
Menu key
Display unit
Memory mediums Front memory I/F card
Operation panel I/O unit
Machine control relay/contact
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Keyboard unit
Machine operation panel made by the machine tool builder
Skip signal input
24VDC stabilized power supply
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
Manual pulse generator (5V/12V)
Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared by the machine tool builder. <> Angle brackets indicates attached cable of unit.
Option relay unit
24VDC
Manual pulse generator (5V)
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
Machine control relay/contact
Machine control relay/contact
G430
/ FCU8-EX744
TP < J421>
FCU8-KB04x FCU8-KB083
FCU8-DX2xx/DX6xx/DX4xx
OPTH1 OPTH2
J395/ J396/ G380
FCU8-MU54x/FCU8-MA54x
Handy terminal
10.4-type:FCU8-DU141-31
15-type:FCU8-DU181-31
Add-on CPU card
Drive unit
(Note 1)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
6IB-1501269-P
2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80] When the display unit is FCU8-DU142-32/FCU8-DU182-32, refer to "2.4 Difference in Connection Depending on the Display Unit" for connection of the display unit.
The general connection diagram with smart safety observation function is as below. Without smart safety observation function, functional safety expansion unit is not installed in the control unit.
(Note 1) For information on how to connect the drive unit, refer to the drive unit's manual. (Note 2) For the 8.4-type display unit, TP connector is not used. (Note 3) The safety remote I/O unit is available only when the functional safety expansion unit is mounted. (Note 4) For details on connecting to the machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric, refer to the
chapter "Connection of Machine Operation Panel".
J395/ J396/ G380
FCUA-R050/054
(1ch)
Field Network
L1 L2 L3
D-AL
MC
DCOUT
FG ACIN
CP/NFB
MC
ON OFF
MC
MC
CP/NFB
FG
Max. 8 points
EMG J120
J303
J070/071
J303
J100
J030(1ch) J031(2ch)
EMG
LAN1
SKIP
DCIN
SIO LAN2
FCU8-EX56x
FCU8-EX70x
FRONT
RIO2ENC CJ71
BL
< J09x>
RIO1
USB_F SDC_F USB_B SDC_B
< J08x>
NCKB
3ch
J210
RIO3EXT MPG
5V : J023(1ch)/024(2ch)/025(3ch) 12V : J020(1ch)/021(2ch)/022(3ch)
J350/351
LCD
MENUKEY
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
(R2-TM)
J210
FCU8-KB92x FCU8-KB941/KB931
G460
J026(1ch) J027(2ch)
J070/071
J070/071
J210
J210
J070/071 DI:CJ31/33
DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
J070/071 DI:CJ31/33
DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
(R2-TM)
(R2-TM)
J010 CJ71
FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761
DI : CJ37/39 DO : CJ38/40
J460/461
Machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
(Note 1)
Drive unit
Control unit
Synchronous feed encoder
No-fuse breaker (NFB)
AC reactor
Circuit protector (CP)
Ethernet device
Ethernet device
24VDC
RS-232C device
Function expansion unit
Menu key
Display unit
Memory mediums Front memory I/F card
Operation panel I/O unit
Machine control relay/contact
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Keyboard unit
Machine operation panel made by the machine tool builder
Skip signal input
24VDC stabilized power supply
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
Manual pulse generator (5V/12V)
Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared by the machine tool builder. <> Angle brackets indicates attached cable of unit.
Option relay unit
24VDC
Manual pulse generator (5V)
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
Machine control relay/contact
Machine control relay/contact
G430
/ FCU8-EX744
FCU8-KB04x FCU8-KB083
TP < J421>
FCU8-DX2xx/DX6xx/DX4xx
FCU8-KB026/KB028/KB029
OPTH1
FCU8-MU511/FCU8-MU512
FCU8-EX133
Handy terminal
8.4-type:FCU8-DU121-12 10.4-type:FCU8-DU141-32 15-type:FCU8-DU181-32
(Note 2)
Functional safety
expansion unit
(Note 3)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
7 IB-1501269-P
2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80]
(Note 1) For information on how to connect the drive unit, refer to the drive unit's manual. (Note 2) For details on connecting to the machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric, refer to the
chapter "Connection of Machine Operation Panel".
J395/ J396/ G380
FCUA-R050/054
(1ch)
Field Network
L1 L2 L3
D-AL
MC
DCOUT
FG ACIN
CP/NFB
MC
ON OFF
MC
MC
CP/NFB
FG
Max. 8 points
EMG J120
J303
J070/071
J303
J100
J030(1ch) J031(2ch)
EMG
LAN1
SKIP
DCIN
SIO LAN2
FCU8-EX56x
FCU8-EX70x
FRONT
RIO2ENC CJ71
BL
< J09x>
RIO1
USB_F SDC_F USB_B SDC_B
< J08x>
NCKB
3ch
J210
RIO3EXT MPG
5V : J023(1ch)/024(2ch)/025(3ch) 12V : J020(1ch)/021(2ch)/022(3ch)
J350/351
LCD
MENUKEY
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
(R2-TM)
J210
FCU8-KB92x FCU8-KB941/KB931
G460
J026(1ch) J027(2ch)
J070/071
J070/071
J210
J210
J070/071 DI:CJ31/33
DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
J070/071 DI:CJ31/33
DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
DI:CJ31/33 DO:CJ32/34
RIO1
DCIN
RIO2
J350/351 J350/351
(R2-TM)
(R2-TM)
J010 CJ71
FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761
DI : CJ37/39 DO : CJ38/40
J460/461
Machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
(Note 1)
Drive unit
Control unit
Synchronous feed encoder
No-fuse breaker (NFB)
AC reactor
Circuit protector (CP)
Ethernet device
Ethernet device
24VDC
RS-232C device
Function expansion unit
Menu key
Display unit
Memory mediums Front memory I/F card
Operation panel I/O unit
Machine control relay/contact
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Keyboard unit
Machine operation panel made by the machine tool builder
Skip signal input
24VDC stabilized power supply
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
Manual pulse generator (5V/12V)
Dotted lines indicate the sections prepared by the machine tool builder. <> Angle brackets indicates attached cable of unit.
Option relay unit
24VDC
Manual pulse generator (5V)
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
Remote I/O unit
24VDC
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
To the next remote I/O or terminator connector
Machine control relay/contact
Machine control relay/contact
FCU8-KB024/KB025
OPTH1
FCU8-MU513/FCU8-MU514
FCU8-DX2xx/DX4xx
8.4-type:FCU8-DU121-13
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
8IB-1501269-P
2.4 Difference in Connection Depending on the Display Unit Cables are different depending on the display unit. The parts surrounded by the dotted lines in the figures below are different.
[FCU8-DU142-31 / FCU8-DU142-32 / FCU8-DU182-31 / FCU8-DU182-32]
[FCU8-DU141-31 / FCU8-DU141-32 / FCU8-DU181-31 / FCU8-DU181-32]
LCD
MENUKEY
TP
BL
FCU8-DU182-31 / FCU8-DU182-32 FCU8-DU142-31 / FCU8-DU142-32
Control unit
LCD
with touch panel
Menu key
Display unit
LCD
MENUKEY
TP
BL
FCU8-DU181-31 / FCU8-DU181-32 FCU8-DU141-31 / FCU8-DU141-32
Control unit
LCD
with touch panel
Menu key
Display unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
9 IB-1501269-P
2.5 Connecting an Operation Panel I/O Unit (FCU8-DX834) Dotted lines indicate the sections which is different from the FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761 in FCU8-DX834.
[FCU8-DX834]
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
CJ71
NCKB
RIO3EXT MPG
J350/351
Control unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Machine operation panel made by the
machine tool builder
J070/071
J012 RIO3
FCU8-DX834
DI : CG31/33
DO : CG32/34
J350/351
KEYUSB
CJ71
J460/461
DCIN
OPKB
24VDC
CJ71
NCKB
RIO3EXT MPG
J350/351
Control unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Machine operation panel made by the
machine tool builder J010
CJ71
FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761
DI : CJ37/39
DO : CJ38/40
J460/461
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 2 General Connection Diagram
10IB-1501269-P
2.6 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] Pulse-controlled inverter refers to an inverter capable of controlling spindle operation through pulse train input.
(Note) When the pulse-controlled inverter is connected, the remote I/O unit cannot be connected to the either of the RIO1 connector or the RIO2 connector.
2.7 Connecting a BiSS Encoder BiSS encoder refers to an encoder compatible with BiSS-C. Connect the BiSS encoder to the ENC connector and the RIO2 connector of the control unit.
RIO2ENC RIO1
Control unit
FCUA-R050/054
(1ch)
Synchronous feed encoder
Spindle motor
Pulse-controlled inverter
RIO2ENC RIO1
Control unit
BiSS encoder
11 IB-1501269-P
3 List of Configuration
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
12IB-1501269-P
3.1 Control Unit [M800S]
3.2 Control Unit [M80]
3.3 Control Unit [E80]
Classification Type Components Remarks NC functions and display controller For M830S
FCU8-MU542 Base control card Add-on CPU card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For M850S
FCU8-MA542 Base control card Add-on CPU card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with Export Trade Control Order, and it is compliant with Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For M830S
FCU8-MU541 Base control card Add-on CPU card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For M850S
FCU8-MA541 Base control card Add-on CPU card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with Export Trade Control Order, and it is compliant with Foreign Exchange Order.
Classification Type Components Remarks NC functions and display controller For M80 TypeB
FCU8-MU511 Base control card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For M80 TypeA
FCU8-MU512 Base control card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For M80 TypeB
FCU8-MU501 Base control card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For M80 TypeA
FCU8-MU502 Base control card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
Classification Type Components Remarks NC functions and display controller For E80 TypeB
FCU8-MU513 Base control card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
NC functions and display controller For E80 TypeA
FCU8-MU514 Base control card Front-side memory I/F card
This unit is not compliant with both Export Trade Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
13 IB-1501269-P
3.4 Display Unit [M800S]
3.5 Display Unit [M80]
3.6 Display Unit [E80]
Classification Type Components Remarks
10.4-type color TFT touch panel (VGA:640*480)
FCU8-DU142-31 / FCU8-DU141-31
LCD panel Menu keys Escutcheon Base metal plate Cable Screw cap set
Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with the control unit
15-type color TFT touch panel (XGA:1024*768)
FCU8-DU182-31 / FCU8-DU181-31
LCD panel Menu keys Escutcheon Base metal plate Cable Screw cap set
Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with the control unit
Classification Type Components Remarks
8.4-type color TFT (VGA:640*480) FCU8-DU121-12
LCD panel Menu keys Escutcheon Base metal plate Cable Screw cap set
Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with the control unit
10.4-type color TFT touch panel (VGA:640*480)
FCU8-DU142-32 / FCU8-DU141-32
LCD panel Menu keys Escutcheon Base metal plate Cable Screw cap set
Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with the control unit
15-type color TFT touch panel (XGA:1024*768)
FCU8-DU182-32 / FCU8-DU181-32
LCD panel Menu keys Escutcheon Base metal plate Cable Screw cap set
Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with the control unit
Classification Type Components Remarks
8.4-type color TFT (VGA:640*480) FCU8-DU121-13
LCD panel Menu keys Escutcheon Base metal plate Cable Screw cap set
Front side memory I/F is normally equipped with the control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
14IB-1501269-P
3.7 Keyboard Unit [M800S]
3.8 Keyboard Unit [M80]
3.9 Keyboard Unit [E80]
Classification Type Components Remarks
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB041
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for L system, XZF)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB046
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB047
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
Full keyboard (for M system/L system) (in tandem)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB048
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ABC layout (for M system/L system)
Keyboard for 15-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB083
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
Full keyboard (for M system/L system) (in tandem)
Classification Type Components Remarks
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB026
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB028
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for L system, XZF)
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB029
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for M system/L system) (in tandem)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB041
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for L system, XZF)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB046
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB047
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
Full keyboard (for M system/L system) (in tandem)
Keyboard for 10.4-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB048
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ABC layout (for M system/L system)
Keyboard for 15-type display unit Clear keys FCU8-KB083
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
Full keyboard (for M system/L system) (in tandem)
Classification Type Components Remarks
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Sheet keys FCU8-KB024
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for M system/L system, XYZ)
Keyboard for 8.4-type display unit Sheet keys FCU8-KB025
Escutcheon, key switch G402 cable Screw cap set
ONG layout (for L system, XZF)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
15 IB-1501269-P
3.10 Operation Panel I/O Unit
(Note) DI: Digital input signals, DO: Digital output signals
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [48 points] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX731 Base card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) AO: 1 point Manual pulse generator input: 2ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1, 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 2, 4 to 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [96 points] DO Source output [64 points] FCU8-DX750 Base card
RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type (200mA/point) Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 4 to 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [96 points] DO Source output [96 points] FCU8-DX760
Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 96-points source type (200mA/point) Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 4, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 5, 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [96 points] DO Source output [64 points] AI Analog input [1 point] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX761 Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type (200mA/point) AI: 1 point AO: 1 point Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 5, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [64 points] Scan input [64 points] Scan output [64 points]
FCU8-DX834 Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type (200mA/point) Scan input: 64 points Scan output: 64 points Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 4, 7 to 14, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 5, 6, 15 to 19, 23 to 64
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
16IB-1501269-P
3.11 Remote I/O Unit [M800S/M80]
(Note) DI: Digital input signals, DO: Digital output signals, AI: Analog input signals, AO: Analog output signals
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI 24V/0V common input [32 points] DO Source output [32 points] FCU8-DX220 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type Do: 32-points source type (200mA/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [48 points] FCU8-DX230 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
DI 24V/0V common input DO Source output [48 points] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX231 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
AI Analog input [4 points] AO Analog output [1 point] FCU8-DX202 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
AI : 4 points AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 0V common input [16 points] DO Source output (large capacity) [8 points]
FCU8-DX213 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 16-points 0V common type (3mA/point) DO: 8-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 0V common input [16 points] DO Source output (large capacity) [8 points]
FCU8-DX213-1 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 16-points 0V common type (9mA/point) DO: 8-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
Safety DI 0V common input [8 points] Safety DO Source output (large capacity) [4 points]
FCU8-DX654 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Safety DI: 8-points 0V common type (3mA/point) Safety DO: 4-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
Safety DI 0V common input [8 points] Safety DO Source output (large capacity) [4 points]
FCU8-DX654-1 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Safety DI: 8-points 0V common type (9mA/point) Safety DO: 4-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
DI 24V/0V common input [32points] DO Source output [32 points] Safety DI 0V common input [8 points] (Note 1) Safety relay output [4 points] (Note 2)
FCU8-DX651 Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type Do: 32-points source type (200mA/point) Safety DI: 8-points 0V common type Safety relay: 4-points (non-voltage contact) Relay contact welding detection Number of occupied stations: 3 (Note 1) Safety DI uses 16 points of terminal because of the duplication wiring. (Note 2) Safety relay output uses 8 points of terminal because of the duplication wiring.
Thermistor input [12 points] FCU8-DX408 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Thermistor input: 12 points Number of occupied stations: 3
Multi-analog input [4 points] (Note 3) FCU8-DX409 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Multi-analog input: 4 points (Note 3) Voltage input, current input, thermocouple input and resistance temperature detector input are selected for each CH. Number of occupied stations: 4
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
17 IB-1501269-P
3.12 Remote I/O Unit [E80]
(Note) DI: Digital input signals, DO: Digital output signals, AI: Analog input signals, AO: Analog output signals
3.13 Functional Safety Expansion Unit [M80]
3.14 Function Expansion Unit [M800S/M80]
(Note) To use the function expansion unit, the option relay unit (FCU8-EX70x) is required.
3.15 Function Expansion Unit [E80]
(Note) To use the function expansion unit, the option relay unit (FCU8-EX70x) is required.
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI 24V/0V common input [32 points] DO Source output [32 points] FCU8-DX220 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type Do: 32-points source type (200mA/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [48 points] FCU8-DX230 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
DI 24V/0V common input DO Source output [48 points] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX231 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
AI Analog input [4 points] AO Analog output [1 point] FCU8-DX202 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
AI : 4 points AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 0V common input [16 points] DO Source output (large capacity) [8 points]
FCU8-DX213 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 16-points 0V common type (3mA/point) DO: 8-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 0V common input [16 points] DO Source output (large capacity) [8 points]
FCU8-DX213-1 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 16-points 0V common type (9mA/point) DO: 8-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
Thermistor input [12 points] FCU8-DX408 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Thermistor input: 12 points Number of occupied stations: 3
Multi-analog input [4 points] (Note 3) FCU8-DX409 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Multi-analog input: 4 points (Note 3) Select voltage input, current input, thermocouple and resistance temperature detector input for each ch. Number of occupied stations: 4
Classification Type Components Remarks Functional safety expansion unit FCU8-EX133 Add-on card Smart safety observation
Classification Type Components Remarks CC-Link expansion unit FCU8-EX561 CC-Link I/F PCB CC-Link 1ch PROFIBUS-DP master unit FCU8-EX563 PROFIBUS-DP I/F PCB PROFIBUS-DP 1ch CC-Link IE Field Master/local unit FCU8-EX564 Base card
Add-on card CC-Link IE Field 2ch
EtherNet/IP Scanner/adapter unit FCU8-EX565 Base card
Add-on card EtherNet/IP 1ch (Only LAN1, LAN2 cannot be used)
FL-net expansion unit FCU8-EX568 Base card Add-on card
FL-net 1ch (Only LAN1, LAN2 cannot be used)
Vibration cutting expansion unit FCU8-EX744 Base card Vibration cutting control
Classification Type Components Remarks Option Relay Unit FCU8-EX702 Relay PCB For function expansion unit 1 slot Option Relay Unit FCU8-EX703 Relay PCB For function expansion unit 2 slots
Classification Type Components Remarks CC-Link expansion unit FCU8-EX561 CC-Link I/F PCB CC-Link 1ch PROFIBUS-DP master unit FCU8-EX563 PROFIBUS-DP I/F PCB PROFIBUS-DP 1ch CC-Link IE Field Master/local unit FCU8-EX564 Base card
Add-on card CC-Link IE Field 2ch
EtherNet/IP Scanner/adapter unit FCU8-EX565 Base card
Add-on card EtherNet/IP 1ch (Only LAN1, LAN2 cannot be used)
FL-net expansion unit FCU8-EX568 Base card Add-on card
FL-net 1ch (Only LAN1, LAN2 cannot be used)
Classification Type Components Remarks Option Relay Unit FCU8-EX702 Relay PCB For function expansion unit 1 slot Option Relay Unit FCU8-EX703 Relay PCB For function expansion unit 2 slots
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
18IB-1501269-P
3.16 Manual Pulse Generator
3.17 Synchronous Feed Encoder
3.18 Machine Operation Panel [M800S/M80]
Classification Type Components Remarks
5V Manual Pulse Generator UFO-01-2Z9 UFO-01-2Z9 (Produced by NIDEC NEMICON)
Input 5VDC 100pulse/rev
12V Manual Pulse Generator HD60C HD60C Input 12VDC 25pulse/rev
Classification Type Components Remarks
Synchronous feed encoder OSE1024-3-15-68 OSE1024-3-15-68 Input 5VDC 1024pulse/rev 6000r/min, 68-square flange
Synchronous feed encoder OSE1024-3-15-68-8 OSE1024-3-15-68-8 Input 5VDC 1024pulse/rev 8000r/min ,68-square flange
Synchronous feed encoder OSE1024-3-15-160 OSE1024-3-15-160 Input 5VDC 1024pulse/rev 6000r/min, 160-square flange
Classification Type Components Remarks
Main panel A (For 8.4-type/15-type display unit) FCU8-KB921
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard key layout (55 keys) (Standard specification A)
Main panel A (For 8.4-type/15-type display unit) FCU8-KB922
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
Custom specification key layout (55 keys) (Clear key top cover sold separately)
Main panel B (For 10.4-type display unit) FCU8-KB923
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard key layout (55 keys) (Standard specification A)
Main panel B (For 10.4-type display unit) FCU8-KB924
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
Custom specification key layout (55 keys) (Clear key top cover sold separately)
Main panel A (For 8.4-type/15-type display unit) FCU8-KB925
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard key layout (55 keys) (Standard specification B)
Main panel B (For 10.4-type display unit) FCU8-KB926
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard key layout (55 keys) (Standard specification B)
Sub panel A (Common for all display units) FCU8-KB931
Escutcheon Emergency stop switch, Override switch ON/OFF switch, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard switch specification (Standard specification A)
Sub panel A (Common for all display units) FCU8-KB941
Escutcheon Emergency stop switch, Override switch ON/OFF switch, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard switch specification (Standard specification B)
Clear key top set N030C975G51 / N030C975G55 Clear key top cover (20 pcs/60 pcs)
Set of labels for M7 standard key layout N939A169G51 Labels for M7 standard key layout (1 sheet)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
19 IB-1501269-P
3.19 Machine Operation Panel [E80]
3.20 Handy Terminal
3.21 Cable Connector Sets
Classification Type Components Remarks
Main panel A (For 8.4-type/15-type display unit) FCU8-KB922
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
Custom specification key layout (55 keys) (Clear key top cover sold separately)
Main panel A (For 8.4-type/15-type display unit) FCU8-KB925
Escutcheon, key switch control card G054 cable, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard key layout (55 keys) (Standard specification B)
Sub panel A (Common for all display units) FCU8-KB941
Escutcheon Emergency stop switch, Override switch ON/OFF switch, Screw cap set
MITSUBISHI standard switch specification (Standard specification B)
Clear key top set N030C975G51 / N030C975G55 Clear key top cover (20 pcs/60 pcs)
Set of labels for M7 standard key layout N939A169G51 Labels for M7 standard key layout (1 sheet)
Classification Type Components Remarks
Handy Terminal HG1T-SB12UH- MK1346-L5
Classification Type Components Remarks General I/O units (For SKIP,SIO,MPG,AIO) FCUA-CS000 Connector (10120-3000PE,2pcs),
Shell kit (10320-52F0-008,2pcs) Emergency stop connector (For EMG)
005057-9403 0016020103 x 3 pcs.
Connector (50-57-9403), Contact (0016020103,3pcs.)
Connector kit for RIO 2.0 unit RIO2 CON
Connector (1-1318119-3,2pcs.), Contact (1318107-1,8pcs.), Connector (2-178288-3), Contact (1-175218-5,3pcs)
24VDC power supply connector (For DCIN) FCUA-CN220 Connector (2-178288-3),
Contact (1-175218-5,3pcs) DI/DO connector (For operation panel I/O unit) (For remote I/O unit)
7940-6500SC x 4pcs. 3448-7940 x 4pcs.
Connector (7940-6500SC,4pcs.), Strain relief (3448-7940,4pcs.) FCU8-DX731
DI connector (For operation panel I/O unit)
7950-6500SC x 2pcs. 3448-7950 x 2pcs.
Connector (7950-6500SC,2pcs.), Strain relief (3448-7950,2pcs.) FCU8-DX750/760/761
Connector for CJ71 2-1318119-4 1318107-1 x 8pcs.
Connector (2-1318119-4), Contact (1318107-1,8pcs.)
THERMISTOR connector 37104-2165-000FL 10P Connector (37104-2165-000FL,10pcs.)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
20IB-1501269-P
3.22 Thermistor Sets
3.23 Genuine Memory Card
3.24 Durable Parts
(Note) Contact the Service Center, Sales Office or dealer for repairs or part replacement.
3.25 Replacements
Classification Type Components Remarks Thermistor PT3C-51F-M2 10P Thermistor (PT3C-51F-M2,10pcs.)
Classification Type Components Remarks Exclusive SD cards 1GB FCU8-SD001G FCU8-SD001G 1GB capacity Exclusive SD cards 4GB FCU8-SD004G FCU8-SD004G 4GB capacity
Durable parts Part type Battery for control unit Q6BAT
Replacements Part type Manufacturer Protection fuse for operation panel I/O LM50 Daito Communication Apparatus Co., Ltd. Protection fuse for FCU8-DX220/230/231/651 LM50 Daito Communication Apparatus Co., Ltd. Protection fuse for FCU8-DX213/654/213-1/654-1 MP63 Daito Communication Apparatus Co., Ltd. Pair of SD/USB covers for display unit N031C089G51 -
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
21 IB-1501269-P
3.26 List of Cables [Cable relating to NC]
(Note 1) "x" in type columns indicate cable length (unit: m). (Note 2) Lengths indicated with an asterisk (*) in the max. cable length column indicate the maximum cable length
when connecting via other unit.
Type Application Available cable length (m) Max. cable length
FCUA-R050-xM Synchronous encoder - control unit (straight, with connector) 5 30m FCUA-R054-xM Synchronous encoder - control unit (right angle, with connector) 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 30m G071 LxM 24VDC relay cable for machine operation panel 0.12, 0.5, 1 1m G123 Cable for emergency stop release - - G430 LxM Cable for connection to handy terminal 3, 5, 10 10m
G460 LxM Cable for machine operation panel (Cable between main panel and sub panel) 0.5 0.5m
J010 LxM Operation panel I/O interface cable 0.5, 1 1m J012 LxM Operation panel I/O interface cable (for FCU8-DX834) 0.5, 1 1m J020 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (12V): 1ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 50m J021 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (12V): 2ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 50m J022 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (12V): 3ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 50m J023 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 1ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 20m J024 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 2ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 20m J025 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 3ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 20m
J026 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 1ch (for connection to control unit) 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 20m (*)
J027 LxM Manual pulse generator cable (5V): 2ch (for connection to control unit) 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 20m (*)
J030 LxM RS-232C I/F cable: 1ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 15m (*) J031 LxM RS-232C I/F cable: 2ch 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 15m (*) J070 LxM 24VDC power cable 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15 15m J071 LxM 24VDC power cable (for long distance) 20 20m J100 LxM SKIP input cable 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 20m J120 LxM Emergency stop cable 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 30m J121 LxM Emergency stop cable for machine operation panel 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 30m J210 LxM Remote I/O 2.0 communication cable 0.3, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 50m (*) J221 LxM Analog input/output cable (for remote I/O unit) 2, 3, 7 30m J224 LxM Analog input/output cable (for operation panel I/O unit) 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 30m J225 LxM Analog output cable (for operation panel I/O unit) 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 30m J303 LxM LAN straight cable 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 50m J350 LxM DI/DO cable (connectors at both ends) 1, 2, 3, 5 50m J351 LxM DI/DO cable (connector at one end) 3 50m J460 LxM DI/DO cable (connectors at both ends) 1, 2, 3, 5 50m J461 LxM DI/DO cable (connector at one end) 3 50m R2-TM Terminator for remote I/O interface - -
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 3 List of Configuration
22IB-1501269-P
[Cable Relating to Drive Unit]
(Note 1) "x" in type columns indicate cable length (unit: m). (Note 2) Lengths indicated with an asterisk (*) in the max. cable length column indicate the maximum cable length
when connecting via other unit.
3.27 System Type
Type Application Available cable length (m) Max. cable length
CNP2E-1-xM Motor side PLG cable Spindle side accuracy encoder TS5690 cable
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
CNP3EZ-2P-xM Spindle side encoder cable OSE-1024 cable 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
CNP3EZ-3P-xM Spindle side encoder cable OSE-1024 cable 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
CNV2E-8P-xM For HG/HG-H,HQ/HQ-H Motor side encoder cable (for D48/D51/D74) 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m CNV2E-9P-xM For HG/HG-H,HQ/HQ-H Motor side encoder cable (for D48/D51/D74) 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m CNV2E-D-xM MDS-B-SD unit cable 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m CNV2E-HP-xM MDS-B-HR unit cable 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
DG30-xM Battery cable (For drive unit - Battery box, For drive unit - drive unit)
0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
G380 LxM Optical communication cable For wiring between drive units (outside panel) 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 30m
J395 LxM Optical communication cable For wiring between drive units (outside panel) For wiring between NC-drive units
3, 5, 7, 10 10m
J396 LxM Optical communication cable For wiring between drive units (inside panel) 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 10m
MR- BKS1CBLxMA1-H
<200V Series> Brake cable for HG96 Lead out in direction of motor shaft
2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
MR- BKS1CBLxMA2-H
<200V Series> Brake cable for HG96 Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft
2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
MR-BT6V2CBL LxM
Battery cable (MDS-EJ/EJH) (For drive unit - drive unit) 0.3, 1 1m
MR-D05UDL3M-B STO cable 3 3m
MR- PWS1CBLxMA1-H
<200V Series> Power cable for HG96 Lead out in direction of motor shaft
2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
MR- PWS1CBLxMA2-H
<200V Series> Power cable for HG96 Lead out in opposite direction of motor shaft
2, 3, 5, 7, 10 10m
SH21 LxM Power supply communication cable Power backup unit communication cable 0.35, 0.5, 1, 2, 3 30m
Series Model name System type Control unit Display unit
M800S Series M850S FCA850H-8S FCU8-MA542-001 FCU8-DU182-31/FCU8-DU181-31 (15-type color LCD touchscreen)
FCA850H-4S FCU8-DU142-31/FCU8-DU141-31 (10.4-type color LCD touchscreen)
M830S FCA830H-8S FCU8-MU542-001 FCU8-DU182-31/FCU8-DU181-31 (15-type color LCD touchscreen) FCA830H-4S FCU8-DU142-31/FCU8-DU141-31 (10.4-type color LCD touchscreen)
M80 Series
M80 TypeA FCA80H-8A
FCU8-MU512-001 FCU8-DU182-32/FCU8-DU181-32 (15-type color LCD touchscreen)
FCA80H-4A FCU8-DU142-32/FCU8-DU141-32 (10.4-type color LCD touchscreen) FCA80P-2A FCU8-DU121-12 (8.4-type color LCD)
M80 TypeB FCA80H-8B
FCU8-MU511-001 FCU8-DU182-32/FCU8-DU181-32 (15-type color LCD touchscreen)
FCA80H-4B FCU8-DU142-32/FCU8-DU141-32 (10.4-type color LCD touchscreen) FCA80P-2B FCU8-DU121-12 (8.4-type color LCD)
E80 Series E80 TypeA FCA80P-2EA FCU8-MU514-001 FCU8-DU121-13 (8.4-type color LCD) E80 TypeB FCA80P-2EB FCU8-MU513-001 FCU8-DU121-13 (8.4-type color LCD)
23 IB-1501269-P
4 General Specifications
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
24IB-1501269-P
4.1 Environment Conditions [M800S] 4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) The current consumption of the display unit is included in that of the control unit. (Note 3) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 4) When the display unit is mounted on an incline, the inclination angle to place the unit should be 30 degrees or
less from the vertical direction.
Item
Unit name Control unit Display unit
Type FCU8-MU542/MA542 FCU8-MU541/MA541
FCU8-DU142-31 : (10.4-type) FCU8-DU182-31 : (15-type)
FCU8-DU141-31 : (10.4-type) FCU8-DU181-31 : (15-type)
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 24VDC
FCU8-DU142-31 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC FCU8-DU182-31 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC FCU8-DU141-31 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC FCU8-DU181-31 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC
(Supply from Control Unit)
Current consumption 2.5A - (Note 2)
Maximum heating value(W) 16
FCU8-DU142-31 : 10 FCU8-DU182-31 : 14 FCU8-DU141-31 : 10 FCU8-DU181-31 : 14
Mass (kg) 1.1
FCU8-DU142-31 : 1.7 FCU8-DU182-31 : 4.1 FCU8-DU141-31 : 1.7 FCU8-DU181-31 : 4
Outline dimension WHD or WH
(mm) 239.1173.475
FCU8-DU142-31 : 290220 FCU8-DU182-31 : 400320 FCU8-DU141-31 : 290220 FCU8-DU181-31 : 400320
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
25 IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) The current consumption of the keyboard unit and the operation panel I/O unit (control section) are included in
that of the control unit. Current consumption for the I/O circuit needs to be separately calculated based on the number of points used and its load.
(Note 3) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used. (Note 4) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 5) 24V power input is not required for FCU8-KB931/KB941. (Note 6) Current consumption for the I/O circuit needs to be separately calculated based on the number of points used
and its load.
Item
Unit name Keyboard unit Operation panel I/O unit Machine operation panel
Type
FCU8-KB041/KB046 : (10.4-type) FCU8-KB047 : (10.4-type/vertical
arrangement) FCU8-KB048 : (10.4-type)
FCU8-KB083 : (15-type/vertical arrangement)
FCU8-DX731 FCU8-DX750 FCU8-DX760 FCU8-DX761
FCU8-DX834
FCU8-KB921/KB922/ KB925
FCU8-KB923/KB924/ KB926
FCU8-KB931/KB941
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation) Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 5VDC 5VDC/3.3VDC
24VDC 24VDC (Note 5) (Supply from Control Unit)
Current consumption - (Note 2) 0.3A (Note 6) 0.3A (Note 5) Maximum heating value(W) 1 4 (Note 3) 8 (Note 3) 7.2
Mass (kg)
FCU8-KB041/KB046 : 0.8 FCU8-KB047 : 1.3 FCU8-KB048 : 1.4 FCU8-KB083 : 1.5
FCU8-DX731 : 0.3
FCU8-DX750 : 0.4
FCU8-DX760 : 0.5
FCU8-DX761 : 0.5
0.4
FCU8-KB921/KB922/ KB925 :
1.1 FCU8-KB923/KB924/
KB926 : 1.2
FCU8-KB931/KB941 : 0.5
Outline dimension WH
(mm)
FCU8-KB041/KB046 : 140220 FCU8-KB047 : 290160 FCU8-KB048 : 230220 FCU8-KB083 : 400140
116179
FCU8-KB921/KB922/ KB925 : 260140
FCU8-KB923/KB924/ KB926 : 290140
FCU8-KB931/KB941 : 140140
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
26IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) This value includes the maximum value of DO external load current (3.2A). (Note 3) This value does not include DO external load current. (Note 4) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used. (Note 5) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 6) The maximum value including the heating value of analog input circuit.
Item
Unit name Remote I/O unit
Type FCU8-DX220/
DX230/ DX231
FCU8-DX202
FCU8-DX213/ DX213-1/ DX654/
DX654-1
FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409 FCU8-DX651
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Short term 10 to 95% RH
(with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
10 to 85% RH (with no dew
condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 24VDC
Current consumption 3.5A (Note 2) 0.3A 0.3A (Note 3) 0.1A 0.2A 3.7A (Note 2)
Maximum heating value (W) 8 (Note 4) 3 6 (Note 6) 8 (Note 4)
Mass (kg) 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.8
Outline dimension WHD
(mm) 40175133 40175119 40175130 40175109 40175130 104175115
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
27 IB-1501269-P
4.1.2 24VDC Stabilized Power Supply Selecting Conditions Consider the following characteristics for the stabilized power supply, and select the power supply that complies with laws, regulations, or safety standards of the country where the machine will be installed.
Item Specifications Remarks
Output
Voltage 24VDC When the stabilized power supply and 24VDC input unit are distant, select the stabilized power supply which is possible to set output voltage 24VDC or more allowing for the influence of voltage down by the cable.
Voltage fluctuation 5%
Current - Calculate the current value as a reference of maximum current consumption for the unit which uses the power supply.
Ripple noise 0.2V (P-P)
Output holding time min 20ms Output holding time is decided by loading ratio; however, the stabilized power supply which complies with the specification on the left must be selected during maximum loading.
Overcurrent output shutoff function - Use a power supply having the overcurrent output shutoff function.
CAUTION 1. Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of
24V.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
28IB-1501269-P
4.2 Environment Conditions [M80] 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) The current consumption of the display unit is included in that of the control unit. (Note 3) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 4) When the display unit is mounted on an incline, the inclination angle to place the unit should be 30 degrees or
less from the vertical direction.
Item
Unit name Control unit Display unit
Type FCU8-MU511/MU512 FCU8-MU501/MU502
FCU8-DU142-32 : (10.4-type) FCU8-DU182-32 : (15-type) FCU8-DU121-12 : (8.4-type) FCU8-DU141-32 : (10.4-type) FCU8-DU181-32 : (15-type)
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 24VDC
FCU8-DU142-32 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC FCU8-DU182-32 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC
FCU8-DU121-12 : 12VDC/3.3VDC FCU8-DU141-32 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC FCU8-DU181-32 : 12VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC
(Supply from Control Unit)
Current consumption 2.5A - (Note 2)
Maximum heating value(W) 12
FCU8-DU142-32 : 10 FCU8-DU182-32 : 14 FCU8-DU121-12 : 6 FCU8-DU141-32 : 10 FCU8-DU181-32 : 14
Mass (kg) 1.1
FCU8-DU142-32 : 1.7 FCU8-DU182-32 : 4.1 FCU8-DU121-12 : 1.2 FCU8-DU141-32 : 1.7 FCU8-DU181-32 : 4
Outline dimension WHD or WH
(mm) 239.1173.475
FCU8-DU142-32 : 290220 FCU8-DU182-32 : 400320 FCU8-DU121-12 : 260200 FCU8-DU141-32 : 290220 FCU8-DU181-32 : 400320
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
29 IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) The current consumption of the keyboard unit and the operation panel I/O unit (control section) are included in
that of the control unit. Current consumption for the I/O circuit needs to be separately calculated based on the number of points used and its load.
(Note 3) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used. (Note 4) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 5) 24V power input is not required for FCU8-KB931/KB941. (Note 6) Current consumption for the I/O circuit needs to be separately calculated based on the number of points used
and its load.
Item
Unit name Keyboard unit Operation panel I/O unit Machine operation panel
Type
FCU8-KB026/KB028 : (8.4-type) FCU8-KB029 : (8.4-type/vertical
arrangement) FCU8-KB041/KB046 : (10.4-type) FCU8-KB047 : (10.4-type/vertical
arrangement) FCU8-KB048 : (10.4-type)
FCU8-KB083 : (15-type/vertical arrangement)
FCU8-DX731 FCU8-DX750 FCU8-DX760 FCU8-DX761
FCU8-DX834
FCU8-KB921/KB922/ KB925
FCU8-KB923/KB924/ KB926
FCU8-KB931/KB941
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation) Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 5VDC 5VDC/3.3VDC
24VDC 24VDC (Note 5) (Supply from Control Unit)
Current consumption - (Note 2) 0.3A (Note 6) 0.3A (Note 5) Maximum heating value(W) 1 4 (Note 3) 8 (Note 3) 7.2
Mass (kg)
FCU8-KB026/KB028 : 0.75 FCU8-KB029 :1.0
FCU8-KB041/KB046 : 0.8 FCU8-KB047 : 1.3 FCU8-KB048 : 1.4 FCU8-KB083 : 1.5
FCU8-DX731 : 0.3
FCU8-DX750 : 0.4
FCU8-DX760 : 0.5
FCU8-DX761 : 0.5
0.4
FCU8-KB921/KB922/ KB925 :
1.1 FCU8-KB923/KB924/
KB926 : 1.2
FCU8-KB931/KB941 : 0.5
Outline dimension WH
(mm)
FCU8-KB026/KB028 : 140200 FCU8-KB029 : 260140
FCU8-KB041/KB046 : 140220 FCU8-KB047 : 290160 FCU8-KB048 : 230220 FCU8-KB083 : 400140
116179
FCU8-KB921/KB922/ KB925 : 260140
FCU8-KB923/KB924/ KB926 : 290140
FCU8-KB931/KB941 : 140140
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
30IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) This value includes the maximum value of DO external load current (3.2A). (Note 3) This value does not include DO external load current. (Note 4) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used. (Note 5) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 6) The maximum value including the heating value of analog input circuit.
Item
Unit name Remote I/O unit
Type FCU8-DX220/
DX230/ DX231
FCU8-DX202
FCU8-DX213/ DX213-1/ DX654/
DX654-1
FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409 FCU8-DX651
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Short term 10 to 95% RH
(with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
10 to 85% RH (with no dew
condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 24VDC
Current consumption 3.5A (Note 2) 0.3A 0.3A (Note 3) 0.1A 0.2A 3.7A (Note 2)
Maximum heating value (W) 8 (Note 4) 3 6 (Note 6) 8 (Note 4)
Mass (kg) 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.8
Outline dimension WHD
(mm) 40175133 40175119 40175130 40175109 40175130 104175115
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
31 IB-1501269-P
4.2.2 24VDC Stabilized Power Supply Selecting Conditions Consider the following characteristics for the stabilized power supply, and select the power supply that complies with laws, regulations, or safety standards of the country where the machine will be installed.
Item Specifications Remarks
Output
Voltage 24VDC When the stabilized power supply and 24VDC input unit are distant, select the stabilized power supply which is possible to set output voltage 24VDC or more allowing for the influence of voltage down by the cable.
Voltage fluctuation 5%
Current - Calculate the current value as a reference of maximum current consumption for the unit which uses the power supply.
Ripple noise 0.2V (P-P)
Output holding time min 20ms Output holding time is decided by loading ratio; however, the stabilized power supply which complies with the specification on the left must be selected during maximum loading.
Overcurrent output shutoff function - Use a power supply having the overcurrent output shutoff function.
CAUTION 1. Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of
24V.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
32IB-1501269-P
4.3 Environment Conditions [E80] 4.3.1 Installation Environment Conditions
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) The current consumption of the display unit is included in that of the control unit. (Note 3) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 4) When the display unit is mounted on an incline, the inclination angle to place the unit should be 30 degrees or
less from the vertical direction.
Item Unit name Control unit Display unit
Type FCU8-MU513 FCU8-MU514 FCU8-DU121-13 : (8.4-type)
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 24VDC 12VDC/3.3VDC
(Supply from Control Unit)
Current consumption 2.5A - (Note 2)
Maximum heating value(W) 12 6
Mass (kg) 1.1 FCU8-DU121-12 : 1.2 FCU8-DU141-32 : 1.7 FCU8-DU181-32 : 4
Outline dimension WHD or WH
(mm) 239.1173.475 260200
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
33 IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) The current consumption of the keyboard unit and the operation panel I/O unit (control section) are included in
that of the control unit. Current consumption for the I/O circuit needs to be separately calculated based on the number of points used and its load.
(Note 3) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used. (Note 4) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 5) 24V power input is not required for FCU8-KB941. (Note 6) Current consumption for the I/O circuit needs to be separately calculated based on the number of points used
and its load.
Item
Unit name Keyboard unit Operation panel I/O unit Machine operation panel
Type FCU8-KB024 FCU8-KB025
FCU8-DX731 FCU8-DX750 FCU8-DX760 FCU8-DX761
FCU8-DX834 FCU8-KB922/KB925 FCU8-KB941
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation) Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 5VDC 5VDC/3.3VDC
24VDC 24VDC (Note 5) (Supply from Control Unit)
Current consumption - (Note 2) 0.3A (Note 6) 0.3A (Note 5) Maximum heating value(W) 1 4 (Note 3) 8 (Note 3) 7.2
Mass (kg) 0.75
FCU8-DX731 : 0.3
FCU8-DX750 : 0.4
FCU8-DX760 : 0.5
FCU8-DX761 : 0.5
0.4
FCU8-KB922/KB925 : 1.1
FCU8-KB941 : 0.5
Outline dimension WH
(mm) 140200 116179
FCU8-KB922/KB925 : 260140
FCU8-KB941 : 140140
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
34IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "Short term" means roughly within one month. (Note 2) This value includes the maximum value of DO external load current (3.2A). (Note 3) This value does not include DO external load current. (Note 4) For the heating value of the I/O circuit, calculate with the number of points used. (Note 5) For the whole NC system, consider the characteristics of the drive units when the altitude is more than 1000
meters above sea level. Refer to the manual of drive unit for details. (Note 6) The maximum value including the heating value of analog input circuit.
Item
Unit name Remote I/O unit
Type FCU8-DX220/
DX230/ DX231
FCU8-DX202 FCU8-DX213/ DX213-1 FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 58C
During storage -20 to 60C
Ambient humidity
Long term 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Short term 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Altitude Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 13000 meters or less above sea level
Power supply voltage 24VDC
Current consumption 3.5A (Note 2) 0.3A 0.3A (Note 3) 0.1A 0.2A Maximum heating value (W) 8 (Note 4) 3 6 (Note 6)
Mass (kg) 0.4 0.2 0.3
Outline dimension WHD
(mm) 40175133 40175119 40175130 40175109 40175130
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
35 IB-1501269-P
4.3.2 24VDC Stabilized Power Supply Selecting Conditions Consider the following characteristics for the stabilized power supply, and select the power supply that complies with laws, regulations, or safety standards of the country where the machine will be installed.
Item Specifications Remarks
Output
Voltage 24VDC When the stabilized power supply and 24VDC input unit are distant, select the stabilized power supply which is possible to set output voltage 24VDC or more allowing for the influence of voltage down by the cable.
Voltage fluctuation 5%
Current - Calculate the current value as a reference of maximum current consumption for the unit which uses the power supply.
Ripple noise 0.2V (P-P)
Output holding time min 20ms Output holding time is decided by loading ratio; however, the stabilized power supply which complies with the specification on the left must be selected during maximum loading.
Overcurrent output shutoff function - Use a power supply having the overcurrent output shutoff function.
CAUTION 1. Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of
24V.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
36IB-1501269-P
4.4 Control Unit [M800S]
4.4.1 FCU8-MU542 / FCU8-MA542 / FCU8-MU541 / FCU8-MA541
[Outline dimension]
[mm]
47
15 6
17 2.
4 17
3. 4
90 28
214.5 239.1
208 11 6
6
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
37 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) USB_F Front-side USB memory I/F (13) RIO2 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (2) USB_B (14) MENUKEY Menu key I/F
(3) BL Display unit backlight I/F (15) ENC Encoder input 1ch (5V manual pulse generator input 2ch)
(4) SDC_F Front-side SD card I/F (16) SKIP SKIP input 8 points (5) SDC_B Back-side SD card I/F (17) SIO RS-232C communication 2ch (6) DCIN 24VDC input (18) LAN1 Ethernet communication (7) EMG External emergency stop input (19) LAN2 Ethernet communication
(8) OPTH1 High-speed optical servo communication (20) FG FG terminal
(9) OPTH2 High-speed optical servo communication (21) LCD Display unit signal I/F
(10) BAT Battery I/F (22) EXT_P Function expansion unit I/F (11) CJ71 Operation panel I/O unit I/F (23) TP Touch panel I/F (12) RIO1 Remote I/O 2.0 communication
(1)
(2)
(3)
(8)
(5)
(4)
(7)(6)
(9) (13)(11) (12) (14)
(15) (16) (18)(17) (19) (20)
(21)
(22)
(10)Arrow A
[Cover opened]
A
(23)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
38IB-1501269-P
(1) USB_F (Front-side USB memory I/F)
(2) USB_B
(3) BL (Display unit backlight I/F)
(4) SDC_F (Front-side SD card I/F)
(5) SDC_B (Back-side SD card I/F)
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
12V, 5V, and 3.3V output from connectors are to supply the power for dedicated peripheral devices. Do not use for other equipment to supply the power since we do not guarantee the NC operation by voltage down or noise sneaking.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
39 IB-1501269-P
(6) DCIN (24VDC input)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(a) Specifications of power supply Consider the following characteristics when selecting the stabilized power supply (prepared by machine tool builder). Use a power supply that complies with CE Marking or that follows the safety standards given below.
[Stabilized power supply selection items]
[Standards]
(Note) 24VDC voltage may drop instantaneously due to rush current at the beginning of 24V power supply to the control unit. The level of voltage drop depends on the capacity of the power supply. Do not share the power supply with the devices that have alarms to warn the voltage drop.
1 I +24V 2 0V 3 FG
Item Standard setting
Output Voltage fluctuation 5% or less of 24VDC Ripple noise 200mV (P-P)
Power capacity Calculate the current value as a reference of maximum current consumption for the unit which uses the power supply.
Output holding time 20ms Overcurrent protection Required
Safety Standards UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 234 approved, IEC950 compliant Noise Terminal Voltage FCC Class A, VCCI Class A High Harmonics Current Restrictions IEC61000-3-2
CAUTION 1. Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of
24V.
1 3
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
40IB-1501269-P
(7) EMG (External emergency stop input)
Connector : 50-57-9403 Contact : 0016020103 Manufacturer: MOLEX
(Note) Use this when installing an emergency stop switch in the electric cabinet. Connect a terminator (G123 cable) when not using this connector.
(8) OPTH1 (High-speed optical servo communication 1st ch) (9) OPTH2 (High-speed optical servo communication 2nd ch)
Connector : LGP-Z0007K Manufacturer: HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
(10) BAT (Battery I/F)
(11) CJ71 (Operation panel I/O unit I/F)
Connector : 2-1318119-4 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
1 FG 2 I EMG IN 3 O +24V
A1 I/O TXRXD B1 I/O TXRXD* A2 - +5V B2 - +3.3V A3 - - B3 - 0V A4 - FG B4 - 0V
123
1 2 3 4
B A
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
41 IB-1501269-P
(12) RIO1 (Remote I/O 2.0 communication 1st channel) (13) RIO2 (Remote I/O 2.0 communication 2nd channel)
Up to 64 remote I/O stations can be connected.
Connector : 1-1318119-3 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
A B 1 I/O TXRXD 1 I/O TXRXD* 2 NC 2 0V 3 FG 3 NC
1 2 3
B A
X
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
42IB-1501269-P
(a) Connecting a pulse-controlled inverter [M80/E80] For M80/E80, RIO1 and RIO2 connectors can be used as interfaces to output pulses. With this function, you can connect a pulse-controlled inverter with RS422 interface to M80/E80. (Note 1) When you use a function with pulse output, remote I/O unit cannot be connected to the RIO1 and RIO2
connectors. (Note 2) When you use a function with pulse output, BiSS encoder cannot be connected to the RIO2 connector.
Pulse output specifications
(Note) The output signal logic type can be selected with the logic selecting function.
RIO1 RIO2 A B A B
1 O A/PULSE/CW 1 O A*/PULSE*/CW* 1 O B/SIGN/CCW 1 O B*/SIGN*/CCW* 2 NC 2 0V 2 NC 2 0V 3 FG 3 NC 3 FG 3 NC
Number of control axes One axis Pulse output mode (Note) A phase/B phase, PULSE/SIGN, CW/CCW Pulse output frequency 1 to 4,000,000 pulses per second Pulse output signal RS422 differential driver output
Signal voltage Differential output voltage 2.0 V or greater Common mode output voltage 3.0 V or less
Output current 250 mA in maximum Cable wire length 30 meters or less
Pulse output mode Positive logic Negative logic
A phase/B phase
PULSE/SIGN
CW/CCW
A
A*
B
B*
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
A
A*
B
B*
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
PULSE
SIGN
PULSE*
SIGN*
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
PULSE
SIGN
PULSE*
SIGN*
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
CW
CCW
CW*
CCW*
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
CW
CCW
CW*
CCW*
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
43 IB-1501269-P
(b) Connecting a BiSS encoder RIO2 connector and ENC connector can be used as BiSS interface. This enables you to connect a BiSS encoder with RS422 interface. (Note) When the BiSS encoder is connected, the remote I/O unit and the pulse-controlled inverter cannot
be connected to the RIO2 connector.
Connector: 1-1318119-3 Contact: 1318108-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
BiSS interface specifications
(Note) Access to the slave register is not supported.
(14) MENUKY (Menu key I/F)
RIO2 A B
1 O MA+ 1 O MA- 2 NC 2 0V 3 FG 3 NC
Connectable number One piece Protocol BiSS C (Note) Transmission 625 kbps to 5 Mbps Output signal RS422 differential driver output
Output signal voltage Differential output voltage 2.0 V or greater Common mode output voltage 3.0 V or less
Output current 250 mA in maximum Input signal RS422 differential driver input
Input signal voltage Differential input voltage 0.2 V or greater Common mode input voltage -7.0 V to 7.0 V
Cable length 30 m or less
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
44IB-1501269-P
(15) ENC (Encoder input 1ch, 5V manual pulse generator input 2ch) Synchronous feed encoder or 5V manual pulse generator can be connected to this connector.
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note 1) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
(Note 2) Both the synchronous feed encoder and the manual pulse generator can be connected at the same time. (In this case, the cables must be prepared by the machine tool builder.)
1 0V 11 0V 2 I ENC1Z 12 I ENC1Z* 3 I ENC1B 13 I ENC1B* 4 I ENC1A 14 I ENC1A* 5 0V 15 0V 6 O +5V 16 O +5V 7 I HA2A 17 I HA2B 8 I HA1A 18 I HA1B 9 NC 19 NC
10 O +5V 20 O +5V
10 1
20 11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
45 IB-1501269-P
(a) Input for synchronous feed encoder (Note) When a synchronous feed encoder is connected, a BiSS encoder cannot be connected.
Specification of input part
a.b.c.d.e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 T/10
(b) Input for 5V manual pulse generator Specification of input part
a.b.c.d.e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 T/10 T: A or B phase cycle
Number of pulse phases Three phases (A phase, B phase, a phase difference 90 degrees, Z phase) (Refer to the waveform below.)
Signal output of the encoder RS422 differential driver output
Signal voltage
Differential input voltage 0.2 V or greater Common mode input voltage -7.0 V to 7.0 V
Power supply voltage 5VDC10% Current consumption 200mA or less Number of pulses per rotation 1024 pulse/rev Input frequency (rotation speed) 136kHz or less (8000r/min or less) Cable length 50m or less
Number of pulse phases Two phases (A phase, B phase, a phase difference 90 degrees) (Refer to the waveform below.)
Signal output of manual pulse generator Voltage output, open collector output
Signal voltage H level 3.5V to 5.25V L level 0V to 0.5V
Power supply voltage 5VDC10% Current consumption 100mA or less Number of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev, 100 pulse/rev
Input frequency (rotation speed) 1kHz or less (2400r/min or less for 25pluse/rev, 600r/min or less for 100pluse/ rev)
Cable length 20m or less
A
A*
B
B*
Z
Z*
a b c d e
T
phase
phase
phase
phase
phase
phase
T
b da c e
A(B) phase
B(A) phase
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
46IB-1501269-P
Input/output circuit
When using the synchronous feed encoder and the manual pulse generator at the same time, connect the manual pulse generator to the operation panel I/O unit or use a distribution cable made by the machine tool builder.
0V
+5V
8 7
18 17
10 20
1 11
0V
+5V
+5V +5V
0V 0V
0V
HA1A HA2A
HA1B HA2B
R
C
R
R
C
R
Connector pin No.
Control circuit
Signal input
Power output
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
47 IB-1501269-P
(c) Connecting a BiSS encoder Refer to "(b) Connecting a BiSS encoder" in (13) for the BiSS encoder specifications. (Note) When the BiSS encoder is connected, the synchronous feed encoder cannot be connected.
HA1A, HA1B, HA2A, and HA2B are signals for the manual pulse generator. They are used when the BiSS encoder and the manual pulse generator are connected at the same time.
(16) SKIP (SKIP input 8 points)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
1 0V 11 0V 2 NC 12 NC 3 NC 13 NC 4 I SL+ 14 I SL- 5 0V 15 0V 6 O +5V 16 O +5V 7 I HA2A 17 I HA2B 8 I HA1A 18 I HA1B 9 NC 19 NC 10 O +5V 20 O +5V
1 COM GND 11 COM GND 2 I SKIP IN1 12 I SKIP IN2 3 I SKIP IN3 13 I SKIP IN4 4 NC 14 NC 5 COM GND 15 COM GND 6 NC 16 NC 7 I SKIP IN5 17 I SKIP IN6 8 I SKIP IN7 18 I SKIP IN8 9 NC 19 NC
10 NC 20 NC
10 1
20 11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
48IB-1501269-P
(a) Skip signal input conditions Use the input signal within the following condition ranges.
24V common 0V common 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 6mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less 5 Input resistance 2.35k 6 Input signal holding time (Ton) 2ms or more 7 Internal response time 0.08ms or less 8 Machine side contact capacity +30V or more, 16mA or more
Ton
0V
+24V External signal
Connection to 24V common
0V
+24V
Ton
External signal
Connection to 0V common
0V(RG)
0V(RG)
0V(RG)
SKIP SKIP
COM COM
2.35k
2.35k
2.35k
2.35k
24VDC
(Machine side)
Control circuit
Control circuit
(Machine side)
Connection to 24V common Connection to 0V common
24VDC
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
49 IB-1501269-P
(17) SIO (RS-232C communication 2ch)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
1 0V 11 0V 2 I RD1(RXD1) 12 O SD1(TXD1) 3 I CS1(CTS1) 13 O RS1(RTS1) 4 I DR1(DSR1) 14 O ER1(DTR1) 5 0V 15 0V 6 NC 16 NC 7 I RD2(RXD2) 17 O SD2(TXD2) 8 I CS2(CTS2) 18 O RS2(RTS2) 9 I DR2(DSR2) 19 O ER2(DTR2)
10 NC 20 NC
10 1
20 11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
50IB-1501269-P
(18) LAN1 (Ethernet communication)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern. - Use J303 cable when directly connecting a device such as a personal computer to the unit.
Connector : J00026A0165 Manufacturer: Japan Telegrtner
(19) LAN2 (Ethernet communication)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern. - Use J303 cable when directly connecting a device such as a personal computer to the unit.
Connector : J00026A0165 Manufacturer: Japan Telegrtner
(20) FG (FG terminal)
(21) LCD (Display unit signal I/F)
(22) EXT_P (Function expansion unit I/F)
(23) TP (Touch panel I/F)
1 I/O TXRXD0+ 2 I/O TXRXD0- 3 I/O TXRXD1+ 4 I/O TXRXD2+ 5 I/O TXRXD2- 6 I/O TXRXD1- 7 I/O TXRXD3+ 8 I/O TXRXD3-
1 I/O RD- 2 I/O RD+ 3 I/O TD- 4 I/O TCT 5 I/O TCT 6 I/O TD+ 7 I/O RCT 8 I/O RCT
81
81
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
51 IB-1501269-P
[LED]
No. Name Lamp state Details
(1) 24VIN
Lit (Green) 24VDC power is being supplied from the external power supply.
Not lit
The following may have caused an error: - No 24VDC-power supply from the external power supply. - Disconnection of fuse near DCIN connector. - Failure of LED.
(2) DCOUT
Lit (Green) Internal voltage is normally output.
Not lit
The followings may have caused an error: - No 24V-power supply from the external power supply. - Failure in any of the power output circuits. - Failure of LED or IC which helps turn the LED ON.
(3) LCDON
Lit (Green) 12VDC for the backlight of display unit is normally output.
Not lit The followings may have caused an error: - Failure of 12VDC output in control unit. - 24VDC input voltage is +20V or less.
(4) READY Lit (Green) Ready ON state.
Not lit Ready OFF state.
(5) ERR Lit (Red)
H/W is not operating properly. The followings may have caused an error: - Occurrence of NC watchdog error. - Failure of main CPU card.
Not lit H/W is operating properly.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
52IB-1501269-P
4.5 Control Unit [M80]
4.5.1 FCU8-MU511 / FCU8-MU512 / FCU8-MU501 / FCU8-MU502
[Outline dimension]
[mm]
47
15 6
17 2.
4 17
3. 4
90 28
214.5 239.1
208 11 6
6
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
53 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
Refer to "General Specifications: Control Unit [M800S]" for details on the connectors.
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) USB_F Front-side USB memory I/F (13) RIO2 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (2) USB_B (14) MENUKEY Menu key I/F
(3) BL Display unit backlight I/F (15) ENC Encoder input 1ch (5V manual pulse generator input 2ch)
(4) SDC_F Front-side SD card I/F (16) SKIP SKIP input 8 points (5) SDC_B Back-side SD card I/F (17) SIO RS-232C communication 2ch (6) DCIN 24VDC input (18) LAN1 Ethernet communication (7) EMG External emergency stop input (19) LAN2 Ethernet communication
(8) OPTH1 High-speed optical servo communication (20) FG FG terminal
(10) BAT Battery I/F (21) LCD Display unit signal I/F (11) CJ71 Operation panel I/O unit I/F (22) EXT_P Function expansion unit I/F (12) RIO1 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (23) TP Touch panel I/F
(1)
(2)
(3)
(8)
(5)
(4)
(7)(6)
(10) (13)(11) (12) (14)
(15) (16) (18)(17) (19) (20)
(21)
(22)
Arrow A
A
(23)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
54IB-1501269-P
[LED]
No. Name Lamp state Details
(1) 24VIN
Lit (Green) 24VDC power is being supplied from the external power supply.
Not lit
The following may have caused an error: - No 24VDC-power supply from the external power supply. - Disconnection of fuse near DCIN connector. - Failure of LED.
(2) DCOUT
Lit (Green) Internal voltage is normally output.
Not lit
The followings may have caused an error: - No 24V-power supply from the external power supply. - Failure in any of the power output circuits. - Failure of LED or IC which helps turn the LED ON.
(3) LCDON
Lit (Green) 12VDC for the backlight of display unit is normally output.
Not lit The followings may have caused an error: - Failure of 12VDC output in control unit. - 24VDC input voltage is +20V or less.
(4) READY Lit (Green) Ready ON state.
Not lit Ready OFF state.
(5) ERR Lit (Red)
H/W is not operating properly. The followings may have caused an error: - Occurrence of NC watchdog error. - Failure of main CPU card.
Not lit H/W is operating properly.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
55 IB-1501269-P
4.6 Control Unit [E80]
4.6.1 FCU8-MU513 / FCU8-MU514
[Outline dimension]
[mm]
47
15 6
17 2.
4 17
3. 4
90 28
214.5 239.1
208 11 6
6
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
56IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
Refer to "General Specifications: Control Unit [M800S]" for details on the connectors.
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) USB_F Front-side USB memory I/F (13) RIO2 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (2) USB_B (14) MENUKEY Menu key I/F
(3) BL Display unit backlight I/F (15) ENC Encoder input 1ch (5V manual pulse generator input 2ch)
(4) SDC_F Front-side SD card I/F (16) SKIP SKIP input 8 points (5) SDC_B Back-side SD card I/F (17) SIO RS-232C communication 2ch (6) DCIN 24VDC input (18) LAN1 Ethernet communication (7) EMG External emergency stop input (19) LAN2 Ethernet communication
(8) OPTH1 High-speed optical servo communication (20) FG FG terminal
(10) BAT Battery I/F (21) LCD Display unit signal I/F (11) CJ71 Operation panel I/O unit I/F (22) EXT_P Function expansion unit I/F (12) RIO1 Remote I/O 2.0 communication
(1)
(2)
(3)
(8)
(5)
(4)
(7)(6)
(10) (13)(11) (12) (14)
(15) (16) (18)(17) (19) (20)
(21)
(22)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
57 IB-1501269-P
[LED]
No. Name Lamp state Details
(1) 24VIN
Lit (Green) 24VDC power is being supplied from the external power supply.
Not lit
The following may have caused an error: - No 24VDC-power supply from the external power supply. - Disconnection of fuse near DCIN connector. - Failure of LED.
(2) DCOUT
Lit (Green) Internal voltage is normally output.
Not lit
The followings may have caused an error: - No 24V-power supply from the external power supply. - Failure in any of the power output circuits. - Failure of LED or IC which helps turn the LED ON.
(3) LCDON
Lit (Green) 12VDC for the backlight of display unit is normally output.
Not lit The followings may have caused an error: - Failure of 12VDC output in control unit. - 24VDC input voltage is +20V or less.
(4) READY Lit (Green) Ready ON state.
Not lit Ready OFF state.
(5) ERR Lit (Red)
H/W is not operating properly. The followings may have caused an error: - Occurrence of NC watchdog error. - Failure of main CPU card.
Not lit H/W is operating properly.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
58IB-1501269-P
4.7 Display Unit [M800S]
4.7.1 10.4-type (FCU8-DU142-31/FCU8-DU141-31)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
290
22 0
9.5
[mm]
A
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
59 IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension]
0. 5
19 2
0. 3
20 6
0. 3
2760.3
20.2
(7) (7)
12 12
[mm] 290
277
20 7
22 0
2720.3
77
(7 )
(7 )
7 0.
2
4-C 2
4-M3
0.5
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension) (S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
60IB-1501269-P
4.7.2 15-type (FCU8-DU182-31/FCU8-DU181-31)
[Outline dimension: FCU8-DU182-31]
(Note) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
400
32 0
9.5
[mm]
A (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
61 IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension: FCU8-DU181-31]
(Note) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
400
32 0
9.5
[mm]
A
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
62IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension]
0. 5
1930.3
13 8
0. 3
30 2
0. 3
15 3
0. 3
1930.3
193.5
80.2 80.2
2 0.
2
(7) (7) 12
12
[mm]
a
a a a
a
a
aa aa
b
b b
b
b b
b
b
400
387
30 7
32 0
1990.3 1830.3
15 4
0. 3
15 3
0. 3
18
5
77
13 26
7
(7 )
(7 )
7 0.
2
12-C 2
8-M3
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
10 - 4 holes
screw
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
63 IB-1501269-P
4.7.3 Precautions
[Precautions for handling touchscreen] (1) Operate the touchscreen with fingers. The touchscreen does not react with nails. (2) The use of gloves, work gloves, etc. will have effects such as the deterioration of the operation feeling
depending on the material and thickness of the gloves. (3) The initialization process is performed for 3 seconds after the power is turned ON. Do not touch the
touchscreen with a finger, hold a palm over, put the conductive objects such as metals on, etc., during the initialization.
(4) If the surface of the touchscreen gets dirt, wipe it off with soft cloth. (5) Make sure to ground FG terminal of the control unit at one ground point. (Refer to "Installation: Connection of
Frame Ground (FG)".) Otherwise, the reaction and usability of the touchscreen will remarkably deteriorate. (6) Do not place a device which removes static electricity such as an ionizer. The static electricity-removing device
may worsen the response and usability of the touchscreen.
[Characteristic of liquid crystal display panels] As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Variation of liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
64IB-1501269-P
4.8 Display Unit [M80]
4.8.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-12)
[Outline dimension]
(Note 1) The 8.4-type display unit is incompatible with the touchscreen. (Note 2) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
260
20 0
9.5
[mm]
A
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
65 IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension]
0. 5
17 2
0. 3
18 6
0. 3
2460.3 20.2
(7) (7)
12 12
[mm] 260
247 18
7
20 0
2420.3 77
(7 )
(7 )
7 0.
2
4-C 2
4-M3
0.5
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension) (S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
66IB-1501269-P
4.8.2 10.4-type (FCU8-DU142-32/FCU8-DU141-32)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
290
22 0
9.5
[mm]
A
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
67 IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension]
0. 5
19 2
0. 3
20 6
0. 3
2760.3
20.2
(7) (7)
12 12
[mm] 290
277
20 7
22 0
2720.3
77
(7 )
(7 )
7 0.
2
4-C 2
4-M3
0.5
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension) (S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
68IB-1501269-P
4.8.3 15-type (FCU8-DU182-32/FCU8-DU181-32)
[Outline dimension: FCU8-DU182-32]
(Note) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
400
32 0
9.5
[mm]
A
Top
Bottom
(Space required for wiring)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
69 IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension: FCU8-DU181-32]
(Note) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
400
32 0
9.5
[mm]
A
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
70IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension]
0. 5
1930.3
13 8
0. 3
30 2
0. 3
15 3
0. 3
1930.3
193.5
80.2 80.2
2 0.
2
(7) (7) 12
12
[mm]
a
a a a
a
a
aa aa
b
b b
b
b b
b
b
400
387
30 7
32 0
1990.3 1830.3
15 4
0. 3
15 3
0. 3
18
5
77
13 26
7
(7 )
(7 )
7 0.
2
12-C 2
8-M3
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
10 - 4 holes
screw
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
71 IB-1501269-P
4.8.4 Precautions
[Precautions for handling touchscreen] (1) Operate the touchscreen with fingers. The touchscreen does not react with nails. (2) The use of gloves, work gloves, etc. will have effects such as the deterioration of the operation feeling
depending on the material and thickness of the gloves. (3) The initialization process is performed for 3 seconds after the power is turned ON. Do not touch the
touchscreen with a finger, hold a palm over, put the conductive objects such as metals on, etc., during the initialization.
(4) If the surface of the touchscreen gets dirt, wipe it off with soft cloth. (5) Make sure to ground FG terminal of the control unit at one ground point. (Refer to "Installation: Connection of
Frame Ground (FG)".) Otherwise, the reaction and usability of the touchscreen will remarkably deteriorate. (6) Do not place a device which removes static electricity such as an ionizer. The static electricity-removing device
may worsen the response and usability of the touchscreen.
[Characteristic of liquid crystal display panels] As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Variation of liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
72IB-1501269-P
4.9 Display Unit [E80]
4.9.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-13)
[Outline dimension]
(Note 1) The 8.4-type display unit is incompatible with the touchscreen. (Note 2) The figure above shows the state with the control unit mounted.
Option relay unit not mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX702 mounted
Option relay unit, FCU8-EX703 mounted
A (Space required for wiring) 110 114
260
20 0
9.5
[mm]
A
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
73 IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension]
4.9.2 Precautions
[Characteristic of liquid crystal display panels] As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Variation of liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.
0. 5
17 2
0. 3
18 6
0. 3
2460.3 20.2
(7) (7)
12 12
[mm] 260
247 18
7
20 0
2420.3 77
(7 )
(7 )
7 0.
2
4-C 2
4-M3
0.5
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension) (S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
74IB-1501269-P
4.10 Keyboard Unit (Note) Do not change the setting for the rotary switch mounted on the keyboard unit.
If the setting is changed, the keyboard will not work.
Type The initial value of the rotary switch FCU8-KB026 1 FCU8-KB028 3 FCU8-KB029 0 FCU8-KB041 2 FCU8-KB046 0 FCU8-KB047 0 FCU8-KB048 0 FCU8-KB083 A FCU8-KB024 5 FCU8-KB025 6
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
75 IB-1501269-P
4.10.1 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB026)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
140
20 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
18 7
17 3
0. 3
18 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
20 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
76IB-1501269-P
4.10.2 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB028)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
140
20 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
18 7
17 3
0. 3
18 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
20 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
77 IB-1501269-P
4.10.3 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB029)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
[mm]
260
14 0
9.5 110 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
2480.3 260
247
2460.3
0.5
12 7
11 3
0. 3
12 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
913 913
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2 10.2
4-M3
14 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
78IB-1501269-P
4.10.4 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB041)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
140
22 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
20 7
19 3
0. 3
20 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
22 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e) (Square hole
dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
79 IB-1501269-P
4.10.5 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB046)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
140
22 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
20 7
19 3
0. 3
20 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
22 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e) (Square hole
dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
80IB-1501269-P
4.10.6 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB047)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
290
16 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
2780.3
290
277
2760.3
0.5 14 7
13 3
0. 3
14 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
16 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
81 IB-1501269-P
4.10.7 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB048)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
[mm]
230
22 0
9.5 110 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
2180.3 230
217
2160.3
0.5
20 7
19 3
0. 3
20 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
913 913
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2
4-M3
22 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
82IB-1501269-P
4.10.8 Keyboard for 15-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB083)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
400
14 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring) Top
Bottom
[mm]
200.50.3
400
387
1930.3
193.5
12 7
11 3
0. 3
12 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13 9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
6-M3
14 0
187.50.3 1930.3
12 8
0. 3
(6 )
6.50.2 6.50.2
(6 ) 3. 5
3. 5
4 4
9 18
1 0.
2
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
8 - 4
holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
83 IB-1501269-P
4.10.9 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB024)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
140
20 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
18 7
17 3
0. 3
18 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
20 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
84IB-1501269-P
4.10.10 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB025)
[Outline dimension]
(Note) The above side view shows the state with the operation panel I/O unit mounted.
[Panel cut dimension]
140
20 0
9.5
[mm]
110
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
18 7
17 3
0. 3
18 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
9 13
9 13
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2
10.2 4-M3
20 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
85 IB-1501269-P
4.11 Operation Panel I/O Unit 4.11.1 List of Units
(Note 1) The form of the CG31/CG32/CG35/CG36 connectors on FCU8-DX731 are the same as that of CJ38/CJ40/ CJ42 connectors on other units. Be careful not to connect to a wrong connector. See the descriptions below for more specific explanation on connections.
(Note 2) The connection method of DO (CG32/CG34) of FCU8-DX834 is different from other operation panel I/O units. Be careful not to connect to a wrong connector. See the descriptions mentioned in the later section for more specific explanation on connections.
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [48 points] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX731 (Note 1)
Base card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) AO: 1 point Manual pulse generator input: 2ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1, 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 2, 4 to 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [96 points] DO Source output [64 points] FCU8-DX750 Base card
RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type (200mA/point) Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 4 to 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [96 points] DO Source output [96 points] FCU8-DX760
Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 96-points source type (200mA/point) Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 4, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 5, 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [96 points] DO Source output [64 points] AI Analog input [1 point] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX761 Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 96-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type (200mA/point) AI: 1 point AO: 1 point Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Control unit I/F Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 5, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [64 points] Scan input [64 points] Scan output [64 points]
FCU8-DX834 (Note 2)
Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 terminator connector (R2-TM)
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 64-points source type (200mA/point) Scan input: 64 points Scan output: 64 points Manual pulse generator input: 3ch Keyboard unit I/F Remote I/O 2.0 I/F RIO occupied stations (fixed): 1 to 4, 7 to 14, 20 to 22 RIO extensible stations: 5, 6, 15 to 19, 23 to 64
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
86IB-1501269-P
4.11.2 FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 / FCU8-DX834
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX731]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX750]
[mm]
116
17 9
99 (Space required for wiring)
[mm]
116
17 9
99 (Space required for wiring)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
87 IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX760]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX761]
[mm]
116 17
9 99 (Space required for wiring)
[mm]
116
17 9
99 (Space required for wiring)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
88IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX834]
[mm]
116
17 9
99 (Space required for wiring)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
89 IB-1501269-P
[Installation dimension: FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 / FCU8-DX834]
(Note) The unit thickness of the fixed part with screws is 16.6mm. Select the fixing screws having the length suitable for the thickness.
17 1
0. 3
(5) (4
) 1060.3
(4 )
(5)
[mm]
4-M3 screw
116 (Unit outline) 17
9 (U
ni t o
ut lin
e)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
90IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(Note) The CJ71 connector of FCU8-DX834 is not used.
FCU8-DX731 FCU8-DX750 FCU8-DX760
FCU8-DX761 FCU8-DX834
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) CG31 Machine signal input (12) MPG Manual pulse generator input (2) CG32 Machine signal output (13) RIO3EXT Remote I/O 2.0 communication (3) CG33 Machine signal input (14) RIO3 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (4) CG34 Machine signal output (15) CJ71 Control unit I/F (5) CG35 Machine signal input (16) NCKB Keyboard I/F (6) CG36 Machine signal output (17) AO Analog output
(7) CJ37 Machine signal input (18) AIO Analog input Analog output
(8) CJ38 Machine signal output (19) OPKB Scan input Scan output
(9) CJ39 Machine signal input (20) DCIN 24VDC input (10) CJ40 Machine signal output (21) FG FG terminal (11) CJ42 Machine signal output
(12)
(13)
(15)
(16)
(2)
(6)
(21)
(17)
(1)
(5)
(12)
(13)
(15)
(9)
(16)
(8)
(10)
(7)
(21)
(12)
(13)
(15)
(9)
(16)
(8)
(10)
(7)
(21)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(15)
(9)
(16)
(8)
(10)
(7)
(21)(18)(21)
(12)
(13)
(16)
(2)
(4)
(21)
(1)
(3) (19)
(14)
(20)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
91 IB-1501269-P
(1) CG31 (Machine signal input) Digital input 32 points (1st station)
(3) CG33 (Machine signal input) Digital input 32 points (2nd station)
(5) CG35 (Machine signal input) Digital input 32 points (3rd station)
The input/output assignment is modifiable using a parameter. Refer to "17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment" for details.
Connector : XG4M-4030 / 7940-6500SC Strain relief : XG4T-4004 / 3448-7940 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
12V, 5V, and 3.3V output from connectors are to supply the power for dedicated peripheral devices. Do not use for other equipment to supply the power since we do not guarantee the NC operation by voltage down or noise sneaking.
CG31 CG33 CG35 B A B A B A
20 I X200 20 I X210 20 I X220 20 I X230 20 I X240 20 I X250 19 I X201 19 I X211 19 I X221 19 I X231 19 I X241 19 I X251 18 I X202 18 I X212 18 I X222 18 I X232 18 I X242 18 I X252 17 I X203 17 I X213 17 I X223 17 I X233 17 I X243 17 I X253 16 I X204 16 I X214 16 I X224 16 I X234 16 I X244 16 I X254 15 I X205 15 I X215 15 I X225 15 I X235 15 I X245 15 I X255 14 I X206 14 I X216 14 I X226 14 I X236 14 I X246 14 I X256 13 I X207 13 I X217 13 I X227 13 I X237 13 I X247 13 I X257 12 I X208 12 I X218 12 I X228 12 I X238 12 I X248 12 I X258 11 I X209 11 I X219 11 I X229 11 I X239 11 I X249 11 I X259 10 I X20A 10 I X21A 10 I X22A 10 I X23A 10 I X24A 10 I X25A 9 I X20B 9 I X21B 9 I X22B 9 I X23B 9 I X24B 9 I X25B 8 I X20C 8 I X21C 8 I X22C 8 I X23C 8 I X24C 8 I X25C 7 I X20D 7 I X21D 7 I X22D 7 I X23D 7 I X24D 7 I X25D 6 I X20E 6 I X21E 6 I X22E 6 I X23E 6 I X24E 6 I X25E 5 I X20F 5 I X21F 5 I X22F 5 I X23F 5 I X24F 5 I X25F 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 2 +24V 2 0V 2 +24V 2 0V 2 +24V 2 0V 1 +24V 1 0V 1 +24V 1 0V 1 +24V 1 0V
B1 B20
A1 A20
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
92IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Both 24V common and 0V common connections are allowed in the digital signal input circuit. Follow the wiring diagram below for each type.
Input circuit
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
[FCU8-DX834]
X200 X21F
0V
FG
3.3k
DICOM 0V
FG
3.3k
DICOM
CG31/CG35CG31/CG35
X240 X25F
X200 X21F X240 X25F24VDC(+)
24V common
Control circuit
Stabilized power supply
External contact
24VDC(+)
0V common
Stabilized power supply
External contact
Control circuit
X200
X23F
0V
FG
5k
DICOM
X200
X23F
0V
FG
5k
DICOM
24VDC(+)
24V common
Control circuit
Stabilized power supply
External contact
24VDC(+)
0V common
Stabilized power supply
External contact
Control circuit
CG31/CG33CG31/CG33
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
93 IB-1501269-P
Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
[FCU8-DX834]
(*1) Note that "40 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
(E) : External signal, (I):Internal signal
(Note) Set the number of DI points that are simultaneously turned ON to be less than half of the total points. If many points are set to be simultaneously turned ON, operation panel I/O unit may be deteriorated due to the heat.
24V common 0V common 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 5mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 1.2mA or less 5 Input resistance 3.3k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1)
8 Input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
24V common 0V common 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 3mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20.2V or more, 25.2V or less 3.8V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 0.7mA or less 5 Input resistance 5k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1)
8 Input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Connection to 24V common input Connection to 0V common input
T1T1
T2
GND
+24V
T4T3
(E)
(I)
T1T1
T2
T4T3
GND
+24V
(E)
(I)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
94IB-1501269-P
(2) CG32 (Machine signal output) Digital output 32 points (1st station)
(4) CG34 (Machine signal output) Digital output 32 points (2nd station)
(6) CG36 (Machine signal output) Digital output 16 points (3rd station)
(8) CJ38 (Machine signal output) Digital output 32 points (1st station)
(10) CJ40 (Machine signal output) Digital output 32 points (2nd station)
(11) CJ42 (Machine signal output) Digital output 32 points (4th station)
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
CG32 CG36 B A B A
20 O Y200 20 O Y210 20 O Y240 20 NC 19 O Y201 19 O Y211 19 O Y241 19 NC 18 O Y202 18 O Y212 18 O Y242 18 NC 17 O Y203 17 O Y213 17 O Y243 17 NC 16 O Y204 16 O Y214 16 O Y244 16 NC 15 O Y205 15 O Y215 15 O Y245 15 NC 14 O Y206 14 O Y216 14 O Y246 14 NC 13 O Y207 13 O Y217 13 O Y247 13 NC 12 O Y208 12 O Y218 12 O Y248 12 NC 11 O Y209 11 O Y219 11 O Y249 11 NC 10 O Y20A 10 O Y21A 10 O Y24A 10 NC 9 O Y20B 9 O Y21B 9 O Y24B 9 NC 8 O Y20C 8 O Y21C 8 O Y24C 8 NC 7 O Y20D 7 O Y21D 7 O Y24D 7 NC 6 O Y20E 6 O Y21E 6 O Y24E 6 NC 5 O Y20F 5 O Y21F 5 O Y24F 5 NC 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 2 DOCOM 2 0V 2 DOCOM 2 0V 1 DOCOM 1 0V 1 DOCOM 1 0V
B1 B20
A1 A20
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
95 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX834]
The input/output assignment is modifiable using a parameter. Refer to "17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment" for details.
Connector : XG4M-4030 / 7940-6500SC Strain relief : XG4T-4004 / 3448-7940 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
CJ38 CJ40 CJ42 B A B A B A
20 O Y200 20 O Y210 20 O Y220 20 O Y230 20 O Y260 20 O Y270 19 O Y201 19 O Y211 19 O Y221 19 O Y231 19 O Y261 19 O Y271 18 O Y202 18 O Y212 18 O Y222 18 O Y232 18 O Y262 18 O Y272 17 O Y203 17 O Y213 17 O Y223 17 O Y233 17 O Y263 17 O Y273 16 O Y204 16 O Y214 16 O Y224 16 O Y234 16 O Y264 16 O Y274 15 O Y205 15 O Y215 15 O Y225 15 O Y235 15 O Y265 15 O Y275 14 O Y206 14 O Y216 14 O Y226 14 O Y236 14 O Y266 14 O Y276 13 O Y207 13 O Y217 13 O Y227 13 O Y237 13 O Y267 13 O Y277 12 O Y208 12 O Y218 12 O Y228 12 O Y238 12 O Y268 12 O Y278 11 O Y209 11 O Y219 11 O Y229 11 O Y239 11 O Y269 11 O Y279 10 O Y20A 10 O Y21A 10 O Y22A 10 O Y23A 10 O Y26A 10 O Y27A 9 O Y20B 9 O Y21B 9 O Y22B 9 O Y23B 9 O Y26B 9 O Y27B 8 O Y20C 8 O Y21C 8 O Y22C 8 O Y23C 8 O Y26C 8 O Y27C 7 O Y20D 7 O Y21D 7 O Y22D 7 O Y23D 7 O Y26D 7 O Y27D 6 O Y20E 6 O Y21E 6 O Y22E 6 O Y23E 6 O Y26E 6 O Y27E 5 O Y20F 5 O Y21F 5 O Y22F 5 O Y23F 5 O Y26F 5 O Y27F 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 4 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 3 DOCOM 2 DOCOM 2 0V 2 DOCOM 2 0V 2 DOCOM 2 0V 1 DOCOM 1 0V 1 DOCOM 1 0V 1 DOCOM 1 0V
CG32 CG34 B A B A
20 O Y200 20 O Y210 20 O Y220 20 O Y230 19 O Y201 19 O Y211 19 O Y221 19 O Y231 18 O Y202 18 O Y212 18 O Y222 18 O Y232 17 O Y203 17 O Y213 17 O Y223 17 O Y233 16 O Y204 16 O Y214 16 O Y224 16 O Y234 15 O Y205 15 O Y215 15 O Y225 15 O Y235 14 O Y206 14 O Y216 14 O Y226 14 O Y236 13 O Y207 13 O Y217 13 O Y227 13 O Y237 12 O Y208 12 O Y218 12 O Y228 12 O Y238 11 O Y209 11 O Y219 11 O Y229 11 O Y239 10 O Y20A 10 O Y21A 10 O Y22A 10 O Y23A 9 O Y20B 9 O Y21B 9 O Y22B 9 O Y23B 8 O Y20C 8 O Y21C 8 O Y22C 8 O Y23C 7 O Y20D 7 O Y21D 7 O Y22D 7 O Y23D 6 O Y20E 6 O Y21E 6 O Y22E 6 O Y23E 5 O Y20F 5 O Y21F 5 O Y22F 5 O Y23F 4 +24V 4 +24V 4 +24V 4 +24V 3 +24V 3 +24V 3 +24V 3 +24V 2 +24V 2 0V 2 +24V 2 0V 1 +24V 1 0V 1 +24V 1 0V
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
96IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal output circuit Use within the specification ranges shown below.
Output circuit
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
[FCU8-DX834]
Output conditions
(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance 100V or more, twice or more the load current) in parallel to the load.
Insulation method Non-insulation Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current
0.2A/point [Total output current of whole unit] - For FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX761/DX834: 3.8A or less - For FCU8-DX760: 5.7A or less
Output delay time 40s
DOCOM
0V
0V
FG Y200 Y23F
CG32/CG36/CJ38/CJ40/CJ42
Y260 Y27F
Y240 Y24F
24VDC(+)
Control circuit
Stabilized power supply
Load
Source output
Y200
Y23F
CG32/CG34
24VDC
Load
Control circuit
Source output
Y
Source output
Inductive load
Diode
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
97 IB-1501269-P
(Note 2) When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor (R=150) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. Make sure that the current is less than the maximum output current including the momentary current.
(Note 3) Always keep the total sum output current of each Y200 to Y207, Y208 to Y20F, Y210 to Y217, Y218 to Y21F, Y220 to Y227, Y228 to Y22F, Y230 to Y237, Y238 to Y23F, Y240 to Y247, Y248 to Y24F, Y260 to Y267, Y268 to Y26F, Y270 to Y277, and Y278 to Y27F less than 0.8A.
CAUTION 1. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load to prevent a
counter-electromotive force.
2. When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents.
Y
Source output
Load Resistor
Y200 Y201 Y202 Y203 Y204 Y205 Y206 Y207 Y208 Y209 Y20A Y20B Y20C Y20D Y20E Y20F
Y210 Y211 Y212 Y213 Y214 Y215 Y216 Y217 Y218 Y219 Y21A Y21B Y21C Y21D Y21E Y21F
Y220 Y221 Y222 Y223 Y224 Y225 Y226 Y227 Y228 Y229 Y22A Y22B Y22C Y22D Y22E Y22F
Y230 Y231 Y232 Y233 Y234 Y235 Y236 Y237 Y238 Y239 Y23A Y23B Y23C Y23D Y23E Y23F
Y240 Y241 Y242 Y243 Y244 Y245 Y246 Y247 Y248 Y249 Y24A Y24B Y24C Y24D Y24E Y24F
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 3.8A or less
0.2A or less per point
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Y260 Y261 Y262 Y263 Y264 Y265 Y266 Y267 Y268 Y269 Y26A Y26B Y26C Y26D Y26E Y26F
Y270 Y271 Y272 Y273 Y274 Y275 Y276 Y277 Y278 Y279 Y27A Y27B Y27C Y27D Y27E Y27F
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 1.9A or less
0.2A or less per point
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
98IB-1501269-P
(7) CJ37 (Machine signal input) Digital input 48 points (1st and 2nd stations)
(9) CJ39 (Machine signal input) Digital input 48 points (2nd and 3rd stations)
The input/output assignment is modifiable using a parameter. Refer to "17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment" for details.
Connector : XG4M-5030 / 7950-6500SC Strain relief : XG4T-5004 / 3448-7950 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
CJ37 CJ39 B A B A
25 I X200 25 I X218 25 I X230 25 I X248 24 I X201 24 I X219 24 I X231 24 I X249 23 I X202 23 I X21A 23 I X232 23 I X24A 22 I X203 22 I X21B 22 I X233 22 I X24B 21 I X204 21 I X21C 21 I X234 21 I X24C 20 I X205 20 I X21D 20 I X235 20 I X24D 19 I X206 19 I X21E 19 I X236 19 I X24E 18 I X207 18 I X21F 18 I X237 18 I X24F 17 I X208 17 I X220 17 I X238 17 I X250 16 I X209 16 I X221 16 I X239 16 I X251 15 I X20A 15 I X222 15 I X23A 15 I X252 14 I X20B 14 I X223 14 I X23B 14 I X253 13 I X20C 13 I X224 13 I X23C 13 I X254 12 I X20D 12 I X225 12 I X23D 12 I X255 11 I X20E 11 I X226 11 I X23E 11 I X256 10 I X20F 10 I X227 10 I X23F 10 I X257 9 I X210 9 I X228 9 I X240 9 I X258 8 I X211 8 I X229 8 I X241 8 I X259 7 I X212 7 I X22A 7 I X242 7 I X25A 6 I X213 6 I X22B 6 I X243 6 I X25B 5 I X214 5 I X22C 5 I X244 5 I X25C 4 I X215 4 I X22D 4 I X245 4 I X25D 3 I X216 3 I X22E 3 I X246 3 I X25E 2 I X217 2 I X22F 2 I X247 2 I X25F 1 DICOM 1 DICOM 1 DICOM 1 DICOM
A25
B25
A1
B1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
99 IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Both 24V common and 0V common connections are allowed in the digital signal input circuit. Follow the wiring diagram below for each type.
Input circuit
Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.
(*1) Note that "40 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
(E) : External signal, (I):Internal signal
(Note) Set the number of DI points that are simultaneously turned ON to be less than half of the total points. If many points are set to be simultaneously turned ON, operation panel I/O unit may be deteriorated due to the heat.
24V common 0V common 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 3mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20.2V or more, 25.2V or less 3.8V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 0.7mA or less 5 Input resistance 5k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1)
8 Input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Connection to 24V common input Connection to 0V common input
X200
X25F
0V
FG
5k
DICOM
X200
X25F
0V
FG
5k
DICOM
24VDC(+)
24V common
Control circuit
Stabilized power supply
External contact
24VDC(+)
0V common
Stabilized power supply
External contact
Control circuit
CJ37/CJ39CJ37/CJ39
T1T1
T2
GND
+24V
T4T3
(E)
(I)
T1T1
T2
T4T3
GND
+24V
(E)
(I)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
100IB-1501269-P
(12) MPG (Manual pulse generator input) 5V manual pulse generator and 12V manual pulse generator can be connected to this connector.
[FCU8-DX731]
[FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
1 0V 11 0V 2 NC 12 NC 3 I HA2A 13 I HA2B 4 I HA1A 14 I HA1B 5 0V 15 0V 6 O +12V 16 O +12V 7 NC 17 NC 8 NC 18 NC 9 NC 19 NC
10 O +5V 20 O +5V
1 0V 11 0V 2 I HA3A 12 I HA3B 3 I HA2A 13 I HA2B 4 I HA1A 14 I HA1B 5 0V 15 0V 6 O +12V 16 O +12V 7 NC 17 NC 8 NC 18 NC 9 O +12V 19 O +5V
10 O +5V 20 O +5V
10 1
20 11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
101 IB-1501269-P
a.b.c.d.e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 T/10 T: A or B phase cycle
5V manual pulse generator 12V manual pulse generator
Number of pulse phases Two phases (A phase, B phase, a phase difference 90 degrees) (Refer to the waveform below.)
Signal output of manual pulse generator Open collector output
Signal voltage H level 3.5V to 5.25V L level 0V to 0.5V
Power supply voltage 5VDC10% 12VDC10% Current consumption 100mA or less Number of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev,100 pulse/rev
Input frequency (rotation speed) 1kHz or less (2400r/min or less for 25pluse/rev, 600r/min or less for 100pluse/ rev)
Cable length 20m or less 50m or less
T
b da c e
A(B) phase
B(A) phase
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
102IB-1501269-P
(a) 5V manual pulse generator
(Note) No HA3A and HA3B in FCU8-DX731.
(b) 12V manual pulse generator
(Note) No HA3A and HA3B in FCU8-DX731.
HA1A HA2A HA3A
HA1B HA2B HA3B
+5V
0V
5V
+5V
+5V 0V
0V
0V
MPG
B A
5V 0V
470
470 Control
circuit
B A
MPG
HA1A HA2A HA3A
HA1B HA2B HA3B
+12V
0V
+5V
+5V
+12V 0V
0V
0V
12V 0V
470
470 Control
circuit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
103 IB-1501269-P
(13) RIO3EXT (Remote I/O 2.0 communication) (14) RIO3 (Remote I/O 2.0 communication)
Connector : 1-1318119-3 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Refer to the following chart for the maximum number of connecting stations and I/O points.
(Note 1) Refer to the section "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" for the number of occupying stations and I/ O points of remote I/O units.
(15) CJ71 (Control unit I/F)
Connector : 2-1318119-4 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
A B 1 I/O TXRXD 1 I/O TXRXD* 2 NC 2 0V 3 FG 3 NC
Operation panel I/O unit type Max. number of stations (RIO3EXT connection)
Max. number of I/O points (RIO3EXT connection)
FCU8-DX731 53 stations
(2nd, 4th to 6th, 13th to 19th, and 23rd to 64th stations can be used)
1696 points/ 1696 points
FCU8-DX750 52 stations
(4th to 6th, 13th to 19th, and 23rd to 64th stations can be used)
1664 points/ 1664 points
FCU8-DX760 51 stations
(5th, 6th, 13th to 19th, and 23rd to 64th stations can be used)
1632 points/ 1632 points
FCU8-DX761 50 stations
(6th, 13th to 19th, and 23rd to 64th stations can be used)
1600 points/ 1600 points
FCU8-DX834 49 stations
(5th, 6th, 15th to 19th, and 23rd to 64th stations can be used)
1568 points/ 1568 points
A1 I/O TXRXD B1 I/O TXRXD* A2 - +5V B2 - +3.3V A3 - - B3 - 0V A4 - FG B4 - 0V
1 2 3
B A
X
1 2 3 4
B A
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
104IB-1501269-P
(16) NCKB (Keyboard I/F)
(17) AO (Analog output) Analog output can be connected to this connector.
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-56F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-56S0-008-F for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
(a) Outline of analog signal output circuit
Output circuit
Output conditions
1 0V 11 0V 2 NC 12 NC 3 NC 13 NC 4 NC 14 NC 5 0V 15 0V 6 NC 16 NC 7 O AO 17 NC 8 NC 18 NC 9 NC 19 NC
10 NC 20 NC
Analog output voltage -10 to 10V(5%) Resolution 10V / 4095 = 2.44mV Load conditions External load resistance value 10k or more Output resistance value 500
10 1
20 11
DAC
AO
AO
0V
500Load
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
105 IB-1501269-P
(18) AIO (Analog input, Analog output) Analog input and analog output can be connected to this connector.
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-56F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-56S0-008-F for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
1 0V 11 0V 2 I AI0 12 NC 3 NC 13 NC 4 NC 14 NC 5 0V 15 0V 6 NC 16 NC 7 O AO 17 NC 8 NC 18 NC 9 0V 19 NC
10 NC 20 NC
10 1
20 11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
106IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of analog signal input circuit
Input circuit
Input conditions
(Note 1) This indicates the input voltage which must not exceeded even in an instant. (Note 2) Except when the accuracy is affected by the noise.
(b) Outline of analog signal output circuit
Output circuit
Output conditions
Analog input voltage -10 to 10V Max. input rating (Note 1) 15V
Resolution |-10 +10V| / 4095 = 4.88mV Repeatability Within 25mV (Note 2) Tolerance 0.35V
Analog output voltage -10 to 10V(5%) Resolution 10V / 4095 = 2.44mV Load conditions External load resistance value 10k or more Output resistance value 500
ADC AIO
AI
0V
DAC
AIO
AO
0V
500Load
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
107 IB-1501269-P
(19) OPKB (Scan input, Scan output)
Connector : XG4M-5030 / 7950-6500SC Strain relief : XG4T-5004 / 3448-7950 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
OPKB B A
25 0V 25 0V 24 O LC3B 24 O LC3A 23 O LC2B 23 O LC2A 22 O LC1B 22 O LC1A 21 O LC0B 21 O LC0A 20 I LD7B* 20 I LD7A* 19 I LD6B* 19 I LD6A* 18 I LD5B* 18 I LD5A* 17 I LD4B* 17 I LD4A* 16 I LD3B* 16 I LD3A* 15 I LD2B* 15 I LD2A* 14 I LD1B* 14 I LD1A* 13 I LD0B* 13 I LD0A* 12 0V 12 NC 11 NC 11 NC 10 NC 10 O NC 9 O KYC7* 9 O KYC6* 8 O KYC5* 8 O KYC4* 7 O KYC3* 7 O KYC2* 6 O KYC1* 6 O KYC0* 5 I KYD7* 5 I KYD6* 4 I KYD5* 4 I KYD4* 3 I KYD3* 3 I KYD2* 2 I KYD1* 2 I KYD0* 1 NC 1 0V
A25
B25
A1
B1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
108IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of scan input circuit
Input circuit
Input conditions
(*1) Note that "11.68 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
The common signals are changed over with scan input as shown in the following drawing. Key input data can be received when the common signal is LOW. The common signal changeover cycle is 11.68ms, but the input signal will not be recognized unless it is held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer.
(Note) To perform a scan input, connect a sneak path prevention diode as illustrated below. Input signals may not be read correctly without the sneak path prevention diode.
1 Number of points 64 points 2 Configuration Matrix of 8 common signals 8 data signals 3 Rated voltage 5 VDC 4 Minimum applicable load 1.4 mA per point 5 Input signal holding time 11.68 ms or more (*1)
OPKB
0V
: :
KYC0*
KYC1*
KYC2* : :
5V
: :
: :
KYD0*
KYD1*
KYD2* : :
Control circuit
KYC0*
KYC1*
KYC2*
KYC3*
KYC4*
KYC5*
KYC6*
KYC7*
11.68ms 1.46ms
KYC0* - KYC7*
KYD0* - KYD7*
Sneak path prevention diode
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
109 IB-1501269-P
(b) Outline of scan output circuit
Output circuit
Output conditions
The common signals are switched over with scan output as shown in the following drawing. The LED lights only when the common signal is High. As the common signal, four signals are switched in order, and LED lights once every 5.84 ms for 1.28 ms.
1 Number of points 64 points
2 Configuration Matrix of 4 common signals 4 data signals + 4 common signals 4 data signals
3 Rated voltage 5 VDC 4 Maximum output current 23 mA per point
5V
0V
: :
: :
OPKB
LC0A
LC1A
LC2A
LD0A*
LD1A*
LD2A*
: :
: :
100 Control circuit
LC0A
LC1A
LC2A
LC3A
LC0B
LC1B
LC2B
LC3B
5.84ms 1.28ms
5.84ms 1.28ms
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
110IB-1501269-P
(20) DCIN (24VDC input)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(a) Specifications of power supply Consider the following characteristics when selecting the stabilized power supply (prepared by machine tool builder). Use a power supply that complies with CE Marking or that follows the safety standards given below.
[Stabilized power supply selection items]
[Standards]
(Note) 24VDC voltage may drop instantaneously due to rush current at the beginning of 24V power supply to the operation panel I/O unit. The level of voltage drop depends on the capacity of the power supply. Do not share the power supply with the devices that have alarms to warn the voltage drop.
(21) FG (FG terminal)
1 I +24V 2 0V 3 FG
Item Standard setting
Output Voltage fluctuation 5% or less of 24VDC Ripple noise 200mV (P-P)
Power capacity Calculate the current value as a reference of maximum current consumption for the unit which uses the power supply.
Output holding time 20ms Overcurrent protection Required
Safety Standards UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 234 approved, IEC950 compliant Noise Terminal Voltage FCC Class A, VCCI Class A High Harmonics Current Restrictions IEC61000-3-2
CAUTION 1. Using a stabilized power supply without overcurrent protection may cause the unit's failure due to miswiring of
24V.
1 3
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
111 IB-1501269-P
[LED]
FCU8-DX731 FCU8-DX750 FCU8-DX760
FCU8-DX761 FCU8-DX834
No. Name Function Color Status
Details NormalAt fault
(1) FUSE Fuse status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a fuse has been blown out.
(2) DOCOM Energization status of 24VDC input (DOCOM) of CG32/CG36/CJ38/CJ40 connector
Green Lit Not lit Lit when a current is applied.
(3) EMG Emergency stop input status Red Not lit Lit Lit when an emergency stop has occurred.
(4) 24VDCIN Energization status of 24VDC input of DCIN connector Green Lit Not lit Lit when a current is applied.
(5) 5VIN 5V power supply circuit status Green Lit Not lit Lit when the circuit is normally operated. (6) 3VIN 3.3V power supply circuit status Green Lit Not lit Lit when the circuit is normally operated. (7) 12VON 12V power supply circuit status Green Lit Not lit Lit when the circuit is normally operated.
(8) ALM1 RIO communication error Red Not lit Lit Lit when RIO communication error has occurred.
(9) ALM2 RIO communication error Red Not lit Lit Lit when RIO communication error has occurred.
(10) ALM3 RIO communication error Red Not lit Lit Lit when RIO communication error has occurred.
(11) ALM4 RIO communication error Red Not lit Lit Lit when RIO communication error has occurred.
(12) FUSE2 Fuse status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a fuse has been blown out.
(13) DOCOM2 Energization status of 24VDC input (DOCOM) of CJ42 connector Green Lit Not lit Lit when a current is applied.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(8)
(1)
(2) (5)
(7)
(6)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(1)
(2) (5)
(7)
(6)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(12)
(1)
(2) (5)
(7)
(6)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(1)
(2) (5)
(7)
(6)
(10)
(8) (3)
(11)
(9)
(4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
112IB-1501269-P
4.12 Remote I/O Unit
Types of signals described on the list of units can be input/output from the remote I/O unit (FCU8-DXxxx) according to the type and No. of contacts. Remote I/O units are used by being connected to the control unit or the operation panel I/O unit. Multiple remote I/O units can be used as long as the total number of occupied stations is 64 or less.
(Note) The maximum connectable number of remote I/O units is 32.
4.12.1 List of Units
Classification Type Components Remarks
DI 24V/0V common input [32 points] DO Source output [32 points] FCU8-DX220 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type Do: 32-points source type (200mA/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 24V/0V common input [64 points] DO Source output [48 points] FCU8-DX230 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
DI 24V/0V common input DO Source output [48 points] AO Analog output [1 point]
FCU8-DX231 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 64-points 24V/0V common type DO: 48-points source type (200mA/point) AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 2
AI Analog input [4 points] AO Analog output [1 point] FCU8-DX202 Base card
RIO 2.0 connector set
AI : 4 points AO: 1 point Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 0V common input [16 points] DO Source output (large capacity) [8 points]
FCU8-DX213 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 16-points 0V common type (3mA/point) DO: 8-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
DI 0V common input [16 points] DO Source output (large capacity) [8 points]
FCU8-DX213-1 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 16-points 0V common type (9mA/point) DO: 8-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 1
Safety DI 0V common input [8 points] Safety DO Source output (large capacity) [4 points]
FCU8-DX654 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Safety DI: 8-points 0V common type (3mA/point) Safety DO: 4-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
Safety DI 0V common input [8 points] Safety DO Source output (large capacity) [4 points]
FCU8-DX654-1 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Safety DI: 8-points 0V common type (9mA/point) Safety DO: 4-points source type (2A/point) Number of occupied stations: 2
DI 24V/0V common input [32points] DO Source output [32 points] Safety DI 0V common input [8 points] (Note 1) Safety relay output [4 points] (Note 2)
FCU8-DX651 Base card Add-on card RIO 2.0 connector set
DI: 32-points 24V/0V common type Do: 32-points source type (200mA/point) Safety DI: 8-points 0V common type Safety relay: 4-points (non-voltage contact) Relay contact welding detection Number of occupied stations: 3 (Note 1) Safety DI uses 16 points of terminal because of the duplication wiring. (Note 2) Safety relay output uses 8 points of terminal because of the duplication wiring.
Thermistor input [12 points] FCU8-DX408 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Thermistor input: 12 points Number of occupied stations: 3
Multi-analog input [4 points] (Note 3) FCU8-DX409 Base card RIO 2.0 connector set
Multi-analog input: 4 points (Note 3) Voltage input, current input, thermocouple input and resistance temperature detector input are selected for each CH. Number of occupied stations: 4
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
113 IB-1501269-P
4.12.2 FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX651/ FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX220]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX230] (S
pa ce
re qu
ire d
a bo
ve th
e un
it) (S
pa ce
re qu
ire d
b el
ow th
e un
it)
(Space required for
wiring)
Top
Bottom
40
16 8
2. 5
45 115
4
[mm]
30 30
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it)
(Space required for
wiring)
Top
Bottom
40
16 8
2. 5
45 115
4
[mm]
30 30
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
114IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX231]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX202]
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it)
(Space required for
wiring)
Top
Bottom
40 16
8 2.
5 45 115
4 [mm]
30 30
40
16 8
2. 5
115
4
[mm]
(Space required for wiring)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it)
Top
Bottom
80 30
30
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
115 IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX213]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX213-1]
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it)
(Space required for
wiring)
Top
Bottom
40 16
8 2.
5 45 115
4 [mm]
30 30
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it) (Space
required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
40
16 8
2. 5
45 115
4
[mm] 30
30
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
116IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX654]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX654-1]
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it)
(Space required for
wiring)
Top
Bottom
40 16
8 2.
5 45 115
4 [mm]
30 30
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d a
bo ve
th e
un it)
(S pa
ce re
qu ire
d b
el ow
th e
un it)
(Space required for
wiring)
Top
Bottom
40
16 8
2. 5
45 115
4
[mm]
30 30
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
117 IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX651]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX408]
100 16
8 115
[mm] 45
2. 5
4 4
(Space required for
wiring) Top
Bottom
(Space required for
wiring)Top
Bottom
40
16 8
2. 5
45 109
4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
118IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-DX409]
(Space required for
wiring)Top
Bottom
40 16
8 2.
5 45 115
4 [mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
119 IB-1501269-P
[Installation dimension : FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409]
[Installation dimension : FCU8-DX651]
[mm]
15 6
0.
2
6
6
(Unit outline) 40
16 8
2-M5 Screw
4 (U
ni t o
ut lin
e) (U
ni t o
ut lin
e)
[mm]
15 6
0.
2 4
16 8
88 0.2 100
6
6
4
3-M5 Screw
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Unit outline)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
120IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
FCU8-DX220 FCU8-DX230 / DX231 FCU8-DX202 FCU8-DX213 / DX213-1 FCU8-DX654 / DX654-1
FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409 FCU8-DX651
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) CJ31 Machine signal input (12) SDO2 Safety relay output (2) CJ32 Machine signal output (13) RIO1 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (3) CJ33 Machine signal input (14) RIO2 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (4) CJ34 Machine signal output (15) DCIN 24VDC input (5) CJ35 Machine signal input (16) DCOUT 24VDC output (6) CJ36 Machine signal output (17) FG FG terminal (7) SDI Safety machine signal input (18) FG FG terminal (M4 screw)
(8) SDO Safety machine signal output (19) AIO1 Analog input Analog output
(9) SDI1 Safety DI input (20) THERMISTOR Thermistor input (10) SDI2 Safety DI input (21) AI Multi-analog input (11) SDO1 Safety relay output
No. Switch name Function (s1)
STATION No. Station No. group setting switch
(s2) Station No. setting switch (s3) Station No. setting switch
(1)
(2)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(19)
(5)
(6)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(7)
(8)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(13)
(15)
(14)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(20)
(17)
(15)
(14)
(21)
(s2) (s1)
(13)
(9) (11)
(13) (15) (18)(2)(1)
(10) (12)
(14)(s3)
(16)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
121 IB-1501269-P
(1) CJ31 (Machine signal input) (3) CJ33 (Machine signal input)
Connector : XG4M-4030 / 7940-6500SC Strain relief : XG4T-4004 / 3448-7940 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
12V, 5V, and 3.3V output from connectors are to supply the power for dedicated peripheral devices. Do not use for other equipment to supply the power since we do not guarantee the NC operation by voltage down or noise sneaking.
CJ31 CJ33 B A B A
20 I X00 20 I X10 20 I X20 20 I X30 19 I X01 19 I X11 19 I X21 19 I X31 18 I X02 18 I X12 18 I X22 18 I X32 17 I X03 17 I X13 17 I X23 17 I X33 16 I X04 16 I X14 16 I X24 16 I X34 15 I X05 15 I X15 15 I X25 15 I X35 14 I X06 14 I X16 14 I X26 14 I X36 13 I X07 13 I X17 13 I X27 13 I X37 12 I X08 12 I X18 12 I X28 12 I X38 11 I X09 11 I X19 11 I X29 11 I X39 10 I X0A 10 I X1A 10 I X2A 10 I X3A 9 I X0B 9 I X1B 9 I X2B 9 I X3B 8 I X0C 8 I X1C 8 I X2C 8 I X3C 7 I X0D 7 I X1D 7 I X2D 7 I X3D 6 I X0E 6 I X1E 6 I X2E 6 I X3E 5 I X0F 5 I X1F 5 I X2F 5 I X3F 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 3 DICOM 2 +24V 2 0V 2 +24V 2 0V 1 +24V 1 0V 1 +24V 1 0V
B1 B20
A1 A20
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
122IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Both 24V common and 0V common connections are allowed in the digital signal input circuit. Follow the wiring diagram below for each type.
Input circuit
Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.
(*1) Note that "40 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
(E) : External signal, (I) : Internal signal
24V common 0V common 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 3mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20.2V or more, 25.2V or less 3.8V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 0.7mA or less 5 Input resistance 5k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1)
8 input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms
9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Connection to 24V common input Connection to 0V common input
X00
X3F
0V
FG
5k
DICOM
X00
X3F
0V
FG
5k
DICOM
24VDC(+)
24V common
Control circuit
Stabilized power supply
External contact
24VDC(+)
0V common
Stabilized power supply
External contact
Control circuit
CJ31/CJ33CJ31/CJ33
T1T1
T2
GND
+24V
T4T3
(E)
(I)
T1T1
T2
T4T3
GND
+24V
(E)
(I)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
123 IB-1501269-P
(2) CJ32 (Machine signal output) (4) CJ34 (Machine signal output)
Connector : XG4M-4030 / 7940-6500SC Strain relief : XG4T-4004 / 3448-7940 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
CJ32 CJ34(FCU8-DX230) CJ34(FCU8-DX231) B A B A B A
20 O Y00 20 O Y10 20 O Y20 20 NC 20 O Y20 20 NC 19 O Y01 19 O Y11 19 O Y21 19 NC 19 O Y21 19 NC 18 O Y02 18 O Y12 18 O Y22 18 NC 18 O Y22 18 NC 17 O Y03 17 O Y13 17 O Y23 17 NC 17 O Y23 17 NC 16 O Y04 16 O Y14 16 O Y24 16 NC 16 O Y24 16 NC 15 O Y05 15 O Y15 15 O Y25 15 NC 15 O Y25 15 NC 14 O Y06 14 O Y16 14 O Y26 14 NC 14 O Y26 14 NC 13 O Y07 13 O Y17 13 O Y27 13 NC 13 O Y27 13 NC 12 O Y08 12 O Y18 12 O Y28 12 NC 12 O Y28 12 NC 11 O Y09 11 O Y19 11 O Y29 11 NC 11 O Y29 11 NC 10 O Y0A 10 O Y1A 10 O Y2A 10 NC 10 O Y2A 10 NC 9 O Y0B 9 O Y1B 9 O Y2B 9 NC 9 O Y2B 9 NC 8 O Y0C 8 O Y1C 8 O Y2C 8 NC 8 O Y2C 8 NC 7 O Y0D 7 O Y1D 7 O Y2D 7 NC 7 O Y2D 7 NC 6 O Y0E 6 O Y1E 6 O Y2E 6 NC 6 O Y2E 6 NC 5 O Y0F 5 O Y1F 5 O Y2F 5 NC 5 O Y2F 5 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 NC 4 O AO 4 AO* 3 NC 3 NC 3 NC 3 NC 3 NC 3 NC 2 +24V 2 0V 2 +24V 2 0V 2 +24V 2 0V 1 +24V 1 0V 1 +24V 1 0V 1 +24V 1 0V
B1 B20
A1 A20
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
124IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal output circuit Use within the specification ranges shown below.
Output circuit
Output conditions
(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance 100V or more, twice or more the load current) in parallel to the load.
Insulation method Non-insulation Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 0.2A/point 3.2A or less in the whole unit
Output delay time 40s
Y00
Y2F
CJ32/CJ34
24VDC
Load
Source output
Control circuit
Y
24VDC Source output
Control circuit
Inductive load
Diode
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
125 IB-1501269-P
(Note 2) When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor (R=150) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. Make sure that the current is less than the maximum output current including the momentary current.
(Note 3) Always keep the total sum of output current of each Y00 to Y07, Y08 to Y0F, Y10 to Y17, Y18 to Y1F, Y20 to Y27, and Y28 to Y2F less than 0.8A.
CAUTION 1. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load to prevent a
counter-electromotive force.
2. When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents.
Y
24VDC Source output
Control circuit
Load Resistor
Y00 Y01 Y02 Y03 Y04 Y05 Y06 Y07 Y08 Y09 Y0A Y0B Y0C Y0D Y0E Y0F
Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F
Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 Y28 Y29 Y2A Y2B Y2C Y2D Y2E Y2F
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 0.8A or less
Total 3.2A or less
0.2A or less per point
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
126IB-1501269-P
(b) Outline of analog signal output circuit The analog signal output circuit can be used only for FCU8-DX231.
Output circuit
Output conditions
Analog output voltage -10 to 10V(5%) Resolution 10V / 4095 = 2.44mV Load conditions External load resistance value 10k or more Output resistance value 500
DAC
CJ34
AO
AO*
500Load
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
127 IB-1501269-P
(5) CJ35 (Machine signal input)
Connector : 713-1116/037-000 Manufacturer: WAGO
(The cable side connector is attached to the unit.)
16 I X0F 32 COMB+ 15 I X0E 31 COMA+ 14 I X0D 30 COMB+ 13 I X0C 29 COMA+ 12 I X0B 28 COMB+ 11 I X0A 27 COMA+ 10 I X09 26 COMB+ 9 I X08 25 COMA+ 8 I X07 24 COMB+ 7 I X06 23 COMA+ 6 I X05 22 COMB+ 5 I X04 21 COMA+ 4 I X03 20 COMB+ 3 I X02 19 COMA+ 2 I X01 18 COMB+ 1 I X00 17 COMA+
161
17 32
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
128IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Follow the wiring diagram below.
Input circuit
Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.
(*1) Note that "40 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
(E) : External signal, (I):Internal signal
For DX213 For DX213-1 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 3mA or more 9mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 3.8V or less 4.0V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 0.7mA or less 1.5mA or less 5 Input resistance (*) 5k 2.2k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1) 8 input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms 9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Connection to 0V common input
X0 X2
XE
CJ35
COMA+
CJ36
IO0VB
IO24VA
IO0VA IO24VB
X1 X3
XF COMB+
|
|
0V
FG
Input resistance
(*)
External contact
External contact
Stabilized power supply
0V common
Control circuit
24VDC(+)
Input resistance
(*)
T1T1
T2
T4T3
GND
+24V
(E)
(I)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
129 IB-1501269-P
(6) CJ36 (Machine signal output)
Connector : 713-1110/037-000 Manufacturer: WAGO
(The cable side connector is attached to the unit.)
(a) Outline of digital signal output circuit Use within the specification ranges shown below.
Output circuit
10 I IO24VB 20 IO0VB 9 I IO24VA 19 IO0VA 8 O Y07 18 COMB- 7 O Y06 17 COMA- 6 O Y05 16 COMB- 5 O Y04 15 COMA- 4 O Y03 14 COMB- 3 O Y02 13 COMA- 2 O Y01 12 COMB- 1 O Y00 11 COMA-
101
11 20
CJ36
IO0VB
IO24VA
IO0VA IO24VB
Y00 Y02
Y06 COMA-
Y01 Y03
Y07 COMB-
0V
FG
|
|
Voltage conversion
Source output
Load
Load
Stabilized power supply
Control circuit
24VDC(+)
Voltage conversion
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
130IB-1501269-P
Output conditions
(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance 100V or more, twice or more the load current) in parallel to the load.
(Note 2) When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor (R=150) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. Make sure that the current is less than the maximum output current including the momentary current.
(Note 3) Total output current for each of Y00/Y02/Y04/Y06 and Y01/Y03/Y05/Y07 must be 4A or less.
Insulation method Optocoupler insulation Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 2A/point 8A or less in the whole unit
Output delay time 400s
CAUTION 1. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load to prevent a
counter-electromotive force.
2. When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents.
Y
24VDC Source output
Control circuit
Inductive load
Diode
Y
24VDC Source output
Control circuit
Load Resistor
Y00 Y02 Y04 Y06
Y01 Y03 Y05 Y07
Total 8A or less
2A or less per point
Total 4A or less
Total 4A or less
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
131 IB-1501269-P
(7) SDI (Safety machine signal input)
Connector : 713-1116/037-000 Manufacturer: WAGO
(The cable side connector is attached to the unit.)
16 I SX07B 32 COMB+ 15 I SX07A 31 COMA+ 14 I SX06B 30 COMB+ 13 I SX06A 29 COMA+ 12 I SX05B 28 COMB+ 11 I SX05A 27 COMA+ 10 I SX04B 26 COMB+ 9 I SX04A 25 COMA+ 8 I SX03B 24 COMB+ 7 I SX03A 23 COMA+ 6 I SX02B 22 COMB+ 5 I SX02A 21 COMA+ 4 I SX01B 20 COMB+ 3 I SX01A 19 COMA+ 2 I SX00B 18 COMB+ 1 I SX00A 17 COMA+
161
17 32
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
132IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Follow the wiring diagram below.
Input circuit
Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.
(*1) Note that "40 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
(E) : External signal, (I):Internal signal
For DX654 For DX654-1 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 3mA or more 9mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 3.8V or less 4.0V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 0.7mA or less 1.5mA or less 5 Input resistance (*) 5k 2.2k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1) 8 input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms 9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Connection to 0V common input
SX0A |
SX3A
SDI
SX0B |
SX3B
COMA+
COMB+
0V
FG
SDO
IO0VA
IO24VA
0V
FG IO0VB
IO24VB
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
0V common
Control circuit
Control circuit
External duplication contact
24VDC(+)
Input resistance (*)
Input resistance
(*)
T1T1
T2
T4T3
GND
+24V
(E)
(I)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
133 IB-1501269-P
(8) SDO (Safety machine signal output)
Connector : 713-1110/037-000 Manufacturer: WAGO
(The cable side connector is attached to the unit.)
(a) Outline of digital signal output circuit Use within the specification ranges shown below.
Output circuit
10 I IO24VB 20 IO0VB 9 I IO24VA 19 IO0VA 8 O SY03B 18 COMB- 7 O SY03A 17 COMA- 6 O SY02B 16 COMB- 5 O SY02A 15 COMA- 4 O SY01B 14 COMB- 3 O SY01A 13 COMA- 2 O SY00B 12 COMB- 1 O SY00A 11 COMA-
101
11 20
|
IO0VB
IO24VA IO0VA
IO24VB
SY0A
SY3A COMA-
COMB-
0V FG
SDO
| SY0B
SY3B
0V FG
Source output
Load
Stabilized power supply
Control circuit
24VDC(+)
Control circuit
Safety relay
Safety relay
Voltage conversion
Voltage conversion
Stabilized power supply 24VDC(+)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
134IB-1501269-P
Output conditions
(Note 1) When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance 100V or more, twice or more the load current) in parallel to the load.
(Note 2) When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor (R=150) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. Make sure that the current is less than the maximum output current including the momentary current.
(Note 3) Total output current for each of SY00A to SY03A and SY00B to SY03B must be 4A or less.
Insulation method Optocoupler insulation Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 2A/point 8A or less in the whole unit
Output delay time 400s
CAUTION 1. When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the load to prevent a
counter-electromotive force.
2. When the rush current exceeds the maximum output current, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents.
Y
24VDC Source output
Control circuit
Inductive load
Diode
Y
24VDC Source output
Control circuit
Load Resistor
SY00A SY01A SY02A SY03A
SY00B SY01B SY02B SY03B
Total 8A or less
2A or less per point
Total 4A or less
Total 4A or less
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
135 IB-1501269-P
(9) SDI1 (Safety DI input)
Connector : 175362-1 (2-pole type) Connector : 175363-1 (4-pole type) Connector : 1318095-1 (6-pole type) Contact : 175218-2 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
B A 10 COM+ 10 I SX04B 9 COM+ 9 I SX04A 8 COM+ 8 I SX03B 7 COM+ 7 I SX03A 6 COM+ 6 I SX02B 5 COM+ 5 I SX02A 4 COM+ 4 I SX01B 3 COM+ 3 I SX01A 2 COM+ 2 I SX00B 1 COM+ 1 I SX00A
A1 B1
A10 B10
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
136IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Follow the wiring diagram below.
Input circuit
Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.
(*1) Note that "40 ms or more" is a guide of the "Input signal holding time". The input signal is recognized only when its "ON" state is held longer than the ladder processing cycle time.
(E) : External signal, (I):Internal signal
0V common 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 3mA or more 3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 3.8V or less 4 Input current at external contact OFF 0.7mA or less 5 Input resistance 5k 6 Tolerable chattering time (T1) 3ms 7 Input signal holding time (T2) 40ms or more (*1) 8 input circuit operation delay time (T3 and T4) 3 to 16ms 9 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
Connection to 0V common input
5k
5k
SX00A |
SX07A
SX00B |
SX07B
COM+
COM+
DCIN
SDI1 / SDI2 External duplication contact
24VDC
Control circuit
Control circuit
24VDC
T1T1
T2
T4T3
GND
+24V
(E)
(I)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
137 IB-1501269-P
(10) SDI2 (Safety DI input)
Connector : 175362-1 (2-pole type) Connector : 175363-1 (4-pole type) Connector : 1318095-1 (6-pole type) Contact : 175218-2 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(a) Outline of digital signal input circuit Refer to "(9) SDI1 (Safety DI input)".
(11) SDO1 (Safety relay output) (12) SDO2 (Safety relay output)
Connector : 178289-4 Contact : 175218-2 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
B A 6 COM+ 6 I SX07B 5 COM+ 5 I SX07A 4 COM+ 4 I SX06B 3 COM+ 3 I SX06A 2 COM+ 2 I SX05B 1 COM+ 1 I SX05A
SDO1 SDO2 B A B A
4 SYR03A 4 SYR03A 4 SYR03B 4 SYR03B 3 SYR02A 3 SYR02A 3 SYR02B 3 SYR02B 2 SYR01A 2 SYR01A 2 SYR01B 2 SYR01B 1 SYR00A 1 SYR00A 1 SYR00B 1 SYR00B
A1
B1
A6
B6
A1 B1
A4 B4
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
138IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of digital signal output circuit Use within the specification ranges shown below.
Output circuit
Output conditions
Insulation method Insulated by relay
Output method Non-voltage A contact
Contact structure Forced guide style relay
Rated voltage 250VAC, 125VDC Rated current 6A Min. applicable load
1mA, 5VDC
Operation time 20ms or less (contact bounce not included)
Response time 8ms or less (contact bounce not included)
Return time 20ms or less (contact bounce not included)
Life
100,000 times or more with 250VAC 6A resistant load (opening/closing frequency: 20 times/min) 100,000 times or more with 30VDC 6A resistant load (opening/closing frequency: 20 times/min) 500,000 times or more with 250VAC 1A resistant load (opening/closing frequency: 30 times/min) 500,000 times or more with 30VDC 1A resistant load (opening/closing frequency: 30 times/min) 100,000 times or more with 15AC:240VAC 2A induction load (opening/closing frequency: 20 times/min, cos=0.3) 100,000 times or more with 13DC:24VDC 1A induction load (opening/closing frequency: 20 times/min, L/R=48ms)
Max. operation frequency
20 times/min
SYR00A |
SYR03A
SYR00B |
SYR03B
SYR00A |
SYR03A
SYR00B |
SYR03B
SDO1
SDO2
Load
Load
Welding check LED Relay feedback
24VDC
Control circuit
Control circuit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
139 IB-1501269-P
Precautions
(1) Influence on the relay life by a connected load An actual relay life can be substantially shortened depending on the type of a connected load and the characteristics of its inrush current. The inrush current generated by a connected load can lead to contact welding of the module. To prevent shortening of the relay life and contact welding, take the following measures: - Considering the possibility of a high inrush current, select a load so that the inrush current generated by the connected load falls within the range of the rated current of the module. - Connect a relay capable of withstanding the inrush current, outside the module.
The following table lists the relations between typical loads and each inrush current. Select a load so that the inrush current, i, and rated current, io, fall within the range of the rated switching current described in the module specifications. n some loads, the inrush current flows for a long time.
(Note 1) A typical discharge lamp circuit is configured with a combination of discharge tubes, transformers, choke coils, capacitors and others. Because of this, be especially careful of the case of a high power factor and a low power supply impedance, where the inrush current flowing into the output module can be 20 to 40 times as high as the rated current.
(Note 2) When the wiring is long, be careful with the cable capacity as well.
Load type Waveform
Inrush current i/
rated current io
Waveform
Inrush current i/
rated current io
Inductive load
Approx. 10 to 20 times
Approx. 3 to 10 times
Lamp load
Approx. 3 to 10 times
Approx. 3 times (Note 1)
Approx. 5 to 10 times - -
Capacitive load
Approx. 20 to 40 times - -
i io
Load of a solenoid
0.07 to 0.1 seconds
i: Inrush current io: Rated current
i io
0.017 to 0.033 seconds (1 to 2 cycles)
Load of an electromagnetic contactor
i: Inrush current io: Rated current
ioi
Load of an incandescent bulb
Approx. 0.33 seconds
i: Inrush current io: Rated current
i io
Load of a mercury lamp
180 to 300 seconds (3 to 5 minutes)
i: Inrush current io: Rated current
ioi
Load of a fluorescent
Within 10 seconds
i: Inrush current io: Rated current
ioi
Capacitive load (Note 2)
0.008 to 0.33 seconds (0.5 to 2 cycles)
i: Inrush current io: Rated current
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
140IB-1501269-P
(2) Measures against back EMF Provide a contact protection circuit for an extended contact life, noise prevention at contact close, and reduction of the carbides and nitric acids formed by an arc discharge. An incorrect circuit involves a high risk of contact welding. With the contact protection circuit, the recovery time may be delayed. The following table shows typical examples of the contact protection circuit.
(Note 1) On AC power supply, the impedance of the CR needs to be sufficiently higher than that of the load (for preventing errors due to the leakage current of the CR).
Circuit example Element selection criteria Remarks
Capacitor + resistance method (CR method)
Estimate the constants of a capacitor and resistance with the following as a guide. Some differences, however, may arise from a variation in the nature and characteristics of the load. - Capacitor: 0.5 to 1 (F) for a load current of 1A - Resistance: 0.5 to 1 () for a power supply voltage of 1V Use a capacitor whose withstand voltage is higher than the rated voltage. In an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no polarity.
When a relay or solenoid is used as the load, the recovery time is delayed. A capacitor has the effect of reducing a discharge at contact OFF, while a resistance has the effect of limiting a current at contact ON.
Diode method
Use a diode that satisfies the following conditions: - A reverse breakdown voltage is more than ten times as high as the circuit voltage. - A forward current is more than twice as high as the load current.
The recovery time is delayed than the CR method.
Diode + zener diode method
Use a zener diode whose zener voltage is higher than the power supply voltage.
This method is suitable for the case where the diode method results in a substantial delay in the recovery time.
Varistor method
Select a varistor whose cut-off voltage (Vc) satisfies the following conditions: - Vc > power supply voltage1.5 (V) - Vc > power supply voltage1.5 (V)
2 (on AC power supply) Note that selecting an element of a too high Vc leads to a weaker effect.
The recovery time is a little delayed.
- Avoid using contact protection circuits like the following. Although highly effective in reducing the arc at current cutoff, a charge current flows into the capacitor when the contact turns on or off, which leads to the risk of contact welding. A DC inductive load, generally considered to be more difficult to open and close than a resistive load, can achieve the same performance of a resistive load in an appropriate configuration of the protection circuit.
Install the protection circuit near the load or contact (module). A long distance between them may inhibit the effect of the protection circuit. As a guide, install it at a distance of no more than 50cm.
(Note 1)
Capacitor
Resistor
Inductive load
Capacitor
Resistor
Inductive load
Diode Inductive load
Zener Diode
Diode Inductive load
Varistor Inductive load
POINT Capacitor Capacitor
Inductive load
Inductive load
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
141 IB-1501269-P
(13) RIO1 (Remote I/O 2.0 communication) (14) RIO2 (Remote I/O 2.0 communication)
Connector : 1-1318119-3 Contact : 1318107-1 x6 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(15) DCIN (24VDC input)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(16) DCOUT (24VDC output)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
A B 1 I/O TXRXD 1 I/O TXRXD* 2 NC 2 0V 3 FG 3 NC
1 I +24V 2 0V 3 FG
1 O +24V 2 0V 3 FG
1 2 3
B A
X
1 3
1 3
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
142IB-1501269-P
(17) FG (FG terminal)
(18) FG (FG terminal (M4 screw))
(19) AIO1 (Analog input, Analog output) Analog input and analog output can be connected to this connector.
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Plug : 10120-3000PE Shell : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
(Note) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
1 0V 11 0V 2 I AI 0 12 I AI 1 3 I AI 2 13 I AI 3 4 NC 14 NC 5 0V 15 0V 6 NC 16 NC 7 O AO 17 I NC 8 NC 18 NC 9 0V 19 NC
10 NC 20 NC
10 1
20 11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
143 IB-1501269-P
(a) Outline of analog signal input circuit
Input circuit
Input conditions
(Note 1) This indicates the input voltage which must not exceeded even in an instant. (Note 2) Except when the accuracy is affected by the noise.
(b) Outline of analog signal output circuit
Output circuit
Output conditions
Analog input voltage -10 to 10V Max. input rating (Note 1) 15V Resolution |-10 to +10V| / 4095 = 4.88mV Repeatability Within 25mV (Note 2) Tolerance 0.35V
Analog output voltage -10 to 10V (5%) Resolution 10V / 4095 = 2.44mV Load conditions External load resistance value 10k or more Output resistance value 500
ADC AIO1
AI
0V
DAC
AIO1
AO
0V
500Load
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
144IB-1501269-P
(20) THERMISTOR (Thermistor input) Thermistor can be connected to this connector.
Connector : 37104-2165-000FL Manufacturer: 3M
(a) Outline of the thermistor input circuit
(Note 1) This indicates the maximum measurable temperature change amount per unit time. When the temperature change exceeds the described value, it cannot be measured correctly.
(Note 2) Do not connect any thermistor other than PT3C-51F-M2 made by SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS Co., Ltd.
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 1 FG FG FG FG FG FG 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 Thermistor CH1 Thermistor CH2 Thermistor CH3 Thermistor CH4 Thermistor CH5 Thermistor CH6 4 Thermistor CH1 Thermistor CH2 Thermistor CH3 Thermistor CH4 Thermistor CH5 Thermistor CH6
CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 1 FG FG FG FG FG FG 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 Thermistor CH7 Thermistor CH8 Thermistor CH9 Thermistor CH10 Thermistor CH11 Thermistor CH12 4 Thermistor CH7 Thermistor CH8 Thermistor CH9 Thermistor CH10 Thermistor CH11 Thermistor CH12
Measurement temperature -10.0 to +150.0
Resolution 0.1
Accuracy
1.5 (Measurement temperature -10 to +10 ) 1.0 (Measurement temperature +10 to +70 ) 1.5 (Measurement temperature +70 to +110 ) 2.0 (Measurement temperature +110 to +130 ) 2.5 (Measurement temperature +130 to +150 )
Thermal responsiveness (Note 1)
This varies depending on the setting of the parameter (#1334). 10 /s (When the setting of #1334 is -1) 20 /s (When the setting of #1334 is 0) 45 /s (When the setting of #1334 is 1) 90 /s (When the setting of #1334 is 2)
Disconnection detection function Provided
CH1 CH12CH11CH10CH9CH8CH7CH6CH5CH4CH3CH2
1 2 3 4
ADC
3.3V
FG
THERMISTOR
Thermistor
Shield
Thermistor
Thermistor
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
145 IB-1501269-P
(21) AI (Multi-analog input)
Connector : DFMC1,5/12-ST-3,5-LR Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact
(The cable side connector is attached to the unit.)
(a) Outline of multi-analog input circuit There are four types of multi-analog input as below:
- Voltage input - Current input - Thermocouple input - Resistance temperature detector input
The measurement mode (voltage measurement, current measurement, temperature (thermocouple) measurement and temperature (resistance temperature detector) measurement) can be set for each CH and input corresponding to the mode can be performed. All CHs (CH1 to CH4) are set to the voltage measurement mode when the machine is delivered.
Precautions - Input the signal within the appropriate input range for the set measurement mode.
(Note) Do not input the voltage when the current or temperature (thermocouple or resistance temperature detector) measurement mode is set. This could result in faults of the unit. Pay close attention to the combination of the measurement mode setting and input.
- Running-in is required for about 10 to 15 minutes after the power is ON until the measurement value is stable.
- Do not apply voltage or current from external devices before turning ON the power of multi- analog input unit. This may damage the multi-analog input unit. Turn ON the power of the multi-analog input unit and external device at the same time, or wire circuit so that the power supply of the multi-analog input unit is turned ON first.
13
CH3
FG 1
CH1
FG 14 NC 2 NC 15 V+/A 3 V+/A 16 l+/a/CJ+ 4 l+/a/CJ+ 17 V-/l-/B 5 V-/l-/B 18 b/CJ- 6 b/CJ- 19
CH4
V+/A 7
CH2
V+/A 20 l+/a/CJ+ 8 l+/a/CJ+ 21 V-/l-/B 9 V-/l-/B 22 b/CJ- 10 b/CJ- 23 NC 11 NC 24 FG 12 FG
1 12
13 24
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
146IB-1501269-P
(a-1) Outline of voltage input circuit Input circuit
Input conditions Set the input signal within the range as shown in the conditions below.
(a-2) Outline of current input circuit Input circuit
Input conditions Set the input signal within the range as shown in the conditions below.
Input voltage range -10V to +10V Max. input rating 13V Resolution |-10V to +10V| / 64000 = 312.5V Max. input delay (AI input to R register output) 40ms
Disconnection detection function Not provided Precision 0.5%FS (FS : Full Scale)
Input current range -20mA to +20mA Max. input rating 30mA Resolution |-20mA to +20mA| / 32000 = 1.25A Input resistance 250 Max. input delay (AI input to R register output) 40ms
Disconnection detection function Not provided Precision 0.5%FS (FS : Full Scale)
ADC
AI
V+
V-
FG
FG
FCU8-DX409
Voltage source
ADC
AI
I+
I-
FG
FG
FCU8-DX409
Current source
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
147 IB-1501269-P
(a-3) Outline of thermocouple input circuit Input circuit
Input conditions Set the input signal within the range as shown in the conditions below.
(Note) Refer to "(a-5) Supplement: Overall precision of temperature measurement".
Input temperature range -40C to +600C Resolution 0.1C Cold junction compensation Use Pt100. Cold junction compensation precision 1C Max. input delay (AI input to R register output) 40ms
Disconnection detection function Provided
Precision (Note)
K type
3C (Measurement temperature -40 to +150C) 4C (Measurement temperature +150 to +300C) 5C (Measurement temperature +300 to +450C) 6C (Measurement temperature +450 to +600C)
J type
2.8C (Measurement temperature -40 to +150C) 3.8C (Measurement temperature +150 to +300C) 4.8C (Measurement temperature +300 to +450C) 5.8C (Measurement temperature +450 to +600C)
ADC
AI
V+ V-
FG
FCU8-DX409
CJ+
CJ-(Pt100)
FG
SG
Thermocouple
Constant current source
Cold junction compensation resistor
Set the lead length 2cm or shorter. (As a guide)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
148IB-1501269-P
(a-4) Outline of resistance temperature detector input circuit Input circuit
Input conditions Set the input signal within the range as shown in the conditions below.
(Note) Refer to "(a-5) Supplement: Overall precision of temperature measurement".
Input temperature range -50C to +300C Resolution 0.1C (Normal mode) or 0.03C (High resolution mode) Max. input delay (AI input to R register output) 40ms
Disconnection detection function Provided
Precision (Note) Pt100
1.5C (Measurement temperature -50 to +150C) 1.8C (Measurement temperature +150 to +300C)
Pt1000 1.8C (Measurement temperature -50 to +150C) 2.2C (Measurement temperature +150 to +300C)
ADC
AI
A
a
FG
FCU8-DX409
B
b
FG
SG
ADC
AI
A
a
FG
FCU8-DX409
B
b
FG
SG
Constant current source
Resistance temperature detector
Resistance temperature detector
<3-wire type>
<4-wire type>
Constant current source
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
149 IB-1501269-P
(a-5) Supplement: Overall precision of temperature measurement
The precision shown in (a-3) and (a-4) is the one attributed to the unit. The thermocouple or resistance temperature detector input to the unit also has precision and the overall precision of temperature measurement is the addition of the precision of unit and the precision of thermocouple or resistance temperature detector. The precision of unit includes the cold junction compensation precision ( 1C).
Thermocouple overall precision = Unit precision + thermocouple precision
When K-type or Class2 thermocouple is used, if the measurement point temperature is 100C, the overall precision is as below. (Note) According to the thermocouple standard (IEC60584-1), K-type or Class2 thermocouple
precision is " 2.5 C or 0.75% of the measurement temperature, whichever has the greater value"
(Overall precision) = 3 [C] 2.5 [C] = 5.5 [C]
Resistance temperature detector overall precision = Unit precision + Resistance temperature detector
When Pt100 or ClassA resistance temperature detector is used, if measurement point temperature is 100C, the overall precision is as below. (Note) According to the Platinum RTD standard (IEC60751), Pt100 or ClassA precision is
" (0.15 + 0.002 |t| ) [C] t: Measurement temperature"
(Overall precision) = 1. 5 [C] (0.15 + 0.002 100) [C] = 1.85 [C]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
150IB-1501269-P
(s1) STATION No. (Station No. group setting switch)
(s2) STATION No. (Station No. setting switch)
(s3) STATION No. (Station No. setting switch)
1 2
O N
0123456789AB CD
EF
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
151 IB-1501269-P
[LED : FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409]
FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1
FCU8-DX202 FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409
No. Name Function Color Status
Details Normal At fault
(1) RIOVER RIO communication status Green Lit during RIO 2.0 communication Not lit during RIO 1.0 communication
(2) ALM RIO communication error Red Not lit Lit Lit when RIO communication error has occurred.
(3) FUSE Fuse status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a fuse has been blown out.
(4) 24VDCIN Energization status of 24VDC input of DCIN connector Green Lit Not lit Lit when a current is applied.
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(1)
(2)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
152IB-1501269-P
[LED : FCU8-DX651]
No. Name Function Color Status
Details Normal At fault
(1)
H1 Safety relay output SYR00 status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a relay has been blown out. H2 Safety relay output SYR01 status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a relay has been blown out. H3 Safety relay output SYR02 status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a relay has been blown out. H4 Safety relay output SYR03 status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a relay has been blown out.
(2) ALM RIO communication error Red Not lit Lit Lit when RIO communication error has occurred.
(3) DCIN Energization status of 24VDC input of DCIN connector Green Lit Not lit Lit when a current is applied.
(4) FUSE Fuse status Green Lit Not lit Not lit when a fuse has been blown out.
(1)
(4)(3)(2)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
153 IB-1501269-P
4.13 Functional Safety Expansion Unit
4.13.1 Functional Safety Expansion Unit (FCU8-EX133) [Outline dimension]
23.4
[mm]
118.2
12 9.
3
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
154IB-1501269-P
4.14 Function Expansion Unit
4.14.1 CC-Link (FCU8-EX561) [Outline dimension]
3094.6
12 4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
155 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(1) CCL (CC-Link communication)
Connector : 35505-6000-BOM GF Manufacturer: 3M
No. Connector name Function
(1) CCL CC-Link communication
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
1 I/O DA 2 I/O DB 3 DG 4 NC 5 SLD
(1)
15
1
2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
156IB-1501269-P
[LED]
(Note 1) All LED (RUN, LRUN, SD, RD, ERR, LERR) are lit during resetting of the CC-Link module.
No. Name Color Status Details
(1) RUN Green Lit CC-Link module in the normal state
Not lit Watchdog timer error (2) LRUN Green Lit Data link in process of execution (3) SD Green Lit During data transmission (4) RD Green Lit During data reception
(5) ERR Red Lit Switch setting error (LERR is also lit), overlapping of master, parameter error,
communication error Flashing Other station data link error (when it is master station)
(6) LERR Red Lit Data link communication error
Flashing Station and mode change during operation
(1) (2)
(5) (4) (3)
(6)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
157 IB-1501269-P
4.14.2 PROFIBUS-DP (FCU8-EX563) [Outline dimension]
3094.6
12 4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
158IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(1) PBD (PROFIBUS-DP communication)
Connector : 6GK1 500-0FC10 Manufacturer: Siemens
No. Connector name Function
(1) PBD PROFIBUS-DP
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
5V output from connectors are to supply the power for dedicated peripheral devices. Do not use for other equipment to supply the power since we do not guarantee the NC operation by voltage down or noise sneaking.
1 NC 6 +5V 2 NC 7 NC 3 I/O RXD/TXD-P 8 I/O RXD/TXD-N 4 I/O CNTR-P 9 NC 5 0V
(1)
1
9
5
6
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
159 IB-1501269-P
[LED]
(Note 1) All LED (RUN, RDY, STA and ERR) are lit during the reset of PROFIBUS-DP module. (Note 2) The status of PROFIBUS-DP module is displayed by the combination of RUN/RDY. (Note 3) The status of PROFIBUS-DP communication is displayed by the combination of STA/ERR.
Name Color Status Details
(1) RUN (Green) (2) RDY (Yellow) (Module status)
Green Lit Lit when PROFIBUS-DP module is normally operated Green/ yellow Flashing Boot standby
Yellow Lit Boot error - Lit No power supply, module failure
(3) STA (Green) (4) ERR (Red) (Communication status)
Green Lit regularly Configuration successful, communication unestablished
Green Lit randomly Configuration failure, stuck error Green Lit Communicating with slave(s) Red Flashing Communication is interrupted with at least one slave Red Lit Communication is interrupted with all the slaves
(1) (2) (3) (4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
160IB-1501269-P
4.14.3 CC-Link IE Field (FCU8-EX564) [Outline dimension]
3094.6
12 4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
161 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(1) LAN1 (CC-Link IE Field communication 1st channel) (2) LAN2 (CC-Link IE Field communication 2nd channel)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Connector : J00026A0165 Manufacturer: Japan Telegartner
No. Connector name Function (1) LAN1
CC-Link IE Field communication (2) LAN2
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
1 I/O TXRXD0+ 2 I/O TXRXD0- 3 I/O TXRXD1+ 4 I/O TXRXD2+ 5 I/O TXRXD2- 6 I/O TXRXD1- 7 I/O TXRXD3+ 8 I/O TXRXD3-
(1)
(2)
8 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
162IB-1501269-P
[LED]
No. Name Color Status Details
(1) L ERR Red Not lit Normal data received and loopback not performed
Lit Abnormal data received or loopback being performed
(2) SD/RD Green Lit Data being sent or received
Not lit Data not sent nor received
(3) D LINK Green Lit Data link (cyclic transmission being performed)
Flashing Data link (cyclic transmission stopped) Not lit Data link not performed (disconnected)
(4) MST Green Lit Operating as master station
Not lit Operating as local station
(5) ERR Red
Not lit Normal operation Flashing
(500 ms interval) A data link faulty station detected
Flashing (200 ms interval) Failure occurring
Lit Error in all stations detected or occurring
(6) RUN Green Lit Hardware running normally
Not lit Hardware error occurring
(7) LINK Green Lit Link-up
Not lit Link-down
(8) L ER Red Lit Normal data received and loopback not performed
Not lit Abnormal data received or loopback being performed
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(7) (8)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
163 IB-1501269-P
4.14.4 EtherNet/IP (FCU8-EX565) [Outline dimension]
3094.6
12 4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
164IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(Note) On this unit, EtherNet/IP function is supported by the "LAN1" port only. LAN2 does not support EtherNet/ IP function.
(1) LAN1 (EtherNet/IP communication)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Connector : J00026A0165 Manufacturer: Japan Telegrtner
No. Connector name Function
(1) LAN1 EtherNet/IP communication
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
1 O TXD+ 5 NC 2 O TXD- 6 I RXD- 3 I RXD+ 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC
(1)
8 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
165 IB-1501269-P
[LED]
(Note 1) Ignore LED which is not written in the table above.
No. Name Green LED Red LED Details (1) MS (Green/Red)
(Module status) Flashing Flashing In self-test Flashing Not lit Waiting for initialization
Lit Not lit Normal operation Not lit Flashing Recoverable failure
Not lit Lit Unrecoverable failure (The hardware needs to be replaced.)
(2) NS (Green/Red) (Communication status)
Flashing green/red (alternately) In self-diagnosis
Not lit Not lit No IP address Flashing Not lit No connection
Lit Not lit Normal operation Not lit Flashing Connection time out Not lit Lit IP address duplication
(1)
(2)
(1) (2)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
166IB-1501269-P
4.14.5 FL-net (FCU8-EX568) [Outline dimension]
3094.6
12 4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
167 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(Note) On this unit, FL-net function is supported by the "LAN1" port only. LAN2 does not support FL-net function.
(1) LAN1 (FL-net communication)
- Connect connector case with FG pattern.
Connector : J00026A0165 Manufacturer: Japan Telegrtner
No. Connector name Function
(1) LAN1 FL-net communication
CAUTION
Do not apply any voltage to the connectors other than voltage specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Connect the cables to the designated connectors. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
1 O TXD+ 5 NC 2 O TXD- 6 I RXD- 3 I RXD+ 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC
(1)
8 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
168IB-1501269-P
[LED]
(1) Ignore LED of FCU8-EX568. (This is used by MITSUBISHI.)
(1)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
169 IB-1501269-P
4.14.6 Vibration Cutting Expansion Unit (FCU8-EX744) [Outline dimension]
3094.6
12 4
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
170IB-1501269-P
4.14.7 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX702) [Outline dimension]
50
94.6
13 4.
9
[mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
171 IB-1501269-P
4.14.8 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX703) [Outline dimension]
78.4
99
13 4.
9 [mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
172IB-1501269-P
4.15 Manual Pulse Generator
4.15.1 5V Manual Pulse Generator (UFO-01-2Z9)
100 pulse/rev
[Outline dimension]
[Panel cut dimension]
Produced by NIDEC NEMICON CORPORATION
3-M4
[mm]
0
10
20 30
40 50
60
70 80
90
0V A B80 .5
60
61 62 6 R
43
565877
8.89 7.6 M3 x 6
5V
Gasket
Above size only
72 at equal pitch Panel cut diameter studIndex
Top
Bottom
[mm]
72
62
at equal pitch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
173 IB-1501269-P
4.15.2 12V Manual Pulse Generator (HD60C)
25 pulse/rev
[Outline dimension]
[Panel cut dimension]
3.6
16 27 0.5
L10
8.89 7.60
t 2.0 3-M4
77 0.
5
80 1
58 0.
5
60 0.
5
[mm]
24 0.5
56 0.
5
Installation of screws
stud bolt Packing
other than M3 x 6 not possible
Top
Bottom
BA0V12V
40
30
50 60
70
10
20
90 0
80
3 - 4. 8
62 +2 0
72 0. 2
120
[mm]
(Divide equally by three)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
174IB-1501269-P
4.16 Synchronous Feed Encoder
4.16.1 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) [Outline dimension]
19. 5
102
135
5 3
33
2
68
28
20
56 68
4 - 5. 4
21mm
14. 3 0 - 0.11
1. 15 +0.14 0 1. 15
+0.14 0
2
26
16
50
15- 0.006 - 0.017
- 0. 009 - 0. 025
2
5 - 0. 012 - 0. 042
3 +0
.1 0
68 56
50
-0 .0
09 -0
.0 25
[mm]
Caution plate
hole
Enlarged drawing of key
Valid depth of key groove is Cross section BB
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
175 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
Connector pin assignment
Pin Function Pin Function A A phase K 0V B Z phase L - C B phase M - D - N A phase reverse E Case grounding P Z phase reverse F - R B phase reverse G - S - H +5V T - J -
F J
T
G
L
K
M
H
C
D
ERS
P N
B
A
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
176IB-1501269-P
4.17 Machine Operation Panel
4.17.1 Main Panel A , B (FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925 , FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926)
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB921]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB922]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB925]
[mm]
260
14 0
9.5 60 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
260
14 0
9.5 60 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
260
14 0
9.5 60 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
177 IB-1501269-P
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB923]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB924]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB926]
[mm]
290 14
0 9.5 60
(Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
290
14 0
9.5 60 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
290
14 0
9.5 60 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
178IB-1501269-P
[Panel cut dimension : FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925]
[Panel cut dimension : FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926]
[mm]
2480.3 260
247
2460.3
0.5
12 7
11 3
0. 3
12 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
913 913
(6.5)
3.53.5 0.
5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2 10.2
4-M3
14 0
(6.5)
(6 .5
)
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
[mm]
2780.3 290
277
2760.3
0.5
12 7
11 3
0. 3
12 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
913 913
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2 10.2
4-M3
14 0
(6.5)
(6 .5
)
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
179 IB-1501269-P
[Letter label dimension : FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB924]
[Connector]
FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925
FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) DCIN 24VDC input (4) RIOOUT Remote I/O 2.0 communication (relay)
(2) DCOUT 24VDC output (5) FG FG terminal
(3) RIOIN Remote I/O 2.0 communication (input) (6) SUBP Sub panel connection
Clear key top
Letter label
(Material: PET or equivalent, t = 0.125 or less)
Example of a letter
12.8 or less 9.
8 or
le ss
(5)(1)
(6)
(2) (3) (4)
(5)(1)
(6)
(2) (3) (4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
180IB-1501269-P
(1) DCIN (24VDC input)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(2) DCOUT (24VDC output)
Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(3) RIOIN (Remote I/O 2.0 communication (input)) (4) RIOOUT (Remote I/O 2.0 communication (relay))
Up to 64 remote I/O stations can be connected.
Connector : 1-1318119-3 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
(5) FG (FG terminal)
1 I +24V 2 0V 3 FG
1 O +24V 2 0V 3 FG
A B 1 I/O TXRXD 1 I/O TXRXD* 2 NC 2 0V 3 FG 3 NC
1 3
1 3
1 2 3
B A
X
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
181 IB-1501269-P
(6) SUBP (Sub panel connection)
RSW1: Cutting override switch RSW2: Rapid traverse override switch RSW3: Spare switch
Connector : HIF3BA-40D-2.54C Contact : HIF3-2428SC Manufacturer: Hirose Electric
B20 NC A20 NC B19 NC A19 NC B18 NC A18 NC B17 NC A17 NC B16 0V A16 I Spare SW(ZR5423[5]) B15 0V A15 I Spare SW(ZR5423[4]) B14 0V A14 I Spare SW(ZR5423[3]) B13 0V A13 I Memory protection (ZR5423[2]) B12 NC A12 I RSW3_G(ZR5423[1]) B11 I RSW3_F(ZR5422[D]) A11 I RSW3_E(ZR5422[F]) B10 I RSW3_D(0V) A10 I RSW3_C(ZR5423[0]) B9 I RSW3_B(ZR5422[E]) A9 I RSW3_A(ZR5422[C]) B8 NC A8 I RSW2_G(ZR5422[B]) B7 I RSW2_F(ZR5422[7]) A7 I RSW2_E(ZR5422[9]) B6 I RSW2_D(0V) A6 I RSW2_C(ZR5422[A]) B5 I RSW2_B(ZR5422[8]) A5 I RSW2_A(ZR5422[6]) B4 NC A4 I RSW1_G(ZR5422[5]) B3 I RSW1_F(ZR5422[1]) A3 I RSW1_E(ZR5422[3]) B2 I RSW1_D(0V) A2 I RSW1_C(ZR5422[4]) B1 I RSW1_B(ZR5422[2]) A1 I RSW1_A(ZR5422[0])
A1
B1
A20
B20
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
182IB-1501269-P
4.17.2 Sub Panel A (FCU8-KB931 / FCU8-KB941)
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB931]
[Outline dimension : FCU8-KB941]
[Panel cut dimension : FCU8-KB931 / FCU8-KB941]
[mm]
140
14 0
9.5 70 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
140
14 0
9.5 70 (Space required for wiring)
Top
Bottom
[mm]
1280.3 140
127
1260.3
0.5
12 7
11 3
0. 3
12 6
0. 3
(7 )
(7 )
(7) (7)
913 913
(6.5)
3.53.5
0. 5
(6 .5
)
6. 5
0. 2 10.2
4-M3
14 0
(Unit outline)
(U ni
t o ut
lin e)
(Square hole dimension)
(S qu
ar e
ho le
d im
en si
on )
screw
4 - 4 holes
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
183 IB-1501269-P
[Connector]
(1) Rapid traverse override
Switch : AC09-GY0/10L3B02 Manufacturer: Fuji Electric Connection : Connector
Connector : IL-7P-S3EN2 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics
Connector : IL-7S-S3L-(N) Contact : IL-C2-10000 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics
No. Switch name No. Switch name (1) Rapid traverse override (4) ON switch (2) Emergency stop switch (5) OFF switch (3) Memory protection switch (6) Cutting override
A O Output signal a B O Output signal c C O Output signal e D - Common terminal E O Output signal d F O Output signal b G O Parity check signal
(1)
(6)
(2)
(3)
(5)(4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
184IB-1501269-P
(2) Emergency stop switch
Switch : XA1E-BV4U02TR Manufacturer: IDEC Connection : Terminal
Connector: Faston terminal #110 Manufacturer: -
(3) Memory protection switch
Switch :LB6K-2ST2B Manufacturer: IDEC Connection : Terminal
Connector: Faston terminal #110 Manufacturer: -
A O Contact 1 (B contact) B O Contact 2 (B contact)
22 O Contact 2 (B contact) 12 O Contact 1 (B contact) 24 O Contact 2 (A contact) 14 O Contact 1 (A contact) 21 - Contact 2 (Common) 11 - Contact 1 (Common)
12
1 2
2 1
21
Contact 2 Contact 1
22
24
21
12
14
11
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
185 IB-1501269-P
(4) ON switch
(Note) Connect LGCON terminal and ON terminal of G170 cable to NO terminal of ON switch.
Switch : AH165-SLW11X3/0063 Manufacturer: IDEC Connection : Terminal
Connector: Faston terminal #110 Manufacturer: -
(5) OFF switch
(Note) Contact LGCOFF terminal and OFF terminal of G170 cable to NO terminal of OFF switch.
Switch : AH165-SLB11X3/0063 Manufacturer: IDEC Connection : Terminal
Connector: Faston terminal #110 Manufacturer: -
a I Lamp terminal (+) b O Lamp terminal (-)
NO O Contact 1 (A contact) NC O Contact 2 (B contact)
NO O Contact 1 (A contact) NC O Contact 2 (B contact)
NCNC
NO NO
b
a
NCNO NC NO
Switch
NCNC
NO NO
NCNO NC NO
Switch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
186IB-1501269-P
(6) Cutting override
Switch : AC09-GY0/20L3B02 Manufacturer: Fuji Electric Connection : Connector
Connector : IL-7P-S3EN2 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics
Connector : IL-7S-S3L-(N) Contact : IL-C2-10000 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics
A O Output signal a B O Output signal c C O Output signal e D - Common terminal E O Output signal d F O Output signal b G O Parity check signal
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
187 IB-1501269-P
4.18 Handy Terminal
(Note 1) "Short term" means within one month. (Note 2) The unit is an IP65F equivalent.
Item Unit name Handy terminal
Type HG1T-SB12UH-MK1346-L5
General Specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0 to 40
During storage -20 to 60
Ambient humidity
Long term: 10 to 75% RH (with no dew condensation) Short term: 10 to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
Vibration resistance
During operation 9.8m/s2 [1.0G] or less, 10 to 55Hz
Shock resistance
During storage 98m/s2 [10.0G] or less
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Power specifications
Power voltage 24VDC5% Ripple noise 240mV (P-P) Current consumption (max.) 0.2A
Instantaneous stop tolerance time
24VDC: 4ms or less
Others Heating value 4W (max.) Mass 0.6kg
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
188IB-1501269-P
Dimension and names of parts
(Note) Do not press multiple switches simultaneously: When three or more switches are pressed simultaneously, unpressed switches are also detected as pressed ones.
No. Name Function/ Specification No. Name Function/ Specification
(1) LCD Monochrome display with backlight 192(W) 64(H) dots
(7) HOST Host interface connector (DDK: 17JE-23250-02(D8A6))
(2) SW1
Emergency stop switch Contact rating/ Contact: 24VDC, 1A Contact configuration: 2b contacts (IDEC Corporation: HA1E- V2S2VR)
(8) - Host interface cable (5m)
(3) - Membrane switch (Note) (9) - Simplified hand strap (IDEC Corporation: HG9Z-PS1)
(4) SW2
Enable switch Contact rating/ Contact: 24VDC, 50mA Contact configuration: 3 position contact 2 (OFF-ON-OFF) (IDEC Corporation: HE3B-M2)
(10) - Panel hanging fitting (IDEC Corporation: HG9Z-TK1)
(5) SW4
Manual pulse generator Output: Open collector 4.7k pull-up resistor is connected. (TOKYO SOKUTEIKIZAI CO., LTD: RE19PH50C16RR)
(11) - Serial number plate
(6) SW6 Selector switch
133
255
90
46.7 38
51
11.515
(2)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(8)
(7)
(9)
(11)(10)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
189 IB-1501269-P
Signal explanation
(Note) The input/output goes to/from the handy terminal.
HOST terminal No.
HOST connector signal name
Input/ Output Function/ Name
1 FG - Frame ground 2 Reserved - Reserved 3 Reserved - Reserved 4 Reserved - Reserved 5 Reserved - Reserved 6 0V - Ground 7 RS(RTS) O RS-232C communication signal (Request To Send) 8 CS(CTS) I RS-232C communication signal (Clear To Send) 9 SW2_C11 - Enable switch contact 1 terminal 1 10 SW2_C12 - Enable switch contact 1 terminal 2 11 SW1_NC11 - Emergency stop switch contact 1 terminal 1 12 SW1_NC12 - Emergency stop switch contact 1 terminal 2 13 24VDC(-) I 24VDC ground 14 SD(TXD) O RS-232C communication signal (Send Data) 15 RD(RXD) I RS-232C communication signal (Receive Data) 16 HA O Manual pulse generator A phase signal 17 HB O Manual pulse generator B phase signal 18 SW6_NO1 - Switchover switch terminal 1 19 SW6_C1 - Switchover switch terminal 2 20 0V - Ground 21 SW2_C21 - Enable switch contact 2 terminal 1 22 SW2_C22 - Enable switch contact 2 terminal 2 23 SW1_NC21 - Emergency stop switch contact 2 terminal 1 24 SW1_NC22 - Emergency stop switch contact 2 terminal 2 25 24VDC(+) I 24VDC input
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
190IB-1501269-P
Terminal connections
25
13
9 SW2_C11
10 SW2_C12
21 SW2_C21
22 SW2_C22
11 SW1_NC11
12 SW1_NC12
23 SW1_NC21
24 SW1_NC22
18 SW6_NO1
19 SW6_C1
+5V
0V
24VDC(+)
24VDC(-)
Handy terminal side
Insulation type DC-DC
converter
Enable switch
Emergency stop switch
Switchover switch
24VDC input
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
191 IB-1501269-P
4.19 Thermistor 4.19.1 Thermistor(PT3C-51F-M2)
[Outline dimension]
Made by SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS Co., Ltd.
Ambient temperature -10 to + 190
Insulation resistance 100M or more at 500VDC [between case and lead wire]
25010
3
123
4.5 [mm]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
192IB-1501269-P
4.20 Exclusive SD Cards
(Note 1) SLC stands for Single Level Cell, and it stores one bit data in each memory cell. This provides longer life span and high product reliability in comparison with MLC (Multi Level Cell), which is commonly applied to SD cards.
(Note 2) Do not touch the terminal part with fingers, etc. when handling the SD cards. The contamination of the terminal part of SD card causes a contact failure or a trouble.
Item FCU8-SD001G FCU8-SD004G Capacity 1GB 4GB
NAND Flash SLC (Note 1)
Ambient temperature During operation -25 to +85
During storage -40 to +85
Ambient humidity During operation 5% to 95%RH (with no dew condensation) During storage 5% to 95%RH (with no dew condensation)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
193 IB-1501269-P
4.21 Specifications and Precautions of USB/SD/LAN Interface
4.21.1 USB Interface (Memory I/F card)
(Note 1) Data transfer speed is the theoretical value on the standard, and the actual speed will be inferior to the value listed above. The transfer speed may be restrained depending on the specification of the connected device.
(Note 2) Do not connect the devices other than the USB memory.
(1) Precautions for insertion/removal of USB memory When inserting/removing an USB memory, turn the MITSUBISHI device's power OFF. Do not pull out the USB memory or turn OFF the power during access to the USB memory. Failure to observe this could cause the memory contents to be erased. When Inserting/removing a USB memory, be sure to have enough interval to perform that (about 10 seconds or more). In case of emergency, always perform backups by having your important data duplicate, etc. as MITSUBISHI will not guarantee the broken or lost data.
(2) Precaution for operation with front-side USB memory A USB memory to be used has to be supported USB2.0 Hi-Speed (480Mbps). When connecting the USB memory, connect it directly without using the extension cable or USB hub. Machine vibration may cause the USB memory to fall out depending on environment. Therefore, the operation with the front-side USB memory is required to be performed on your own responsibility.
M800S / M80 Standards USB2.0
Data transfer speed (Note)
High Speed (480Mbps) Full Speed (12Mbps) Low Speed (1.5Mbps)
Power supply to USB device
Supply voltage: 5V 5% Supply current: Max. 500mA/port
Number of free ports Front X 1 Max. cable length 5m
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 4 General Specifications
194IB-1501269-P
4.21.2 SD Interface (Memory I/F card)
(Note) SDXC is not supported.
(1) Precautions for use of commercially available SD card MITSUBISHI will not provide performance guarantee and maintenance for commercially available SD card, mini SD card or micro SD card (requires converting adapter). In case of using one of them, careful performance check must be required by the machine tool builder. Commercially available devices may not be compatible with MITSUBISHI units or suitable FA environment for temperature- or noise-wise.
(2) Precautions for insertion/removal of SD card When inserting/removing an SD card, turn the MITSUBISHI device's power OFF. Do not pull out the card or turn OFF the power during access to the SD card. Failure to observe this could cause the memory contents to be erased. In case of emergency, always perform backups by having your important data duplicate, etc. as MITSUBISHI will not guarantee the broken or lost data.
4.21.3 LAN Interface (Control Unit)
(Note 1) Data transfer speed is the theoretical value on the standard, and the actual speed will be inferior to the value listed above. The transfer speed may be restrained depending on the specification of the connected device.
(Note 2) When using half-duplex communication, the response time may become long depending on the connected device. Use full-duplex communication to connect with the opposite device via a switching HUB.
(1) Precautions for selection of LAN cable Make sure to select the LAN cables which are "category 5e or above" and "shielded". Cable wire material with double shielded, which is appropriate for FA environment., is recommended.
M800S / M80 Standards SD/SDHC (Note) Transfer speed According to the connecting SD card Capacity 32GB Number of free ports Front X 1, Rear X 1
M800S/M80 Standards 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T Data transfer speed (Note 1) 100Mbps / 10Mbps
Number of free ports Control unit 2
195 IB-1501269-P
5 Installation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
196IB-1501269-P
5.1 Heat Radiation Countermeasures Please refer to the following method for heat radiation countermeasures.
Example of heat radiation countermeasures
(1) Average internal temperature of operation panel: T 58C (2) Peripheral temperature of operation panel : Ta 0C to 45C (3) Internal temperature rise value : T = T - Ta (max) = 13C
Procedures for heat design and verification
(1) Refer to "General Specification" for the heat generated by each unit. (2) Enclosed cabinet (thin steel plate) cooling capacity calculation equation
W1 = U A T
U: 6 W/m2C
A: Effective heat radiation area (m2) (Area where heat can be radiated from operation panel) T: Internal temperature rise value (13C)
(Caution) 8 W/m2C can be applied only when the operation panel is so small that the internal temperature stays uniform.
(3) Points of caution for heat radiation countermeasures when designing mounting state - Consider convection in operation panel (eliminate heat spots) - Collect hot air at suction port of heat exchanger in operation panel.
(4) Criterion for internal temperature rise distribution data T (average value) 13C Tmax (maximum value) 15C R (inconsistency Tmax - Tmin) 6C (Evaluate existence of heat spots)
W W1
W>W1
T13C
T>13C
Calculate total heat radiation of each mounted unit (W)
Comparison of W and W1
Collection of internal temperature rise distribution data
Mounting design
Improvements
Completion
Selection of heat exchanger
Evaluation
Calculate cooling capacity of operation panel (W1)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
197 IB-1501269-P
The following shows an example of calculation applied to heat radiation countermeasures for the operation panel when 15-type display unit is used. Because heat will accumulate in the upper portions of the unit, install an agitating fan as required.
120
32 0
400
60 0
500
14 0
400 Display unit
(Agitating fan)
Keyboard unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
198IB-1501269-P
Calculation example of panel internal heating value
(1) Calculation of unit heating value (In the case of FCU8-DU182-32 + FCU8-MU511 + FCU8-KB083 + FCU8-DX750) Heating value (W)
Total heating value of units (W) : 31W (= display unit + control unit + keyboard unit + operation panel I/O unit)
Total heating value (W) by machine input (D1) : 5.5W (= 24V (total heating value when the 48 points are simultaneously turned ON) 4.8mA 48) ... 24V (current consumption per point of the operation panel I/O unit DI) divided by 5k 4.8mA
Total heating value W = 36.5W (31 + 5.5)
(2) Calculation of operation panel cooling capacity Tolerance value for temperature rise (t)
- Panel internal temperature (according to each unit's specification) T 58C - Panel peripheral temperature (according to machine's specification) Ta 45C
Tolerance value for internal temperature rise T = 13C (T - Ta)
Heat radiation area (A) The surface of the molded unit, which has lower radiation capacity than the metal plate surface, should be excluded for the heat radiation area in principle. The bottom of the operation panel, which has difficulty in radiating due to the temperature distribution, should also be excluded for the heat radiation area in principle.
Operation panel cooling capacity (W1) Calculate the cooling capacity to keep the temperature rise in the operation panel less than 13C.
Cooling capacity W1 = 48.4W (6 A T)
(3) Comparison of heating value and operation panel cooling capacity The operation panel cooling capacity is over the heating value, which presumed no need to install the heat exchanger.
(4) Confirmation with the actual machine The result of the calculation above is only a rough indication. The actual temperature rise may differ according to the structure of the operation panel. The actual unit heating value may differ depending on the user's machine specifications or operating environment. Be sure to confirm the temperature rise value in the operation panel when the actual machine is running.
Heat radiation area A
= 0.62 mm2 ( 0.50.12 + 0.60.52 + 0.120.62 - 0.320.4 + 0.140.4 )
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Top surface (2) Front, rear surface (3) Both sides surface (4) Unit surface
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
199 IB-1501269-P
5.2 Noise Countermeasures 5.2.1 Connection of Frame Ground (FG)
The frame should basically be grounded at one ground point. Connect the control unit and operation panel I/O unit's 0V (RG) to the FG on the +24V stabilized power supply.
(Note) "24VDC" represents (+) side of 24V stabilized power supply, while "0V(RG)" represents (-) side. "FG" (Frame Ground) corresponds to the functional earth.
Y
0V (R
G )
FG Short bar
AC input Stabilized
power supply Main grounding plate for electric cabinet
FG cable
FG cable
J070 cable
Control unitOperation panel I/O unit
24V D
C
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
200IB-1501269-P
5.2.2 Shield Clamping of Cables The shield of the shield cable connected to the control unit and drive unit must be connected to the grounding plate to stabilize operation while preventing malfunctioning due to noise. The shield can be connected to the grounding plate with lead wires or clamp fittings. Refer to the following drawings to treat the shield cable.
[Example of connection with lead wire]
[Example of connection with clamp fitting]
(1) Peel part of the cable sheath and expose the shield as shown in the drawing. Press the exposed part against the grounding plate with the cable clamp fittings.
(2) If the cable is thin, clamp several together in a bunch. (3) Use adequate force when tightening the cable so that the wire material is not damaged. (4) Connect each grounding plate together and ground them at one point.
Cable Unit
Lead wireExample of lead wire treatment
CableShield
Soldering
Cable
Grounding plate
Shield
Grounding plate
Cable
Clamp fitting
Shield
Unit
Clamp fitting
Less than 0.8m
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
201 IB-1501269-P
5.2.3 Connecting Spark Killers The noise which is generated during the operation of the coil or contact needs to be eliminated. Connect the spark killers (CR composite element) in the parallel with the coil and the contact for the countermeasure. The Spark killer is effective in eliminating the noise generated by electromagnetic induction.
E
C : 0.033 to 0.1F R : 10 to 120
Contact
Spark killer
Coil
S park
killer
Spark killer
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
202IB-1501269-P
5.2.4 Lightning Surge Protection Countermeasure Generally, the lightning surge intrudes into the control power supply of device from the power supply line, and the surge may damage the control power supply and the internal circuit. For protection from the lightning surge, MITSUBUSHI NC unit has the surge absorber for the control power supply of the NC control section and the NC drive section. However, when there is a device which is not applied with the countermeasure as illustrated below, the lightning surge may intrude through the signal line of the device which is not applied with the countermeasure and may damage the NC device.
(1) Protection countermeasure method Add the surge absorber to the power supply lines as illustrated below for the power supply device, etc., which are separately prepared. The following two items are needed to protect the whole from surge. - Surge absorber installation - Circuit protector installation
(2) Product example of surge absorber Case of OKAYA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES surge absorber
(Note) Refer to "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Surge Absorber" for the outline, etc. Refer to the manufacturer catalog for detailed characteristics, outline and connection methods of the surge absorber.
Type Rated Voltage (50/60Hz)
DC Breakdown voltage
Voltage protection level
Normal discharge current
Max. discharge current Surge current life
RSPD-250-U4 250VAC (Three phase) 700V25% 1.3kV 8/20s
2.5kA 8/20s
5kA Approx. 300 times
8/20s-1kA
NC control section
NC drive section (Servo/spindle
drive unit)
Panel power supply
Control panel (relay panel, etc.)
Power supply line
Path of damage caused by lightning surge
Lightning surge path
Other device (panel power supply, etc.)
Control panel (relay panel, etc.)
Power supply line
Circuit protector
Surge absorber
Lightning surge countermeasure for three-phase power supply line
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
203 IB-1501269-P
5.3 Unit Installation 5.3.1 Display Unit
Mount the display unit with the prescribed number of fixing screws.
(Note) Refer to "General Specifications: Display Unit" for the panel cut dimension drawing and the screw hole position.
[FCU8-DU121 (8.4-type display unit)] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
204IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DU142/FCU8-DU141 (10.4-type display unit)] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
205 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DU182/FCU8-DU181 (15-type display unit)] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (8 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (8 pcs). (8 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
206IB-1501269-P
5.3.2 Keyboard Unit Mount the keyboard unit with the prescribed number of fixing screws.
(Note) Refer to "General Specifications: Keyboard Unit" for the panel cut dimension drawing and the screw hole position.
[FCU8-KB024/KB025/KB026/KB028] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
207 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-KB029] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
208IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-KB041/KB046] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
209 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-KB047] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
210IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-KB048] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
211 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-KB083] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (6 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (6 pcs). (6 pcs of screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
212IB-1501269-P
5.3.3 Operation Panel I/O Unit Mount the operation panel I/O unit with the prescribed number of fixing screws.
(Note) Refer to "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" for the installation dimension and the screw hole position.
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 / FCU8-DX834]
Fixing screw: M3 (4 pcs)
Installation on the back side of the keyboard Operation panel I/O unit can be installed on the back side of the keyboard.
Fixing screw: M3x25 (4 pcs)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
213 IB-1501269-P
5.3.4 Remote I/O Unit Mount the remote I/O unit with the prescribed number of fixing screws.
(Note) Refer to "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" for the installation dimension and the screw hole position.
[FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409]
Fixing screw: M5 (2pcs)
[FCU8-DX651]
Fixing screw: M5 (3pcs)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
214IB-1501269-P
[Install to DIN rail] (1) Set down the rail hook. (2) Hook the upper latch of the unit on the DIN rail. (3) Push the unit into the rail. (4) Lock it.
Designate the type below as DIN rail standard - TH35-7.5Fe : 7.5 - TH35-7.5AL : 7.5 - TH35-15Fe : 15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
215 IB-1501269-P
5.3.5 Functional Safety Expansion Unit Install the functional safety expansion unit as follows:
(1) Open the cover of control unit.
(2) Fix the functional safety expansion unit with 2 screws.
(3) Close the cover of control unit.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
216IB-1501269-P
5.3.6 Function Expansion Unit Install the expansion unit as follows:
[Option relay unit: FCU8-EX702(1 slot)] (1) Remove the cover on the back side of control unit.
(2) Insert the function expansion unit into FCU8-EX702.
(3) Fix FCU8-EX702 to the control unit with three screws of M3 x 25.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
217 IB-1501269-P
[Option relay unit: FCU8-EX703(2 slot)] (1) Remove the cover of FCU8-EX703.
(2) Insert the function expansion unit into FCU8-EX703.
(3) Close the cover of FCU8-EX703.
(4) Remove the cover on the back side of control unit.
(5) Fix FCU8-EX703 to the control unit with three screws of M3 x 25.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
218IB-1501269-P
5.3.7 Machine Operation Panel Mount the machine operation panel (main panel and sub panel) with the prescribed number of fixing screws.
(Note) Refer to "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel" for the panel cut dimension drawing and the screw hole position.
[FCU8-KB921/KB922/KB923/KB924/KB925/KB926] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
219 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-KB931/FCU8-KB941] - Fixed on the front side
Fixing screw: Cheese head screw M3 (4 pcs). (Fixing screws are provided with the unit.)
- Fixed on the back side
Fixture: M3 nut (4 pcs). (4 pcs of the screw caps (a) are provided with the unit.)
(a)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 5 Installation
220IB-1501269-P
221 IB-1501269-P
6 Precautions for Connecting
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
222IB-1501269-P
6.1 Precautions for Wiring 6.1.1 Precautions when Connecting/Disconnecting Cables
If the cable is connected/disconnected without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be damaged, and risks could be imposed. Disconnect each cable with the following procedures.
(a) For the following type of connector, press the tabs with a thumb and forefinger in the direction of the arrow, and pull the connector off.
CAUTION 1. Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
2. Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
Y
(1)
(2)
Press
Pull (2)
(1)
Pull
Press
(2)
(1)
View from above
Pull
Press
(1)
(2)
Press
Pull
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
223 IB-1501269-P
(b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and pull the connector off.
(c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and pull the connector off.
(d) For the screw fixed type connector, loosen the two fixing screws, and pull the connector off.
CAUTION 1. Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
2. Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
(1)
(2)
Open
Pull
(1)
(2)
Hold with thumb and forefinger.
Pull
(1)
(2)
Loosen
Pull
(1)
(2)
Loosen
Pull
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
224IB-1501269-P
(e) For the optical cable connector, pull off while holding down the lock button.
(f) For the Ethernet connector, pull off while holding down the locked latch.
(g) For the USB connector, pull off while holding down the locked latch.
CAUTION 1. Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
2. Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
(1)
(2)
Press
Pull
(1)
(2)
Press
Pull
(1)
(2)
Press
Pull
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
225 IB-1501269-P
6.1.2 Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable An optical communication cable is used for communication between the control unit and the drive unit. Special precautions, differing from the conventional cable, are required when laying and handling the optical communication cable.
(Note) If the cable you use is not Mitsubishi's, malfunctions resulted from connection problems or aged deterioration are not covered under the warranty.
To ensure the system performance and reliability, purchase the optical communication cable from Mitsubishi. A machining drawing is given in "Cable" as reference, but the purchased optical communication cable cannot be cut or connected by the machine tool builder.
(1) A protective cap is attached to the optical module and optical communication cable mounted on the PCB when the system is delivered. Leaving this protective cap unattached could result in connection faults from the adherence of dirt and dust. Do not remove the protective cap when not connecting the cable. If dirty, wipe off lightly with a piece of dry gauze, etc. (Do not use solvents such as alcohol as the optical fiber material could melt.)
(2) Hold the connector section when connecting or disconnecting the optical connector. Holding the fiber cord will result in force exceeding the tolerable tension on the fiber cord and connector connection section, and could cause the fiber cord to dislocate from the optical connector thereby inhibiting use.
(3) The optical connector cannot be connected in reversed. Check the connector orientation when connecting the optical communication cable to the optical module. Align the connector lock lever with the lock holes on the PCB's optical module, and press the connector straight in. Confirm that the lock lever connects with the optical module and that a "click" is heard.
(4) When disconnecting the optical communication cable from the PCB, press the lock release buttons on the lock lever, and pull out the cable while holding the connector section. The connector could be damaged if the cable is pulled without pressing down on the lock release buttons.
(5) Do not apply excessive force onto the optical communication cable by stepping on it or dropping tools, etc., on it.
Optical communication cable outline and parts
Precautions for handling optical communication cable
20 .3
22.7 150 35
7
Optical connector Fiber code/connector connection section
Fiber cord
Bushing Reinforced sheath
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
226IB-1501269-P
(1) Do not apply a force exceeding the cable's tolerable tension. Binding the cables too tight with tie-wraps could result in an increased loss or a disconnection. Use a cushioning material such as a sponge or rubber when bundling the cables and fix so that the cables do not move.
(2) Do not connect the cables with a radius less than the tolerable bending radius. Excessive stress could be applied near the connector connection section and cause the optical characteristics to drop. The cable bending radius should be 10 times or more than the outer diameter at the reinforced sheath, and 20 times or more than the outer diameter at the fiber cord section.
(3) Do not apply torsion to the optical communication cable. Laying a twisted cable could cause the optical characteristics to drop.
(4) When laying the cables in a conduit, avoid applying stress on the fiber cord and connector connection section. Use the tensile end such as a pulling eye or cable grip, etc.
(5) Fix the reinforced sheath with a cable clamp so that the mass of the optical communication cable is not directly applied on the fiber cord and connector connection section.
(6) Never bundle the cables with vinyl tape. The plasticizing material in the vinyl tape could cause the POF cable to break.
(7) Loop the excessive cable with twice or more than the minimum bending radius.
6.1.3 Precautions for Connecting 24V Power Supply (1) When 24V power is supplied to the unit under the following conditions, welding may occur on the contacts due to
rush current; so be careful.
When 24VDC's ON/OFF are directly controlled by a magnetic switch such as relay AND When heat capacity of the contacts for relay, etc. used to control 24VDC's ON/OFF is small.
Precautions for laying optical communication cable
Clamp material for reference:
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CKN-13SP
Optical communication cable (section with reinforced sheath): Bending radius: Refer to the specification of your optical communication cable.
Optical communication cable (section without reinforced sheath): Bending radius: Refer to the specification of your optical communication cable.
Control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
227 IB-1501269-P
6.2 Turning the Power ON/OFF The diagram below shows the ON/OFF timing of the drive unit power supply (200VAC/400VAC), remote I/O unit power supply (24VDC) and control unit power supply (24VDC).
[Power ON] Turn the power ON in the following order; drive unit, remote I/O unit -> control unit
If the control unit is powered ON before the drive unit or remote I/O unit, the initial communication with the drive unit or remote I/O unit may fail and the alarm "Servo communication error" or "Remote I/O unequipped error" may occur.
[Power OFF] Turn the power OFF in the following order; control unit -> Remote I/O unit, drive unit.
If the remote I/O unit or drive unit is powered OFF before the control unit, the alarm "Remote I/O communication error" may be occurred with the detection of remote I/O unit communication stop, or the alarms "Absolute value data illegal", "Servo communication error", etc., may be occurred by the failure of data acquisition.
24VDC (The remote I/O unit power)
24VDC (The control unit power)
200VAC/(400VAC) (The drive unit power)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 6 Precautions for Connecting
228IB-1501269-P
229 IB-1501269-P
7 Connection of Control Unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
230IB-1501269-P
The method for connecting to each unit and device from the control unit is explained in this chapter.
7.1 Control Unit Connection System Drawing
(Note 1) The mounted connector differs depending on the unit. Refer to the following chapter for which of the connector is mounted. "General specifications: Control Unit [M800S]" "General specifications: Control Unit [M80]" "General specifications: Control Unit [E80]"
(Note 2) For the connection of machine operation panel, refer to the chapter "Connection of Machine Operation Panel". (Note 3) The section indicated with asterisk (*) indicates cable to be wired outside the operation panel.
Since the cable could be affected by the exogenous noise depending on the environment, the following noise countermeasure is recommended.
Expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute.
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
LCD
SIO
ENC
SKIP
OPTH1/OPTH2
RIO1/RIO2
CJ71
EMG
DCIN
J026/J027
J100
J210
R050/R054
J395/J396/G380
J030/J031
J070/J071
CJ71J010
LAN1/LAN2 J303
J120
BL
MENUKEY
OPTH1 J395/J396/G380
CJ71 RIO3J012
[FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761]
RIO1/RIO2 J210
[FCU8-DX834]
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*) (*)
(*)
RIO2/ENC
cable Network
Control unit
Display unit
RS-232C device
Synchronous feed encoder, or
cable
Skip input (Sensor input)cable
Remote I/O unit cable
cable
cable
5V manual pulse generator
Servo/Spindle drive unitcable
cable
Operation panel I/O unit cable
Emergency stop signal cable
Attached cable of unit
Attached cable of unit
Attached cable of unit
Servo/Spindle drive unitcable
For M800S
For M80/E80
24VDC Stabilized power supply
cable Operation panel I/O unit
For M800S
Remote I/O unit cable
For M80/E80
Pulse-controlled inverter Select
BiSS encoder
Shield Cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
231 IB-1501269-P
7.2 Connecting with Power Supply Connect a general-purpose 24VDC stabilized power supply to the control unit.
(Note 1) Rush current may occur to lead welding on the contacts, when a magnetic switch such as relay directly controls 24VDC's ON/OFF during 24V power supply to the control unit. Use relay with large heat capacity of contacts to control 24VDC's ON/OFF.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable : J070/J071 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (DCIN connector)
0V +24V
AC AC FG
NFB
MC
MC
MC
ON OFF
Y
DCIN
FG
L1
L2
L3
DCIN
J070/J071
Control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
232IB-1501269-P
7.3 Connecting with Emergency Stop Signal Connect the emergency stop switch to EMG connector of the control unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J120 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (EMG connector)
J120
+24V
EMGIN
LG
R
FG
EMG
Control unit
Control unit
Emergency stop input circuit
Emergency stop switch
Emergency stop switch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
233 IB-1501269-P
ISO13849-1 (PLd, Cat.3) and IEC62061 (SIL CL2) can be realized by using the safety remote I/O unit (directly wiring the external emergency stop redundantly). Refer to "Smart safety observation" (BNP-C3072-022) for details.
+24V
EMGIN
LG
FG
EMG
CN24 J120
MDS-E/EH-CV
+24V
0V(LG
4A
1A
3
2
1
3
2
1
MDS-E/EH-CV
R
Emergency stop input circuit
Stabilized power supply
Emergency stop switch
Power supply unit
Control unit
Control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
234IB-1501269-P
(1) External emergency stop cannot substitute the emergency stop signal which is input to NC.
It is a function which helps the NC emergency stop. (2) When duplicating emergency stop input, wire the NC emergency stop input and the power supply unit external
emergency stop input from the same emergency stop switch.
MDS-EJ/EJH
CN9
+24V
EMGIN
LG
FG
EMG J120
+24V
0V(LG
MDS-EJ/EJH
3
2
1
3
2
1
5
20
R
Control unit
Control unit
Emergency stop input circuit
Emergency stop switch
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
235 IB-1501269-P
7.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit Connect the operation panel I/O unit to CJ71 connector of the control unit.
[FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
[FCU8-DX834]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable : J010 Cable" and "Cable : J012 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (CJ71 connector)
CJ71 CJ71J010
RIO3EXT
RIO2.0 A
B
A M
P D
-2
(R2-TM)
Control unit Operation panel I/O unit
Terminator connector
CJ71 RIO3J012
RIO3EXT
RIO2.0 A
B
A M
P D
-2
(R2-TM)
Control unit Operation panel I/O unit
Terminator connector
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
236IB-1501269-P
7.5 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit Connect the remote I/O unit to RIO1 or RIO2 connector of the control unit.
(Note 1) Connect the J210 cable to the RIO1 or RIO2 connector of the control unit. Check the connector position with the actual machine.
(Note 2) When you use a function with pulse output, the remote I/O unit cannot be connected to RIO1 and RIO2 connectors.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable : J210 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (RIO1 connector, RIO2 connector)
RIO1
RIO2
J210
J210
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O 1ch
Remote I/O 2ch
Max.64 stations Max. input: 2048 points Max. output: 2048 points
Max.64 stations Max. input: 2048 points Max. output: 2048 points
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
237 IB-1501269-P
7.6 Connecting with Drive Unit Connect the optical communication cables from the NC to the each drive unit so that they run in a straight line from the NC to the drive unit that is a final axis. Note that the number of connected axes is limited by the NC.
(Note) Refer to "Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable" when handling and wiring optical communication cable.
Cable application table
Cable Panel internal wiring Panel external wiring
Under 10m 10 to 30m 10m or less 10 to 30m J396 J395 G380
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
238IB-1501269-P
7.6.1 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-E/EH Series 7.6.1.1 Connection of Optical Communication Cables
(1) When Using One Power Supply Unit Connect the largest-capacity spindle drive unit to the final axis of the NC communication bus in order to control the power supply unit. The spindle drive unit must be installed adjacent to the power supply unit. In the system with servo only, a servo drive unit for controlling unbalance axis must be installed in the same manner in the same way. < Connection > CN1A : CN1B connector on NC or previous stage's drive unit CN1B : CN1A connector on next stage's drive unit CN4 : Connector for communication between power supply unit (master side) and drive unit
Connection when using one power supply unit
CAUTION 1. Connect the NC and the drive units by the optical communication cables. The distance between the NC and the
final drive unit must be within 30m and the specified bending radius (for wiring inside panel: 25mm, and for wiring outside panel: 50mm) or more.
2. For the main circuit wiring of the drive unit and power supply unit, the drive unit of 200V series is to be wired with MDS-E-CV, and the drive unit of 400V series is to be wired with MDS-EH-CV.
POINT Axis Nos. are determined by the rotary switch for setting the axis No. (Refer to the manual of drive unit.) The axis No. has no relation to the order for connecting to the NC.
CN4
CN4
The optical communication cables from the NC to the final drive unit must be within 30m.
Optical communication cable
Connected to the NC
MDS-E/EH-V2 1st/2nd axis
MDS-E/EH-V1 3rd axis
MDS-E/EH-SP 6th axis
(Final axis)
MDS-E/EH-CVMDS-E-SP2 4th/5th axis
Refer to the instruction manuals of NC for details.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
239 IB-1501269-P
(2) When Using Two or More Power Supply Units within a Single NC Communication Bus System Two or more power supply units may be required within a single NC communication bus system if the spindle drive unit capacity is large. The drive unit receiving power (L+, L-) from each power supply unit must always have NC communication cable connection at the NC side of each power supply unit. In the NC communication bus connection example below, power supply [1] cannot supply power (L+, L-) to the 5th axis servo drive unit. For basic connection information, refer to (1).
Connections when using two power supply units within a single NC communication bus system
CAUTION 1. The drive unit receiving power (L+, L-) from each power supply unit must always have NC communication bus
connection at the NC side of each power supply unit.
2. If two or more power supply units are connected in the drive system, confirm that the units are not connected with each other through the L+ and L- lines before turning ON the power. Also make sure that the total capacity of the drive units connected to the same power supply unit meets the unit's selected capacity.
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
Power cannot be supplied
Optical communication cable
MDS-E/EH-SP 8th axis
(CV control axis)
MDS-E/EH-CV [2]
MDS-E-SP2 6th/7th axis
MDS-E/EH-V2 1st/2nd axis
MDS-E/EH-V2 3rd/4th axis
(CV control axis)
MDS-E/EH-CV [1]
MDS-E/EH-V1 5th axis
Connected to the NC
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
240IB-1501269-P
(3) When using the additional axis drive unit by supplying power (L+, L-) from MDS-EM/EMH unit The power (L+, L-) can be supplied to the additional axis drive unit by using the power supply part which is built into MDS-EM/EMH.
CAUTION 1. There is a limit to the combination of the drive unit.
Refer to "7.3 Selection of the Additional Axis Drive Unit" in "MDS-EM/EMH Series Specifications Manual".
2. When using the additional axis drive unit by supplying power (L+, L-) from MDS-EM/EMH unit, install the optical communication cables in a manner that makes MDS-EM/EMH unit the final axis. Failure to observe this could lead to damage unit.
3. When installing the additional axis unit, install the spindle drive unit with maximum capacity adjacent to the MDS-EM/EMH-SPV3, and connections for other drive units should be such that the total TE2 wiring length is 800mm or less.
MDS-EM-SPV3MDS-E-V1 MDS-E-SP2 MDS-E-SP
TE2
The optical communication cables from the NC to the final drive unit must be within 30m.
Optical communication cable
Connected to the NC
5th axis 8th axis6th/7th axis Servo:2nd/3rd/4th axis
Spindle:1st axis
When using MDS-EM drive unit together with MDS-E
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
241 IB-1501269-P
7.6.1.2 Drive Unit Arrangement Arrange the drive units in the following procedure. (1) Install a power supply unit. (2) Arrange drive units in order of the nominal current from largest from the right. (3) In the arrangement, the clearance between the units is 1 mm. (4) Arrange the drive units with the DC connection length from the power supply unit being 1500mm or less.
For the arrangement of 1500mm or more, multiple power supply units are required. (5) Arrange large capacity drive units at the left of the power supply unit with the clearance between the drive units
being 1mm.
POINT 1. Arrange large capacity drive units at the left of the power supply unit with the clearance between the drive units
being 1mm.
2. Power supply units equivalent to the number of large capacity drive units are required.
3. MDS-E-SP-400/640, MDS-EH-SP-200/320/480/600, and MDS-EH-V1-200 are the large capacity drive units.
1mm1mm1mm 1mm
Large Small
Arrange drive units in order of nominal current from largest.
Use the dedicated connection bar.
1500mm or less
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
242IB-1501269-P
7.6.2 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EM/EMH Series
(1) When using only MDS-EM/EMH-SPV Series
CAUTION Connect the NC and the drive units by the optical communication cables. The distance between the NC and the final drive unit must be within 30m and the specified bending radius (for wiring inside panel: 25mm, and for wiring outside panel: 50mm) or more.
POINT Axis Nos. are determined by the rotary switch for setting the axis No. (Refer to the manual of drive unit.) The axis No. has no relation to the order for connecting to the NC.
CAUTION Confirm that the TE2 (L+, L-) wiring is not connected to other power supply before turning the power ON.
MDS-EM/EMH-SPV3
MDS-EM/EMH-SPV3
Spindle:1st axis Servo:2nd/3rd/4th axis
to the NC Connected
communication Optical
cable
Spindle:5th axis Servo:6th/7th/8th axis
CAUTIONCAUTION Refer to the instruction
manuals of NC for details.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
243 IB-1501269-P
(2) When using the MDS-E/EH unit together The power (L+, L-) can be supplied to the additional axis drive unit by using the power supply part which is built into MDS-EM/EMH. For the additional axis unit receiving power (L+,L-) from the MDS-EM/EMH unit, the optical cable must be connected at the NC side of the MDS-EM/EMH unit.
CAUTION There is a limit to the combination of the drive unit. Refer to "7.3 Selection of the Additional Axis Drive Unit" in "MDS-EM/EMH Series Specifications Manual".
MDS-EM-SPV3MDS-E-V1 MDS-E-SP2 MDS-E-SP
TE2
The optical communication cables from the NC to the final drive unit must be within 30m.
Optical communication cable
Connected to the NC
5th axis 8th axis6th/7th axis Servo:2nd/3rd/4th axis
Spindle:1st axis
When using MDS-EM drive unit together with MDS-E
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
244IB-1501269-P
7.6.3 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EJ/EJH Series
CN1A: CN1B connector on NC or previous stage's drive unit CN1B: CN1A connector on next stage's drive unit
CAUTION Connect the NC and the drive units by the optical communication cables. The distance between the NC and the final drive unit must be within 30m and the specified bending radius (for wiring inside panel: 25mm, and for wiring outside panel: 50mm) or more.
POINT Axis Nos. are determined by the rotary switch for setting the axis No. (Refer to the manual of drive unit.) The axis No. has no relation to the order for connecting to the NC.
MDS-EJ-V1 MDS-EJ-V1 MDS-EJ-V1 MDS-EJ-SP
The optical communication cables from the NC to the final drive unit must be within 30m.
Optical communication cable
Connected to the NC
1st axis 2nd axis 4th axis3rd axis
Refer to the instruction manuals of NC for details.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
245 IB-1501269-P
7.7 Connecting with Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] Connect the pulse-controlled inverter to RIO1 and RIO2 connectors of the control unit.
Wire material: HK-SB/20276XL Black LF 2P 22AWG Manufacturer: Taiyo Cabletec
Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (RIO1/RIO2 connector)
Note 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
3. Use the cable with shield and ground it in order to reduce the influence of noise.
RIO2
RIO1
Control unit
Cable with shield
Maximum: 30m
Pulse-controlled inverter
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
246IB-1501269-P
[Connecting the inverter with an FG terminal]
[Connecting the inverter without an FG terminal]
(Note) Connect cable shields to both FG on the control unit and the inverter. When there is no FG terminal on the inverter, use a clamp fitting or other tools to connect to the grounding plate of the electric cabinet.
A/PULSE/CW
A*/PULSE*/CW*
1A
1B
RIO1
B/SIGN/CCW 1A
1B
RIO2
3AFG
B*/SIGN*/CCW*
A/PULSE/CW
A*/PULSE*/CW*
B/SIGN/CCW
B*/SIGN*/CCW*
FG
Control unit Inverter
Connect the cable shield to FG of the control unit.
Connect the cable shield to FG of the inverter.
A/PULSE/CW
A*/PULSE*/CW*
1A
1B
RIO1
B/SIGN/CCW 1A
1B
RIO2
3AFG
B*/SIGN*/CCW*
A/PULSE/CW
A*/PULSE*/CW*
B/SIGN/CCW
B*/SIGN*/CCW*
FG
Control unit Inverter
Connect the cable shield to FG of the control unit.
Connect the cable shield to the grounding plate of the electric cabinet.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
247 IB-1501269-P
7.8 Connecting with a BiSS Encoder Connect the BiSS encoder to RIO2 connector and ENC connector of the control unit.
Wire material: HK-SB/20276XL Black LF 3P 24AWG Manufacturer: Taiyo Cabletec
Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (RIO1/RIO2 connector)
Note 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
3. Use the cable with shield and ground it in order to reduce the influence of noise.
ENC
RIO2
Control unit
Cable with shield
Maximum: 30m
BiSS encoder
ENC
MA+ 1A
1B
RIO2
3AFG
MA-
0V
5V
MA+
MA-
FG
4SL+
SL- 14
0V 1
5V 10
SL+
SL-
Control unit BiSS encoder
Connect the cable shield to FG of the control unit.
Connect the cable shield to FG of the encoder.
Connect FG of the encoder to the grounding plate of the electric cabinet.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
248IB-1501269-P
7.9 Connecting with RS-232C Device (1) Connect the RS-232C device to SIO connector of the control unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J030/J031 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (SIO connector)
1ch 2ch
J031SIO
J031 cable
J030 cable
Cable name
RS-232C device
Control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
249 IB-1501269-P
7.10 Connecting with Skip Signal (Sensor) Connect the skip signals to SKIP connector of the control unit. Skip signals are used for processing high-speed signals. Always shield the cable.
(Note) Connecting the skip signal cable to a wrong connector causes a damage on the control unit when turning ON the skip signal power supply. Confirm the wiring before turning the power ON.
(1) Connection of skip signal cable
<0V connection at COM terminal>
J100 SK2
COM
SK0
COM
COM
SK6
SK7
SK5
SK4
COM
SK1
SK3
SKIP
Control unit
SKIP
SI8
SI1
SI2
SI3
SI4
SI5
SI6
SI7
FG
0V 1,5,11,15
COM
18
2
12
3
13
7
17
8
FG
2.35k J100
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
0V connection at COM terminal
Control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
250IB-1501269-P
<24V connection at COM terminal>
(Note 1) NC recognizes input signals of 2ms or more as the valid skip signals. If machine contacts (relay, etc.) are used, malfunctions will occur due to chattering. Use semiconductor contacts (transistor, etc.).
(Note 2) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J100 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (SKIP connector)
SKIP
SI8
SI1
SI2
SI3
SI4
SI5
SI6
SI7
FG
0V 1,5,11,15
COM
18
2
12
3
13
7
17
8
FG
2.35k J100
Stabilized power supply
24V connection at COM terminal
Control unit
24VDC(+)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
251 IB-1501269-P
7.11 Connecting with Manual Pulse Generator Connect the 5V power supply type manual pulse generator (2ch) to ENC connector of the control unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J026/J027 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (ENC connector)
When using the synchronous feed encoder and the manual pulse generator at the same time, the cables must be prepared by the machine tool builder.
5V 0V A B
5V 0V A B5V 0V A B
ENC
NO.1
NO.1
NO.2
J026
J027
When connecting one 5V manual pulse generator
When connecting two 5V manual pulse generators
5V manual pulse generator (Rear view)
(Rear view) 5V manual pulse generator
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
252IB-1501269-P
7.11.1 Handle Numbers
There are two types of the handle numbers assignment: automatic assignment and arbitrary assignment.
[Automatic assignment] Set all the parameters from "#1395 H1_pno (1st handle selection)" to "#1397 H3_pno (3rd handle selection)" to "0000". An example is shown below. "ENC": Connector on control unit (two channels), "MPG": Connector on operation panel I/O unit (Up to three channels)
[Arbitrary assignment] Assign the handle I/F arbitrary according to the setting values of the parameters "#1395 H1_pno (1st handle selection)" to "#1397 H3_pno (3rd handle selection)".
Operation panel I/O unit Handle assignment
1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle Used Group (a) ch1 Group (a) ch2 Group (a) ch3
Not used Group (b) ch1 Group (b) ch2
CJ71
ENC
CJ71 MPG (5V/12V)
(5V)
Manual Pulse Generator (ch1) Manual Pulse Generator (ch2) Manual Pulse Generator (ch3)
Operation panel I/O unit
Control unit
Manual Pulse Generator (ch1) Manual Pulse Generator (ch2)
[ Group (a) ]
[ Group (b) ]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
253 IB-1501269-P
7.12 Connecting with Synchronous Feed Encoder Connect the synchronous feed encode (1ch) to ENC connector of the control unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: FCUA-R050/R054 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Control Unit" (ENC connector)
When using the synchronous feed encoder and the manual pulse generator at the same time, the cables must be prepared by the machine tool builder.
OSE1024-3-15-68
ENC
R050 cable
R054 cable
Synchronous feed encoder
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
254IB-1501269-P
7.13 Connecting I/O Device via Function Expansion Unit Mount the function expansion unit onto the dedicated slot of the control unit. (Note 1) To use the function expansion unit, the option relay unit (FCU8-EX70x) is required. (Note 2) When the option relay unit FCU8-EX703 (for two slots) is connected, the available combinations of the
communication function expansion units for which two slots can be used are as follows. Any combination not stated below cannot be used. Either slot can be used.
Case 1
FCU8-EX561 : CC-Link
FCU8-EX561 : CC-Link Case 2 FCU8-EX563 : PROFIBUS-DP Case 3 FCU8-EX564 : CC-Link IE Field Case 4 FCU8-EX565 : EtherNet/IP Case 5 FCU8-EX568 : FL-net Case 6
FCU8-EX564 : CC-Link IE Field
FCU8-EX563 : PROFIBUS-DP Case 7 FCU8-EX564 : CC-Link IE Field Case 8 FCU8-EX565 : EtherNet/IP Case 9 FCU8-EX568 : FL-net Case 10 FCU8-EX565 : EtherNet/IP FCU8-EX568 : FL-net
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
255 IB-1501269-P
7.13.1 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link Use the dedicated communication cable for CC-Link network connection. Connect the communication cable to the communication connector of the CC-Link expansion unit. The connector for the communication cable on the CC-Link expansion unit side is provided with the CC-Link expansion unit. Use the Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable as the communication cable. CC-Link system cannot provide its performance with the Ver.1.10-incompatible cable, because it may cause the restrictions such as the reduction of maximum cable length, increment of cable length between stations, and unusability of mixed wire materials from the different manufacturers. Make sure to attach the terminator to the final station unit.
[Connection of terminator] Excerpt from CC-Link cable wiring manual (published by CC-Link partner association).
(Note 1) Unless the CC-Link dedicated cable is used, CC-Link system does not guarantee its operation. For the specifications of the CC-Link dedicated cable and the inquiries, see the homepage of the CC-Link Partner Association (http://www.cc-link.org/). (Click "Product Information".)
(Note 2) The value of the terminator that can be used for Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable is 110. (Note 3) The terminator attaching to the communication connector on the CC-Link expansion unit side is the
connector type which has built-in resistance. The communication connector has a two-level structure, however there is no difference in the specification attaching the cable to either one.
(FCU8-EX561)
CC-Link
(FCU8-EX70x)
CC-Link expansion unit
network connector
Prepared by MTB
Connector for communication cable
CC-Link cable
CC-Link remote I/O station
Option Relay Unit
Master Remote Local
CC-Link cable CC-Link cable
TR TR
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
256IB-1501269-P
[CC-Link cable connecting procedure] (1) Remove the sheath of the CC-Link cable about 4cm.
(2) Isolate the shield mesh and the wires coverd with shield tape. Remove the shield tape from wires.
(3) Insert the wires to the connector for CC-Link as below.
1pin Blue wire (cover notation: DA B) 2pin White wire (cover notation: DB W) 3pin Yellow wire (cover notation: DG Y) 4pin No connect 5pin Shield wire (cover notation: SLD)
(4) Press the connector with the use of a pliers. Check that the clamp point is flat to the connector for CC-Link.
4cm
Shield mesh
CC-Link cable
twist shield mesh
remove shield tape wires
Connector for CC-link
Inset
pliers
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
257 IB-1501269-P
(5) Insert the CC-Link cable into the connector of CC-Link unit.
(Note) Connector of CC-Link unit is two-step structure. It is not different even if attach the cable to whichever.
(6) Insert the terminator to the connector of CC-Link unit as in the figure. In the final station, the terminator connector is required.
[Noise countermeasures of CC-Link dedicated cable] When the CC-Link expansion unit is being used, expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
Refer to "4.4 Shield connection to ground" of "CC-Link Cable Wiring Manual" (published by CC-Link partner association) for shield wire grounding for CC-Link dedicated cable.
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting"
Control unit
Connector of CC-link unit
CC-link cable
CC-Link expansion unit
Terminator connector
Shield
CC-Link dedicated cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
258IB-1501269-P
7.13.2 Connecting I/O Device via PROFIBUS-DP The expansion unit FCU8-EX563 functions as a master station of PROFIBUS-DP. Use the PROFIBUS dedicated communication cable for connection to PROFIBUS-DP. Make sure to attach the terminator to the final station unit of the network. There is a slide switch on the PROFIBUS communication cable for setting the terminator. Turning "ON" the slide switch means attaching the terminator. Make sure to turn "ON" the slide switch for the last station, and to turn "OFF" for other stations. To use the expansion unit as a master station of PROFIBUS-DP, set the parameter with the configuration software (a tool for parameter setting). When setting the parameter, you need to use the cable G295 to connect the PROFIBUS-DP unit to the configuration software- installed personal computer (PC/AT compatible machine). (Note) The communication parameters, etc. at the time of setup are required to be backed up for maintenance.
(Note 1) Use the rotary switch of PROFIBUS-DP unit with the initial value "0". (Note 2) The performance is not guaranteed unless the PROFIBUS dedicated cable is used. For the specifications of
the PROFIBUS dedicated cable or for contact information for any inquiries, see the homepage of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI) (http://www.profibus.com/).
Contact information for inquiries related to the configuration software is as follows.
Hilscher Gesellschaft fur Systemautomation mbH Rheinstrasse 78 D-65795 Hattersheim Germany TEL: +49-6190-9907-0 FAX: +49-6190-9907-50
Contact in Japan: Euro-Far East Co., Ltd Lilas Nogisaka Bldg. #901 Minami Aoyama 1-15-18 Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-0062 JAPAN TEL: 03-3470-8769 FAX: 03-3478-8648
(FCU8-EX563)
(FCU8-EX70x)
provided by MTB
PROFIBUS-DP slave unit
PROFIBUS cable
Personal computer (PC/AT compatibles)
provided by MTB
Connector for configuration
G295 cable
Connector for PROFIBUS-DP communication
(Note 1) (Note 2)
PROFIBUS-DP unit
Option Relay Unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
259 IB-1501269-P
[Countermeasures for PROFIBUS cable noise] When the PROFIBUS-DP unit is being used, expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute to PROFIBUS cable (near the expansion unit).
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
Shield
PROFIBUS cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
260IB-1501269-P
7.13.3 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link IE Field The expansion unit FCU8-EX564 functions as a master station or slave (local) station of CC-Link IE Field. Connect the CC-Link IE Field-compatible equipment with an ethernet cable (category 5e or above and twisted pair shield cable). For details, refer to "M800/M80 Series CC-Link IE Field (Master/local) Specifications manual".
[Noise countermeasures of ethernet cable] When the CC-Link IE Field unit is being used, expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute to ethernet cable (near the expansion unit).
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
(FCU8-EX70x)
(FCU8-EX564)
Option relay unit
CC-Link IE Field unit
Connector for CC-Link IE Field communication
(* Prepared by MTB)
Switching hub Slave station
Ethernet cable (category 5e or above and twisted pair cable with shield)
CC-Link IE Field-compatible equipment
Slave station Slave station
Shield
Ethernet cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
261 IB-1501269-P
7.13.4 Connecting I/O Device via EtherNet/IP The expansion unit FCU8-EX565 functions as a scanner or an adapter of EtherNet/IP. Connect the EtherNet/IP- compatible equipment with an ethernet cable (category 5e or above and twisted pair shield cable). For details, refer to "M800/M80 Series EtherNet/IP Specifications manual".
(Note 1) EtherNet/IP unit is equipped with two RJ-45 connectors (LAN1 and LAN2); however, the function of EtherNet/ IP is available only on LAN1. Do not connect any cable to LAN2 port.
[Noise countermeasures of ethernet cable] When the EtherNet/IP expansion unit is being used, expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute to ethernet cable (near the expansion unit).
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
(FCU8-EX565)
(FCU8-EX70x)
EtherNet/IP
Option relay unit
EtherNet/IP unit
network connector (Only LAN1)
(* Prepared by MTB)
Industrial switching hub
Adapters
Scanners
Industrial switching hub
Ethernet cable (category 5e or above and twisted pair cable with shield)
EtherNet/IP-compatible equipment
Shield
Ethernet cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 7 Connection of Control Unit
262IB-1501269-P
7.13.5 Connecting I/O Device via FL-net The expansion unit FCU8-EX568 functions as a node of FL-net. Connect the FL-net-compatible equipment with an ethernet cable (category 5e or above and twisted pair shield cable).
(Note 1) FL-net expansion unit is equipped with two RJ-45 connectors (LAN1 and LAN2); however, the function of FL- net is available only on LAN1. Do not connect any cable to LAN2 port.
[Noise countermeasures of ethernet cable] When the FL-net expansion unit is being used, expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute to ethernet cable (near the expansion unit).
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
(FCU8-EX568)
(FCU8-EX70x)
FL-net
Option relay unit
FL-net expansion unit
network connector (Only LAN1)
(* Prepared by MTB)
Industrial switching hub
Industrial switching hub
Ethernet cable (category 5e or above and twisted pair cable with shield)
FL-net-compatible equipment
FL-net-compatible equipment
FL-net-compatible equipment
FL-net-compatible equipment
Shield
Ethernet cable
263 IB-1501269-P
8 Connection of Keyboard Unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 8 Connection of Keyboard Unit
264IB-1501269-P
The method for connecting to each unit and device from the keyboard unit is briefly explained in this chapter.
8.1 Keyboard Unit Connection System Drawing
8.2 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit Connect the operation panel I/O unit to connector of the keyboard unit.
NCKB G402
Operation panel I/O unit
cable
Keyboard unit
NCKB
G402
Operation panel I/O unit Keyboard unit (Rear view)
cable
265 IB-1501269-P
9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
266IB-1501269-P
9.1 Operation Panel I/O Unit Connection System Drawing
(Note 1) For the connection of machine operation panel, refer to the chapter "Connection of Machine Operation Panel". (Note 2) The section indicated with asterisk (*) indicates cable to be wired outside the operation panel.
Since the cable could be affected by the exogenous noise depending on the environment, the following noise countermeasure is recommended.
Expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute.
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
RIO3EXT
CG31
CG32
CG35
CG36
MPG
J210
J350/J351
J350/J351
J350/J351
J350/J351
J020/J021/J022
J023/J024/J025
NCKB G402
J224
J460/J461
AIO
CJ37
CJ38
CJ39
CJ40
CJ42
J350/J351
J460/J461
J350/J351
J350/J351
J225AO
CJ71 CJ71J010
RIO3 CJ71J012
[FCU8-DX731/DX750/DX760/DX761]
[FCU8-DX834]
DCIN J070/J071
CG34 J350/J351
CG33 J350/J351
J460/J461OPKB Machine control panel, etc.cable
cable (*) 24VDC Stabilized power supply
Machine control panel, etc. cable
cable Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
Analog I/O
Machine control panel, etc.
Analog input
cable
cable
cable
cable (*)
cable
cable (*)
Control unit
Control unit
cable
cable
Operation panel I/O unit
Remote I/O unit
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
5V manual pulse generator
12V manual pulse generator
cable (*)
cable
cable
cable
cable
cable
cable (*)
cable (*)
Keyboard unit
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.cable
Shield Cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
267 IB-1501269-P
9.2 Connecting with Power Supply Connect 24VDC power supply (general-purpose stabilized power supply) to the operation panel I/O unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J070/J071 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (DCIN connector)
0V +24V
DCIN
DCIN
Y FG
J070/J071 Operation panel
I/O unit
24VDC stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
268IB-1501269-P
9.3 Connecting with Frame Ground [FCU8-DX731]
[FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760]
FG FG FG
Round terminal Frame groundM4 screw
FG FG FG
Round terminal Frame groundM4 screw
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
269 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX761]
FG FG FG
FG FG FG
Round terminal Frame groundM4 screwM4 screw
Round terminal Frame ground
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
270IB-1501269-P
9.4 Connecting with Control Unit Connect the control unit to CJ71 connector of the operation panel I/O unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J010 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (CJ71 connector)
9.5 Connecting with Keyboard Unit Connect the keyboard unit to NCKB connector of the operation panel I/O unit.
CJ71 CJ71J010
RIO3EXT
RIO2.0 A
B
A M
P D
-2
(R2-TM)
Control unit Operation panel I/O unit
Terminator connector
NCKB
G402
Operation panel I/O unit Keyboard unit (Rear view)
cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
271 IB-1501269-P
9.6 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit Connect the remote I/O unit to RIO3EXT connector of the operation panel I/O unit.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J210 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (RIO3EXT connector)
(Note) The maximum connectable number of remote I/O units is 32.
Operation panel I/O unit RIO occupied stations FCU8-DX731 1, 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX750 1 to 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX760 1 to 4, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX761 1 to 5, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX834 1 to 4, 7 to 14, 20 to 22
J210
CJ71
J010(FCU8-DX731/750/760/761) J012(FCU8-DX834)
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Remote I/O 3ch
Max.49 to 53 stations Max. input: 1568 to 1696 points Max. output: 1568 to 1696 points
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
272IB-1501269-P
9.7 Connecting with Manual Pulse Generator (MPG) Connect the manual pulse generator to MPG connector of the operation panel I/O unit. Both 5V power supply type (UFO-01-2Z9) and 12V power supply type (HD60C) manual pulse generator can be used. Take the maximum cable length, etc. into consideration when selecting. (Note) Set one of the following parameters which is suitable for your manual pulse generator.
- 5V manual pulse generator (UFO-01-2Z9) : #1240 set12/bit0 = 1 (100 pulse/rev) -12V manual pulse generator (HD60C) : #1240 set12/bit0 = 0 ( 25 pulse/rev)
(1) Connecting with 5V manual pulse generator (maximum cable length: 20m) Connect the 5V manual pulse generator to the connector MPG.
MPG
NO.1
NO.1NO.2
NO.2NO.3 NO.1
5V 0V A B
5V 0V A B 5V 0V A B
5V 0V A B 5V 0V A B 5V 0V A B
J023
J024
J025
When connecting one 5V manual pulse generator
When connecting two 5V manual pulse generators
When connecting three 5V manual pulse
generators
Operation panel I/O unit
5V manual pulse generator
(Rear view)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
273 IB-1501269-P
(2) Connecting with 12V manual pulse generator (maximum cable length: 50m) Connect the 12V manual pulse generator to the connector MPG.
(Note 1) When selecting a manual pulse generator, make sure that its case and 0V terminal are insulated. (Note 2) Select 25pulse/rev or 100pulse/rev on the parameter screen.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J020/J021/J022 Cable" and "Cable: J023/J024/J025 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (MPG connector)
MPG
12V 0V A B
NO.1
NO.1NO.2
NO.2NO.3 NO.1
12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B
12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B
J020
J021
J022
12V manual pulse generator
HD60C (Rear view)
When connecting three 12V manual pulse
generators
When connecting two 12V manual pulse
generators
When connecting one 12V manual pulse
generator
Operation panel I/O unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
274IB-1501269-P
9.7.1 Handle Numbers
There are two types of the handle numbers assignment: automatic assignment and arbitrary assignment.
[Automatic assignment] Set all the parameters from "#1395 H1_pno (1st handle selection)" to "#1397 H3_pno (3rd handle selection)" to "0000". An example is shown below. "ENC": Connector on control unit (two channels), "MPG": Connector on operation panel I/O unit (Up to three channels)
[Arbitrary assignment] Assign the handle I/F arbitrary according to the setting values of the parameters "#1395 H1_pno (1st handle selection)" to "#1397 H3_pno (3rd handle selection)".
Operation panel I/O unit Handle assignment
1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle Used Group (a) ch1 Group (a) ch2 Group (a) ch3
Not used Group (b) ch1 Group (b) ch2
CJ71
ENC
CJ71 MPG (5V/12V)
(5V)
Manual Pulse Generator (ch1) Manual Pulse Generator (ch2) Manual Pulse Generator (ch3)
Operation panel I/O unit
Control unit
Manual Pulse Generator (ch1) Manual Pulse Generator (ch2)
[ Group (a) ]
[ Group (b) ]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
275 IB-1501269-P
9.8 Connecting with Machine Operation Panel Connect the machine operation panel to CG31/CG32/CG35/CG36/CJ37/CJ38/CJ39/CJ40/CJ42/OPKB connector of the operation panel I/O unit.
[FCU8-DX731]
[FCU8-DX750/DX761]
[FCU8-DX760]
[FCU8-DX834]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J350 Cable", "Cable: J460 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (CG31/CG32/CG35/CG36/CJ37/ CJ38/CJ39/CJ40/CJ42/OPKB connector)
CG31
CG32
CG35
CG36
J350
J350 FCU8-DX731Machine operation panel (example)
CJ37
CJ38
CJ39
CJ40
J350
J460 FCU8-DX750/DX761Machine operation panel (example)
J350
J460 FCU8-DX760
CJ37
CJ39
CJ38 CJ40 CJ42
Machine operation panel (example)
CG31
CG32
CG33
CG34
OPKB
J350
J350
J460
FCU8-DX834Machine operation panel (example)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
276IB-1501269-P
9.8.1 Wiring for 24V Common Input [FCU8-DX731]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine input connector pin assignment in "(1) CG31 (Machine signal input)" or "(5) CG35 (Machine signal input)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
CG35
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X240
X241
X242
X243
X244
X245
X246
X247
X248
X249
X24A
X24B
X24C
X24D
X24E
X24F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X250
X251
X252
X253
X254
X255
X256
X257
X258
X259
X25A
X25B
X25C
X25D
X25E
X25F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX731
CG31
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X200
X201
X202
X203
X204
X205
X206
X207
X208
X209
X20A
X20B
X20C
X20D
X20E
X20F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X210
X211
X212
X213
X214
X215
X216
X217
X218
X219
X21A
X21B
X21C
X21D
X21E
X21F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX731
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
NC
NC
0V
0V
0V
FG
0V
FG
24VDC(+)
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
277 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine input connector pin assignment in "(7) CJ37 (Machine signal input)" or "(9) CJ39 (Machine signal input)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
0V
FG
0V
FG
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DICOM
DICOM
CJ37
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DICOM
DICOM
A25 A24 A23 A22 A21
B25 B24 B23 B22 B21
A25 A24 A23 A22 A21
B25 B24 B23 B22 B21
CJ39
X220 X221 X222 X223 X224 X225 X226 X227 X228 X229 X22A X22B X22C X22D X22E X22F
X218 X219 X21A X21B X21C X21D X21E X21F
X200 X201 X202 X203 X204 X205 X206 X207 X208 X209 X20A X20B X20C X20D X20E
X214 X215 X216 X217
X20F X210 X211 X212 X213
X230 X231 X232 X233 X234 X235 X236 X237 X238 X239 X23A X23B X23C X23D X23E X23F X240 X241 X242 X243 X244 X245 X246 X247
X248 X249 X24A X24B X24C X24D X24E X24F X250 X251 X252 X253 X254 X255 X256 X257 X258 X259 X25A X25B X25C X25D X25E X25F
FCU8-DX750/DX760/DX761 FCU8-DX750/DX760/DX761
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
278IB-1501269-P
9.8.2 Wiring for 0V Common Input [FCU8-DX731]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine input connector pin assignment in "(1) CG31 (Machine signal input)" or "(5) CG35 (Machine signal input)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
CG35
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X240
X241
X242
X243
X244
X245
X246
X247
X248
X249
X24A
X24B
X24C
X24D
X24E
X24F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X250
X251
X252
X253
X254
X255
X256
X257
X258
X259
X25A
X25B
X25C
X25D
X25E
X25F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX731
CG31
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X200
X201
X202
X203
X204
X205
X206
X207
X208
X209
X20A
X20B
X20C
X20D
X20E
X20F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X210
X211
X212
X213
X214
X215
X216
X217
X218
X219
X21A
X21B
X21C
X21D
X21E
X21F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX731
0V
FG
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
NC
NC
0V
0V
24VDC(+)
Machine sideMachine side
Stabilized power supply
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
279 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine input connector pin assignment in "(7) CJ37 (Machine signal input)" or "(9) CJ39 (Machine signal input)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
0V
FG
0V
FG
X220 X221 X222 X223 X224 X225 X226 X227 X228 X229 X22A X22B X22C X22D X22E X22F
CJ37
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
X200 X201 X202 X203 X204 X205 X206 X207 X208 X209 X20A X20B X20C X20D X20E
X214
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
X218 X219 X21A X21B X21C X21D X21E X21F
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DICOM
DICOM
A25 A24 A23 A22 A21
X215 X216 X217
B25 B24 B23 B22 B21
X20F X210 X211 X212 X213
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
X230 X231 X232 X233 X234 X235 X236 X237 X238 X239 X23A X23B X23C X23D X23E X23F
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DICOM
DICOM
A25 A24 A23 A22 A21
B25 B24 B23 B22 B21
X240 X241 X242 X243 X244 X245 X246 X247
X248 X249 X24A X24B X24C X24D X24E X24F X250 X251 X252 X253 X254 X255 X256 X257 X258 X259 X25A X25B X25C X25D X25E X25F
CJ39
FCU8-DX750/DX760/DX761 FCU8-DX750/DX760/DX761
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
280IB-1501269-P
9.8.3 Wiring for Source Type Output [FCU8-DX731]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine input connector pin assignment in "(2) CG32 (Machine signal output)" or "(6) CG36 (Machine signal output)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
CG36
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y240
Y241
Y242
Y243
Y244
Y245
Y246
Y247
Y248
Y249
Y24A
Y24B
Y24C
Y24D
Y24E
Y24F
FCU8-DX731
0V
FG
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
0V
0V
CG32
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y200
Y201
Y202
Y203
Y204
Y205
Y206
Y207
Y208
Y209
Y20A
Y20B
Y20C
Y20D
Y20E
Y20F
FCU8-DX731
0V
FG
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
Y210
Y211
Y212
Y213
Y214
Y215
Y216
Y217
Y218
Y219
Y21A
Y21B
Y21C
Y21D
Y21E
Y21F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
DOCOM
0V
0V24VDC(+)
Machine sideMachine side
Stabilized power supply
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
281 IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine output connector pin assignment in "(8) CJ38 (Machine signal output)" or "(10) CJ40 (Machine signal output)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
0V FG
0V FG
CJ38
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
Y200 Y201 Y202 Y203 Y204 Y205 Y206 Y207 Y208 Y209 Y20A Y20B Y20C Y20D Y20E Y20F
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
Y210 Y211 Y212 Y213 Y214 Y215 Y216 Y217 Y218 Y219 Y21A Y21B Y21C Y21D Y21E Y21F
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DOCOM DOCOM DOCOM DOCOM
DOCOM DOCOM 0V 0V
CJ40
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
Y220 Y221 Y222 Y223 Y224 Y225 Y226 Y227 Y228 Y229 Y22A Y22B Y22C Y22D Y22E Y22F
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
Y230 Y231 Y232 Y233 Y234 Y235 Y236 Y237 Y238 Y239 Y23A Y23B Y23C Y32D Y23E Y23F
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DOCOM DOCOM DOCOM DOCOM
DOCOM DOCOM 0V 0V
FCU8-DX750/DX760/DX761 FCU8-DX750/DX760/DX761
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
282IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX834]
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine output connector pin assignment in "(2) CG32 (Machine signal output)" or "(4) CG34 (Machine signal output)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
CG32
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y200
Y201
Y202
Y203
Y204
Y205
Y206
Y207
Y208
Y209
Y20A
Y20B
Y20C
Y20D
Y20E
Y20F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
Y210
Y211
Y212
Y213
Y214
Y215
Y216
Y217
Y218
Y219
Y21A
Y21B
Y21C
Y21D
Y21E
Y21F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
FCU8-DX834
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
CG34
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y220
Y221
Y222
Y223
Y224
Y225
Y226
Y227
Y228
Y229
Y22A
Y22B
Y22C
Y22D
Y22E
Y22F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
Y230
Y231
Y232
Y233
Y234
Y235
Y236
Y237
Y238
Y239
Y23A
Y23B
Y23C
Y23D
Y23E
Y23F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
FCU8-DX834
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
283 IB-1501269-P
9.8.4 Example of Wiring CJ42 (FCU8-DX760)
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine output connector pin assignment in "(11) CJ42 (Machine signal output)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
0V FG
FCU8-DX760
CJ42
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05
Y260 Y261 Y262 Y263 Y264 Y265 Y266 Y267 Y268 Y269 Y26A Y26B Y26C Y26D Y26E Y26F
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05
Y270 Y271 Y272 Y273 Y274 Y275 Y276 Y277 Y278 Y279 Y27A Y27B Y27C Y27D Y27E Y27F
B04 B03 B02 B01
A04 A03 A02 A01
DOCOM DOCOM DOCOM DOCOM
DOCOM DOCOM 0V 0V24VDC(+)
Machine side
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
284IB-1501269-P
9.8.5 Connection with the scan input signal (FCU8-DX834)
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine output connector pin assignment in "(19) OPKB (Scan input, Scan output)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
KYC0*
X240 KYC1*
KYC2*
KYC3*
KYC4*
KYC5*
KYC6*
KYC7*
X241
KYD0*
X242X243X244X245X246X247
X248X249
KYD1*
KYD2*
KYD3*
KYD4*
KYD5*
KYD6*
KYD7*
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
OPKB
X24AX24BX24CX24DX24EX24F
X250X251X252X253X254X255X256X257
X258X259X25AX25BX25CX25DX25EX25F
X260X261X262X263X264X265X266X267
X268X269X26AX26BX26CX26DX26EX26F
X270X271X272X273X274X275X276X277
X278X279X27AX27BX27CX27DX27EX27F
FCU8-DX834Machine side
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
285 IB-1501269-P
9.8.6 Connection with the scan output signal (FCU8-DX834)
For connection details, refer to the descriptions on machine output connector pin assignment in "(19) OPKB (Scan input, Scan output)" of "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit".
Y240Y241Y242Y243Y244Y245Y246Y247
Y248Y249Y24AY24BY24CY24DY24EY24F
LC0A
LC1A
LC2A
LC3A
LD0A*
LD1A*
LD2A*
Y250Y251Y252Y253Y254Y255Y256Y257
Y258Y259Y25AY25BY25CY25DY25EY25F
LD3A*
LD4A*
LD5A*
LD6A*
LD7A*
Y260Y261Y262Y263Y264Y265Y266Y267
Y268Y269Y26AY26BY26CY26DY26EY26F
LC0B
LC1B
LC2B
LC3B
LD0B*
LD1B*
LD2B*
Y270Y271Y272Y273Y274Y275Y276Y277
Y278Y279Y27AY27BY27CY27DY27EY27F
LD3B*
LD4B*
LD5B*
LD6B*
LD7B*
OPKB
A21
A22
A23
A24
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
FCU8-DX834Machine side
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
286IB-1501269-P
9.9 Connecting with Analog Output Signal (FCU8-DX731) For the analog output signals, connect J225 cable to the AO connector of FCU8-DX731. The analog output signals are available to connect up to one point for the input, and up to one point for the output.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J225 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (AO connector)
AO J225
AO
15
7 AO
0V
1
11
5
FCU8-DX731
FG
Shell
Machine side
Shield
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
287 IB-1501269-P
9.10 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX761) For the analog input/output signals, connect J224 cable to the AIO connector of FCU8-DX761. The analog input/output signals are available to connect up to one point for the input, and up to one point for the output.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J224 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Operation Panel I/O Unit" (AIO connector)
AIO
J224
AIO
7
9
2
1
AO
0V
AI0
11
5
15
FCU8-DX761
FG FG
Shell
Machine side
Shield
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 9 Connection of Operation Panel I/O Unit
288IB-1501269-P
289 IB-1501269-P
10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
290IB-1501269-P
This chapter describes the connection of the remote I/O unit and machine control signals.
10.1 Remote I/O Unit Connection System Drawing
(Note 1) The mounted connector differs depending on the unit. Refer to the following chapter for which of the connector is mounted. "General Specifications: Remote I/O unit"
(Note 2) For the connection of machine operation panel, refer to the chapter "Connection of Machine Operation Panel". (Note 3) The section indicated with asterisk (*) indicates cable to be wired outside the electric cabinet.
Since the cable could be affected by the exogenous noise depending on the environment, the following noise countermeasure is recommended.
Expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute.
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
CJ31/CJ33
CJ32/CJ34
CJ35
CJ36
DCIN J070/J071
SDI
SDO
RIO2 J210
RIO1 J210
J350/J351
J350/J351
SDI1/SDI2
SDO1/SDO2
AIO1 J221
THERMISTOR
AI
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
Thermistor
Remote I/O unit, Control unit, etc.
Remote I/O unit
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
cable
Machine control panel, etc.
Machine control panel, etc.
cable
Next stage's remote I/O or terminator
cable
Previous stage's remote I/O
cable
cable
cable Analog I/O
24VDC Stabilized power supply
Remote I/O unit, Operation panel I/O unit, etc.
Multi-analog input
Shield Cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
291 IB-1501269-P
10.2 Connecting with Power Supply Connect 24VDC power supply (general-purpose stabilized power supply) to the remote I/O unit.
[FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable : J070/J071 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (DCIN connector)
0V FG
24V
0V
FG
DCIN
J070/071
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
292IB-1501269-P
[FCU8-DX651]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable : J070/J071 Cable", "Cable : G071 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (DCIN connector)
0V FG
24V
0V
J070/071 FG
DCIN
G071
DCIN
DCOUT
Y
Y
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
cable
cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
293 IB-1501269-P
10.3 Connecting with Frame Ground [FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 /
FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409]
Flat terminal: 175021-1 / 175023-1 Protection cover: 174817-2 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
[FCU8-DX651]
FG
Frame ground 250 Series flat terminal
FG
M4
Round terminal
screw Frame ground
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
294IB-1501269-P
10.4 Connecting with Control Unit
(Note) Connect the J210 cable to the RIO1 or RIO2 connector of the control unit. Check the connector position with the actual machine.
Refer to the "17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit" for the station No. setting.
RIO1
RIO2
J210
J210
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O 1ch
Remote I/O 2ch
Max.64 stations Max. input: 2048 points Max. output: 2048 points
Max.64 stations Max. input: 2048 points Max. output: 2048 points
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
295 IB-1501269-P
10.5 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit
Refer to the "17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit" for the station No. setting.
(Note) The maximum connectable number of remote I/O units is 32.
Operation panel I/O unit RIO occupied stations FCU8-DX731 1, 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX750 1 to 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX760 1 to 4, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX761 1 to 5, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 FCU8-DX834 1 to 4, 7 to 14, 20 to 22
J210
CJ71
J010(FCU8-DX731/750/760/761) J012(FCU8-DX834)
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Remote I/O 3ch
Max.49 to 53 stations Max. input: 1568 to 1696 points Max. output: 1568 to 1696 points
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
296IB-1501269-P
10.6 Connecting with Machine Control Signal (FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX651)
[FCU8-DX220]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J351 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (CJ31/CJ32 connector)
[FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J351 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (CJ31/CJ32/CJ33/CJ34 connector)
CAUTION 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
J351
J351
CJ31
CJ32
J351
J351
CJ31
CJ32
CJ33
CJ34
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
297 IB-1501269-P
[Machine input 0V common]
CJ33
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
X28
X29
X2A
X2B
X2C
X2D
X2E
X2F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X30
X31
X32
X33
X34
X35
X36
X37
X38
X39
X3A
X3B
X3C
X3D
X3E
X3F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX230/231
CJ31
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X00
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
X0A
X0B
X0C
X0D
X0E
X0F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
X19
X1A
X1B
X1C
X1D
X1E
X1F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX220/230/231/651
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
0V
FG
0V
FG
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
0V
0V
NC
0V
0V
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
298IB-1501269-P
[Machine input 24V common]
CJ33
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
X28
X29
X2A
X2B
X2C
X2D
X2E
X2F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X30
X31
X32
X33
X34
X35
X36
X37
X38
X39
X3A
X3B
X3C
X3D
X3E
X3F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX230/231
CJ31
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
X00
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
X0A
X0B
X0C
X0D
X0E
X0F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
X19
X1A
X1B
X1C
X1D
X1E
X1F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
DICOM
DICOM
FCU8-DX220/230/231/651
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
0V
FG
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
0V
0V
NC
+24V
NC
+24V
0V
0V
24VDC(+)
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
299 IB-1501269-P
[Machine output : FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX651]
CJ32
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y00
Y01
Y02
Y03
Y04
Y05
Y06
Y07
Y08
Y09
Y0A
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Y0E
Y0F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y1A
Y1B
Y1C
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
FCU8-DX220/230/651
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
CJ34
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
Y26
Y27
Y28
Y29
Y2A
Y2B
Y2C
Y2D
Y2E
Y2F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
FCU8-DX230
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
NC NC
+24V
+24V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
0V
0V
NC
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
NC
0V
0V
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
300IB-1501269-P
[Machine output : FCU8-DX231]
CJ32
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y00
Y01
Y02
Y03
Y04
Y05
Y06
Y07
Y08
Y09
Y0A
Y0B
Y0C
Y0D
Y0E
Y0F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y1A
Y1B
Y1C
Y1D
Y1E
Y1F
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
0V
FG
FCU8-DX231
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
CJ34
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
Y26
Y27
Y28
Y29
Y2A
Y2B
Y2C
Y2D
Y2E
Y2F
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A04
A03
A02
A01
FCU8-DX231
AO
AO*
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
0V
0V
NC
NC
+24V
+24V
NC
NC
0V
0V
24VDC(+) 24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side Machine side
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
301 IB-1501269-P
10.7 Connecting with Machine Control Signal (FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1)
[FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1]
Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (CJ35/CJ36/SDI/SDO connector)
CAUTION 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
FCU8-DX213 / 213-1 : CJ35 FCU8-DX654 / 654-1 : SDI
FCU8-DX213 / 213-1 : CJ36 FCU8-DX654 / 654-1 : SDO
2
2
2
2
: 0.08 - 1.5 mm : 0.08 - 1.5 mm : 0.25 - 0.75 mm : 0.25 - 1.0 mm
: 210-719 : WAGO
: WAGO
: 216 series
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
302IB-1501269-P
[Mounting the wire] (1) Insert a slotted screwdriver (blade width: 2.5mm). (2) Insert the wire and then pull the screwdriver out.
[Mounting the connector] (1) Push the connector to the lock lever position.
(2) Push the right and left lock levers up simultaneously.
[Removing the connector] (1) Push the right and left lock levers down simultaneously.
(2) Release the lock and pull the connector out.
(1)(2)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
303 IB-1501269-P
[Machine input (wiring example 1) : FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1]
X09
COMB+
X0A
COMA+
X0B
COMB+
X0C
COMA+
X0D
COMB+
X0E
COMA+
X0F
COMB+
X01
COMB+
X02
COMA+
X03
COMB+
X04
COMA+
X05
COMB+
X06
COMA+
X07
COMB+
X08
COMA+
CJ35
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
9
19
10
20
CJ36
X00
0V
FG
FCU8-DX213/213-1
COMA+
IO24VA
IO24VB
IO0VA
IO0VB
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
24VDC(+)
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
304IB-1501269-P
[Machine input (wiring example 2) : FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1]
FCU8-DX213/213-1
X09
X0A
X0B
X0C
X0D
X0E
X0F
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
CJ35
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
9
19
10
20
CJ36
X00
0V
FG
IO0VA
IO0VB
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
IO24VA
IO24VB
24VDC(+)
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
305 IB-1501269-P
[Machine output : FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1]
FCU8-DX213/213-1
Y01
COMB-
Y02
COMA-
Y03
COMB-
Y04
COMA-
Y05
COMB-
Y06
COMA-
Y07
COMB-
CJ36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
9
19
10
20
Y00
0V
FG
COMA-
IO24VA
IO24VB
IO0VA
IO0VB
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
24VDC(+)
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
306IB-1501269-P
[Safety machine input (wiring example 1) : FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1]
SX00A
SX00B
COMB+
COMA+
SX01A
SX01B
COMB+
COMA+
SX02A
SX02B
COMB+
COMA+
SX03A
SX03B
COMB+
COMA+
SX04A
SX04B
COMB+
COMA+
SX05A
SX05B
COMB+
COMA+
SX06A
SX06B
COMB+
COMA+
SX07A
SX07B
COMB+
COMA+
SDI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FCU8-DX654/654-1
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
9
19
10
20
0V
FG
IO24VA
IO24VB
IO0VA
IO0VB0V
FG
SDO
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
307 IB-1501269-P
[Safety machine input (wiring example 2) : FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1]
FCU8-DX654/654-1
SX00A
SX00B
SX01A
SX01B
SX02A
SX02B
SX03A
SX03B
SX04A
SX04B
SX05A
SX05B
SX06A
SX06B
SX07A
SX07B
SDI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
9
19
10
20
0V
FG
IO0VA
IO0VB0V
FG
SDO
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
COMA+
COMB+
IO24VA
IO24VB
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
308IB-1501269-P
[Safety machine output : FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDO
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SY00A
COMA-
COMB-
COMA-
COMB-
COMA-
COMB-
COMA-
COMB-
SY00B
SY01A
SY01B
SY02A
SY02B
SY03A
SY03B
9
19
10
20
0V
FG
IO24VA
IO24VB
IO0VA
IO0VB0V
FG
FCU8-DX654/654-1
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
S af
et y
re la
y
Lo ad
S af
et y
re la
y
Lo ad
S af
et y
re la
y
Lo ad
S af
et y
re la
y
Lo ad
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
309 IB-1501269-P
10.8 Connecting with Safety Machine Control Signal (FCU8-DX651)
[Safety DI input]
CAUTION 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
SX00A
SX00B
COM+
COM+
SX01A
SX01B
COM+
COM+
SX02A
SX02B
COM+
COM+
SX03A
SX03B
COM+
COM+
SX04A
SX04B
COM+
COM+
SX05A
SX05B
COM+
COM+
SX06A
SX06B
COM+
COM+
SX07A
SX07B
COM+
COM+
SDI1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
FCU8-DX651
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
SDI2
1
2
3
DCOUT
0V
FG
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Machine side
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
310IB-1501269-P
[Safety relay output]
H1
DC24V
SY00A
SDO1
A1
B1
SY00B
SX08A
SX08B
SDO2
A1
B1
FCU8-DX651
H2
DC24V
SY01A
SDO1
A2
B2
SY01B
SX09A
SX09B
SDO2
A2
B2
H3
DC24V
SY02A
SDO1
A3
B3
SY02B
SX0AA
SX0AB
SDO2
A3
B3
H4
DC24V
SY03A
SDO1
A4
B4
SY03B
SX0BA
SX0BB
SDO2
A4
B4
SYR00A
SYR00A
SYR00B
SYR00B
SYR01A
SYR01A
SYR01B
SYR01B
SYR02A
SYR02A
SYR02B
SYR02B
SYR03A
SYR03A
SYR03B
SYR03B
Relay Feedback
Relay Feedback
Relay Feedback
Relay Feedback
Machine side
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
311 IB-1501269-P
10.9 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX202)
For the analog input/output signals, connect J221 cable to the AIO1 connector of FCU8-DX202. The analog input/output signals are available to connect up to four points for the input, and up to one point for the output.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable : J221 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (AIO1 connector)
J221 AIO1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
312IB-1501269-P
Input/output circuit
CAUTION 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
AIO1
7
9
2
1
AO
0V
AI0
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
+24V
0V
FG
12
11
AI1
3
5
AI2
13
15
AI3
FCU8-DX202Machine side
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Shield Shell
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
313 IB-1501269-P
10.10 Connecting with Thermistor (FCU8-DX408) Connect the thermistor with THERMISTOR connector. The maximum cable length is 25m. The recommended shield cable is "HK-SB/20276XL, black, LF 1P X 22AWG" made by Taiyo Cabletec.
Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit" (THERMISTOR connector)
Note 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
3. Use the cable with shield and ground it in order to reduce the influence of noise.
THERMISTORCable with shieldThermistor
Maximum: 25m
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
314IB-1501269-P
[Thermistor cable connecting procedure] The thermistor cable has the following configuration:
(1) Solder the thermistor to the shield cable and cover the joint surface with the protection tube.
(2) Twist the shield of the cable or pull out the drain wire.
(3) Insert the wire into the THERMISTOR connecter as follows:
1 pin: Twisted shield wire or drain wire 2 pin: Not connected. 3 pin: Thermistor 4 pin: Thermistor
(4) Crimp the THERMISTOR connector with pliers. Make sure the crimp is horizontal.
Thermistor Cable with shield THERMISTOR connector
4 3
2 1
Tube for protection
Twister shield wire or drain wire
4 3 2 1
Insert
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
315 IB-1501269-P
[Connecting with thermistor:FCU8-DX408]
THERMISTOR
FG
4
CH1
FCU8-DX408
1
FG
4
CH2
1
FG
4
CH12
1
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
0V
FG
+24V
3
3
3
Shield
Thermistor
Thermistor CH1
Thermistor
Thermistor CH2
Thermistor
Thermistor CH12
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
Thermistor CH1
Thermistor CH2
Thermistor CH12
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
316IB-1501269-P
10.11 Connecting with Multi-analog Input Signal (FCU8-DX409)
There are four types of multi-analog input signals as below: - Voltage input signal - Current input signal - Thermocouple input signal - Resistance temperature detector input signal
Connect these signals to AI connector. Up to 4 points of multi-analog input signals (CH1 to CH4) can be connected. The measurement mode (voltage measurement, current measurement, temperature (thermocouple) measurement and temperature (resistance temperature detector) measurement) can be set for each CH and input corresponding to the mode can be performed. All CHs (CH1 to CH4) are set to the voltage measurement mode when the machine is delivered. Prepare the thermocouple, resistance temperature detector and cable with shield.
Precautions - Input the appropriate signal for the set measurement mode.
(Note) Do not input the voltage when the current or temperature (thermocouple or resistance temperature detector) measurement mode is set. This could result in faults of the unit. Pay close attention to the combination of the measurement mode setting and input.
- Running-in is required for about 10 to 15 minutes after the power is ON until the measurement value is stable. - Do not apply voltage or current from external devices before turning ON the power of multi-analog input unit.
This may damage the multi-analog input unit. Turn ON the power of the multi-analog input unit and external device at the same time, or wire circuit so that the power supply of the multi-analog input unit is turned ON first.
CAUTION 1. Connect the cable to the designated connector. Incorrect connections could damage the device.
2. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
317 IB-1501269-P
Maximum cable length is 50m. Line resistance is 10 or less, and line resistance difference is 0.1 or less (see below).
AI : DFMC1,5/12-ST-3,5-LR (Phoenix Contact)
Twisted wire : 0.2-1.5mm2
Bar terminal with insulation collar : 0.25-0.75mm2
Bar terminal without insulation collar : 0.25-1.5mm2
Stripping line length : 10mm
Type : SZS 0,4X2,5 VDE Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact
FCU8-DX409 : AI
Resistance temperature detector
Conducting wire A
Conducting wire B
- Line resistance of conducting wire A, B C and D is 10 or less. - Each line resistance difference between conducting wire A, B C and D is 0.1 or less.
Conducting wire A
Conducting wire B
- Line resistance of conducting wire A and B is 10 or less. - Line resistance difference between conducting wire A and B is 0.1 or less.
Connector for analog input
Machine side
Conducting wire C
Conducting wire D
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
318IB-1501269-P
[Mounting the wire] (1) Push in the wire opening lever (orange) using a slotted screwdriver (blade width: 2.5mm). (2) Insert the wire and then pull the screwdriver out of the wire opening lever.
[Mounting the connector] (1) Push the connector to the lock and release (LR) lever position.
(2) When the connector is pushed in to the end, the LR lever is applied. If the lever is loose, lift up the latch and tighten the lever.
[Removing the connector] (1) Push the lock and release (LR) levers down simultaneously.
(2) After unlocking (the connector is pushed out by the LR lever and left half-inserted), pull out the connector.
( ) 2)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
319 IB-1501269-P
(a) Connecting with the voltage input signal
- Use the twisted cable with shield to reduce the influence of noise. - Connect the shield to FG pin of AI connector. Ground the machine side, too. - Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
AI
3
5
1
FCU8-DX409
FG
0V
FG
1
2
3
DCIN
0V
FG
+24V
V+
V-
FG
7
9
12 FG
V+
V-
FG
15
17
13 FG
V+
V-
FG
19
21
24 FG
V+
V-
FG
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
24VDC(+)
Shield
Machine side
Stabilized power supply
Shield
Shield
Shield
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
320IB-1501269-P
(b) Connecting with the current input signal
- Use the twisted cable with shield to reduce the influence of noise. - Connect the shield to FG pin of AI connector. Ground the machine side, too. - Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
AI
4
5
1
FCU8-DX409
FG
I+
I-
8
9
12 FG
I+
I-
16
17
13 FG
I+
I-
20
21
24 FG
I+
I-
0V FG
1 2 3
DCIN
0V FG
+24V
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
FG
FG
FG
FG
24VDC(+)
Shield
Machine side
Shield
Shield
Shield
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
321 IB-1501269-P
(c) Connecting with the thermocouple input signal
- Connect the shield to FG pin of AI connector. Ground the thermocouple tip side, too. - Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON. - Keep the lead length of cold junction compensation resistor as short as possible (2 cm or shorter as a guide).
AI
3 5
1
FCU8-DX409
4
6(Pt100)
FG
(Pt100)
AI
CJ+
CJ-
V+ V-
CJ+
CJ-
CH1
7 9
12
8
10(Pt100)
FG
V+ V-
CJ+
CJ-
CH2
15 17
13
16
18(Pt100)
FG
V+ V-
CJ+
CJ-
CH3
19 21
24
20
22(Pt100)
FG
V+ V-
CJ+
CJ-
CH4
0V FG
1 2 3
DCIN
0V FG
+24V
FG
FG
FG
FG
24VDC(+)
Thermocouple
Cold junction compensation resistor
Set the lead length 2cm or shorter including the length to insert to AI connector. (As a guide)
Shield
Cold junction compensation resistor
2cm or shorter
Cold junction compensation resistor
Shield
Thermocouple
Cold junction compensation resistor
Shield
Thermocouple
Cold junction compensation resistor
Shield
Thermocouple
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
322IB-1501269-P
(d) Connecting with the resistance temperature detector input signal There are 3-wire type and 4-wire type for the connecting method of resistance temperature detector.
- Use the twisted cable with shield to reduce the influence of noise. - Connect the shield to FG pin of AI connector. Ground the cold junction compensation resistor side, too. - Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
AI
3
1
FCU8-DX409
5 6
FG
A
B
b
CH1
7
12
9 10
FG
A
B
b
CH2
15
13
17 18
FG
A
B
b
CH3
19
24
21 22
FG
A
B
b
CH4
0V FG
1 2 3
DCIN
0V FG
+24V
FG
FG
FG
FG
24VDC(+)
<3-wire type>
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
323 IB-1501269-P
- Use the twisted cable with shield to reduce the influence of noise. - Connect the shield to FG pin of AI connector. Ground the cold junction compensation resistor side, too. - Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
AI
3
1
FCU8-DX409
5 6
FG
A
B
b
CH1
7
12
9 10
FG
A
B
b
CH2
15
13
17 18
FG
A
B
b
CH3
19
24
21 22
FG
A
B
b
CH4
0V FG
1 2 3
DCIN
0V FG
+24V
a
a
4
8
a16
a20
FG
FG
FG
FG
24VDC(+)
<4-wire type>
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Resistance temperature detector
Shield
Stabilized power supply
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 10 Connection of Remote I/O Unit
324IB-1501269-P
325 IB-1501269-P
11 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 11 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator
326IB-1501269-P
The method for connecting to each unit and device from the manual pulse generator is briefly explained in this chapter.
11.1 Manual Pulse Generator Connection System Drawing
(Note 1) The section indicated with asterisk (*) indicates cable to be wired outside the operation panel. Since the cable could be affected by the exogenous noise depending on the environment, the following noise countermeasure is recommended.
Expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute.
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
ENC J026/J027
MPG J020/J021/J022
MPG J023/J024/J025
Control unit
cable (*)
5V manual pulse generator
5V manual pulse generator
12V manual pulse generator
cable (*)
Operation panel I/O unit
cable (*)
Operation panel I/O unit
Connecting to control unit (5V)
Connecting to operation panel I/O unit (12V)
Connecting to operation panel I/O unit (5V)
Shield Cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 11 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator
327 IB-1501269-P
11.2 Connecting with Control Unit
11.3 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit (1) 5V manual pulse generator (maximum cable length: 20m)
5V 0V A B
5V 0V A B5V 0V A B
ENC
NO.1
NO.1
NO.2
J026
J027
When connecting one 5V manual pulse generator
When connecting two 5V manual pulse generators
5V manual pulse generator (Rear view)
(Rear view) 5V manual pulse generator
MPG
NO.1
NO.1NO.2
NO.2NO.3 NO.1
5V 0V A B
5V 0V A B 5V 0V A B
5V 0V A B 5V 0V A B 5V 0V A B
J023
J024
J025
When connecting one 5V manual pulse generator
When connecting two 5V manual pulse generators
When connecting three 5V manual pulse
generators
Operation panel I/O unit
5V manual pulse generator
(Rear view)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 11 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator
328IB-1501269-P
(2) 12V manual pulse generator (maximum cable length: 50m)
(Note 1) When selecting a manual pulse generator, make sure that its case and 0V terminal are insulated. (Note 2) Select 25pulse/rev or 100pulse/rev on the parameter screen.
MPG
12V 0V A B
NO.1
NO.1NO.2
NO.2NO.3 NO.1
12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B
12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B
J020
J021
J022
12V manual pulse generator
HD60C (Rear view)
When connecting three 12V manual pulse
generators
When connecting two 12V manual pulse
generators
When connecting one 12V manual pulse
generator
Operation panel I/O unit
329 IB-1501269-P
12 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 12 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder
330IB-1501269-P
The method for connecting to each unit and device from the synchronous feed encoder is explained in this chapter.
12.1 Synchronous Feed Encoder Connection System Drawing
(Note 1) The section indicated with asterisk (*) indicates cable to be wired outside the operation panel. Since the cable could be affected by the exogenous noise depending on the environment, the following noise countermeasure is recommended.
12.2 Connecting with Control Unit
Expose the cable by removing a part of the cable sheath and use the shield clamp for the exogenous noise countermeasure.
When you cannot use the shield clamp, install a ferrite core as a substitute.
Shield clamp fitting: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting" Ferrite core: "EMC Installation Guidelines: EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core"
ENC R050/R054
Control unit
cable (*)
Synchronous feed encoder
Shield Cable
OSE1024-3-15-68
ENC
R050 cable
R054 cable
Synchronous feed encoder
331 IB-1501269-P
13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
332IB-1501269-P
This chapter briefly explains how to connect the machine operation panel manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric to each unit and device.
13.1 Machine Operation Panel Connection System Drawing
SUBP
J010
CJ71
CJ71 RIO3EXT
RIOIN
J210
0V FG
DCIN
J070/071
DCIN
J121
DCOUT
EMG
G460
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
G071 (Only when relaying the power)
Operation panel I/O unit
Control unit
Machine operation panel (main panel) Machine operation panel (sub panel)
Emergency stop switch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
333 IB-1501269-P
13.2 Connecting with Power Supply Connect 24VDC power supply (general-purpose stabilized power supply) to the main panel of the machine operation panel.
[FCU8-KB921/KB922/KB923/KB924/KB925/KB926]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J070/J071 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel: Main Panel A,B" (DCIN connector)
When sharing the 24VDC power supply with the control unit, connect a 24VDC relay cable.
[FCU8-KB921/KB922/KB923/KB924/KB925/KB926]
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: G071 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel: Main Panel A,B" (DCOUT connector)
DCIN
J070/J071
1
2
3
Y
0V
FG
24VDC(+)
Stabilized power supply
G071
DCOUT DCIN
Y
Y
Control unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
334IB-1501269-P
13.3 Connecting with Frame Ground [FCU8-KB921/KB922/KB923/KB924/KB925/KB926]
13.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit
When the remote I/O unit on the next stage is not relayed, connect the R2-TM terminal.
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J010 Cable", "Cable: J210 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel: Main Panel A,B" (RIOIN/RIOOUT connector)
FG
M4
Round terminal
screw
Frame ground
J010
CJ71
CJ71 RIO3EXT
RIOIN
J210
J210
RIOOUT
A
B
A M
P D
-2[FCU8-KB921/KB922/KB923/KB924 /KB925/KB926]
RIO occupied stations: 20 to 22 (3 stations)
Operation panel I/O unit
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O unit 3ch
Remote I/O unit 3ch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
335 IB-1501269-P
13.5 Connecting Emergency Stop Switch
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: J121 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel: Sub Panel A" (emergency stop switch)
13.6 Connecting with Sub Panel
Cable connection drawing: "Cable: G460 Cable" Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel: Main Panel A,B" (SUBP connector) Connector pin assignment: "General Specifications: Machine Operation Panel: Sub Panel A" (rapid traverse override, cutting override, memory protection switch)
J121
EMG
24V
E M
G
Control unit
Machine operation panel (sub panel)
Emergency stop switch
SUBP
G460
Cutting override
Rapid traverse override
Memory protection switch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
336IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) Use the special lead wire with a connector for wiring of rotary switch. Lead wire with a connector: ACX011-705 (7 terminals, 0.5m) Fuji Electric
(Note 2) A09 to 12 and B09 to 11 of SUBP are spares, so they do not need wiring. (Note 3) Select a rotary switch which guarantees 5V/1mA. (Note 4) Length of cables must be 0.5m or shorter. (Note 5) The numbers in the above diagram do not indicate the actual device numbers.
D
G
C
E
B
F
A
[SUBP]
X60
X61
X62
X63
X64
X65
X66
X67
X68
X69
X6A
X6B
B02
A01
B03
B01
A03
A02
A04
+5V
D
G
C
E
B
F
A
B06
A05
B07
B05
A07
A06
A08
+5V
X6D
X6E
X6F
X70
X71
D
G
C
E
B
F
A
B10
A09
B11
B09
A11
A10
A12
+5V
X6C
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
21 position
Rotary Switch
Real gray code
(For cutting feedrate override)
Rotary Switch (For rapid traverse override)
8 position Real gray code
Rotary Switch
(Spare)
Main panel A/B (FCU8-KB92x)
Sub panel A (FCU8-KB931/KB941)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
337 IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) Wirings for memory protection switches must be directly soldered to terminals or use tab terminals (110 series).
(Note 2) When wiring the emergency stop switch, the crimp terminal must be fastened with thread. (Note 3) For NCs whose control unit and display unit are integrated, wire the emergency stop switch
directly to the EMG connector of the control unit. (Use J121 cable) For a separated-type NC, wire it directly to the EMG connector of the operation panel I/O unit.
(Note 4) Select a rotary switch which guarantees 5V/1mA. (Note 5) Length of cables must be 0.5m or shorter. (Note 6) The numbers in the above diagram do not indicate the actual device numbers.
[SUBP]
X72
X73
X74
X75
B13
A13
A14
A15
A16
B20
A20
B14
B15
B16
+5V
[EXT]
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
EMG B04
A04
B01
A01
B02
A02
B03
A03
A05
B05
R
R
R
R
Main panel A/B (FCU8-KB92x)
Sub panel A (FCU8-KB931/KB941)
Memory protection switch 2 notch Key shape
2c Manual return type
Switch input spare (3 points)
Push down switch (For emergency stop)
Push Lock - Turn Reset
2a2b contact
Spare for signal relay
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
338IB-1501269-P
13.7 Software Interface Station Nos. of the machine operation panel RIOs are fixed. Device Nos. such as switch and LED on the machine operation panel are fixed as follows:
(1) Main panel (key switch/LED) Main panel is equipped with 55 switches and 55 LEDs. I/O devices are assigned to the switches and LEDs as illustrated below. (The numbers given in the drawing represent the positions, not the device Nos.)
(Note 1) If the stations of machine operation panel and other remote I/O unit overlap, all the connections of the overlapping stations are invalidated and cannot be used. Stations which do not overlap can be used.
Channel No. No Device Function
RIO1
#1 20th station Input: ZR5022/ZR5023 [Input] Reading switch data of the sub panel
#2 21st station Input: ZR5024/ZR5025
[Input] Reading key data of the main panel (55 points) [Output] LED lighting control (55 points)
Output: ZR6024/ZR6025
#3 22nd station Input: ZR5026/ZR5027 Output: ZR6026/ZR6027
RIO2
#1 20th station Input: ZR5222/ZR5223 [Input] Reading switch data of the sub panel
#2 21st station Input: ZR5224/ZR5225
[Input] Reading key data of the main panel (55 points) [Output] LED lighting control (55 points)
Output: ZR6224/ZR6225
#3 22nd station Input: ZR5226/ZR5227 Output: ZR6226/ZR6227
RIO3
#1 20th station Input: ZR5422/ZR5423 [Input] Reading switch data of the sub panel
#2 21st station Input: ZR5424/ZR5425
[Input] Reading key data of the main panel (55 points) [Output] LED lighting control (55 points)
Output: ZR6424/ZR6425
#3 22nd station Input: ZR5426/ZR5427 Output: ZR6426/ZR6427
X00 X01 X02 X03
Y00 Y01 Y02 Y03
X04 X05 X06 X07
Y04 Y05 Y06 Y07
X08 X09 X0A X0B
Y08 Y09 Y0A Y0B
X0C X0D X0E X0F
Y0C Y0D Y0E Y0F
X10 X11 X12 X13
Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13
X14 X15 X16 X17
Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
X18 X19 X1A X1B
Y18 Y19 Y1A Y1B
X1C X1D X1E X1F
Y1C Y1D Y1E Y1F
X20 X21 X22 X23
Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23
X24 X25 X26 X27
Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27
X28 X29 X2A
Y28 Y29 Y2A
X2C X2D X2E
Y2C Y2D Y2E
X30 X31 X32
Y30 Y31 Y32
X34 X35 X36
Y34 Y35 Y36
X38 X39 X3A
Y38 Y39 Y3A
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
339 IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "$" in the device No. varies depending on the channel No. of RIO. (RIO1 = "0", RIO2 = "2", RIO3 = "4")
(Note 2) While the key switch is pressed, "1" is input in the ZR device.
Key switch Device Key switch Device X00 ZR5$24[0] X20 ZR5$26[0] X01 ZR5$24[1] X21 ZR5$26[1] X02 ZR5$24[2] X22 ZR5$26[2] X03 ZR5$24[3] X23 ZR5$26[3] X04 ZR5$24[4] X24 ZR5$26[4] X05 ZR5$24[5] X25 ZR5$26[5] X06 ZR5$24[6] X26 ZR5$26[6] X07 ZR5$24[7] X27 ZR5$26[7] X08 ZR5$24[8] X28 ZR5$26[8] X09 ZR5$24[9] X29 ZR5$26[9] X0A ZR5$24[A] X2A ZR5$26[A] X0B ZR5$24[B] Not used ZR5$26[B] X0C ZR5$24[C] X2C ZR5$26[C] X0D ZR5$24[D] X2D ZR5$26[D] X0E ZR5$24[E] X2E ZR5$26[E] X0F ZR5$24[F] Not used ZR5$26[F] X10 ZR5$25[0] X30 ZR5$27[0] X11 ZR5$25[1] X31 ZR5$27[1] X12 ZR5$25[2] X32 ZR5$27[2] X13 ZR5$25[3] Not used ZR5$27[3] X14 ZR5$25[4] X34 ZR5$27[4] X15 ZR5$25[5] X35 ZR5$27[5] X16 ZR5$25[6] X36 ZR5$27[6] X17 ZR5$25[7] Not used ZR5$27[7] X18 ZR5$25[8] X38 ZR5$27[8] X19 ZR5$25[9] X39 ZR5$27[9] X1A ZR5$25[A] X3A ZR5$27[A] X1B ZR5$25[B] Not used ZR5$27[B] X1C ZR5$25[C] Not used ZR5$27[C] X1D ZR5$25[D] Not used ZR5$27[D] X1E ZR5$25[E] Not used ZR5$27[E] X1F ZR5$25[F] Not used ZR5$27[F]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
340IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) "$" in the device No. varies depending on the channel No. of RIO. (RIO1 = "0", RIO2 = "2", RIO3 = "4")
LED Device LED Device Y00 ZR6$24[0] Y20 ZR6$26[0] Y01 ZR6$24[1] Y21 ZR6$26[1] Y02 ZR6$24[2] Y22 ZR6$26[2] Y03 ZR6$24[3] Y23 ZR6$26[3] Y04 ZR6$24[4] Y24 ZR6$26[4] Y05 ZR6$24[5] Y25 ZR6$26[5] Y06 ZR6$24[6] Y26 ZR6$26[6] Y07 ZR6$24[7] Y27 ZR6$26[7] Y08 ZR6$24[8] Y28 ZR6$26[8] Y09 ZR6$24[9] Y29 ZR6$26[9] Y0A ZR6$24[A] Y2A ZR6$26[A] Y0B ZR6$24[B] Not used ZR6$26[B] Y0C ZR6$24[C] Y2C ZR6$26[C] Y0D ZR6$24[D] Y2D ZR6$26[D] Y0E ZR6$24[E] Y2E ZR6$26[E] Y0F ZR6$24[F] Not used ZR6$26[F] Y10 ZR6$25[0] Y30 ZR6$27[0] Y11 ZR6$25[1] Y31 ZR6$27[1] Y12 ZR6$25[2] Y32 ZR6$27[2] Y13 ZR6$25[3] Not used ZR6$27[3] Y14 ZR6$25[4] Y34 ZR6$27[4] Y15 ZR6$25[5] Y35 ZR6$27[5] Y16 ZR6$25[6] Y36 ZR6$27[6] Y17 ZR6$25[7] Not used ZR6$27[7] Y18 ZR6$25[8] Y38 ZR6$27[8] Y19 ZR6$25[9] Y39 ZR6$27[9] Y1A ZR6$25[A] Y3A ZR6$27[A] Y1B ZR6$25[B] Not used ZR6$27[B] Y1C ZR6$25[C] Not used ZR6$27[C] Y1D ZR6$25[D] Not used ZR6$27[D] Y1E ZR6$25[E] Not used ZR6$27[E] Y1F ZR6$25[F] Not used ZR6$27[F]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
341 IB-1501269-P
(2) Sub panel Sub panel is equipped with cutting override, rapid traverse override, memory protection switch and emergency stop switch. Direct wiring is available for the emergency stop switch, and device numbers for the other switches are assigned as listed below:
(a) Cutting override (6bit)
(b) Rapid traverse override (6bit)
(c) Memory protection switch (1bit)
(Note 1) "$" in the device No. varies depending on the channel No. of RIO. (RIO1 = "0", RIO2 = "2", RIO3 = "4")
Setting value
Device ZR5$22[0] ZR5$22[1] ZR5$22[2] ZR5$22[3] ZR5$22[4] ZR5$22[5]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 0 0 0 1 20 1 1 0 0 0 0 30 0 1 0 0 0 1 40 0 1 1 0 0 0 50 1 1 1 0 0 1 60 1 0 1 0 0 0 70 0 0 1 0 0 1 80 0 0 1 1 0 0 90 1 0 1 1 0 1
100 1 1 1 1 0 0 110 0 1 1 1 0 1 120 0 1 0 1 0 0 130 1 1 0 1 0 1 140 1 0 0 1 0 0 150 0 0 0 1 0 1 160 0 0 0 1 1 0 170 1 0 0 1 1 1 180 1 1 0 1 1 0 190 0 1 0 1 1 1 200 0 1 1 1 1 0
Setting value
Device ZR5$22[6] ZR5$22[7] ZR5$22[8] ZR5$22[9] ZR5$22[A] ZR5$22[B]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 0 0 0 1 20 1 1 0 0 0 0 30 0 1 0 0 0 1 40 0 1 1 0 0 0 50 1 1 1 0 0 1 60 1 0 1 0 0 0 70 0 0 1 0 0 1 80 0 0 1 1 0 0 90 1 0 1 1 0 1
100 1 1 1 1 0 0
Setting value
Device ZR5$23[2]
LOCK 0 ENABLE 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel
342IB-1501269-P
343 IB-1501269-P
14 Connection of Handy Terminal
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 14 Connection of Handy Terminal
344IB-1501269-P
This chapter briefly explains how to connect the handy terminal to each unit and device.
14.1 Handy Terminal Connection System Drawing
(Note 1) Connect the HOST connector of the G430 cable to the grounding plate.
14.2 Connecting with Control Unit Connect the handy terminal to SIO connector and ENC connector of the control unit. Also, connect the emergency stop switch (SW1), enable switch (SW2), selector switch (SW) and 24VDC input to the control panel terminal block.
SIO G430
ENC
HOST cable
Handy terminal Control unit
G430 cable
terminal block
Handy terminal
Connector name: HOST
Control panel
Control unit
FG ENC
SIO
SIOENC
345 IB-1501269-P
15 Cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
346IB-1501269-P
15.1 Symbols for Writing Cable Drawings
(1) indicates twisted pair.
(2) indicates the shield sheath.
(3) indicates shield clamping to the grounding plate.
(4) In the cable drawings, the partner of the twisted pair cable is given a priority, so please be aware that the pin No. of the connectors at both ends are not necessarily in sequential order.
(5) Equivalent parts can be used for the connector, contact and wire material.
(6) The tolerances of the cables provided by MITSUBISHI are as follows:
Cable length (mm) Tolerances (mm) 600 30
601 1000 50
1001 5000 100
5001 10000 150
10001 15000 200
15001 20000 300
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
347 IB-1501269-P
15.2 Cable Relating to NC 15.2.1 FCUA-R050/R054 Cable
Max. cable length: 30m Application: Synchronous encoder - control unit
(Note) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
[ENC1] Plug: 10120-3000VL Shell: 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material: UL1061-2464 AWG2412P Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
[FCUA-R050 cable] Connector: MS3106B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A Manufacturer: ITT Cannon [FCUA-R054 cable] Connector: MS3108B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A Manufacturer: ITT Cannon
ENC
FCUA-R050
FCUA-R054
ENC1A (ENC2A) ENC1A*(ENC2A*) ENC1B (ENC2B) ENC1B*(ENC2B*) ENC1Z (ENC2Z) ENC1Z*(ENC2Z*)
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
A N C R B P K
ENC1 4 14 3 13 2 12 1
11
10
20
H
FG
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
348IB-1501269-P
15.2.2 G071 Cable Max. cable length: 1m Application: 24VDC relay cable for machine operation panel
(Note) These cables are available only when wired to a same control panel.
15.2.3 G123 Cable Application: Cable for emergency stop release
R : Red W : White G : Green
[DCOUT] Connector: 2-178288-3 Contact: 1-175218-5 x 3 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Wire material: UL1264 AWG16 (Red, White, Green)
[DCIN] Connector: 2-178288-3 Contact: 1-175218-5 x 3 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Wire material : UL1007 AWG22
[EMG] Connector : 50-57-9403 Contact : 0016020103 Manufacturer : MOLEX
Y
Y
DCOUT DCIN
24V 1
2
3
GND
FG
24V1
2
3
GND
FG
R R
W W
G G
20mm
EMG
G123
Circuit display 1st pole
EMG
1
2
3
FG
+24V
EMGIN
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
349 IB-1501269-P
15.2.4 G430 Cable Max. cable length: 10m Application: For connection to handy terminal
(Note) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
[ENC][SIO] Plug: 10120-3000VL Shell: 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M Wire material: UL1061-2464 AWG28 x 3P Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable [Control panel terminal block] Crimp terminal: R1.25-3.5 Manufacturer: JST Wire material: UL1061-2464 AWG24 x 8P Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
FG terminal Crimp terminal: V1.25-4 Manufacturer: JST Wire material: UL1061-2464 AWG18(Green) Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
[HOST] Plug: CDB-25S Contact: CD-SC-221 21 Manufacturer: Hirose Electric
ENC HOST
SIO
Control unit
Cotrol panel terminal block
Handy terminal
HOST
16 17 20
14 15 7 8
6
8 18 5
HA1A HA1B 0V
RD(RXD) SD(TXD) CS(CTS) RS(RTS) DR(DSR) ER(DTR)
HA HB 0V
SD(TXD) RD(RXD) RS(RTS) CS(CTS)
0V
FG
FG
7 17 8 18 9 19 11
9 10
DED1 DCOM1
SW2_C11 SW2_C12
21 22
DED2 DCOM2
SW2_C21 SW2_C22
11 12
EMG1 ECOM1
SW1_NC11 SW1_NC12
23 24
EMG2 ECOM2
SW1_NC21 SW1_NC22
18 19
SEL1 SCOM1
SW6_NO1 SW6_C1
25 13
+24V 0V
0V
FG
ENC
SIO
1 FG
24VDC(+) 24VDC(-)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
350IB-1501269-P
15.2.5 G460 Cable Max. cable length: 0.5m Application: Cable for machine operation panel (cable between main panel and sub panel)
(Note) Coat the connector [SW-NO][SW-C] with an insulation.
[RSW1][RSW2] 1 : Purple 2 : Blue 3 : Green 4 : Yellow 5 : Orange 6 : Red 7 : Brown
[SUBP] [RSW1][RSW2] Connector: HIF3BA-40D-2.54C Contact: HIF3-2428SC x 16 Manufacturer: Hirose Electric
Wire material: UL1007 AWG24 (Red, Black)
Connector with cable : ACX011-705 x 2 Contact: 1-175218-5 x 3 Manufacturer: Fuji Electric [SW-NO][SW-C] Connector: STO-01T-110N Manufacturer: JST
SW-NO
SW-C
S U
B P
G 46
0
R S
W 1
SUBP
RSW1
RSW2
SW-NO SW-C
R S
W 2
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A
5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A
13A 13B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SW-NO SW-C
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
351 IB-1501269-P
15.2.6 J010 Cable Max. cable length: 1m Application: Operation panel I/O interface cable
(Note) Use the wire material of which impedance characteristics is 110.
15.2.7 J012 Cable Max. cable length: 1m Application: Operation panel I/O interface cable (for FCU8-DX834)
(Note) Use the wire material of which impedance characteristics is 110.
[CJ71] Connector : 2-1318119-4 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Wire material : HRZEV-SB-A(20276) AWG223P Manufacturer: DYDEN
[CJ71] Connector : 2-1318119-4 Contact : 1318107-1 (1318105-1) Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Wire material : HK-SB/20276XL Black LF 2P22AWG Manufacturer: Taiyo Cabletec
[RIO] Connector : 1-1318119-3 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
CJ71 CJ71
AWG223P
TXRXD*
TXRXD
5V
3.3V
0V
0V
TXRXD*
TXRXD
5V
3.3V
0V
0V
CJ71
1A
3B
1B
2A
2B
4B
1A
3B
1B
2A
2B
4B
CJ71
4A 4AFG FG
Drain wire
(With shield / drain wire)
Drain wire
CJ71 RIO
J012 L**.*M
CJ71
1A
3B
1BTXRXD*
TXRXD
2A5V
3.3V 2B
0V
4BNC
TXRXD*
TXRXD
0V
1A
3B
1B
2A
2B
RIO
4AFG FG
3A
3A
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Drain wire Drain wire
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
352IB-1501269-P
15.2.8 J020/J021/J022 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: Manual Pulse Generator cable (12V)
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) The cables for 1ch and 2ch are compatible with F320 or F321 cable of the conventional model. (Note 3) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly
otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[MPG] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG24 6P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
[1ch][2ch][3ch] Crimp terminal : R1.25-3 12 Manufacturer: JST
Cable name 1ch 2ch 3ch J020 cable
J021 cable
J022 cable
: Usable channel Unconnectable to control unit side
MPG
MPG
HA1A HA1B +12V
0V HA2A HA2B +12V
0V HA3A HA3B +12V
0V
FG
4 14 6 1 3 13 16 11 2 12 9 5
HA1 HB1 12V1 0V1 HA2 HB2 12V2 0V2 HA3 HB3 12V3 0V3
1ch
2ch
3ch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
353 IB-1501269-P
15.2.9 J023/J024/J025 Cable Max. cable length: 20m Application: Manual Pulse Generator cable (5V)
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) The cables for 1ch and 2ch are compatible with F023 or F024 cable of the conventional model. (Note 3) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly
otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[MPG] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG22 6P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
[1ch][2ch][3ch] Crimp terminal : R1.25-3 12 Manufacturer: JST
Cable name 1ch 2ch 3ch J023 cable
J024 cable
J025 cable
: Usable channel Unconnectable to control unit side
MPG
MPG
HA1A HA1B
+5V 0V
HA2A HA2B
+5V 0V
HA3A HA3B
+5V 0V
4 14 10 1 3 13 20 11 2
12 19 15
FG
HA1 HB1 5V1 0V1 HA2 HB2 5V2 0V2 HA3 HB3 5V3 0V3
1ch
2ch
3ch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
354IB-1501269-P
15.2.10 J026/J027 Cable Max. cable length: 20m (the maximum length of the cable when connected to the control unit via other
units) Application: Manual Pulse Generator cable (5V)
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) The cables are compatible with G023 or G024 cable of the conventional model. (Note 3) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly
otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[MPG] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG22 6P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
[1ch][2ch] Crimp terminal : R1.25-3 8 Manufacturer: JST
Cable name 1ch 2ch J026 cable
J027 cable
: Usable channel Unconnectable to operation board side
MPG
MPG
FG
HA1A HA1B
+5V 0V
HA2A HA2B
+5V 0V
8 18 10 5 7 17 20 15
HA1 HB1 5V1 0V1 HA2 HB2 5V2 0V2
1ch
2ch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
355 IB-1501269-P
15.2.11 J030/J031 Cable Max. cable length: 15m (the maximum length of the cable when connected to the control unit via other
units) Application: RS232C I/F cable
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) Signal names in parentheses "( )" are generally used. (Note 3) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly
otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[SIO] Connector: 10120-3000PE Case: 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material: 2464C BIOS-CL3-26 07P Manufacturer: Bando Electric Wire
[SIO1][SIO2] Connector: CDB-25S Contact: CD-SC-111 Lock nut: HD-LNA Manufacturer: Hirose Electric
Cable name SIO1 SIO2 J030 cable
J031 cable
: Usable channel
SIO SIO1
SIO2
SIO SIO1
FG
12 2
13 3
14 4
1
17 7
18 8
19 9
11
SD1(TXD1) RD1(RXD1)
RS1(RTS1) CS1(CTS1)
ER1(DTR1) DR1(DSR1)
0V
SD2(TXD2) RD2(RXD2)
RS2(RTS2) CS2(CTS2)
ER2(DTR2) DR2(DSR2)
0V
2 3
4 5
20 6
7
2 3
4 5
20 6
7
SIO2
SD(TXD) RD(RXD)
RS(RTS) CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) DR(DSR)
0V
SD(TXD) RD(RXD)
RS(RTS) CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) DR(DSR)
0V
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
356IB-1501269-P
15.2.12 J070/J071 Cable Max. cable length: 15m(J070) / 20m(J071) Application: 24VDC power cable
[DCIN] Connector : 2-178288-3 Contact: : 1-175218-5 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
[J070 cable] Wire material : 2464C BIOS-CL3-16 02C 16AWG(26/0.26) Manufacturer: BANDO DENSEN [J071 cable] Wire material : UL2464-SB TEW 214AWG(41/0.26)LF Black White Manufacturer: Hitachi Metals
Crimp terminal : R1.25-4 3 Manufacturer: JST
1
2
3
Y
DCIN
DCIN 1 2 3
+24V 0V FG
+24V 0V FG
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
357 IB-1501269-P
15.2.13 J100 Cable Max. cable length: 20m Application: Skip
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[SKIP] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG24 6P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
Crimp terminal : R1.25-3.5 12 Manufacturer: JST
SKIP
SKIP
FG
COM
COM
SKIP0
SKIP1
SKIP2
SKIP3
COM
COM
SKIP4
SKIP5
SKIP6
SKIP7
1
11
2
12
3
13
5
15
7
17
8
18
COM
COM
SK0
SK1
SK2
SK3
COM
COM
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
358IB-1501269-P
15.2.14 J120 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Emergency stop cable
15.2.15 J121 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Emergency stop cable for machine operation panel
[EMG] Connector : 50-57-9403 (former model number: 51030-0330) Contact : 0016020103 (former model number: 50084-8129) Manufacturer: MOLEX
Wire material : 2464C BIOS-CL3-22 01P Manufacturer: BANDO DENSEN
Crimp terminal : R1.25-3 2 Manufacturer: JST
[EMG] Connector : 50-57-9403 Contact : 0016020103 Manufacturer: MOLEX
Wire material : 2464C BIOS-CL3-22 01P Manufacturer: BANDO DENSEN
Crimp terminal : Faston terminal #110 with insulating coating
EMG
EMG
24V
EMG
COM EMG IN
FG
24V EMG
1
2 3
R1.25-3
EMG 24V
EMG
EMG
COM EMG IN
FG
24V EMG
1
2 3
Faston terminal#110
Red
White
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
359 IB-1501269-P
15.2.16 J210 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: Remote I/O 2.0 communication cable
(Note 1) Use the wire material of which impedance characteristics is 110.
[RIO] Connector : 1-1318119-3 Contact : 1318107-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Wire material : HK-SB/20276XL Black LF 2P 22AWG Manufacturer: Taiyo Cabletec
RIO RIO
RIO RIO
TXRXD
TXRXD*
NC
0V
FG
NC
TXRXD
TXRXD*
NC
0V
FG
NC
1A
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
1A
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
AWG222P
Drain wire
(With shield / drain wire)
Drain wire
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
360IB-1501269-P
15.2.17 J221 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Analog input/output cable (for remote I/O unit)
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
(Note 3) FCUA-R031 cable of the conventional models is also available to use. (Note 4) For FCUA-R031, AOG and AI3G share the pin #15. For J221, however, AOG uses the pin #9.
[AIO] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG24 6P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
Crimp terminal : R1.25-3.5 x 10 Manufacturer: JST
AI2
AI0
AI1
AI3
AI3G
AOG
AO
AI0G
AI1G
AI2G
AIO
AIO
2
1
12
11
3
5
13
15
7
9
AI0G
AI1
AI0
AI1G
AI0
0V
AI1
0V
AI2G
AI3
AI2
AI3G
AI2
0V
AI3
0V
AOG
AO
0V
AO
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
361 IB-1501269-P
15.2.18 J224 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Analog input/output cable (for operation panel I/O unit)
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-56S0-008-F for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[AIO] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-56F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG24 2P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
Crimp terminal : R1.25-3.5 x 10 Manufacturer: JST
AIO
AI0
AO
AOG
AI0G
AIO
2
1
11
5
15
7
9
AI0G
AI0
AOG
AO
AI
0V
0V
0V
0V
AO
0V
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
362IB-1501269-P
15.2.19 J225 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Analog output cable (for operation panel I/O unit)
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
15.2.20 J303 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: LAN straight cable
[AO] Connector : 10120-3000PE Case : 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material : UL2464 U-TKVVBS AWG24 1P Manufacturer: Tachii Electric Wire
Crimp terminal : R1.25-3.5 x 2P Manufacturer: JST
[LAN] Connector : J00026A0165 Boot : B00080F0090 Manufacturer: JAPAN Telegrtner
Wire material: FANC-IEF-SB 24AWG 4P Manufacturer: Kuramo Electric
A O
AI0O
AOG
AO 7 1 AOG
AO AOG AO
LAN LAN
LAN LAN
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8 Double shield ShieldShield
Shell Shell
White orange
Orange
White green
Green
Blue
White blue
White brown
Brown
White orange
Orange
White green
Green
Blue
White blue
White brown
Brown
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
363 IB-1501269-P
15.2.21 J350 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: DI/DO
15.2.22 J351 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: DI/DO
[CG31,CG32,CG35,CG36,CJ31,CJ32,CJ33,CJ34,CJ38,CJ40,CJ42] Connector: XG4M-4030 / 7940-6500SC Strain relief: XG4T-4004 / 3448-7940 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
Wire material: UL2651 AWG28x40 (FLEX-S(40)-7/0.127 7030 2651P) Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
[CG31,CG32,CG35,CG36,CJ31,CJ32,CJ33,CJ34,CJ38,CJ40,CJ42] Connector: XG4M-4030 / 7940-6500SC Strain relief: XG4T-4004 / 3448-7940 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
Wire material: UL2651 AWG28x40 (FLEX-S(40)-7/0.127 7030 2651P) Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
CG31,CG32,CG35,CG36, CJ31,CJ32,CJ33,CJ34, CJ38,CJ40,CJ42
CG31,CG32,CG35,CG36, CJ31,CJ32,CJ33,CJ34, CJ38,CJ40,CJ42
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
364IB-1501269-P
15.2.23 J460 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: DI/DO
(Note) This cable is used to connect the operation panel I/O unit.
15.2.24 J461 Cable Max. cable length: 50m Application: DI/DO
(Note) This cable is used to connect the operation panel I/O unit.
[CJ37,CJ39] Connector: XG4M-5030 / 7950-6500SC Strain relief: XG4T-5004 / 3448-7950 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
Wire material: UL2651 AWG28x50 (FLEX-S(50)-7/0.127 7030 2651P) Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
[CJ37,CJ39] Connector: XG4M-5030 / 7950-6500SC Strain relief: XG4T-5004 / 3448-7950 Manufacturer: OMRON / 3M
Wire material: UL2651 AWG28x50 (FLEX-S(50)-7/0.127 7030 2651P) Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
CJ37,CJ39
CJ37,CJ39
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
365 IB-1501269-P
15.2.25 R2-TM Terminator Connector Application: Terminator for remote I/O interface
(Note 1) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing they are compatible with the specifications.
(Note 2) Cover the 110 terminator with a black insulation tube. (Note 3) Stamp the connector name "R2-TM" in white on the rear of the connector.
[R2-TM] Connector: 1-1318119-3 Contact: 1318108-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity Resistor: 110 1/4W
1 2 3
A
B
A M
P D
-2 R2-TM
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B
TXRX TXRX*
0V
FG
R2-TM
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
366IB-1501269-P
15.3 Cable Relating to Drive Unit 15.3.1 Cable Wire and Assembly (1) Cable wire
The specifications of the wire used for each cable, and the machining methods are shown in this section. Mitsubishi uses the cables shown in the tables below. When manufacturing the encoder cable and battery connection cable, use the wires shown below or equivalent products.
(a) Heat resistant specifications cable
(b) General-purpose heat resistant specifications cable
(Note 1) Bando Electric Wire (http://www.bew.co.jp/) (Note 2) The Mitsubishi standard cable is the (a) Heat resistant specifications cable. When the working environment
temperature is low and so higher flexibility is required, use the (b) General-purpose heat resistant specifications cable.
Core identification
(2) Cable assembly Assemble the cable with the cable shield wire securely connected to the ground plate of the connector.
Wire type (other manufacturer's
product)
Finish outer
diameter
Sheath material
No. of pairs
Wire characteristics Configura
tion Conductive
resistor Withstand
voltage Insulation resistance
Heat resistance
temperature Flexibility
BD20288 Compound 6-pair shielded cable Specification No. Bangishi-17145 (Note 1)
8.7mm Heat
resistant PVC
2 (0.5mm2) 100
strands/ 0.08mm
40.7/km or less 500VAC/
1min 1000M/km
or more 105C 70 104 times or more at R200
4 (0.2mm2) 40
strands/ 0.08mm
103/km or less
Wire type (other manufacturer's
product)
Finish outer
diameter
Sheath material No. of pairs
Wire characteristics Configurat
ion Conductive
resistor Withstand
voltage Insulation resistance
Heat resistance
temperature Flexibility
BD20032 Compound 6-pair shielded cable Specification No. Bangishi-16903 Revision No. 3 (Note 1)
8.7mm PVC
2 (0.5mm2) 100
strands/ 0.08mm
40.7/km or less
500VAC/ 1min
1000M/ km or more 60C 100 104 times
or more at R200 4 (0.2mm2)
40 strands/ 0.08mm
103/km or less
Pair No. Insulator color L1 L2
A1 (0.5mm2) Red White A2 (0.5mm2) Black White B1 (0.2mm2) Brown Orange B2 (0.2mm2) Blue Green B3 (0.2mm2) Purple White B4 (0.2mm2) Yellow White
A1
A2 B2
B1 B4
B3
L2 L1
Sheath
Mesh shield
Intervening wire
Tape
Compound 6-pair cable structure drawing
Cable core
Insulator Conductor
Core wire
Shield (external conductor)
Sheath
Connect with a ground plate of connector.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
367 IB-1501269-P
15.3.2 CNP2E-1 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Motor side PLG cable
Spindle side accuracy encoder TS5690 cable
1 2
5 6
7 8 3 4
PE
7 8 2 1 5 6 3 4 9
P5(+5V) LG
MT1 MT2
SD SD* RQ
RQ*
P5(+5V) LG MT1 MT2 SD SD* RQ RQ* SHD
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
Case grounding
(Note) For the pin "7" or "8", use the contact "170364-1". For the other pins, use the contact "170363-1".
(Note)
Spindle motor side connector
Connector: 172169-1 Contact: 170363-1(AWG26-22) 170364-1(AWG22-18)
(TE Connectivity)
1 2
5 6
7 8 3 4
PE
7
8 2 1 5 6 3 4 9
P5(+5V) LG
MT1 MT2
SD SD* RQ
RQ*
P5(+5V) LG MT1 MT2 SD SD* RQ RQ* SHD
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.5mm2
Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
Case grounding
(Note) For the pin "7" or "8", use the contact "170364-1". For the other pins, use the contact "170363-1".
(Note)
Spindle motor side connector
Connector: 172169-1 Contact: 170363-1(AWG26-22) 170364-1(AWG22-18)
TE Connectivity)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
368IB-1501269-P
15.3.3 CNP3EZ-2P/CNP3EZ-3P Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Spindle side encoder cable
OSE-1024 cable CNP3EZ-2P (Straight)
CNP3EZ-3P (Angle)
1 2
10 3 4
5 6 7 8
PE
H
K A N C R B P
P5(+5V) LG
ABZSEL* A
A*
B B* Z
Z*
P5(+5V) LG A A* B B* Z Z*
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
Case grounding
Spindle motor side connector
Connector: D/MS3106A20-29S D/MS3108B20-29S Clamp: CE3057-12A-3(D240)(R1)
(DDK)
1 2
10 3 4
5 6 7 8
PE
H
K A N C R B P
P5(+5V) LG
ABZSEL* A
A*
B B* Z
Z*
P5(+5V) LG A A* B B* Z Z*
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.5mm2
Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
Case grounding
Spindle motor side connector
Connector: D/MS3106A20-29S D/MS3108B20-29S Clamp: CE3057-12A-3(D240)(R1)
(DDK)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
369 IB-1501269-P
15.3.4 CNV2E-8P/CNV2E-9P Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: For HF/HF-H, HF-KP (Tool spindle) Motor side encoder cable (for A48/A51/A74N(/A74)) /
For HF-KP (Servo) Motor side encoder relay cable (Drive unit side) (CNV2E-8P) CNV2E-8P (Straight)
CNV2E-9P (Angle)
1 2
9 7 8 3 4
PE
8 5 3 4 6 7 1 2 10
P5(+5V) LG
BT SD
SD* RQ
RQ*
P5(+5V) LG CNT BT SD SD* RQ RQ* SHD
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
Drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
Case grounding
Motor encoder/ Ball screw side encoder side connector
Plug: CMV1-SP10S-M2 (Straight) CMV1-AP10S-M2 (Angle)
Contact: CMV1-#22ASC-S1
(DDK)
1 2
9 7 8 3 4
PE
8 5 3 4 6 7 1 2 10
P5(+5V) LG
BT SD
SD* RQ
RQ*
P5(+5V) LG CNT BT SD SD* RQ RQ* SHD
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
Drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
Case grounding
Motor encoder/ Ball screw side encoder side connector
Plug: CMV1-SP10S-M2 (Straight) CMV1-AP10S-M2 (Angle)
Contact: CMV1-#22ASC-S1
(DDK)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
370IB-1501269-P
15.3.5 CNV2E-D Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: MDS-B-SD unit cable
15.3.6 CNV2E-HP Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: MDS-B-HR unit cable
1 2 9
10 3 4 5 6 7 8
PE
20 11 10 1 9 7 17 6 16 PE
P5(+5V) LG
RQ RQ*
SD SD*
P5(+5V) LG P5(+5V) LG BAT RQ RQ* SD SD*
0.5mm2
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
Drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
MDS-B-SD unit side connector
Connector: 10120-3000VE Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
Case grounding
Case grounding
(3M)
1 2
10 3 4 5 6 7 8
PE
5 7 6 8 1 2 3 4 PE
P5(+5V) LG
RQ RQ*
SD SD*
P5(+5V) LG P5(+5V) LG RQ RQ* SD SD*
0.5mm2
0.5mm2
0.2mm2
0.2mm2
Drive unit side connector (3M)
Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell kit: 36310-3200-008
(MOLEX) Connector set: 54599-1019
MDS-B-HR unit side connector
Plug: RM15WTPZ-8S(71) Clamp: JR13WCCA-10(72)
Case grounding
Case grounding
(Hirose Electric)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
371 IB-1501269-P
15.3.7 DG30 Cable Max. cable length: 10m Application: Battery cable
(drive unit - battery box, drive unit - drive unit)
15.3.8 G380 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Optical communication cable
for wiring between drive units (outside panel) for optical communication repeater unit Use when the cable length is 10m or more to 30m or less.
(Note 1) Binding the cables too tight with tie-wraps could result in an increased loss or a disconnection. Use a cushioning material such as a sponge or rubber when bundling the cables and fix so that the cables do not move. (Clamp material for reference: KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CKN-13SP)
(Note 2) Never bundle the cables with vinyl tape. The plasticizing material in the vinyl tape could cause the PCF cable reinforced sheath to damage.
(Note 3) Loop the excessive cable with twice or more than the minimum bending radius.
[OPT] Connector: 1123445-1 Manufacturer: TE Connectivity
Wire material: Hard clad type PCF optic cable Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable
Cable Minimum bending radius: R 2-core cable (section with reinforced sheath) 50mm
2-core cable (section without reinforced sheath) 25mm
1 2
1 2
BT LG
BT LG
0.2mm2
Drive unit side connector
Connector: PAP-02V-O Contact: SPHD-001G-P0.5
Drive unit side connector
Connector: PHR-2-BL Contact: SPH-0022GW-P0.5S
(J.S.T) (J.S.T)
OPT OPTSection with reinforced sheath
Section without reinforced sheath
OPT
1
2
OPT
1
2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
372IB-1501269-P
15.3.9 J395 Cable Max. cable length: 10m Application: Optical communication cable
for wiring between drive units (outside panel) for wiring between NC-drive units Use when wiring outside of the panel with a cable of 10m or less.
(Note 1) Binding the cables too tight with tie-wraps could result in an increased loss or a disconnection. Use a cushioning material such as a sponge or rubber when bundling the cables and fix so that the cables do not move. (Clamp material for reference: KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CKN-13SP)
(Note 2) Never bundle the cables with vinyl tape. The plasticizing material in the vinyl tape could cause the POF cable to break.
(Note 3) Loop the excessive cable with twice or more than the minimum bending radius.
[OPT] Connector: LGP-Z0007PK Manufacturer: HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Wire material: PFDU-CL1002-22E60VT Manufacturer: TORAY
Cable Minimum bending radius: R 2-core cable (section with reinforced sheath) 50mm
2-core cable (section without reinforced sheath) 30mm
OPT OPT
OPT OPT
1
2
1
2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
373 IB-1501269-P
15.3.10 J396 Cable Max. cable length: 10m Application: Optical communication cable
for wiring between drive units (inside panel) Use when wiring in the panel with a cable of 10m or less.
(Note 1) Binding the cables too tight with tie-wraps could result in an increased loss or a disconnection. Use a cushioning material such as a sponge or rubber when bundling the cables and fix so that the cables do not move. (Clamp material for reference: KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CKN-13SP)
(Note 2) Never bundle the cables with vinyl tape. The plasticizing material in the vinyl tape could cause the POF cable to break.
(Note 3) Loop the excessive cable with twice or more than the minimum bending radius.
[OPT] Connector: LGP-Z0007PK Manufacturer: HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Wire material: PFDU-CD1002-18E22T Manufacturer: TORAY
Cable Minimum bending radius: R 2-core parallel cord 30mm
OPT OPT
OPT OPT 1
2
1
2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
374IB-1501269-P
15.3.11 MR-BKS1CBL-A1-H / MR-BKS1CBL-A2-H Cable Max. cable length: 10m Application: <200V Series> Brake cable for HG96
MR-BKS1CBL-A1-H (load side angle) MR-BKS1CBL-A2-H (reverse load side angle)
15.3.12 MR-BT6V2CBL Cable Max. cable length: 1m Application: Battery cable (MDS-EJ/EJH)
(drive unit - drive unit)
AWG 20
AWG 20
B1
B2
Servo motor brake connector (Japan Aviation Electronics) Connector: JN4FT02SJ1-R
Bushing and Ground nut Contact: ST-TMH-S-C1B-100(A534G) Crimp tool: CT160-3TMH5B
Hood, Socket insulator,
BT 1
LG 2
BT1
LG2
BT1
LG2
0.12mm2
0.12mm2
Drive unit side connector (J.S.T)
Connector: PAP-02V-O Contact: SPHD-001G-P0.5
Drive unit side connector (J.S.T) Connector: PAP-02V-O Contact: SPHD-001G-P0.5
Battery unit side connector (J.S.T) Connector: PALR-02VF Contact: SPAL-001T-P0.5
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
375 IB-1501269-P
15.3.13 MR-D05UDL3M-B Cable Max. cable length: 3m Application: STO cable
15.3.14 MR-PWS1CBL-A1-H / MR-PWS1CBL-A2-H Cable Max. cable length: 10m Application: <200V Series> Power cable for HG96
MR-PWS1CBL-A1-H (load side angle) MR-PWS1CBL-A2-H (reverse load side angle)
4 5 3 6 7 8 CN8
STO1 STO2 STOCOM24G
24V
TOF1 TOF2 TOFCOM
STO1 input STO2 input
Drive unit side (TE Connectivity) Connector set: MR-D05UDL3M-B
TOF1 output TOF2 output
Yellow (Dot mark: Red)
Gray (Dot mark: Black)
Yellow (Dot mark: Black)
Gray (Dot mark: Red) White (Dot mark: Black)
White (Dot mark: Red)
U V W
Servo motor power supply connector (Japan Aviation Electronics) Connector: JN4FT04SJ1-R Hood, Socket insulator, Bushing and Grand nut Contact: ST-TMH-S-C1B-100(A534G) Crimp tool: CT160-3TM5B
AWG 19 (Red) AWG 19 (White) AWG 19 (Black) AWG 19 (Green/ Yellow)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
376IB-1501269-P
15.3.15 SH21 Cable Max. cable length: 30m Application: Power supply communication cable
Power backup unit communication cable
(Note 1) Fold the cable shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the wound copper foil tape to GND plate of the connector.
(Note 2) When using the jackscrew M2.6-type 10320-52A0-008 for the shell, do not fasten the screws too tightly otherwise the connector and the PCB may be damaged. (Manufacturer recommended tightening torque: 0.200.05Nm)
[CN4,CN9] Plug: 10120-3000PE Shell: 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
Wire material: UL20276 AWG2810P Manufacturer: Toyokuni Electric Cable
Plug: 10120-3000PE Shell: 10320-52F0-008 Manufacturer: 3M
CN4, CN9
1 11
2 12
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
1 11
2 12
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
0V 0V
SVTXD SVTXD*
SVALM SVALM*
SVRXD SVRXD4
0V 0V
SVEMG SVEMG*
+5V
0V 0V
SVTXD SVTXD*
SVALM SVALM*
SVRXD SVRXD4
0V 0V
SVEMG SVEMG*
+5V
FG FG
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
377 IB-1501269-P
15.4 List of Cable Connector Sets Type Application Package contents
FCUA-CS000 General I/O units (For SKIP,SIO,MPG,AIO)
Connector (3M) 10120-3000PE x 2pcs.
Shell kit (3M) 10320-52F0-008 x 2pcs.
005057-9403 0016020103 x 3 pcs.
Emergency stop connector (For EMG)
Connector (MOLEX) 50-57-9403 x 1pc.
Gold contact (MOLEX) 0016020103 x 3 pcs.
RIO2 CON Connector kit for RIO 2.0 unit
Connector (TE Connectivity) 1-1318119-3 x 2pcs.
Connector (TE Connectivity) 2-178288-3 x 1pc.
Contact (TE Connectivity) 1318107-1 x 8pcs.
Contact (TE Connectivity) 1-175218-5 x 3pcs.
FCUA-CN220 24VDC power supply connector (For DCIN)
Connector (TE Connectivity) 2-178288-3 x 1pc.
Contact (TE Connectivity) 1-175218-5 x 3pcs.
7940-6500SC x 4pcs. 3448-7940 x 4pcs.
DO connector (for operation panel I/O unit) DI/DO connector (for remote I/O unit)
Connector (3M) 7940-6500SC x 4pcs.
Strain relief (3M) 3448-7940 x 4pcs.
7950-6500SC x 2pcs. 3448-7950 x 2pcs.
DI connector (for operation panel I/O unit)
Connector (3M) 7950-6500SC x 2pcs.
Strain relief (3M) 3448-7950 x 2pcs.
2-1318119-4 1318107-1 x 8pcs. Connector for CJ71
Connector (TE Connectivity) 2-1318119-4 x 1pc.
Contact (TE Connectivity) 1318107-1 x 8pcs.
37104-2165-000FL 10P
THERMISTOR connector (For thermistor input unit)
Connector (3M) 37104-2165-000FL x 10pcs.
4 3 2 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 15 Cable
378IB-1501269-P
379 IB-1501269-P
16 Setup Outline
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 16 Setup Outline
380IB-1501269-P
16.1 Hardware Configuration The following shows the hardware names used in this manual.
[Example of 15-type]
(A) Cancel key (B) Menu changeover key (C) Front-side SD card I/F (D) USB Interface (E) [INPUT] key
(C)
(B)
(E)
(A)
(D)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 16 Setup Outline
381 IB-1501269-P
[M800S]
[M80/E80]
(A) 7-segment LED (B) Rotary switch
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 16 Setup Outline
382IB-1501269-P
16.2 Flow of Initial Setup The following flow chart shows the procedures of the initial setup. (Note) When setting up with backup files, refer to the chapter of "Data Backup and Restoration".
WARNING Do not cancel the emergency stop before confirming the basic operation.
Setting the machine parameters (1)
Formatting the NC memory
Setting the machine parameters (2)
Setting Date and Time
Refer to section 19.2
Refer to section 19.1 to 19.2
Refer to section 19.3
Refer to section 19.4
Selecting the NC system type and displayed language. Setting the parameters for the system specifications.
Setting the parameters for the machine specifications.
Set the date and time on the integrated time screen.
Refer to section 17
Refer to section 18
Refer to section 20
Refer to section 21
Refer to section 22
Refer to section 27
Refer to the Instruction Manual
Refer to section 23
Points Is the power supply within a specified range? Is the power supply polarity correct? Is the connection of the motor power cable and the encoder cable correct? Is the grounding correct?
Carry out the connecting and setting of drive units, batteries and remote I/O units. Initialize the NC Internal data (SRAM).
Write the created sequence program to NC's ROM using GX Developer or GX Works2.
Confirm input/output of signals, alarm display and manual operation.
Carry out the setting for establishing the reference position (zero point).
Set the tool entry prohibited range.
Confirm that the spindle operates properly in manual/MDI operation. Confirm the spindle rotation speed as well.
Start
Confirming the connection between control unit and peripheral devices
Connecting and Setting the Hardware
Sequence Program Writing
Confirming the Basic Operation
Setting the Position Detection System
Setting the Stored Stroke Limit
Confirming the Spindle Operation
Inputting the machining program
End
Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
Refer to section 28 Input the customized data for the handy terminal. (Note) This procedure is required only when connecting the handy terminal.
Install the custom data (G code guidance data), start-up screen and user cycle. If you do not need the installation, go to the next section.
Setting the Handy Terminal
Refer to section 24Setting the Machine Error Compensation
Refer to section 25 Set the position switches.
Setting the Position Switches
Refer to section 26 Set the backlash compensation and the backlash compensation II.
Setting the Backash Compensation
Set the memory-type pitch error compensation, the memory-type relative position error compensation, and the bidirectional pitch error compensation.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 16 Setup Outline
383 IB-1501269-P
For other settings, refer to the following chapters: - Setting the Deceleration Check - Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control - OMR Control - Variable Torsion Compensation - Adjust S-analog Screen - Device Open Parameter Screen - SRAM Open Parameter Screen - Data Backup and Restoration
When using the system lock, refer to the chapter of "Appendix 1: Setting the System Lock". When using the protection setting, refer to the chapter of "Appendix 2: Protection Setting".
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 16 Setup Outline
384IB-1501269-P
385 IB-1501269-P
17 Setting the Hardware
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
386IB-1501269-P
17.1 Setting Drive Unit MDS-E/EH Series 17.1.1 Setting the Rotary Switch
Set the axis number with the rotary switch.
MDS-E/EH-V1/V2/SP, MDS-E/EH-V3/SP2 setting
Rotary switch setting AXIS NO. 0 1st axis 1 2nd axis 2 3rd axis 3 4th axis 4 5th axis 5 6th axis 6 7th axis 7 8th axis 8 9th axis 9 10th axis A 11th axis B 12th axis C 13th axis D 14th axis E 15th axis F 16th axis
L axis M axis
1-axis spindle drive unit (MDS-E/EH-SP)
2-axis spindle drive unit
(MDS-E-SP2)
1-axis servo drive unit (MDS-E/EH-V1)
2-axis servo drive unit (MDS-E/EH-V2)
L axis M axis S axis
3-axis servo drive unit (MDS-E/EH-V3)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
387 IB-1501269-P
MDS-E/EH-CV setting
17.1.2 Setting DIP Switch As a standard setting, turn the all DIP switches OFF.
Rotary switch setting Setting items 0 Normal setting
1 3 Setting prohibited 4 External emergency stop setting
5 F Setting prohibited
CAUTION An axis set unused is not included in the functional safety.
Power supply unit (MDS-E/EH-CV)
The switches are OFF when facing bottom as illustrated.
M axis Setting unused axis
L axis Setting unused axis
S axis Setting unused axis Unused axis can be set by turning the switches ON. When there is unused axis for the drive unit, set unused axis.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
388IB-1501269-P
17.2 Setting Drive Unit MDS-EM/EMH Series 17.2.1 Setting the Rotary Switch
Set the axis number with the rotary switch.
< Drive unit >
MDS-EM/EMH-SPV3 setting
Rotary switch setting Axis configuration Spindle Servo L-axis M-axis S-axis
0 Spindle +
Servo 3 axes
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 1 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis 2 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 3 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis 4
Spindle + Servo 2 axes
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis - 5 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis - 6 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis - 7 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis - 8 Setting impossible - - - - 9 Setting impossible - - - - A Setting impossible - - - - B Setting impossible - - - - C Setting impossible - - - - D Setting impossible - - - - E Setting impossible - - - - F Setting impossible - - - -
CAUTION The axis configuration "Spindle + Servo 2 axes" is the state where the servo axis S is disabled. Set the NC parameter (#1021) according to the axis numbers.
(MDS-EM/EMH-SPV3) Multi axis unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
389 IB-1501269-P
17.3 Setting Drive Unit MDS-EJ/EJH Series 17.3.1 Setting the Rotary Switch
Set the axis number with the rotary switch.
MDS-EJ/EJH-V1, MDS-EJ-SP setting
Rotary switch setting AXIS NO. 0 1st axis 1 2nd axis 2 3rd axis 3 4th axis 4 5th axis 5 6th axis 6 7th axis 7 8th axis 8 9th axis 9 10th axis A 11th axis B 12th axis C 13th axis D 14th axis E 15th axis F 16th axis
(MDS-EJ-V1) (MDS-EJH-V1)(MDS-EJ-SP) (MDS-EJ-V2/SP2)
1-axis servo drive unit
1-axis spindle drive unit
1-axis servo drive unit
2-axis servo/ spindle drive unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
390IB-1501269-P
MDS-EJ-V2/SP2 setting
(Note 1) As for 2-axis drive unit, one rotary switch sets the L and M axes to the consecutive axis Nos. (Note 2) As for 2-axis drive unit, the rotary switch setting "F" is prohibited.
17.3.2 Setting the DIP Switch As a standard setting, turn the all DIP switches OFF.
MDS-EJ/EJH-V1, MDS-EJ-SP setting
MDS-EJ-V2/SP2 setting
Rotary switch setting AXIS NO. L axis M axis
0 1st axis 2nd axis 1 2nd axis 3rd axis 2 3rd axis 4th axis 3 4th axis 5th axis 4 5th axis 6th axis 5 6th axis 7th axis 6 7th axis 8th axis 7 8th axis 9th axis 8 9th axis 10th axis 9 10th axis 11th axis A 11th axis 12th axis B 12th axis 13th axis C 13th axis 14th axis D 14th axis 15th axis E 15th axis 16th axis F Setting prohibited
CAUTION An axis set unused is not included in the functional safety.
The switches are OFF when facing bottom as illustrated.
Setting unused axis Unused axis can be set by turning the switches ON.
The switches are OFF when facing bottom as illustrated.
M axis Setting unused axis L axis Setting unused axis
Unused axis can be set by turning the switches ON. When there is unused axis for the 2-axis drive unit, set unused axis.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
391 IB-1501269-P
17.4 Setting Up without Connecting to the Motor/Drive Units at the Setup of Drive Unit
When connecting the motor or drive unit after setting up the system, set the axis data beforehand to enable the operation without the motor or drive unit. The following shows the procedures.
Setting Up without Connecting to the Motor The axis detachment can be used for servo axis. The detachment function cannot be used for spindle.
(1) Set the drive unit rotary switch and "#1021 mcp_no" for the axis that is not connected to the motor. (2) Set the parameter "#1070 axoff" to "1" for the axis that is not connected to the motor. (3) Do (a) or (b).
(a) Set parameter "#8201 AX. RELEASE" to "1" for the axis that is not connected to the motor. (b) Turn ON the control axis detach signal (Y780) for the axis that is not connected to the motor.
Setting Up without Connecting to the Drive Unit Set the following parameters.
(1) Set "#1021 mcp_no" (for the servo axis) or "#3031 smcp_no" (for the spindle) to the axis or the spindle that is not connected to the drive unit.
(2) Set the following parameters to the axis that is not connected to the drive unit. For the servo axis: Set "#2018 no_srv" to "1". For the spindle: Set "#3024 sout" to "0".
(Note) After connecting to the drive unit, make sure to set "#2018 no_srv" to "0" and "#3024 sout" to "1".
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
392IB-1501269-P
17.5 Connecting the Batteries 17.5.1 Control Unit Battery
The battery is not connected when the machine is delivered. Be sure to connect the battery before
starting up. A lithium battery in the control unit battery holder retains parameter settings, machining programs and the like, which requires to be backed up at the power OFF.
[Precautions for handling battery] (1) Do not disassemble the battery. (2) Do not place the battery in flames or water. (3) Do not pressurize and deform the battery. (4) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
Battery Q6BAT Battery cumulative data holding time 45,000 hours (At 0 to 45C. The life will be shorter if the temperature is high.) Battery life Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
CAUTION Do not short-circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
393 IB-1501269-P
[Installation method] (1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.) (2) Confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all OFF. (3) Open the front cover of the control unit. (4) Fit the new battery into the battery holder. (5) Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the BAT connector. Pay attention to the connector
orientation: do not insert backwards. (6) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the "click"
sound when the latch catches.
[M800S]
[M80/E80]
Front cover
Battery holder Battery
BAT connector
Front cover
Battery holder Battery
BAT connector
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
394IB-1501269-P
17.5.2 Servo Drive Unit Battery (Note) The battery connection is not necessary unless the drive unit employs absolute position detection. (Spindle
drive unit does not require the battery, because the unit does not employ absolute position detection.)
There are batteries as shown below. Refer to the drive unit's specification manual for details.
MDS-E/EH-Vx Connect the battery connector to the connector BTI of the drive unit.
Type MDS-BAT6V1SET MDSBTBOX-LR2060 MR-BAT6V1SET Installation type Drive unit installation Control panel installation Drive unit installation Hazard class Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Number of connectable axes Up to 3 axes Up to 8 axes Up to 3 axes
Change method Battery option change Battery change Battery option change
Appearance
Compatible model
E/EH - EM - EJ/EJH -
BTO1 BTO2 BTO3 CH1 CH2
DOCOM DO(ALM) LG +5V LG BT(3.6V)
Built-in battery MR-BAT6V1
Name plate
Date of
manufacture
1 2 1 2
1 12 2
BTI BTO
BTA BTB
Connect the battery box with BTI.
Battery connector connection part magnified figure
Battery attaching part
Battery unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
395 IB-1501269-P
MDS-EM Connect the battery connector to the connector BTI of the drive unit.
BTI
1 2
1 2
MR-BAT6V1SET
Battery connector connection part magnified figure
Connect the battery box with BTI.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
396IB-1501269-P
MDS-EJ/EJH-Vx Connect the battery connector to the connector BAT of the drive unit.
Replacing the built-in battery
Insert the plug to BAT after installing the battery. Pull out the connector while
pushing the unlocking lever.
Slide the case of MR-BAT6V1SET toward you while pushing the unlocking lever.
Installation Removal
MR-BAT6V1
MR-BAT6V1SET that reached the end of the life can be reused by replacing the MR-BAT6V1 battery.
Open the cover while pushing the locking part.
Replace the built-in battery with a new battery for MR-BAT6V1.
Close the cover by pushing until it is fixed with the tab of the locking part.
Cover
Locking part
Tab
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
397 IB-1501269-P
17.6 Connecting and Setting the Remote I/O Unit 17.6.1 Outline of the Remote I/O Unit
The specification varies for each remote I/O unit. Each unit has one or two rotary switch(es) for unit No. setting, which links the device Nos. (with X/Y).
FCU8-DX220 FCU8-DX230 / DX231 FCU8-DX202 FCU8-DX213 / DX213-1 FCU8-DX654 / DX654-1
FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409 FCU8-DX651
No. Connector name Function No. Connector
name Function
(1) CJ31 Machine signal input (12) SDO2 Safety relay output (2) CJ32 Machine signal output (13) RIO1 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (3) CJ33 Machine signal input (14) RIO2 Remote I/O 2.0 communication (4) CJ34 Machine signal output (15) DCIN 24VDC input (5) CJ35 Machine signal input (16) DCOUT 24VDC output (6) CJ36 Machine signal output (17) FG FG terminal (7) SDI Safety machine signal input (18) FG FG terminal (M4 screw)
(8) SDO Safety machine signal output (19) AIO1 Analog input Analog output
(9) SDI1 Safety DI input (20) THERMISTOR Thermistor input (10) SDI2 Safety DI input (21) AI Multi-analog input (11) SDO1 Safety relay output
No. Switch name Function (s1)
STATION No. Station No. group setting switch
(s2) Station No. setting switch (s3) Station No. setting switch
(1)
(2)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(19)
(5)
(6)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(7)
(8)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(13)
(15)
(14)
(s2) (s1)
(17)
(20)
(17)
(15)
(14)
(21)
(s2) (s1)
(13)
(9) (11)
(13) (15) (18)(2)(1)
(10) (12)
(14)(s3)
(16)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
398IB-1501269-P
Unit type Machine control signals that can be handled Total Number of occupied stations
FCU8-DX220 Digital input signal (DI) 32 points
1 Digital output signal (DO) 32 points
FCU8-DX230 Digital input signal (DI) 64 points
2 Digital output signal (DO) 48 points
FCU8-DX231 Digital input signal (DI) 64 points
2Digital output signal (DO) 48 points Analog output (AO) 1 point
FCU8-DX202 Analog input signal (AI) 4 points
1 Analog output signal (AO) 1 point
FCU8-DX213 / DX213-1 Digital input signal (DI) 16 points
1 Digital output signal (DO) 8 points
FCU8-DX654 / DX654-1 Safety digital input signal (DI) 8 points
2 Safety digital output signal (DO) 4 points
FCU8-DX651
Digital input signal (DI) 32 points
3 Digital output signal (DO) 32 points Safety digital input signal (DI) 8 points Safety digital output signal (DO) 4 points
FCU8-DX408 Thermistor input (THERMISTOR) 12 points 3 FCU8-DX409 Multi-analog input (Multi AI) 4 points 4
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
399 IB-1501269-P
17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit When connecting directly to the control unit
(Note) Connect the J210 cable to the RIO1 or RIO2 connector of the control unit. Check the connector position with the actual machine.
RIO1
RIO2
J210
J210
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Remote I/O 1ch
Remote I/O 2ch
Max.64 stations Max. input: 2048 points Max. output: 2048 points
Max.64 stations Max. input: 2048 points Max. output: 2048 points
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
400IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) A remote I/O unit has two slide switches (station No. group setting switches) and one rotary switch (station No. setting switch) for station No. setting, which link the device Nos. (with X/Y). Set the slide switches and the rotary switch as follows.
The station Nos. of FCU8-DX651 can be set in two ways according to the slide switch (station No. setting switch). Set the knob to the left for the station No. setting 1 and to the right for the station No. setting 2.
(Note 2) Refer to "17.6.4 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO)" for device No. assignment.
Slide switch
Rotary switch
Station No.
1 2 FCU8-DX213/
DX213-1/ DX220/DX202
FCU8-DX230/ DX231/
DX654/DX654-1 FCU8-DX408 FCU8-DX409
OFF OFF
0 1 1,2 1,2,3 1,2,3,4 1 2 2,3 2,3,4 2,3,4,5 2 3 3,4 3,4,5 3,4,5,6
F 16 16,17 16,17,18 16,17,18,19
OFF ON
0 17 17,18 17,18,19 17,18,19,20 1 18 18,19 18,19,20 18,19,20,21 2 19 19,20 19,20,21 19,20,21,22
F 32 32,33 32,33,34 32,33,34,35
ON OFF
0 33 33,34 33,34,35 33,34,35,36 1 34 34,35 34,35,36 34,35,36,37 2 35 35,36 35,36,37 35,36,37,38
F 48 48,49 48,49,50 48,49,50,51
ON ON
0 49 49,50 49,50,51 49,50,51,52 1 50 50,51 50,51,52 50,51,52,53 2 51 51,52 51,52,53 51,52,53,54
F 64 64,1 64,1,2 64,1,2,3
Device Station No. setting 1 Station No. setting 2 DI/DO Station No. 1 Station No. 4 Safety DI (SX00A to SX07A) /Safety relay output (SY00A to SY03A) /Relay feedback (SX08A to SX0BA)
Station No. 2 Station No. 5
Safety DI (SX00B to SX07B) /Safety relay output (SY00B to SY03B) /Relay feedback (SX08B to SX0BB)
Station No. 3 Station No. 6
Station No. setting 1 Station No. setting 2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
401 IB-1501269-P
When connecting to the operation panel I/O unit
(Note 1) Refer to "17.6.4 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO)" for device No. assignment. (Note 2) The maximum connectable number of remote I/O units is 32.
Operation panel I/O unit RIO occupied stations Extensible stations FCU8-DX731 1, 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 2, 4 to 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64 FCU8-DX750 1 to 3, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 4 to 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64 FCU8-DX760 1 to 4, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 5, 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64 FCU8-DX761 1 to 5, 7 to 12, 20 to 22 6, 13 to 19, 23 to 64 FCU8-DX834 1 to 4, 7 to 14, 20 to 22 5, 6, 15 to 19, 23 to 64
J210
CJ71
J010(FCU8-DX731/750/760/761) J012(FCU8-DX834)
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Remote I/O 3ch
Max.49 to 53 stations Max. input: 1568 to 1696 points Max. output: 1568 to 1696 points
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
402IB-1501269-P
17.6.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units Multiple remote I/O units can be used, as long as the total No. of occupied stations connected with serial links is eight or less. (four/five or less when connected to the operation panel I/O unit).
When using multiple remote I/O units, a characteristic station No. must be set for each unit. A unit has the station No. group setting switches and the station No. setting switch. These switches must be set to the characteristic station No. which is not duplicate with the occupied stations of the operation panel I/O unit.
(Note 1) The maximum connectable number of remote I/O units is 32 per channel. (Note 2) Only one FCU8-DX408 unit can be connected in the entire system. (Note 3) The maximum connectable number of FCU8-DX409 is four.
When connecting directly to the control unit Setting example 1
Unit type Number of occupied stations FCU8-DX220 1 FCU8-DX230 2 FCU8-DX231 2 FCU8-DX202 1
FCU8-DX213 / DX213-1 1 FCU8-DX654 / DX654-1 2
FCU8-DX651 3 FCU8-DX408 (Note 2) 3 FCU8-DX409 (Note 3) 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FCU8-DX213, FCU8-DX213-1, FCU8-DX220
8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
1OFF 2OFF
1OFF 2OFF
Group1
Group1
1OFF 2ON
1OFF 2ON
Group2
Remote I/O unitControl unit
Group2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
403 IB-1501269-P
Setting example 2
Setting example 3
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
0 2 4 6 8 A C E 2ON
1OFF 2OFF
1OFF 2ON
1ON 2OFF
1ON
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Remote I/O unit
FCU8-DX23, FCU8-DX654, FCU8-DX654-1 Control unit
FCU8-DX651
Control unit
Safety remote I/O unit with built-in relay
Station No. setting 1 Station No. setting 2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
404IB-1501269-P
Setting example 4
0 4 8 C
FCU8-DX409
Control unit
1 : OFF 2 : OFF
Group1
Multi-analog input unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
405 IB-1501269-P
When connecting to the operation panel I/O unit Operation panel I/O unit occupies 9 to 11 stations among station No. 1 to 64. Therefore, RIO3 can occupy up to 50 to 53 stations, as shown below.
Setting example 1
(Note) The maximum connectable number of remote I/O units is 32.
Operation panel I/O unit type Max. number of stations (RIO3 connection)
Max. number of I/O points (RIO3 connection)
FCU8-DX731 53 stations Input:1696 points, Output:1696 points FCU8-DX750 52 stations Input:1664 points, Output:1664 points FCU8-DX760 51 stations Input:1632 points, Output:1632 points FCU8-DX761 50 stations Input:1600 points, Output:1600 points FCU8-DX834 49 stations Input:1568 points, Output:1568 points
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
0 2 4 6 8 A C E
FCU8-DX23, FCU8-DX654, FCU8-DX654-1
4 E
1OFF 2OFF
1OFF 2ON
1ON 2OFF
1ON 2ON
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Remote I/O unitOperation panel I/O unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
406IB-1501269-P
17.6.4 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) The input/output signals (analog signal, DI/DO, etc.) are assigned to the PLC devices, and the digital signals (DI/DO) can be assigned to the arbitrary PLC devices by the parameters. Either "Fixed device assignment" which automatically assigns the signals to fixed PLC devices defined by the system or "Arbitrary device assignment" which user can assign the signals the arbitrary PLC devices by the parameters can be selected by setting the RIO assignment parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign (selection of RIO device assignment method)".
[Fixed Device assignment]: Parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign" = 0 Settings are not required because the assignment to the fixed PLC devices are automatically performed. Refer to "17.6.4.1 Fixed Device Assignment" for details.
[Arbitrary Device assignment]: Parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign" = 1 Set the PLC devices which are assigned to the DI/DO of each remote I/O unit station by the parameters. Refer to "17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment" for details.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
407 IB-1501269-P
17.6.4.1 Fixed Device Assignment (1) By setting the parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign" to "0", the PLC device assignment method, which is to be used
for input/output of each remote I/O unit station, will be the fixed device assignment.
(2) PLC devices assigned for each remote I/O unit station at the time of the fixed device assignment are as follows:
(Note) Do not use the input/output signals of the system-occupied stations of RIO3 and operation panel I/O unit- connected channels.
(3) A part of PLC devices assigned for each station of remote I/O units can input/output signals with PLC high speed by setting the high-speed input/output specification parameters or R registers. (a) The devices for inputting/outputting signals with PLC high speed can be set individually for the high-order and
the low-order per 16 points for DI and DO of each remote I/O unit station. (b) Only devices of the first to eighth stations for each remote I/O channel can input/output signals with PLC high
speed. The devices of the ninth to 64th stations input/output with PLC medium speed. (c) The parameter and R register numbers for the high-speed input/output designation are as follows:
(Note 1) The above parameters are invalid when the devices have been assigned arbitrarily. (Note 2) Refer to "PLC Programming Manual" for details of the setting method.
Station No. Channel No. 1 2 8 9 63 64
RIO1 Input device X0000
to X001F X0020
to X003F X00E0 to X00FF
ZR5000 / ZR5001 ZR5108
/ ZR5109 ZR5110 / ZR5111
Output device Y0000 to Y001F
Y0020 to Y003F Y00E0
to Y00FF ZR6000 / ZR6001 ZR6108
/ ZR6109 ZR6110 / ZR6111
RIO2 Input device X0100
to X011F X0120
to X013F X01E0 to X01FF
ZR5200 / ZR5201 ZR5308
/ ZR5309 ZR5310 / ZR5311
Output device Y0100 to Y011F
Y0120 to Y013F Y01E0
to Y01FF ZR6200 / ZR6201 ZR6308
/ZR6309 ZR6310 / ZR6311
RIO3 Input device X0200
to X021F X0220
to X023F X02E0 to X02FF
ZR5400 / ZR5401 ZR5508
/ ZR5509 ZR5510 / ZR5511
Output device Y0200 to Y021F
Y0220 to Y023F Y02E0
to Y02FF ZR6400 / ZR6401 ZR6508
/ ZR6509 ZR6510 / ZR6511
Station No.
Channel No. 1 to 4 5 to 8
Parameter No. R register No. Parameter No. R register No.
RIO1
High-speed input specification 6457 R7828 low-order 6458 R7828 high-order
High-speed output specification 6461 R7830 low-order 6462 R7830 high-order
RIO2
High-speed input specification 6459 R7829 low-order 6460 R7829 high-order
High-speed output specification 6463 R7831 low-order 6464 R7831 high-order
RIO3
High-speed input specification 6465 R7832 low-order 6466 R7832 high-order
High-speed output specification 6473 R7836 low-order 6474 R7836 high-order
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
408IB-1501269-P
17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment
(1) By setting the parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign" to "1", the assignment method for PLC devices to be used for input/output of each remote I/O unit station becomes arbitrary device assignment.
(2) For arbitrary device assignment, set the PLC devices for input and output to DI/DO (32 points) of each remote I/O unit station by the parameters. Also, set the assignment of the operation panel I/O unit.
(3) Turn the power OFF and ON to enable arbitrary device assignment after the parameter settings.
(4) Set the input/output device assignment and high-speed input/output specification by the parameters for each station of all remote units which have DI/DO function (except safety DI/DO). If all stations have not been set, the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error" will be issued when the power turns ON.
(Note 1) A set of RIO assignment parameters consists of eight parameters (from target channel number to high-speed output specification) for one station.
(Note 2) Arbitrary device assignment cannot be performed for the system-occupied stations of RIO3 and operation panel I/O unit-connected channels.
(5) The PLC devices that are valid for arbitrary device assignment are as follows:
(Note 1) Duplication check is not performed between the PLC devices which are set with machine input/ output signal other than the remote I/O such as CC-Link or PROFIBUS and PLC devices which are set with arbitrary device assignment. If the PLC devices have duplicated, NC or PLC ladder can not be carried out correctly. When using machine input/output signal other than the remote I/O, make sure to confirm that the PLC devices do not duplicate the PLC devices set with arbitrary device assignment.
(Note 2) Assignment cannot be performed for the devices corresponding to the system-occupied stations of RIO3. If you connect the operation panel to any channel other than RIO3, assignment is also disabled for the devices corresponding to the system-occupied stations of the said channel.
(6) Even when the RIO assignment parameters are set in the remote I/O unit stations which have the analog input/ output and safety DI/DO functions, the input/output is not carried out to the set PLC devices.
Parameter setting for device arbitrary assignment
Parameter set No. (Note 1) Name #1 #64 #65 #128 #129 #182
Target channel No. #n #53011 #53641 #53651 #54281 #54291 #54821 Target station No. #n
(Note 2) #53012 #53642 #53652 #54282 #54292 #54822
DI device name #n #53013 #53643 #53653 #54283 #54293 #54823 DI device No. #n #53014 #53644 #53654 #54284 #54294 #54824
DO device name #n #53015 #53645 #53655 #54285 #54295 #54825 DO device No. #n #53016 #53646 #53656 #54286 #54296 #54826 High-speed input specification #n #53017 #53647 #53657 #54287 #54297 #54827
High-speed output specification #n #53018 #53648 #53658 #54288 #54298 #54828
PLC device Word/Bit Input Output Assignable range PLC device No. format
X Bit -
X0000 to X05FF However, X400 to X5FF is invalid when PROFIBUS specification is
added.
Hexadecimal
Y Bit -
Y0000 to Y05FF However, Y400 to Y5FF is invalid when PROFIBUS specification is
added.
Hexadecimal
ZR Word ZR5000 to ZR5999 (for input)
Decimal ZR6000 to ZR6999 (for output)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
409 IB-1501269-P
(7) Up to 24 stations can be specified for high-speed input/output specification each for input and output. If 25 or more stations are specified, the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error" will be issued.
(8) High-speed input/output specification can be set by R registers below as well as the RIO assignment parameters.
(Note 1) Turn the power OFF and ON after the R register settings to enable the settings. (Note 2) One bit of each R register is equivalent to one station. The high-speed input/output specification can
be performed by turning ON the R register bits of the stations to be input or output with PC high speed. To output the 10th station of RIO1 at high speed, for instance, turn bit9 of R30544 ON.
(Note 3) High-speed input/output designation is disabled for the system-occupied stations of RIO3 and operation panel I/O unit-connected channels. Even when the bit6 to bitD of R30552 and R30568 are turned ON, they will be invalid.
(Note 4) The above settings are invalid with fixed device assignment.
(9) In the following cases, the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error" will be issued when the power is turned ON. The number of the RIO assignment parameter with illegal setting state will be displayed. (a) The value outside the range of setting has been set to the RIO assignment parameter (except "#53001 RIO
dev assign"). (b) Two or more stations of the target channel No. and the target station No. are set redundantly to the RIO
assignment parameters. (Example)
The power is turned ON in a state where the 1st and 2nd station of RIO1 are set redundantly to the RIO assignment parameter #1 to #5 as shown in the table below. (Both the 1st and 2nd stations are connected to NC control unit.)
Result: The parameter number (53031) of "Target channel #3" will be displayed on the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error". Duplication error of RIO1 second station will be detected first because the RIO assignment parameter is checked from the top. Between the parameter set #2 and #3 to which second station of RIO1 are set, parameter set #3 which is the latter will be displayed as the alarm.
(c) A PLC device outside the assignable range has been set to the RIO assignment parameter. (d) 25 or more stations have been specified with the high-speed input or output with the RIO assignment
parameters.
Station No. Channel No. 1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64
RIO1
High-speed input specification
R30544 low-order
R30544 high-order
R30545 low-order
R30545 high-order
R30546 low-order
R30546 high-order
R30547 low-order
R30547 high-order
High-speed output
specification
R30560 low-order
R30560 high-order
R30561 low-order
R30561 high-order
R30562 low-order
R30562 high-order
R30563 low-order
R30563 high-order
RIO2
High-speed input specification
R30548 low-order
R30548 high-order
R30549 low-order
R30549 high-order
R30550 low-order
R30550 high-order
R30551 low-order
R30551 high-order
High-speed output
specification
R30564 low-order
R30564 high-order
R30565 low-order
R30565 high-order
R30566 low-order
R30566 high-order
R30567 low-order
R30567 high-order
RIO3
High-speed input specification
R30552 low-order
R30552 high-order
R30553 low-order
R30553 high-order
R30554 low-order
R30554 high-order
R30555 low-order
R30555 high-order
High-speed output
specification
R30568 low-order
R30568 high-order
R30569 low-order
R30569 high-order
R30570 low-order
R30570 high-order
R30571 low-order
R30571 high-order
Parameter set No.#n Target channel No. #n (parameter No.)
Target station No. #n (parameter No.) Setting state
1 1 (#53011) 0 (#53012) RIO1 1st station is set 2 1 (#53021) 1 (#53022) RIO1 2nd station is set 3 1 (#53031) 1 (#53032) RIO1 2nd station is set 4 1 (#53041) 0 (#53042) RIO1 1st station is set 5 1 (#53051) 0 (#53052) RIO1 1st station is set
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
410IB-1501269-P
(e) The RIO assignment parameters have not been specified to the remote I/O unit stations with DI/DO functions (except safety DI/DO) that are connected to NC.
(f) Two or more stations of the PLC devices are set redundantly to the RIO assignment parameters. (Note) However, these (a) to (f) will not be issued with the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error" in the
following cases: - "0" has been set to the target channel. - Remote I/O unit with DI/DO function are not connected to the station which has been specified with the target channel and station number. - The parameter "#1238 set10/bit3" is ON (the input from RIO is ignored).
(Example) The power is turned ON in a state where the X100 and X200 of PLC device are set redundantly to the RIO assignment parameter #1 to #5 as shown in the table below. (All stations which has been set to the RIO assignment parameters #1 to #5 are connected to NC control unit.)
Result: The parameter number (53034) of "DI device No. #3" will be displayed on the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error". Duplication error of X200 will be detected first because the RIO assignment parameter is checked from the top. Between the parameter set #2 and #3 to which the X200 are set, parameter set #3 which is the latter will be displayed as the alarm.
Parameter set No. #n
DI device name #n (parameter No.)
DI device No. #n (parameter No.) Setting state
1 X (#53013) 100 (#53014) X100 is set 2 X (#53023) 200 (#53024) X200 is set 3 X (#53033) 200 (#53034) X200 is set 4 X (#53043) 100 (#53044) X100 is set 5 X (#53053) 100 (#53054) X100 is set
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
411 IB-1501269-P
(1) RIO assignment parameter setting rule (a) For arbitrary device assignment, assign PLC devices to all stations which are connected to the remote units
with DI/DO function. Devices can be assigned in random order for arbitrary device assignment. It is unnecessary to assign in order of the target channels, target station numbers, PLC devices, etc.
(b) Set the PLC device numbers after setting the PLC device names. A setting error occurs if PLC number is input when the PLC device name is in the unset (blank) state. When a PLC device name is changed, PLC device number of the same parameter set number is cleared to zero.
(c) When setting the bit devices, set the DI and DO device numbers in increments of 32 points. A setting error occurs if device number is not a multiple of 32 (20 for hexadecimal).
(d) When setting the word devices, set the DI and DO device numbers in increments of two words (32 bits). A setting error occurs if the device number is odd.
(e) Set the target channels to "0" for the parameter sets which are not set for device assignment. The setting state of the parameter sets to which "0" has been set for the target channel will not be checked.
(f) The RIO assignment parameter setting values are retained even when the fixed device assignment and arbitrary device assignment are switched.
(2) RIO assignment parameter setting state check (a) The RIO assignment parameter setting state can be checked without rebooting the power by setting the RIO
assignment parameter "Device Setting Check" to "1" when performing the arbitrary device assignment. The RIO assignment parameter setting state will not be checked at the fixed device assignment.
(b) The RIO assignment parameter settings cannot be valid only by inputting "1" to "Device Setting Check". To enable the arbitrary device assignment, turn the power OFF and ON after the RIO assignment parameter settings.
(c) The value of "Device Setting Check" goes back to "0" after the check for the RIO parameter setting state is completed.
(d) The RIO assignment parameter setting state of each remote I/O unit station with the analog input/output and safety DI/DO functions will not be checked.
(e) The setting state of the parameter set which has been set as the station unconnected to the NC control unit will not be checked.
(f) The setting state of the parameter sets of which the target channel number has been set to "0" will not be checked.
Operating parameter setting screen
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
412IB-1501269-P
17.6.5 Thermistor Input Interface (1) By connecting the remote I/O unit with thermistor, up to 12 points of thermistor input are available.
For details on the unit which has thermistor input function, refer to "General Specifications: Remote I/O Unit".
(2) Up to 12 points of thermistor are detected in the ascending order of the channel No. and station No. of the remote I/ O unit. The file registers which output the temperature information are assigned to the inputs (thermistor input n (TIn)), but are not assigned to the 13th or later thermistor input. The relationship between thermistor inputs and file registers is as follows: [PLC input signal] Through the interface you can read the temperature sensed by a thermistor connected to the designated connector of thermistor input-equipped remote I/O unit.
Channel File register Data update cycle TI0 ZR13028
The thermistor voltage acquired with the thermistor input-equipped remote I/O unit is input after converted to a temperature value per PLC medium-speed cycle. One station of remote I/O has 4 thermistor inputs, thus 4 PLC medium-speed cycles are required for the inputs of one station.
TI1 ZR13029 TI2 ZR13030 TI3 ZR13031 TI4 ZR13032 TI5 ZR13033 TI6 ZR13034 TI7 ZR13035 TI8 ZR13036 TI9 ZR13037
TI10 ZR13038 TI11 ZR13039
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
413 IB-1501269-P
17.7 Initializing the NC Internal Data (SRAM) The initialization does not affect the settings of the option parameters.
(Note) The DIP switches next to the rotary switch are for our adjustment. Do not change them after the shipment. Normally the switches No. 1 and 2 are in OFF state (downward).
(1) With the NC power OFF, turn the rotary switch to "7" . Then, turn the power ON.
(2) Turn the power OFF after one of the two 7-segment LEDs (see below) displays "-" (hyphen).
(Note) Ignore the display on the side not marked with "-" in the above 7-segment LED displays.
(3) Change the rotary switch to "C" and then turn the power ON.
(4) The 7-segment LED display changes as "08." "00" "01" - - - "08". When it shows "0y", SRAM clear is completed (it takes 8 seconds).
(5) Turn the NC power OFF.
(6) Turn the rotary switch to "0" again.
(7) Turn the power ON again.
M800W/M80W M800S M80
2 E
5
3 4 C
7 9 8 6 A
1 F
B
D
0
2 E
5
3 4 C
7 9 8 6 A
1 F
B
D
0
2 E
5
3 4 C
7 9 8 6 A
1 F
B
D
0
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 17 Setting the Hardware
414IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) After the initializing and the NC power ON, the IP address is initialized as follows.
#1934 Local IP address: 192.168.100. 1 Failure to communicate with the screen may be caused by inconsistency between the parameter value and the "C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini" setting value. Confirm that "C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini" is set as shown below.
Last line of C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini
(Note 2) The initial screen after the initialization is displayed in English. Refer to "Selecting the NC System Type and Displayed Language" for how to set a language to display.
... [HOSTS] TCP1=192.168.100.1,683
415 IB-1501269-P
18 Setting Up with
M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
416IB-1501269-P
(Note) M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER is used to install language data other than Japanese and English, as well as custom screens. If you do not need the installation, go to the next section.
You can install the following data with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER. (1) Custom data
- Custom screen - PLC alarm guidance
(2) Custom startup screen (3) APLCdata
An SD card is used for the installation. MITSUBISHI will not provide performance guarantee and maintenance for commercially available SD card. In the case of using a commercially available SD card, careful performance check must be required by the machine tool builder. Commercially available devices may not be compatible with MITSUBISHI units or suitable FA environment for temperature or noise-wise.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
417 IB-1501269-P
18.1 Activate M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER (1) Write the data for M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER into an SD card.
The data configuration is as illustrated below.
*1 Custom data setting files
*2 Custom G code guidance data Store the custom G code guidance data in the G code guidance folder set with config.ini.
*3 Start-up screen - Install the bitmap file of the initial screen to be displayed at power ON. - Select "24-bit color" for colors. (Displayed by reducing to 16-bit color (RGB565).)
For an 8.4-type display unit or a 10.4-type display unit, select "640 * 440". For a 15-type display unit, select "1024 * 728".
- Name the startup screen file "startupscreen.bmp" for an 8.4-type display unit or a 10.4-type display unit, or "startupscreen15.bmp" for a 15-type display unit.
config.ini : Setting file for registering custom screen and G code guidance folder customdef.ini : Setting file for registering custom screens to menu and function buttons on standard screen customload.txt : Setting file for registering the object data name and load sequence
Installer installer.o
custom PLCAlarm
PLCAlarm_0001_jpn.htm
config.ini customdef.ini customload.txt
custom15 PLCAlarm
PLCAlarm_0001_jpn.htm
config.ini customdef.ini customload.txt
startupscreen.bmp startupscreen15.bmp
SD
logo.jpg
logo.jpg
comm_cycle CTMCYCLEDATA EXPANSIONCTM STANDARDCTM CUSTOMEX1 CUSTOMEX2 CUSTOMEX3 CUSTOMEX4 CUSTOMEX5
aplc.o aplc
(Execution file)
(Custom data folder)
(PLC alarm message folder)
(Custom screen module)
(Setting file) (Setting file) (Setting file)
(Custom data folder for 15-type display) (PLC alarm message for 15-type display)
(Custom screen module for 15type display)
(Setting file for 15-type display) (Setting file for 15-type display) (Setting file for 15-type display)
(Start-up screen) (Start-up screen for 15-type display)
(Custom screen module).o
(Custom screen module).o (Custom G code guidance data) *2
(Logo image file)
(Custom G code guidance data) *2
(Logo image file)
(User cycle folder) (Custom cycle folder) (Expansion cycle folder) (Standard cycle folder) (Custom cycle folder 1) (Custom cycle folder 2) (Custom cycle folder 3) (Custom cycle folder 4) (Custom cycle folder 5)
(APLC data folder) (APLC C language module)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
418IB-1501269-P
*4 APLC C language module - The size of APLC C language module must be 120KB or less.
*5 User cycle For details of user cycle, refer to "M800/M80 Series Interactive Cycle Insertion (Customization) Specification manual" ( BNP-C3072-121-0003).
*6 Data storage capacity Storage capacity of the installation data is as follows:
* For custom screen module, the capacity limit is up to 6MB. * Storage capacity is calculated on built-in memory; thus, it may be different from the data size on
installation medium.
(2) Insert an SD card of the M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER into the front-side SD interface.
(3) Turn ON the power while pressing Return key. -> Some time after the start-up screen is opened, "M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER" is activated with a beep sound.
Install data Data storage size General description Custom data (*) 12MB or less
Size on disk User cycle (*) 30MB or less APLC C language module (aplc.o) 120KB or less Module size
Display unit
SD card
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
419 IB-1501269-P
18.2 Install Custom Screen Carry out the procedures of this section to register custom screens. When you use standard screens only, there is no need to carry out the procedure.
(1) Push the [Custom Data] menu. -> The screen is changed to the custom data installation screen.
(2) Push the [Install] menu.
(3) When a confirmation message appears, push the [Yes] menu. (Note) Do not power OFF during installation.
(4) When installation is finished, "Installation completed" appears.
(Note 1) To uninstall the custom screen data, press the [Uninst] menu instead of [Install] in the step (2). Note, however, that both "Custom screen", "PLC alarm message" and "Logo image file" are uninstalled by the uninstallation operation.
(Note 2) The size of custom data must be 12MB or less. If it exceeds 12MB, the following message appears and the installation fails. "Installation Error. Please check the file size."
(Note 3) Installation or uninstallation is not executed when the [Yes] menu is pressed continuously after the previous
installation or uninstallation operation. Push Return key to return to the initial screen and start the procedure again.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
420IB-1501269-P
18.3 Install Start-up Screen Carry out the procedures of this section to register custom start-up screen. When you use standard start-up screen, there is no need to carry out the procedures.
(1) Push the [Custom Startup] menu. -> The screen is changed to the start-up screen installation screen.
(2) Push the [Install] menu.
(3) When a confirmation screen appears, push the [Yes] menu. (Note) Do not power OFF during installation.
(4) When installation is finished, "Installation completed" appears.
(Note 1) To uninstall the start-up screen data, push the [Uninst] menu instead of [Install] in the step (2). (Note 2) Installation or uninstallation is not executed when the [Yes] menu is pressed continuously after the previous
installation or uninstallation operation. Push Return key to return to the initial screen and start the procedure again.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
421 IB-1501269-P
18.4 Install APLC C Language Module Carry out the procedures of this section to register APLC C language module. When you do not use APLC C language module, there is no need to carry out the procedure.
(1) Push the [APLC Data] menu. -> The screen is changed to APLC C language module installation screen.
(2) Push the [Install] menu.
(3) When a confirmation screen appears, push the [Yes] menu. (Note) Do not power OFF during installation.
(4) When installation is finished, "Installation completed" appears.
(Note 1) To uninstall the APLC data, push the [Install] menu instead of [Uninst] in the step (2). (Note 2) The maximum size of APLC C language module (aplc.o) for installation is 120KB. If the size exceeds 120KB,
installation will fail and the massage "The file "aplc.o" is size over." will appear. (Note 3) Installation or uninstallation is not executed when the [Yes] menu is pressed continuously after the previous
installation or uninstallation operation. Push Return key to return to the initial screen and start the procedure again.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER
422IB-1501269-P
18.5 Install User Cycle Carry out the procedures of this section to register user cycle. When you do not use user cycle, there is no need to carry out the procedure.
(1) Push the [Custom Cycle] menu. -> The screen is changed to user cycle installation screen.
(2) Push the [Install] menu.
(3) When a confirmation screen appears, push the [Yes] menu. (Note) Do not power OFF during installation.
(4) When installation is finished, "Installation completed" appears.
(Note 1) To uninstall the user cycle, push the [Install] menu instead of [Uninst] in the step (2). (Note 2) The size of user cycle must be 30MB or less. If it exceeds 30MB, the following message appears and the
installation fails. "Installation Error. Please check the file size."
(Note 3) Installation or uninstallation is not executed when the [Yes] menu is pressed continuously after the previous
installation or uninstallation operation. Push Return key to return to the initial screen and start the procedure again.
423 IB-1501269-P
19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
424IB-1501269-P
Refer to the section of "Alarm/Parameter Manual" for the details of the parameters. You can also refer to the parameter guidance display. Normally, the initial setting of NC is performed with NC Configrator2. NC Configurator2 is a tool for supporting the parameter setting of NC. For the details, refer to "NC Configurator2 Instruction Manual"(IB-1501046).
19.1 Selecting the NC System Type and Displayed Language When employing the lathe system, set the parameter as follows.
(1) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input]. Enter the machine tool builder password in the setting area and press the [INPUT] key. (Note 1) To enter the character "A", press the shift key and then "A" key. Do not press both keys at the same time. (Note 2) The entered password is displayed as "*****".
(2) Go back to the Mainte screen and select [Param].
(3) Select [Para Nosearch]. Enter "1043" in the setting area and press the [INPUT] key. Select the language to be displayed.
(4) Select [Para Nosearch]. Enter "1007" in the setting area and press the [INPUT] key. The screen changes to the base system parameters screen. The cursor moves to the "#1007 System type select" field.
(5) Enter "1" in the setting area and press the [INPUT] key. (0: Machining center system 1: Lathe system)
(6) Turn the power OFF and ON.
WARNING Confirm the emergency stop state before carrying out the steps in this chapter.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
425 IB-1501269-P
19.2 Setting the Parameters for the System Specifications (1) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input]. Enter the machine tool builder password in the
setting area and press the [INPUT] key.
(2) Go back to the Mainte screen.Then select [Param]. Set the parameters according to the system specifications.
"#1001 SYS_ON(System validation setup)" "#1002 axisno(Number of axes)" "#1003 iunit(Input setup unit)" "#1004 ctrl_unit(Control unit)" "#1005 plcunit(PLC unit)" "#1006 mcmpunit(Machine error compensation unit)" "#1037 cmdtyp(Command type)" "#1039 spinno(Number of spindles)" "#1155 DOOR_m"...Set to "100". "#1156 DOOR_s"... Set to "100". "#1511 DOORPm(Signal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each system)" "#1512 DOORPs(Signal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each system)"
(3) After turning the power OFF and ON, select [Mainte] on the maintenance screen, switch the menu by the Menu change button and then select [Format].
(4) When "Input the password" is displayed, enter the machine tool builder password in the setting area and then press [INPUT] key.
(5) When "Format NC memory? (Y/N)" is displayed, press "Y". "Format complete" will be displayed.
(6) Turn the power ON again and select [Mainte] --> [Psswd input] on the maintenance screen. Enter the machine tool builder password in the setting area and press the [INPUT] key. Select [Param] again on the Mainte screen. Set the following parameters.
"#1010 srvunit(Output unit(servo))" "#1013 axname(Axis name)" (Note) When the arbitrary axis exchange control is valid, set the axis names in "#12071 adr_abs[1]" to
"#12078 adr_abs[8]". "#1021 mcp_no(Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo)))"
Set the following parameters as needed. "#1014 incax(Incremental command axis name)" (Note) When the arbitrary axis exchange control is valid, set the incremental command axis name in
"#12079 adr_inc[1]" to "#12086 adr_inc[8]". "#1015 cunit(Command unit)" "#1017 rot(Rotational axis)" "#1018 ccw(Motor CCW)" "#1019 dia(Diameter specification axis)" "#1020 sp_ax(Spindle interpolation)" "#1022 axname2(2nd axis name)"
(7) Turn the power OFF and ON.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
426IB-1501269-P
19.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications (1) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input]. Enter the machine tool builder password in the
setting area and press the [INPUT] key. (Note 1) To enter the character "A", press the shift key and then "A" key. Do not press both keys at the same time.
(2) Go back to the Mainte screen.Then select [Param]. Set the parameters according to the machine specifications. Setting of the following parameters is necessary.
Base system parameters "#1025 I_plane (Initial plane selection)" "#1026 base_I (Base axis I)" "#1027 base_J (Base axis J)" "#1028 base_K (Base axis K)" "#1029 aux_I (Flat axis I)" "#1030 aux_J (Flat axisJ)" "#1031 aux_K (Flat axis K)"
Base axis specification parameters "#1603 PLCdev_no (Axis device assignment No.)" (Note) Set this in one of the following cases:
- When the system has five ore more part systems - When the number of axes in the part system is nine or more - When you want to change the assignment of axis device
[Device]
(Note) The device Nos corresponding to (1) to (32) differ depending on device type.
$1 $2 $3 $4 (1) (9) (17) (25) Axis 1 (2) (10) (18) (26) Axis 2 (3) (11) (19) (27) Axis 3 (4) (12) (20) (28) Axis 4 (5) (13) (21) (29) Axis 5 (6) (14) (22) (30) Axis 6 (7) (15) (23) (31) Axis 7 (8) (16) (24) (32) Axis 8
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
427 IB-1501269-P
Configuration example for seven part systems (Number of axes per part system: 8, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 3) (Assumed to use the device of each part system in the ladder as follows:)
$1 Axis 1 [Axis 1] (1), $1 Axis 2 [Axis 2] (2), $1 Axis 3 [Axis 3] (3), $1 Axis 4 [Axis 4] (4), $1 Axis 5 [Axis 5] (5), $1 Axis 6 [Axis 6] (6), $1 Axis 7 [Axis 7] (7), $1 Axis 8 [Axis 8] (8), $2 Axis 1 [Axis 9] (9), $3 Axis 1 [Axis 10] (10), $4 Axis 1 [Axis 11] (11), $5 Axis 1 [Axis 12] (12), $6 Axis 1 [Axis 13] (13), $7 Axis 1 [Axis 14] (14), $7 Axis 2 [Axis 15] (15), $7 Axis 3 [Axis 16] (16) (Note) (17) to (32) are unused areas.
Parameter setting value (For the above configuration example):
Base common parameters "#1041 I_inch (Initial state (inch))" "#1042 pcinch (PLC axis command (inch))" "#1239 set11/bit1 (Handle I/F selection)" "#1240 set12/bit0 (Handle input pulse)"
Axis specification parameter "#2001 rapid (Rapid traverse rate)" "#2002 clamp (Cutting feedrate for clamp function)" "#2003 smgst (Acceleration and deceleration modes)" "#2004 G0tL (G0 time constant)" "#2005 G0t1(G0 time constant(primary delay)" "#2007 G0tL (G1 time constant)" "#2008 G1t1(G1 time constant (primary delay))"
Spindle specification parameter "#3001 slimt1 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 00))" "#3002 slimt2 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 01))" "#3003 slimt3 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 10))" "#3004 slimt4 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 11))" "#3005 smax1 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 00))" "#3006 smax2 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 01))" "#3007 smax3 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 10))" "#3008 smax4 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 11))" "#3023 smini (Minimum rotation speed)" "#3024 sout (Spindle connection)" "#3031 smcp_no (Drive unit I/F channel No.(spindle))" "#3109 zdetspd (Z phase detection speed)"
Set the servo parameters according to the instruction manual for your drive. Set the spindle parameters according to "Parameter setting list".
(3) Turn the power OFF and ON.
Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6 Axis 7 Axis 8 #1603 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Axis 9 Axis 10 Axis 11 Axis 12 Axis 13 Axis 14 Axis 15 Axis 16 #1603 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 19 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
428IB-1501269-P
19.4 Setting Date and Time (1) Select [Time] on the Monitr screen.
(2) Select [Time setting] on the integrated time screen. The time setting mode is entered. The cursor appears at the "#1 Date" position in the Run-out time display.
(3) Set the date and time to "#1 Date" and "#2 Time" respectively. (4) Select [Selfdia] on the diagn screen. (5) Select [Battery clear] on the self diagn screen, and set the battery used years to "0". (Note) If battery used years is not cleared, passed years from default date (2014/4/1) will be displayed on battery
used years.
429 IB-1501269-P
20 Sequence Program Writing
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
430IB-1501269-P
Sequence program writing is executed by connecting a personal computer, in which GX Developer or GX Works2 has been installed, to the control unit. Refer to the "PLC Development Manual" for details.
20.1 Writing Sequence Program using the SD Card Save the sequence program in an SD card and write the data to NC using the external file operations on PLC onboard.
20.2 Setting the Ethernet Communication 20.2.1 Confirming the IP Address for CNC
Confirm the IP address set for the CNC. IP address is set to the following parameter.
The case of when the initial value "192.168.200.1" after SRAM clear has been set is explained as an example in this chapter.
20.2.2 Setting the IP Address for PC Side For the personal computer for which GX Developer or GX Works2 is available, IP address has to be set within the same subnet mask as CNC unit.
(1) Select [Start] - [Control Panel] - [Network and Internet] - [Network and Sharing Center] from task bar.
(2) "Network and Sharing Center" is displayed. Click [Local Area Connection].
Basic common parameter Item Content Setting example
#1926 Global IP address IP address for CNC seen from an external source 192.168.200.1
#1927 Global Subnet mask Subnet mask of #1926 255.255.255.0
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
431 IB-1501269-P
(3) "Local Area Connection Status" is displayed. Click [Properties].
(4) Click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" on the [Networking] tab, and then click [Properties].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
432IB-1501269-P
(5) Take a note of the displayed IP address and subnet mask.
(6) Set the following addresses. (Note) (Example) IP address: 192.168.200.2
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Note) In the section "20.2.1 Confirming the IP Address for CNC", set an IP address in the range of "192.168.200.1" to "192.168.200.254", but do not use "192.168.200.1". Note that when other CNC and devices are connected on the same network, be careful not to duplicate the address with other CNC and devices.
(7) Click [OK] and close all the windows.
20.3 Connecting the Control Unit and a Personal Computer Connect a personal computer, which has GX Developer or GX Works2 installed, to the control unit.
(Note 1) It is recommended to use GX Developer Version 8.114U (SW8D5C-GPPW) and later. (Note 2) It is recommended to use GX Works2 Version 1.570U and later. (Note 3) Carry out the Ethernet communication setting (IP address and so on) on the personal computer before
connecting it to NC.
GX Developer /GX Works2
LAN1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
433 IB-1501269-P
20.4 Setting the Communication with GX Developer To create the machine sequence and user safety sequence of the CNC, use the Mitsubishi Electric FA engineering software GX Developer, which is the PLC development tool for the Mitsubishi PLC MELSEC Series.
When using GX Works2, refer to "Setting the Communication with GX Works2".
(1) Perform the following operations with GX Developer to start the setup screen. [Online] -> [Transfer setup...]
(2) Set the following items in order. (a) For the machine sequence
*1: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the Ethernet board selection field. *2: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the Ethernet unit selection field. *3: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the other station (Single network) selection field. *4: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the Ethernet unit selection field.
SW8D5C-GPPW setting screen
Machine sequence: Control circuit created to control the machine tools (ladder circuit)
User safety sequence: Control circuit of the safety-related I/O observation created with the smart safety observation function (ladder circuit)
Setting item Setting content Remark PC side I/F Ethernet board
Network No. 1 *1 Station No. 1 *1 Protocol TCP *1
PLC side I/F Ethernet unit Type name QJ71E71 *2 Station No. 1 *2 IP address IP address of CNC *2 Routing parameter conversion method Automatic conversion method *2
Other station Other station (Single network) Time out check (sec.) Arbitrary time (from about 10 sec.) *3 Number of retry 0 *3
Network communication path Ethernet Access to the Ethernet unit that is set with PLC side I/F *4
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
434IB-1501269-P
(b) For the user safety sequence
*1: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the Ethernet board selection field. *2: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the CPU unit selection field. *3: The setting items are displayed by double-clicking the other station (Single network) selection field.
SW8D5C-GPPW setting screen
(3) Press the [Connection test] button after completing the setting. If the connection has succeeded, the message "Successfully connected with the Q26UDHCPU." will be displayed and the multiple CPU connection status will be displayed at the bottom of the message. This display indicates connection status for each project.
Setting item Setting content Remark PC side I/F Ethernet board
Network No. 1 *1 Station No. 1 *1 Protocol TCP *1
PLC side I/F CPU unit CPU mode QCPU (Q mode) *2 Ethernet port direct connection Not check *2 IP address IP address of CNC *2
Other station No other station designated Time out check (sec.) Arbitrary time (Approx. 10 sec. or more) *3 Number of retry 0 *3
Multi CPU For the user safety sequence 1, select No. 1. For the user safety sequence 2, select No. 2.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
435 IB-1501269-P
20.5 Setting the Parameters on GX Developer (Note) There are two methods of ladder programming; independent program method and multi-program method,
which makes differences in parameter settings. An incorrect parameter setting in the ladder programming may cause a write error. For details of the parameter settings, refer to the "PLC Development Manual".
20.5.1 Parameter Setting Screen (1) Displaying the project data list and parameter setting screen
Display the "Project data list" window with the following operations. Double-click on "PLC parameter" to open the parameter setting screen. The same operation can be carried out by designating the data type "Parameter" and the data name "PLC parameter" from the tool bar.
[View] -> [Project data list] and then double-click "PLC parameter".
(2) Displaying the parameter setting screen Perform the following operations to display the parameter setting screen. The characters of tab in "red" show that the settings are the initial values.
Project data list window
Tool bar
PLC parameter
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
436IB-1501269-P
20.5.2 Setting the Number of Device Points After creating a sequence program management area (project), the number of device points to be used in the project must be set first. This operation is required every time when a new project is created. For details on each setting item, refer to the "PLC Programming Manual".
(Note) If this operation is not performed, an error occurs when a sequence program is downloaded to a CNC controller.
(1) Select the tab [Device]. The device range usable for each project changes in the multi-project environment. Input the points "number of device points + number of common points" which have been set on "Device setting screen of built-in PLC built-in editing function" as the number of device points for the parameters. An error occurs when the number of device points is wrong.
(2) Input the numerical values for device points on the screen below and click [End]. Set the number of device points ("number of device points + number of common points" which has been set at the device setting screen of built-in PLC built-in editing function) in the section in red square below. The number should match the currently connected project. After the setting for the number of device points is completed, press "End" to finish the edit.
(Note) If a value other than the designated values is input, an error occurs at the download to a CNC controller.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
437 IB-1501269-P
20.5.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points The number of common pointer points for each sequence program must be set for creating the sequence program with the multi-program method. This operation is required every time when a new project is created, and the parameter file must be written to the CNC controller.
(Note) When common pointer No. is not set, "P1800" is set.
(1) Select the tab "PLC system".
(2) Input the value for "Common pointer No." on the screen below and click [End].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
438IB-1501269-P
20.5.4 Setting the Program Execution Order When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the execution method and execution order of each sequence program must be set. This operation is carried out before the sequence program is executed with the CNC controller. The parameter file must be written to the CNC controller. For details on each setting item, refer to the "PLC Programming Manual".
(Note) If this operation is not completed when using the multi-program method, an error will occur when RUN is executed in the sequence program.
(1) Select the [Program] tab
(2) Select the sequence program name to be registered for execution from the program list on the left of the following screen, and then press the "Insert" button. Select the execution mode from the registration program list on the right side. After registering all sequence programs to be executed, click on [End].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
439 IB-1501269-P
20.6 Writing a Sequence Program with GX Developer (Note) This operation is for performing writing in the temporary storage area of CNC (RAM inside CNC). The
temporary storage area (RAM inside CNC) does not hold data after the power is turned OFF. If the data need to be held even after the power OFF, write the sequence program in ROM inside CNC following the procedure described in "Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Developer".
[Operation procedure for a project "without labels"] The following is the operation procedure for a project in which labels are not used.
(1) Perform the following operation with GX Developer to start the operation screen. [Online] -> [Write to PLC...]
(2) Select a sequence program file for writing in the [File selection] tab of the screen below and click [Execute]. RUN/STOP for PLC can be commanded on [Remote operation...] of "Related functions".
(Note) Only "Program memory/Device memory" is valid for "Target memory". Do not carry out the setting for other tabs than [File selection] ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]).
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
440IB-1501269-P
[Operation procedure for a project "with labels"] The following is the operation procedure for label programming.
(1) Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen. [Online] -> [Write to PLC]
(2) On the following screen, choose the sequence program file to be written from the [File selection] tab and click [Execute]. PLC RUN/STOP can be commanded with [Remote operation] under "Related functions".
(Note 1) As [Target memory] for writing sequence programs, only "Program memory/Device memory" is valid.
(Note 2) Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection]. (Note 3) As [Target memory] for writing label programs, only "Program memory/Device memory" or "Memory
card(RAM)" is valid. When writing label programs, one "symbolic information file" is written to NC.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
441 IB-1501269-P
20.7 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Developer [Operation procedure]
(1) Perform the following operation with GX Developer to start the operation screen. [Online] -> [Write to PLC (Flash ROM)] -> [Copy program memory data into ROM]
(Note) Only "IC Card (ROM)" is valid for "Target".
(2) Click [Execute] and the dialog below is displayed.
(3) Click [Yes] and the dialog below is displayed.
(Note) Once "OK" is clicked on the dialog above, PLC program of ROM inside CNC on the CNC controller is overwritten/deleted. Confirm sufficiently before the execution.
(4) When the execution is completed, the dialog below is displayed. Click [OK].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
442IB-1501269-P
20.8 Setting the Communication with GX Works2 To create the machine sequence and user safety sequence of the CNC, use the Mitsubishi Electric FA engineering software GX Works2, which is the PLC development tool for the Mitsubishi PLC MELSEC Series.
When using GX Developer, refer to "Setting the Communication with GX Developer".
(1) Start the setting screen by the following operation in the navigation window on GX Works2. Select [Connection Destination], then double-click [Current Connection].
(2) Set the following items in the order of the list. (a) For the machine sequence
(*1) Double-click [Ethernet Board] to display the setting item. (*2) Double-click [Ethernet Module] to display the setting item. (*3) Double-click [Other Station (Single network)] to display the setting item. (*4) Double-click [Ethernet] to display the setting item.
Transfer Setup Connection 1 screen
Machine sequence: Control circuit created to control the machine tools (ladder circuit)
User safety sequence: Control circuit of the safety-related I/O observation created with the smart safety observation function (ladder circuit)
Item Setting Note PC side I/F Ethernet Board
Network No. 1 (*1)
Station No. 1 (*1)
Protocol TCP (*1)
PLC side I/F Ethernet Module
Type name QJ71E71 (*2)
Station No. 1 (*2)
IP Address IP address of CNC (*2)
IP Input Format DEC. (*2)
Station No. <-> IP information Automatic Response System (*2)
Other Station Setting Other Station (Single Network)
Check at communication time (sec.) Any time period (from about 10 seconds) (*3)
Retry times 0 (*3)
Network Communication Route Detailed setting of Ethernet
Access to Ethernet module set on PCL side I/F (*4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
443 IB-1501269-P
(b) For the user safety sequence
(*1) Double-click [Ethernet Board] to display the setting item. (*2) Double-click [Ethernet Module] to display the setting item. (*3) Double-click [Other Station (Single network)] to display the setting item.
Transfer Setup Connection 1 screen
(3) After setting the connection, press [Connection Test]. If connection is successful, the message "Connected with Q26UDHCPU" is displayed with the multi-CPU connection status underneath, which indicates the connection status of each project.
Item Setting Note PC side I/F Ethernet Board
Network No. 1 (*1) Station No. 1 (*1) Protocol TCP (*1)
PLC side I/F CPU unit CPU mode QCPU (Q mode) (*2) Ethernet: direct port connection and connection via hub selection Connection via hub (*2)
IP address IP address of CNC (*2) IP input format Decimal (*2)
Other station setting No other station specified
Check at communication time (sec.) Arbitrary time (approximately 10 seconds and longer) (*3)
Retry times 0 (*3) Multi CPU designated
Select the first machine for the user safety sequence 1. Select the second machine for the user safety sequence 2.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
444IB-1501269-P
20.9 Setting the Parameters on GX Works2 (Note) There are two methods of ladder programming; independent program method and multi-program method,
which makes differences in parameter settings. An incorrect parameter setting in the ladder programming may cause a write error. For details of the parameter settings, refer to the "PLC Development Manual".
20.9.1 Parameter Setting Screen (1) Displaying parameter setting screen
To open the parameter setting screen, display the project view on the navigation window by the following operation. Expand the tree by double-clicking [Parameter], and double-click [PLC Parameter].
[Project] -> Double-click [Parameter] -> Double-click [PLC Parameter]
The above operation opens the following parameter setting screen. Tab names in red indicate that the initial values are set.
PLC parameter
Project view
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
445 IB-1501269-P
20.9.2 Setting Device Points After creating an area (project) to manage sequence programs, set the number of the device points used in the project. This operation is required every time a new project is created. For details on each setting item, refer to the "PLC Programming Manual".
(Note) Without this operation, an error occurs when sequence programs are downloaded to the CNC controller.
(1) Select the Device tab. Populate the device points in the parameter with the numbers of device points + common points that are set on the device setting screen in built-in PLC (built-in edit function). Setting wrong device points incurs an error. The range of devices that can be used in each project varies in multi-project environment.
(2) Enter the device points, and click [End] on the following screen. Enter the number of devices in the project currently connected to inside the red line indicated in the figure below. When all device points are set, press [End] to end editing.
(Note) If the wrong number is set, downloading to the CNC controller fails with an error.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
446IB-1501269-P
20.9.3 Setting Common Pointer No. Set the pointer No. common to sequence programs when creating sequence programs in multi-program method. This operation is required every time a new project is created, and parameter files must be written to the CNC controller.
(Note) When not set, Common Pointer No. is set as P1800. When a simple project (with labels) or a structured project is newly created, or when "Project Type" is changed to any of the said project, "2048" is automatically set to "Common Pointer No." as the default value if its setting has been blank.
(1) Select the PLC System tab.
(2) Set a numeric value in [Common Pointer No.], and click [End] on the following screen.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
447 IB-1501269-P
20.9.4 Setting Program Executing Order When creating sequence programs in multi-program method, set the execution method and execution order of sequence programs. This operation is required before a sequence program is executed on the CNC controller, and parameter files must be written to the CNC controller.
(Note) Without this operation, an error occurs on the RUN of sequence programs when multi-program method is in use.
(1) Select the Program tab.
(2) Select the name of the sequence program to be registered for execution from the program list on the left side of the following screen, and press [Insert]. Select the execution mode from the registered program list on the right side.
(3) After registering all sequence programs to execute, click [End].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
448IB-1501269-P
20.10 Writing a Sequence Program with GX Works2 (Note) This operation writes data to the temporary storage in the CNC (RAM in CNC). Data in temporary storage
(RAM in CNC) are not retained after power OFF. To retain data after power OFF, write sequence programs to the ROM in the CNC according to "Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Works2".
[Operating procedure for simple projects (without labels)] The following is the operation procedure for a project in which labels are not used.
(1) Start the operation screen by the following operation on GX Works2. [Online] -> [Write to PLC]
(2) Select [Program Memory/Device Memory] in [Target Memory Setting] of PLC data on the following screen. Select write sequence program files, and click [Execute]. RUN/STOP of PLC can be instructed by selecting [Related Functions] - [Remote Operation].
(Note1) [Program Memory/Device Memory] is the only valid option for [Target Memory Setting].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
449 IB-1501269-P
(Note2) If an attempt is made to remove the check from parameter and write sequence programs during PLC is running, the prompt "PLC is running. Do you want to force write of the files?" is displayed.
The CNC only supports writing during RUN from the [Compile] menu; if [Yes] is clicked, an error dialog is displayed and sequence programs are not written.
Click [No], and click [Yes] to the prompt: "The CPU status must be STOP to perform a write operation. Would you like to perform write operation?"
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
450IB-1501269-P
[Operating procedure for simple projects (with labels)] The operating procedure when "use label" is set is described below.
(1) Start the operation screen by the following operation on GX Works2. [Online] -> [Write to PLC]
(2) Select [Program Memory/Device Memory] in target memory setting for symbolic information on the following screen. Select [Program Memory/Device Memory] in the target memory setting for PLC data. Click [Parameter+Program], and then click [Execute]. RUN/STOP of PLC can be instructed by selecting [Related Functions] - [Remote Operation].
(Note1) Program Memory/Device Memory] is the only valid option for [Target Memory Setting]. (Note2) Since device memory cannot be written to the CNC controller, unselect the checkbox for device
memory. (Note3) Make sure to write parameters at the same time when the symbolic information is to be written. If
parameters are not written, the project has not been compiled when the symbolic information is read.
(Note4) If an attempt is made to remove the check from the parameter and to write sequence programs while PLC is running, the prompt "PLC is running. Do you want to force write of the files?" is displayed. The CNC only supports writing during RUN from the [Compile] menu; if [Yes] is clicked, an error dialog is displayed and sequence programs are not written. Click [No], and click [Yes] to the prompt "The CPU status must be STOP to perform a write operation. Would you like to perform write operation?" is displayed.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
451 IB-1501269-P
20.11 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Works2 (*) Write operation to the ROM is not necessary for the user safety sequence. [Operation procedure]
(1) Start the operation screen by the following operation on GX Works2. [Online] -> [Export to ROM Format]
(Note) Only [memory card (Flash)] is valid as [Target].
(2) Click [Execute] to display the following dialog, and click [Yes].
(Note) When [Yes] is clicked in the above dialog, sequence program files on the ROM in the CNC the CNC controller are overwrite and deleted. This should be done with extreme caution.
(3) Writing is completed when the following dialog is displayed. Click [OK].
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 20 Sequence Program Writing
452IB-1501269-P
20.12 Setting the PLC Parameters Select [Bit select] on the Mainte screen and set the bit selection parameters from #6449 to #6452. See the following table for details of the parameters.
(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated "-" and blanks to "0". (Note 2) Functions marked with "" may not be available for some machine types.
0
-
-
--
-
-
--
-
-
0
1
2
3
1234567Symbol name
#6449 R7824 L
#6450 R7824 H
#6451 R7825 L
#6452 R7825 H
0
1
Branch destination label check valid
External alarm message display
Control unit thermal alarm on
Counter C retention
Integrated timer ST retention
PLC counter program valid
PLC timer program valid
Setting and display unit thermal mgmt valid
Alarm/ operator change
Full screen display of message
Operator message valid
Alarm message valid
F method
R method
-
Serial handy terminal communica- tion valid
Built-in edit function edit invalid
Built-in edit function edit valid
Battery alarm / warning detection disabled
-
453 IB-1501269-P
21 Confirming the Basic Operation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 21 Confirming the Basic Operation
454IB-1501269-P
21.1 Checking Inputs/Outputs and Alarms (1) Checking the input signals
(a) Select [I/F dia] on the Diagn screen. (b) Confirm that signals turn ON/OFF properly on the IF Diagnosis screen.
(2) Checking the alarm display (a) Select [Alarm] on the Diagn screen. (b) Check any other alarm than "Emergency stop EXIN" displayed on the Alarm screen.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 21 Confirming the Basic Operation
455 IB-1501269-P
21.2 Confirming Manual Operation 21.2.1 Using the Manual Pulse Generator
(1) Select the handle mode.
(2) Set the handle feed magnification to a minimum value.
(3) Cancel the emergency stop. Confirm the operation status displays "RDY". (Note 2) (Note 1) If any abnormal noise or vibration occurs, execute an emergency stop and take a measure against
vibration. (Refer to "First Measure Against Vibration".) (Note 2) If there is a keyboard, it can also be confirmed with the READY lamp ON.
(4) Select an axis and turn the manual pulse generator by one scale. Confirm the direction and the amount of the movement on the current position display. If the display is not correct, check parameters, PLC programs and devices' connections.
(5) Turn the manual pulse generator and confirm the direction and the amount of the machine's movement. If the display is not correct, check parameters. (Related parameters: "#1018 ccw (Motor CCW)", "#2201 SV001(PC1) (Motor side gear ratio)", "#2202 SV002(PC2) (Machine side gear ratio)", "#2218 SV018(PIT) (Ball screw pitch)" and so on) (Note) Take care of the machine's movement range during the operation.
(6) Check the rest of the axes for each with the same operation as above.
21.2.2 Using JOG Feed (1) Select JOG mode.
(2) Set the manual feed rate to 100mm/min.
(3) Cancel the emergency stop. Confirm the operation status displays "RDY". (Note 2) (Note 1) If any abnormal noise or vibration occurs, execute an emergency stop and take a measure against
vibration. (Refer to "First Measure Against Vibration". ) (Note 2) If there is a keyboard, it can also be confirmed with the READY lamp ON.
(4) Select an axis, press the JOG feed button and move the axis to safe area. Confirm the direction and the amount of the movement on the current position display. If the display is not correct, check parameters, PLC programs and devices' connections.
(5) Confirm the direction and the amount of machine's movement. If the display is not correct, check parameters. (Related parameters: "#1018 ccw (Motor CCW)", "#2201 SV001(PC1) (Motor side gear ratio)", "#2202 SV002(PC2) (Machine side gear ratio)", "#2218 SV018(PIT) (Ball screw pitch)" and so on) (Note) Take care of the machine's movement range during the operation.
(6) Check the rest of the axes for each with the same operation as above.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 21 Confirming the Basic Operation
456IB-1501269-P
21.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment
21.3.1 First Measure Against Vibration Setting the filter can reduce the vibration.
(1) Select [Drv mon] and then [Servo unit] on the Diagn screen. See the displayed value in "AFLT frequency".
(Note) The screen above is when NC parameters have default values.
(2) Select [Param] and then [Servo param] on the Mainte screen. Set the AFLT frequency value you saw at (1) to "#2238 SV038 FHz1 (Notch filter frequency 1)".
(Note) The screen above is when NC parameters have default values.
If the vibration is not reduced by the measure, refer to the manuals of the drive unit you are using.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 21 Confirming the Basic Operation
457 IB-1501269-P
21.3.2 NC Analyzer2 Servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by measuring and analyzing the machine characteristics. Measurement and analysis are conducted by driving the motor using machining programs for adjustment or vibration signals. Various data can also be sampled.
(*1) For the measurement, create a program by the program creation function or use an arbitrary machining program. (*2) Two or more NC axes in the same system are needed.
For details, refer to "NC Analyzer2 Instruction Manual" (IB-1501501326).
Adjustment wizard Description Velocity loop gain adjustment Automatically adjusts velocity loop gain and resonance filters. Lost motion adjustment Adjusts the lost motion automatically for the delay in responsecaused when the direction of
the machine rotates is reversed.
Measurement and adjustment Description Frequency response measurement Measures the frequency response of speed loop for the designated axis. The result will be
output as frequency response waveform. Reciprocation acceleration/ deceleration measurement
Measures the reciprocation acceleration/deceleration for the designated axis. The result will be output as time-series waveform. (*1)
Roundness measurement Measures the roundness for the designated axis. The result will be output as roundness waveform. (*1)
Synch tap error measurement Measures the synchronous tap error for the designated axis. The result will be output as time- series waveform.(*1)
Spindle acceleration/deceleration measurement
Measures the spindle acceleration/deceleration for the designated axis. The result will be output as time-series waveform. (*1)
Spindle orientation measurement Measures the spindle orientation for the designated axis. The result will be output as time- series waveform.(*1)
Spindle C-axis measurement Executes the reciprocation acceleration/deceleration measurement of spindle C axis with specified axis. The result will be output as time-series waveform. (*1)
Spindle synchronization measurement
Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified axis, and measures spindle synchronization by using that data. The result will be output as time-series waveform.
PLC axis acceleration/deceleration measurement
Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified axis, and measures PLC axis acceleration/deceleration by using that data. The result will be output as time-series waveform.
Arbitrary path measurement (*2)
Executes an arbitrary machining program with specified two axes. The result will be output as arbitrary path measurement waveform. (*1)
NC Analyzer2
Drive unitControl unit
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 21 Confirming the Basic Operation
458IB-1501269-P
459 IB-1501269-P
22 Setting the Position Detection System
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
460IB-1501269-P
There are two kinds of position detection system: one is "relative position detection", which establishes the reference position (zero point) at every CNC power-ON; the other is "absolute position detection", which allows to start the operation without establishing the reference position (zero point) again after the CNC power-ON.
22.1 Adjusting the Absolute Position Detection System There are four types of the absolute position zero point initial setting: "marked point alignment method", "marked point alignment method II", "machine end stopper method", and "dog-type". Set the parameter "#2049 type (Absolute position detection method)" for the type and method of absolute position zero point initial setting. The required components differ depending on the detection method.
[Characteristics of each method] (1) Marked point alignment method I
Align the table sides mark and the machine sides mark. The first grid point which is returned from the marks are aligned is determined as the basic position. Because the first grid point which is returned from the marks are aligned is determined as the basic position, the reproducibility is kept even the position information is lost due to runnning out of battery etc.
(2) Marked point alignment method II Align the table sides mark and the machine sides mark. The position where the marks are aligned is determined as the basic position. Because the position where the marks are alinged is determined as the basic position, the reproductivity is low if the position information is lost due to running out of battery etc.
(3) Machine end stopper method Push the table against the machine end stopper. [When #2059 zerbas = 0]
The position where the table is pushed against the machine end stopper is determined as the basic position. [When #2059 zerbas = 1]
The first grid point which is returned from the position where the table is pushed against the machine end stopper is determined as the basic position.
There are two types of the machine end stopper method: automatic initialization and manual initialization. When the automatic initialization is applied, the axis travels automatically after the JOG is started. When the manual initialization is applied, the axis travels by handle mode or JOG mode while confirming each operation.
(4) Dog method This method requires a dog sensor. Move the table until the dog is kicked, and the first grid point after the dog OFF is determined as the basic position.
Method Required component Basic position #2049
type #2059 zerbas Reference
Marked point alignment method I None The first grid point which is returned from the position where the mark is aligned. 2 1 22.1.1
Marked point alignment method II None The position where the marks are aligned. 4 0 22.1.2
Machine end stopper method Machine end stopper
The position where the table is pushed against the machine end stopper. 1 0
22.1.3 22.1.4The first grid pointed which is returned from the position
where the table is pushed against the machine end stopper. 1 1
Dog type Dog, dog-sensor The first grid point after the dog OFF. 3 0 22.1.5
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
461 IB-1501269-P
22.1.1 Marked Point Alignment Method I (1) Preparations
Set the parameters on the Abs pos param screen.
#2049 type (absolute position detection method): 2 (marked point alignment method I) #2050 absdir (basic point of Z direction): 0 or 1 #2059 zerbas (select zero point parameter and basic point): 0 The parameters other than "#2049 type" can also be set on Absolute position setting screen.
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON. (Only when "#2049 type" is specified again.)
The following are the operations on the absolute position setting screen. (Select [Mainte] - [To Abs pos])
(3) Select an axis to set the absolute position. There are two methods to select an axis. - Select the menu [Axis select], enter the axis name in the input area then press [INPUT]. (For the axis name, input the name set to the parameter "#1022 axname2" (2nd axis name).) - Press the menu [Prev axis] and [Next axis] to switch the axis.
(4) Select "HANDLE" or "JOG" for the mode selection of machine operation switch.
(5) Confirm that the cursor is placed on "Absolute posn set", input "1" in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Absolute posn set" area. State: [Origin set]
(6) Move the axis to mechanical basic position.
(7) Move the cursor to "Origin-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input "1" in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Origin-P" area. State: [Ret. Ref. P.] Machine end: Distance between the mechanical basic position and the first grid point
(8) Move the axis in the direction designated with the absolute position parameter "#2050 absdir".
(9) The axis stops when it reached the first grid point.
State: [Complete] Machine position: Current machine position
Selected axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
462IB-1501269-P
The zero point initial setting is now complete. After initializing all axes, turn the power OFF and ON.
- (6) to (10) in this diagram indicate steps of the operation procedure.
(Note 1) To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, set "#0 Absolute posn set" and "#2 Zero-P", and then turn the power OFF and ON.
(Note 2) If aligning the axis on the marked point is attempted without passing the grip point once after turning the power ON, the operation message "Not passed on grid" will appear. Return to a point before the last grid, and then repeat from step of aligning the axis on the marked point.
(Note 3) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask (#2028 grmask) as a result of return to the electric basic position in the step (8), the axis stops at the next grid point. Note that reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft) is invalid.
(Note 4) Confirm the "absdir" setting if the machine does not move in the direction of "#2050 absdir" in the step (8). The machine will move only in the positive direction when set to "0", and the negative direction when set to "1".
(10) Set the "Zero-P". Move the cursor to "Zero-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input the distance from the basic machine coordinate zero point to the grid point immediately preceding the basic position in the input area then press [INPUT].
Setting "Zero-P" When the machine is set up for the first time or when the grid point has changed because of replacement of motor and encoder, set the distance from the basic machine coordinate system zero point from the grid point (electric basic position) to "Zero-P". (When you set mechanical reference position as basic machine coordinate system zero point, set the display value of "Machine end" to "Zero-P".) When you perform zero point initial setting due to the disappearance of the absolute position, the grid point (electric basic position) does not change; therefore, there is no need to set "Zero-P" again.
(6)
(8) (10)
(7) (9)
Grid point (electric basic position)Zero return parameter
"#2037 G53ofs"
Start point
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Reference position
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
Mechanical basic position
"Machine end"
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
463 IB-1501269-P
22.1.2 Marked Point Alignment Method II (1) Preparations
Set the parameters on the Abs pos param screen.
#2049 type (absolute position detection method): 4 (marked point alignment method II) #2059 zerbas (zero return parameter): 0 The parameters other than #2049 type can also be set in Absolute position setting screen.
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON. (Only when "#2049 type" is specified again.)
The following are the operations on the absolute position setting screen. (Select [Mainte] - [To Abs pos])
(3) Select an axis to set the absolute position. There are two methods to select an axis. - Select the menu [Axis select], enter the axis name in the input area then press [INPUT]. (For the axis name, input the name set to the parameter "#1022 axname2" (2nd axis name).) - Press the menu [Prev axis] and [Next axis] to switch the axis.
(4) Select "HANDLE" or "JOG" for the machine operation switch.
(5) Confirm that the cursor is placed on "Absolute posn set", input "1" in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Absolute posn set" area. State: [Origin set]
(6) Move the cursor to "Zero-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Enter the value in the input area of "Zero-P" and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Zero-P" area.
Selected axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
464IB-1501269-P
The zero point initial setting is now complete. After initializing all axes, turn the power OFF and ON.
(Note 1) To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, set "#0 Absolute posn set" and "#2 Zero-P", and then turn the power OFF and ON.
(7) Move the axis to the mechanical basic position.
(8) Move the cursor to "Origin-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input "1" in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Origin-P" area. State: [Complete] Machine end: 0.000 Machine position: Value set for "Zero-P"
(7)
Reference position
Start point
Mechanical basic position
"#2 Zero-P"
Zero return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
465 IB-1501269-P
22.1.3 Machine End Stopper Method: Automatic Initialization (1) Preparations
Set the parameters on the Abs pos param screen.
#2049 type (absolute position detection method): 1 (stopper method) #2054 clpush (current limit): 0 to 100 (*1) #2055 pushf (push speed): 1 to 999 #2056 aproch (approach point): 0 to 999.999 #2059 zerbas (select zero point parameter and basic point): 0 or 1 (*2) The parameters other than #2049 type can also be set on Absolute position setting screen.
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON. (Only when "#2049 type" is specified again.)
The following are the operations on the absolute position setting screen. (Select [Mainte] - [To Abs pos])
(3) Select an axis to set the absolute position. There are two methods to select an axis. - Select the menu [Axis select], enter the axis name in the input area then press [INPUT]. (For the axis name, input the name set to the parameter "#1022 axname2" (2nd axis name).) - Press the menu [Prev axis] and [Next axis] to switch the axis.
(4) Select the "Auto init set" mode of machine operation switch.
(5) Confirm that the cursor is placed on "Absolute posn set", input "1" in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Absolute posn set" area.
(6) [When the parameter "#2059 zerbas" is set to "0"] Set "Zero-P" here. (*2) Move the cursor to "Zero-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input the distance from the basic machine coordinate zero point to the basic position in the input area, and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Zero-P" area.
Selected axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
466IB-1501269-P
The zero point initial setting is now complete. After initializing all axes, turn the power OFF and ON.
(7) Start JOG operation. The axis moves toward the machine end stopper at the pushing speed (#2055 pushf).
State: [Stopper1]
(8) After the axis pushes against the machine end stopper and the current reaches its limit continually during given time period, the axis returns toward the approach point at the pushing speed.
State: [Zero-P. Rel.]
(9) After the axis arrives at the approach point, the axis moves toward the machine end stopper at the pushing speed.
State: [Stopper2]
(10) [When the parameter "#2059 zerbas" is set to "0"] The axis pushes against the machine end stopper and stops when the current reaches its limit.
State: [Complete] Machine end: 0.000 Machine position: Current machine position
[When the parameter "#2059 zerbas" is set to "1"] When the axis pushes against the machine end stopper and the current reaches its limit, the axis reverses and moves at the pushing speed (#2055 pushf). Then the axis stops at the first grid point. Move the cursor to "Zero-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input the distance from basic machine coordinate system zero point to the grid point immediately preceding the basic position then press [INPUT].
State: [Complete] Machine end: Distance from the machine end stopper to position immediately preceding the grid point Machine position: Current machine position
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
467 IB-1501269-P
(*1) Low current limit value may prevent the basic movement of the axis. Do not set such a low value. Set an appropriate value taking into account the acceleration torque and the friction torque. When the current limit value is set too low, the servo error 3E (magnetic pole position detection error) may occur.
(*2) Depending on the setting value of the parameter "#2059 zerbas", the value set for "Zero-P" differ as shown in the following figure.
- (7) to (11) in this diagram indicate steps of the operation procedure.
(Note 1) To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, set "#0 Absolute posn set" and "#2 Zero-P", and then turn the power OFF and ON.
(Note 2) If pressing against the machine end is attempted without passing the grip point once after turning the power ON, the operation message "Not passed on grid" will appear. Return to a point before the last grid, and then repeat from step of pressing against the machine end stopper.
(Note 3) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask (#2028 grmask) as a result of return to the electric basic position in the step (11), the axis stops at the next grid point. Note that reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft) is invalid.
(Note 4) Acceleration/deceleration during movement at the specified push speed is performed in smoothing-off (stepfeed) mode.
(Note 5) If "0" is specified for "#2056 aproch" of the absolute position parameters, the machine zero point is regardedas the approach point.
(Note 6) Automatic initialization is interrupted if one of the following events occurs. If it is interrupted, [State] indicates "Jog Start" (after selecting the "Auto init set" mode if it is caused by mode change), so restart operation from the step of JOG-start. - An absolute position detection alarm occurs. - Operation preparation signal turns OFF. - The mode is changed. - The system is reset. If [State] is "Complete" before automatic initialization is started, "State" returns to "Complete" when power is turned OFF and ON again without restarting the operation.
(7)
(8)
(9)
(11)
Automatic initialization start point Pushing speed
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Reference position
Machine end stopper (mechanical basic position)
Zero return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
Absolute position parameter "#2056 aproch"
Grid point (electric basic position)
"Machine end"
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
468IB-1501269-P
(Note7) Automatic initialization cannot be started in the following cases. The operation message "Can't start" will appear if starting is attempted. - When "#0 Absolute posn set" is not set. - When the "#2 Zero-P" setting is inappropriate. - When the absolute position parameter "#2055 pushf" is not set. - When "Z71 Abs encoder failure 0005" has occurred. Supplementing one of the points above, "Zero-P" setting is inappropriate when "#2 Zero-P" is smaller than the "#2037 G53ofs" or when "#2 Zero-P" is set to "0" as shown below.
Machine end stopper (Mechanical basic position)
Machine end stopper (Mechanical basic position)
Looking from the basic machine coordinate system zero point, the reference position is located far beyond the machine end stopper, thus the reference position return cannot be carried out.
"#2037 G53ofs"
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
"#2 Zero-P"
Reference position
If the "#2 Zero-P" setting is "0", the basic machine coordinate system zero point is located on the machine end stopper. The direction of axis movement is thus unpredictable.
Zero return parameter
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
469 IB-1501269-P
22.1.4 Machine End Stopper Method: Manual Initialization (1) Preparations
Set the parameters on the Abs pos param screen.
#2049 type (absolute position detection method): 1 (stopper method) #2054 clpush (current limit): 0 to 100 (*1) #2059 zerbas (select zero point parameter and basic point): 0 or 1 (*2) The parameters other than "#2049 type" can also be set on Absolute position setting screen.
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON. (Only when "#2049 type" is specified again.)
The following are the operations on the absolute position setting screen. (Select [Mainte] - [To Abs pos])
(3) Select an axis to set the absolute position. There are two methods to select an axis. - Select the menu [Axis select], enter the axis name in the input area then press [INPUT]. (For the axis name, input the name set to the parameter "#1022 axname2" (2nd axis name).) - Press the menu [Prev axis] and [Next axis] to switch the axis.
(4) Select "HANDLE" or "JOG" for the mode selection of machine operation switch.
(5) Confirm that the cursor is placed on "Absolute posn set", input "1" in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Absolute posn set" area.
(6) [When the parameter "#2059 zerbas" is set to "0"] Set "Zero-P" here. (*2) Move the cursor to "Zero-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input the distance from the basic machine coordinate zero point to the basic position in the input area, and press the [INPUT] key.
The input value is registered in the "Zero-P" area.
Selected axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
470IB-1501269-P
The zero point initial setting is now complete. After initializing all axes, turn the power OFF and ON.
(*1) Low current limit value may prevent the basic movement of the axis. Do not set such a low value. Set an appropriate value taking into account the acceleration torque and the friction torque. When the current limit value is set too low, the servo error 3E (magnetic pole position detection error) may occur.
(*2) Depending on the setting value of the parameter "#2059 zerbas", the value set for "Zero-P" differ as shown in the following figure.
- (7) to (9) in this diagram indicate steps of the operation procedure.
(Note 1) To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, set "#0 Absolute posn set" and "#2 Zero-P", and then turn the power OFF and ON.
(Note 2) If pressing against the machine end is attempted without passing the grip point once after turning the power ON, the operation message "Not passed on grid" will appear. Return to a point before the last grid, and then repeat from step of pressing against the machine end stopper.
(Note 3) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask (#2028 grmask) as a result of return to the electric basic position in the step (9), the axis stops at the next grid point. Note that reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft) is invalid.
(7) Press the axis against the machine end stopper.
State: [Stopper] Machine end: Distance between the machine end stopper and the grid point immediately before the stopper
(8) [When the parameter "#2059 zerbas" is set to "0"] The axis pushes against the machine end stopper and stops when the current reaches its limit.
State: [Complete] Machine end: 0.000 Machine position: Current machine position
[When the parameter "#2059 zerbas" is set to "1"] When the axis pushes against the machine end stopper and the current reaches its limit, the axis reverses and moves at the pushing speed (#2055 pushf). Then the axis stops at the first grid point. Move the cursor to "Zero-P" with the [ ] and [ ] keys. Input the distance from basic machine coordinate system zero point to the grid point immediately preceding the machine end stopper then press [INPUT].
State: [Complete] Machine end: Distance from the machine end stopper to position immediately preceding the grid point Machine position: Current machine position
(7) (8)
(9) Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Reference position
Zero return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"
Grid point (electric basic position)
Machine end stopper (mechanical basic position)
"Machine end""#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
Start point
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
471 IB-1501269-P
22.1.5 Dog-type
The zero point initial setting is now complete. After initializing all axes, turn the power OFF and ON.
(Note 1) If the dog-type reference position return is interrupted by resetting, the previous state ("Complete" or "Illegality") will display in the [State] column.
(Note 2) With dog-type reference position return, reference position return can be executed again even if the [State] is "Complete".
(1) Preparations Set the parameters on the Abs pos param screen.
#2049 type (absolute position detection method): 3 (dog-type) The parameters for the approach speed and grid mask amount etc. need to be adjusted.
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON. (Only when "#2049 type" is specified again.)
The following are the operations on the absolute position setting screen. (Select [Mainte] - [To Abs pos])
(3) Select an axis to set the absolute position. There are two methods to select an axis. - Select the menu [Axis select], enter the axis name in the input area then press [INPUT]. (For the axis name, input the name set to the parameter "#1022 axname2" (2nd axis name).) - Press the menu [Prev axis] and [Next axis] to switch the axis.
(4) Execute the manual or automatic dog- type zero point return.
State: [Zero-P. Rel.] Machine position: Current machine position
(5) The axis arrives at the zero point. State: [Complete] Machine position: 0.000
Selected axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
472IB-1501269-P
22.1.6 Setting the Grid Interval and the Reference Encoder for Grid Interval Set the parameters "#2041 grspcref (reference encoder for grid interval)" and "#2029 grspc (grid interval)" according to the machine configuration.
(1) For semi-closed loop control Set "0" (grid interval by the motor-side) to the reference encoder for grid interval. Set the grid interval same value as the ball screw pitch. If the reference encoder for grid interval is set to "1" (grid interval by the machine-side), the grid interval will be required to set the moving amount calculation value per a motor rotation ("#2201 SV001 PC1" / "2202 SV002 PC2" x "#2218 SV018 PIT").
(2) For full-closed loop control Set "1" (grid interval by the machine-side) to the reference encoder for grid interval. Set the grid interval same value as the Z phase pitch. If the reference encoder for grid interval selection is set to "0" (grid interval by the motor-side), the grid interval will be required to set the moving amount calculation value per Z phase pitch ("2202 SV002 PC2" / "#2201 SV001 PC1" x the Z phase pitch of the machine-side).
Parameter settings of "Specify an encoder grid interval" and "Reference encoder for grid interval"
* If the grid interval is set to "0", the ball screw pitch (#2218 SV018 PIT) will be used instead of the grid interval.
22.1.7 Precautions Common for the Initialization Operation (1) The "#0 Absolute posn set" parameter (axis for which zero point is to be initialized) can be set simultaneously for all
axes or individually for each axis. (2) The "#0 Absolute posn set" parameter cannot be turned OFF with the keys. It is turned OFF when the power is
turned ON again. (3) "#2 ZERO-P" can be set at any time as long as "#0 Absolute posn set" is set to "1". (4) The grid point must be passed at least once after turning the power ON before initializing the zero point. If the grid
point has not been passed, the operation message "Not passed on grid" will appear at the "Machine posn". (5) When the absolute position is established, the required data will be stored in the memory.
Loop control #2041 grspcref Reference encoder for grid interval
#2029 grspc Grid interval
Calculation for the grid interval
Semi-closed
0: grid interval by the motor-side same value as the ball screw pitch unnecessary
1: grid interval by the machine-side calculation value of "#2201 SV001
PC1" / "#2202 SV002 PC2" x "#2218 SV018 PIT"
necessary
Full-closed 0: grid interval by the motor-side
calculation value of "2202 SV002 PC2" / "#2201 SV001 PC1" x the Z
phase pitch of the machine-side necessary
1: grid interval by the machine-side same value as the Z phase pitch unnecessary
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
473 IB-1501269-P
22.1.8 Precautions Common for the Dogless-type Absolute Position Encoder (1) Example of setting "#2 Zero-P" parameter
For the "#2 Zero-P" parameter, set the coordinate value of the absolute position origin point (mechanical basic position or electrical basic position" looking from the basic machine coordinate system zero point.
(2) Setting the reference position The reference position can be set as shown below by setting the "#2037 G53ofs".
(3) When an MPI scale made by Mitsubishi Heavy Industries Machine Tool Co., Ltd. is used, set the zero point return parameters so that Z phase of the MPI scale becomes the grid point (electric basic position), and then perform zero point initialization setting.
(Example 1) To set the zero point at 50.0mm before absolute position origin point on + end
(Example 2) To set the zero point at 400.0mm before the machine basic position or absolute position origin point on - end.
(Example 3) To set the basic machine coordinate system zero point on the grid point, calculate the "#2 Zero-P" parameter setting value as shown below using the value displayed at "Machine end". "Machine end" shows the distance from the mechanical basic position to the previous grid point. (Note that when setting the electrical basic position coordinate value in "#2 Zero-P", the "Machine end" value does not need to be considered.)
To set the third gird point as the zero point when the "Machine end"display is -5.3 at the + end basic position. (Example of 10.0mm grid interval.)
(Example 1) To set the reference position to the same position as the basic machine coordinate system zero point.
(Example 2) To set the reference position at a position 200.0mm to the + side from the basic machine coordinate zero point. (To set the basic machine coordinate system zero point 300.0mm front of the absolute position origin point.)
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
"#2 Zero-P" = 50.0
Absolute position origin point
(Mechanical basic position or electrical basic position)
"#2 Zero-P" = 400.0
Absolute position origin point
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
(Mechanical basic position or electrical basic position)
10.0 10.0
"Machine end" = -5.3
"#2 Zero-P" = 25.3
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Mechanical basic position
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Reference position "G53ofs" = 0
"#2 Zero-P"
Absolute position origin point
(Mechanical basic position or electrical basic position)
"G53ofs" = 200.0
Reference position
"#2 Zero-P" = 300.0
Absolute position origin point
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
(Mechanical basic position or electric basic position)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
474IB-1501269-P
22.2 Adjustment of Reference Position Return in Relative Position Detection System
22.2.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation In the dog-type reference position return, the axis moves as follows: (1) Starts moving at G28 rapid traverse rate. (2) Decelerates to stop when the near-point dog is detected during the movement. Then, resumes moving at G28
approach speed. (3) Stops at the first grid point after leaving the near-point dog.
This grid point, where the axis stopped at (3), is called the electrical zero point. Normally, this electrical zero point is regarded as the reference position.
The first reference position return after turning the power ON is carried out with the dog-type reference position return. The second and following returns are carried out with either the dog-type reference position return or the high-speed reference position return, depending on the parameter. High-speed reference position return is a function that directly positions to the reference position saved in the memory without decelerating at the near-point dog.
(Note) If reference position return has never been executed after turning the power ON and a movement command other than G28 is executed, the program error (P430) will occur.
(1)
(2)
(3)
G28 rapid traverse rate
Grid point
Grid space
Limit switch for near-point detection
Near-point dog
Grid amount
Electrical zero pointDirection of reference position return
G28 approach speed
Reference position
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
475 IB-1501269-P
22.2.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures Adjust the dog-type reference position return with the following steps.
(1) Select [Param] menu from the maintenance screen, and then select zero point parameter screen by pressing the page up/down keys. The [zero point parameter] screen appears.
(2) Set the following parameters to "0" on the [zero point parameter] screen. Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft) Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask)
(3) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return. (Note) Use the switches on the machine operation panel to command "reference position return mode" and
operate the axis movement. The GOT project and the panel switches are made by the machine tool builder.
(4) Select [Drv mon] screen from the diagnosis screen, and display the drive monitor screen. Feed the page and check "Grid space" and "Grid amnt".
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
476IB-1501269-P
(5) Determine the grid mask amount according to the state as shown below.
(6) Set the determined grid mask amount for "#2028 grmask" of the [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen.
Switch
OFF ON
0
+
#2028 Grid mask amount
Grid space
2
Position
Electrical zero point (the first grid after the switch is turned ON and OFF)
Grid amount
Grid space
#2027 G28sft Reference position shift distance
Grid mask amount = Grid amount + Grid space
2
When is smaller than the grid amount
Axis speed
Reference position
Near-point dogGrid point Grid mask
Grid space
2
When is larger than the grid amount
Grid space
2
OFF ON
Position
Axis speed
Reference position
Near-point dog Grid point
Grid mask
#2028 Grid mask amount
Grid space
2
Grid amount
Grid space
#2027 G28sft Reference position shift distance
Electrical zero point before the grid mask setting (the exact point is set after the grid mask setting)
Electrical zero point after the grid mask setting
Grid mask amount = Grid amount - Grid space
2
Grid amount after the grid mask setting
Switch
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
477 IB-1501269-P
(7) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(8) Confirm the grid space and grid amount values on DRIVE MONITOR screen. If the grid amount value is approximately half of the grid space, the grid mask amount has been set correctly. If the value is not approximately half, repeat the procedure from step (1).
(9) Set the reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft). To designate the electrical zero point as reference position, set "#2027 G28sft" to "0".
(10) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute the reference position return. (Note) The axis moves at the speed of "#2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate".
The parameter "#2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate" is usually set the maximum speed, which makes the high-speed movement in the 2nd reference position return and later. Take extra care for the safe axis movement.
(11) Set the machine coordinate system offset amount (#2037 G53ofs).
[Terms and parameters related to the dog-type reference position return]
Electrical zero point The first grid point after the dog OFF. If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked OFF, the position of electrical zero point may be at the grid point where the dog is kicked OFF or at the next grid point because of the delay of the limit switch operation. This causes a deviation of reference position by the amount of the grid space. Setting the grid mask amount ("#2028 grmask") prevents this deviation.
Reference position The base for position and coordinate. The axis is positioned to this position by the manual reference position return command or G28 command in the machining program. The position is determined by shifting from the electrical zero point by the amount of "#2027 G28sft Reference position shift amount".
#2037 G53ofs
Grid spaceBasic machine coordinate system zero point
Axis speed
Reference position (for the reference position return)
Position
Electrical zero point #2026 G28crp (G28 approach speed)
#2025 G28rap (G28 rapid traverse rate)
Grid point
OFF ON Switch
#2028 grmask Grid mask amount Grid amount
#2027 G28sft Reference position shift distance
#2030 dir (-) (Reference position return direction)
Near-point dog Grid mask
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
478IB-1501269-P
Grid point The position encoder has a Z-phase that generates one pulse per rotation. The 0-point position of this Z-phase is the grid point. Thus, there is a grid point per rotation of the position encoder, and the machine has many grid points at a regular pitch. The grid point can be set at intervals of grid space by setting the grid space (#2029 grspc). Thus, multiple grid points can be set per encoder rotation.
Grid amount The grid amount is the distance from where the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point dog to the grid point (electrical zero point) as the dog-type reference position return is executed. The grid amount can be confirmed on the DRIVE MONITOR screen. After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the distance from the grid mask OFF to the grid point.
G28 rapid traverse rate (#2025 G28rap) Set the feedrate for dog-type reference position return in manual operation and the automatic operation. The rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is applied for the feedrate during the high-speed reference position return.
G28 approach speed (#2026 G28crp) Set the approach speed to the reference position after decelerating to a stop by the near-dog detection. Since the approach speed is accelerated and decelerated in steps (no-acceleration/deceleration), the mechanical shock, etc. could occur if the speed is too large. The G28 approach speed should be set between 100 and 300 mm/min., or within 500 mm/min. at the fastest.
Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft) When shifting the reference position from the electrical zero point, set the shift amount. The shifting direction can be set only in the reference position return direction. If the reference position shift amount is "0", the grid point (electrical zero point) will be the reference position.
Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask) The first grid point after the dog OFF is regarded as the electrical zero point. If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked OFF, the position of electrical zero point may be at the grid point where the dog is kicked OFF or at the next grid point because of the delay of the limit switch operation. This causes a deviation of reference position by the amount of the grid space. Thus, the position that the dog is kicked OFF needs to be at the approximate center of the grid space. Adjustments are made by setting the grid mask amount or changing the near-point dog. Setting the grid mask has the same effect as lengthening the near-point dog. Refer to the previous procedures for setting the grid mask amount.
Grid space (#2029 grspc) Set the distance between grids. Set either the ball screw pitch value (#2218 PIT) or the movement amount per motor rotation as the normal grid space. To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space.
(1) When linear feed mechanism is a ball screw:
The movement amount per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio x the ball screw pitch
(2) When linear feed mechanism is a rack and pinion: The movement amount per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio x number of pinion gear teeth x the rack pitch
(3) For the rotary axis: The movement angle per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio x 360
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
479 IB-1501269-P
Reference position return direction (#2030 dir (-)) The direction of the (axis) movement, after the dog-type reference position return is executed and the limit switch kicks the dog and decelerate to stop, is set to either positive "0" or negative "1". Set "0" if the reference position is in the positive direction from the near-point dog. Set "1" if the reference position is in the negative direction from the near-point dog.
Axis with no reference position (#2031 noref) Set the axis to carry out dog-type reference position return and the axis for absolute position detection to "0". Set the axis without carrying out reference position return during the relative position detection to "1".
Machine coordinate system offset (#2037 G53ofs) Set the amount to shift the basic machine coordinate system zero point position from the reference position. When "0" is set, the reference position will be the position of the basic machine coordinate system zero point. In "G53ofs" parameter, set the position of the reference position looking from the basic machine coordinate system zero point with the coordinates of basic machine coordinate system. By the reference position return after the power is turned ON, the machine position will be set and the basic machine coordinate system will be established.
Selection of grid display type (#1229 set01/bit6) Select the grid display type on DRIVE MONITOR screen during dog-type reference position return.
0: Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (including the grid mask amount) 1: Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (excluding the grid mask amount)
( - ) (+) ( - ) (+)
When reference position return direction is positive (+) When reference position return direction is negative (-)
Movement in (+) direction
Movement in (-) direction
Movement in (+) direction
Movement in (-) direction
DogDog Reference positionReference position
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 22 Setting the Position Detection System
480IB-1501269-P
481 IB-1501269-P
23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
482IB-1501269-P
Following functions are available for setting a tool entry prohibited range to detect over travels (OT). (1) Stroke end
The axis movement is restricted by the signal that detects the stroke ends. (2) Stored stroke limit
Prohibited ranges are set with parameters.
When stroke end is set, the axis will move the distance required to decelerate and stop after the limit switch is activated. When stored stroke limit is set, the axis will stop before the prohibited range of the stored stroke limit including the deceleration distance. For safety, set the stroke end and also, the stored stroke limit.
23.1 Stroke End The axis movement is restricted by the signal that detects the stroke ends. Signal device No. is allocated by the following parameters. Parameter "#2074" and "#2075" will be valid only when "#1226 aux10/bit" is set to "1".
#1226 aux10/bit5: Set to "1" (assigning the dog signal is valid). #2074 H/W OT+: Set the input device for assigning the OT (+) signal. (Setting range 0000 to 02FF (Hexadecimal)) #2075 H/W OT-: Set the input device for assigning the OT (-) signal. (Setting range 0000 to 02FF (Hexadecimal))
(Note 1) When "OT IGNORED" (R248) signal is set to ON, the stroke end signal associated with a specific control axis can be ignored.
(Note 2) When parameter "#1226 aux10/bit5" is set to "1", do not set the same device No. to #2073 to #2075. Setting the same device No. may cause the emergency stop. However, the device number will not be checked for the axis which is set the signal to ignore (R248,R272).
WARNING Stroke end (H/W OT) and stored stroke limit (S/W OT) must always be set. If not, the tool may hit the machine end.
(1) (1)(2)(2)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
483 IB-1501269-P
23.2 Stored Stroke Limit 23.2.1 Outline
Three tool entry prohibited ranges can be set with stored stroke limit I, stored stroke limit II, IIB and stored stroke limit IB. Part of the prohibited range on the outside of stored stroke limit I can turn into a moveable range with stored stroke limit IC. Set the parameters to select the entry prohibited range, stored stroke limit II or IIB. (II: Prohibits entering outside the range IIB: Prohibits entering inside the range)
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range (A): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit I (B): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IIB (C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IB (D): Moveable range by stored stroke limit IC
If the axis is moving over the set range, an alarm will appear and the axis will decelerate to a stop. If the prohibited range is entered and an alarm occurs, movement will be possible only in the direction opposite the entry direction.
(B) (C)
(A)
(D)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
484IB-1501269-P
Valid Conditions of Stored Stroke Limit When using the relative position detection system, the stored stroke limit is invalid until the reference position return is completed after the power is turned ON. The stored stroke limit can be validated even if the reference position return is not yet completed, by setting "#2049 type (Absolute position detection method)" to "9".
(Note) If the absolute position detection is valid when using the absolute position detection system, the stored stroke limit will be validated immediately after the power is turned ON.
Stored Stroke Limit Coordinates The stored stroke limit check is carried out in the basic machine coordinate system established by the reference position return. When the stored stroke limit has been validated while the reference position return has not been completed, the stored stroke limit check is executed with the basic machine coordinate system at the time of last power-OFF as temporary one. When the 1st dog-type reference position return is completed after the power is turned ON, the proper coordinate system is established.
(Note) While the reference position return has not been completed, only the manual and handle feed mode allow the axis movement. Automatic operation is validated after the reference position return is completed.
CAUTION Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
485 IB-1501269-P
The stored stroke limits I, II, IIB, IB and IC are handled as follows.
- The stroke check will not be executed when both maximum and minimum value are set to the same value. - This function is valid after the reference position return if the system does not apply the absolute position detection
system. - Before the machine enters the prohibited range, an error "M01 Operation error 0007" (S/W stroke end) will occur,
and the machine movement will stop. The alarm can be reset by moving the erroneous axis in the opposite direction.
- During automatic operation, if an alarm occurs with even one axis, all axes will decelerate to a stop. - During manual operation, only the axis that caused the alarm will decelerate to a stop. - The axis will always stop at a position before the prohibited range. - The distance between the prohibited range and stop position will depend on the feedrate, etc.
Type Prohibited range Description Range setting parameters Validating conditions
I Outside
- Set by the machine tool builder. - When used with II, the confined range designated by the two functions becomes the movement valid range.
"#2013 OT - (Soft limit I -)" "#2014 OT + (Soft limit I +)"
- Reference position return is completed. - #2013 and #2014 are not set to the same value.
II Outside - Set by the user. - Select II or IIB with the parameters.
- "#8210 OT- INSIDE" = "0" - Used with I. "#8204 OT-CHECK-N"
"#8205 OT-CHECK-P"
- Reference position return is completed. - #8204 and #8205 are not set to the same value. - "#8202 OT-CHECK OFF" = "0"
IIB Inside - "#8210 OT- INSIDE" = "1"
IB Inside - Set by the machine tool builder.
"#2061 OT_1B- (Soft limit IB-)" "#2062 OT_1B+ (Soft limit IB +)"
- Reference position return is completed. - #2061 and #2062 are not set to the same value.
IC Outside - Set by the machine tool builder.
"#2061 OT_1B- (Soft limit IB-)" "#2062 OT_1B+ (Soft limit IB +)"
- Reference position return is completed. - #2061 and #2062 are not set to the same value. - "#2063 OT_1Btype (Soft limit IB type)" = "2"
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
486IB-1501269-P
23.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit I This is a stroke limit function used by the machine tool builder. The boundary is set with the parameters ("#2013 OT - (Soft limit I -)" and "#2014 OT + (Soft limit I +)"). The outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. The outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. When used with the stored stroke limit II function, the confined range designated by the two functions becomes the moveable range.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range (A): Set value for (-) side (B): Set value for (+) side Point 1: "#2014 OT+ (Soft limit I +)" and Point 2: "#2013 OT- (Soft limit I -)" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system.
(Note 1) This function will be invalid if the same value excluding "0" is set for both "#2013 OT -" and "#2014 OT +".
2
1
(A) (B)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
487 IB-1501269-P
23.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit II The boundary is set with the axis parameters "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" and "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" or with program commands. Either the inside or the outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. Whether the inside or outside of the range is prohibited is determined by "#8210 OT-INSIDE". When the inside is selected, this function is called stored stroke limit IIB. When using program commands, entry of the tool into the prohibited range is prohibited with G22, and entry into the prohibited range is enabled with G23. The stored stroke limit II can be invalidated for each axis with setting "#8202 OT- CHECK OFF" to "1". Prohibited range
X: Outside Z: Outside X: Inside Z: Outside X: Inside Z: Inside
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
(1) Stored stroke limit II (When prohibited range is on outside) When used with the stored stroke limit I function, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range (A): Set value for (-) side (B): Set value for (+) side (C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit II Point 3: "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" and Point 4: "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system. Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
(A) (B)
3
4
(C)
2
1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
488IB-1501269-P
(2) Stored stroke limit IIB (When prohibited range is on inside) A range except for that of the stored stroke limit I becomes the movement prohibited range.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range (A): Set value for (-) side (B): Set value for (+) side (C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IIB Point 3: "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" and Point 4: "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system. Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.
1
2
3
4
(A) (B)
(C)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
489 IB-1501269-P
23.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IB The boundary is set for each axis with the axis parameters "#2061 OT_1B-" and "#2062 OT_1B+". The inside of the set boundary is the prohibited range.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range Point 5: "#2062 OT_1B+ (Soft limit IB+)" and Point 6: "#2061 OT_1B- (Soft limit IB-)" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system. (A): Set value for (-) side (B): Set value for (+) side (C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit II (D): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IB Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I. Points 3 and 4 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit IIB.
3
4
5
6
(B)
(A)
(C)
(D)
2
1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
490IB-1501269-P
23.2.5 Stored Stroke Limit IC The boundary is set for each axis with the axis parameters "#2061 OT_1B-" and "#2062 OT_1B+". The inside of the set boundary is the machine movement valid range. This is valid when the axis parameter "#2063 OT_1Btype (Soft limit IB type)" is set to "2". Cannot be used with soft limit IB.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range Point 3: "#2062 OT_1B+ (Soft limit IB+)" and Point 4: "#2061 OT_1B- (Soft limit IB-)" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system. Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.
2
1
4
3
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
491 IB-1501269-P
23.2.6 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control By setting "#2063 OT_1Btype" to "3", the inclined axis control axis can be checked with the program coordinates using the stored stroke limit IB/IC range setting ("#2061" and "#2062"). The stored stroke limit IB and IC cannot be used together at this time. By using this function with stored stroke limit I, the check can be carried out simultaneously with the actual axis and program coordinate value. In this case, the range that does not fit into either of the following two prohibited ranges will be the movable range.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range Point 3: "#2062 OT_1B+ (Soft limit IB+)" and Point 4: "#2061 OT_1B- (Soft limit IB-)" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system. Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.
4
3
2
1
y
Y
X
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
492IB-1501269-P
23.2.7 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis Stored stroke limits I and II are used as the stored stroke limit for the rotation axis. The area between the maximum and minimum values of the prohibited range's parameters, which does not contain the 0 point of the basic machine coordinate system, is the entry prohibited range. The prohibited range parameters for the rotary axis can be set to establish "maximum value" < "minimum value" ("#2014 OT+" < "#2013 OT-", "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" < "#8204 OT-CHECK-N"). This will be handled the same as if "maximum value" > "minimum value" ("#2014 OT+" > "#2013 OT-", "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" > "#8204 OT-CHECK-N").
(Example) Stored stroke limit I (maximum value and minimum value of prohibited range parameter) #2013 OT -: -70.000 #2014 OT +: 60.000 Stored stroke limit II (maximum value and minimum value of prohibited range parameter) #8204 OT-CHECK-N: 30.000 #8205 OT-CHECK-P: 80.000
(A): Moveable range (B): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit I (C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit II
(Note) Do not use stored stroke limits IB, IIB or IC. Invalidate stored stroke limits IB, IIB and IC by setting the parameters as shown below. #8210 OT INSIDE: 0 (stored stroke limit II valid, IIB invalid) #2061, #2062 set to same value (stored stroke limits IB and IC invalid)
23.2.8 Changing the Area for the Stored Stroke Limit I The range of the stored stroke limit I can be changed to the value set to R register for each axis. When "Stored stroke limit I change request" signal is turned ON, the range of stored stroke limit changes. Changing the area for the stored stroke limit I is also possible during automatic operation. Also, the current settings for the stored stroke limit I can be checked by with the R register values. Refer to "PLC Programming Manual" and "PLC Interface Manual" for details.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
493 IB-1501269-P
23.2.9 Behavior in Prohibited Area 23.2.9.1 Stored stroke limits I, IC, and II
When the tool has entered the prohibited area of stored stroke limit I, IC, or II, an operation error (M01 0007) occurs. When the operation error occurs, only the axis that is within the prohibited range is prevented from moving away from the permitted area. In the example below, the X coordinate of the current position is within the prohibited range. So the movement in the X(- ) direction is disabled because the direction is not towards the permitted area. The Y coordinate of the current position is within the permitted range. So the movement in the Y direction is permitted within the permitted range even though the tool is inside of the prohibited area.
23.2.9.2 Stored stroke limits IB and IIB For stored stroke limits IB and IIB, movement of the tool within the prohibited area can be disabled through the parameter "#1711 cfg11/bit1" (disabling movement in prohibited area of stored stroke limit IB/IIB). When this parameter is on, each axis is allowed to move only in the direction that has the shorter distance to the permitted area. When an attempt is made to move an axis in the direction that has the longer distance to the permitted area, an operation error (M01 0007) is issued, which disables the movement. The alarm can be canceled through NC reset or by moving the axis in the direction that has the shorter distance to the permitted area. The function of disabling movement in the prohibited area is supported by stored stroke limits IB and IIB. The function does not apply to the prohibited area of stored stroke limit I, IC or II.
X
Y
Point 2
Point 1
Movable (Because the direction is towards the permitted area)
Movable (Because Y axis is within the permitted range)
Not movable (Because the direction is away from the permitted area, which will cause an operation error (M01 0007 X))
Permitted areaCurrent position
P rohibited area
Basic machine coordinate system
X
Y
Point 2
Point 1
Movable (Because these directions have the shortest distance to the permitted area)
Not movable (Because these directions do not have the shortest distance to the permitted area, an operation error (M01 0007 XY) is issued.)
Permitted area
Current position
P rohibited area
Prohibited area specified by Stored stroke limit IIB
Point 3
Point 4
Basic machine coordinate system
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
494IB-1501269-P
(1) The function of disabling movement in the prohibited area works while the tool is within the prohibited area of stored stroke limit IB or IIB. The function does not disable any movement within the permitted area (including the boundary).
(2) All the axes for which the function disables movement are indicated in the alarm guidance. (3) If the tool is at the center of the prohibited area, as illustrated below, the distance to the permitted area in the
positive direction is equal to that in the negative direction. In this case the tool can move in both directions. Note that when the direction that has the shorter distance to the permitted area is uniquely determined as a result of the tool movement, the function will disable movement in all the directions except for the said direction.
(4) If this function is used together with the stored stroke limit function that does not support this function, the tool may be allowed to move towards the prohibited area of the combined stored stroke limit function, as illustrated below. To prevent this, it is recommended to set the ranges of stored stroke limit IB and IIB to be large enough.
(5) As illustrated below, when stored stroke limit IB and IIB are used together, and the tool enters the overlap of the two prohibited areas, movement of the tool may be disabled. To prevent this, configure settings so that the prohibited areas of stored stroke limit IB and IIB will not overlap with each other. (If the tool has entered both prohibited areas due to an incorrect setting, disable stored stroke limit IIB to move the tool.)
Precautions
X
Y
X
Y
Basic machine coordinate system
X axis direction is uniquely determined
Permitted area
Current position
Prohibited area After the movement, the direction with the shortest distance to the permitted area is determined, so the other direction will be disabled.
Move in X(-) and Y(+) direction
Y axis can move in plus or minus direction
Point 2
Point 1
Point 3
Point 4 Point 2
Point 1
Point 3
Point 4
Permitted area
Prohibited area
Permitted area
Prohibited area
Current position Current position
Tool moves to another prohibited area by mistake
Make the prohibited area of IB or IIB wider so that the control will determine the correct movement direction
Prohibited area IB, IIB
Prohibited area IB, IIB
Widen the prohibited
area
Basic machine coordinate system
Basic machine coordinate system
Prohibited area IIB
Prohibit- ed area IB Overlap area
of the two prohibited areas
Not movable in any direction
Specify the prohibited areas of IB and IIB so that they will not overlap
Prohibited area IIB
Prohibited area IB
Movable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
495 IB-1501269-P
23.2.10 Precautions (1) If the maximum value and minimum value of the stored stroke limit's prohibited range are set to the same value, the
following will occur. (a) When the maximum value and minimum value are set to "0", if the outside is the prohibited range, the entire
range will be prohibited. If the inside is the prohibited range, the entire range will be the moveable range. (b) If data other than 0 is set for the maximum value and minimum value, the entire range will be the moveable
range. (2) The stored stroke limit IC is valid when the axis parameter #2063 is changed. If changed during automatic
operation, the function will be validated after the smoothing for all axes reaches 0. (3) Make sure that the lower limit value of the stored stroke limit IC setting value is "smaller than the upper limit value". (4) To set the inside of the specified range as a prohibited range, set the parameters as follow:
EX. There are 2 methods to set 10 to 70 as a prohibited range. [Method 1]
Set "70" to parameter "#2013 OT-" and "370" to parameter "#2014 OT+". [Method 2]
Set "370" to parameter "#2013 OT-" and "70" to parameter "#2014 OT+".
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
496IB-1501269-P
497 IB-1501269-P
24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
498IB-1501269-P
24.1 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation/Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation
24.1.1 Outline (1) Memory-type pitch error compensation
According to the specified parameters, this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball screw pitch error, etc. You can set compensation amount for each division point obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates based on the reference position. (See the figure below.) The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental amount method. Select the method with "#4000 Pinc". Machine position between division points "n" and "n+1" is smoothly compensated by the linear approximation of the compensation amount.
n n+1
n+2
Actual machine position
Ideal machine position
Actual machine position without compensation
Commanded machine position
Reference position Compensation amount between two division points
Commanded machine position
Compensation amount
: Division point
Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
499 IB-1501269-P
(2) Memory-type relative position error compensation This function compensates the relative position error between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving according to the specified parameters. You can set compensation amount in the compensated axis direction for each division point obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the basic axis. (See the figure below.) "Basic axis" refers to the one axis of two orthogonal axes on which relative position compensation is made. This axis is used as the criterion for relative-error measurement. "Compensation axis" refers to the coordinate axis that is orthogonal to the basic axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis. Machine position between division points "n" and "n+1" is smoothly compensated by the linear approximation of the compensation amount.
n n+1 n+2
Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
Reference position
Actual machine position of compensation axis
Compensation amount
Compensation amount between two division points
Commanded machine position
Actual machine position without compensation
Commanded machine position (basic axis)
: Division point
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
500IB-1501269-P
24.1.2 Setting Compensation Data There are two methods for setting the compensation data: absolute amount method and incremental amount method. "#4000 Pinc" 0 : Absolute amount method 1 : Incremental amount method
(1) Absolute amount method When you feed an axis from the reference position to each division point, calculate and set the compensation amount using the following formula.
Compensation amount = (Commanded position - Actual machine position) 2 The unit of compensation amount depends on the setting of machine error compensation unit (parameter "#1006 mcmpunit"). The following shows examples when the parameter #1006 is set to "B".
(Example 1) Feeding an axis from the reference position to the position moved by +100 mm (See the left figure below.) When the actual machine position is 99.990 mm, the compensation amount at the position moved by +100 mm is "20". (100000 - 99990) 2 = 20
(Example 2) Feeding an axis from the reference position to the position moved by -100 mm (See the right figure below.) When the actual machine position is -99.990 mm, the compensation amount at the position moved by - 100 mm is "-20". (-100000 - (-99990)) 2 = -20
+99.990
+100
- 99.990
- 100 Compensation amount: 20 (10m)
Compensation amount: -20
(-10m)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
501 IB-1501269-P
(2) Incremental amount method The compensation amount at the division point "n" is calculated for the axis that moves by "interval between division points" specified with #4007. The formula for calculating the compensation amount differs depending on whether the division point "n" is on the positive side or the negative side from the reference position.
[On the positive side] Actual travel amount = (Actual machine position of division point "n") - (Actual machine position of division point "n-1") (See the left figure below.) Compensation amount = (Interval between division points - Actual travel amount) 2
[On the negative side] Actual travel amount = (Actual machine position of division point "n") - (Actual machine position of division point "n+1") (See the left figure below.) Compensation amount = (Interval between division points + Actual travel amount) 2
In both cases, the unit of compensation amount depends on the setting of the machine error compensation unit (parameter "#1006 mcmpunit").
nn-1 i
n+1n i
Division point compensation number Division interval
Unit of compensation amount : Machine error compensation unit (#1006) Range of compensation amount : -128 to 127
n
i
:
:
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
502IB-1501269-P
24.1.3 Setting Method 24.1.3.1 Using a Linear Axis as Basic Axis
(1) When "mdvno" or "pdvno" exists at both ends of "rdvno"
The compensation beyond the setting range ("mdvno" to "pdvno") will be based on the compensation amount at "mdvno" or "pdvno".
(2) When the range compensated is only the positive range
When the machine position is beyond "pdvno", the compensation will be based on the compensation amount at "pdvno". If the machine position is on the negative side in this case, no compensation will be executed.
Division point number #4101 #4102 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 rdvno 4103 Specified machine position -300.000 -200.000 -100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000 mdvno 4101 Real machine position -299.999 -200.000 -100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 pdvno 4106
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method 2 6 -6 -4 0 6 spcdv 100.000
Absolute amount method -2 0 6 -4 -4 2
Division point number #4113 #4114 #4115 #4116 #4117 rdvno 4112
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method -4 2 0 6 2 mdvno 4113
Absolute amount method -4 -2 -2 4 6 pdvno 4117
#4101 #4103#4102 #4104 #4105 #4106 2
1
- 1
- 2
- 3
(1) (3) ( - 3) ( - 2) (0) (3)
(3) ( - 2) (0) ( - 2)
( - 1) (1)
3
Compensation amount in incremental amount method
Error
Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation amount in absolute amount method
#4114#4113 #4116 #4117
2
1
- 1
- 2
- 3
( - 2) (1) (0) (3) (1)
( - 2) ( - 1)
(2)
3 #4115
( - 1)
(3)
Compensation amount in incremental amount method
Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation amount in absolute amount method
Error
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
503 IB-1501269-P
(3) When the range compensated is only the negative range
When the machine position is beyond "mdvno", the compensation will be based on the compensation amount at "mdvno".
(4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference position
In this case, the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno". This setting is also applied to the compensation executed in an range in which a machine position is negative and a reference position is not included.
Division point number #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 rdvno 4130
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method -2 2 6 2 0 -6 mdvno 4125
Absolute amount method -2 -4 -2 4 6 6 pdvno 4130
Division point number #4135 #4136 #4137 #4138 #4139 #4140 rdvno 4134
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method -2 -2 6 2 mdvno 4136
Absolute amount method -2 -4 2 4 pdvno 4140
#4128#4127 #4130#4126 2
1
- 1
- 2
- 3
(3) (1) (0) ( - 3)
(3) (3)
( - 1)
3 #4129
(2)
( - 2)
( - 1) (1)
#4125
( - 1)
Compensation amount in incremental amount method
Error
Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation amount in absolute amount method
#4136#4135 #4138 #4139 2
1
- 1
- 2
- 3
(1)( - 1) ( - 1) (3)
( - 1) ( - 2)
(2)
3 #4137
(1)
#4140
Error Compensation
amount in incremental amount
method
Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation amount in
absolute amount method
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
504IB-1501269-P
24.1.3.2 Using a Rotary Axis as Basic Axis
The sum of the compensation amounts set with the incremental amount method is always "0". In the absolute amount method, the compensation amount at the terminal point (360 degrees) is always "0".
Division point number #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 rdvno 4122
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method -4 2 0 6 2 -6 mdvno 4123
Absolute amount method -4 -2 -2 4 6 0 pdvno 4128
#4124#4123 #4126 #4127
2
1
- 1
- 2
- 3
( - 2) (1) (0) (3) (1)
( - 2) ( - 1)
(2)
3 #4125
( - 1)
(3)
( - 3)
#4128
(0)
Compensation amount in incremental amount method
360 deg
Basic axis machine coordinate
Error
Compensation amount in absolute amount method
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
505 IB-1501269-P
24.2 Bidirectional pitch error compensation 24.2.1 Outline
Compensation amounts can be set respectively for the movement in positive and negative directions, and compensation can be made for each direction. This method will reduce the difference between the path in the positive direction and path in the negative direction. You can set the compensation amount for each division point obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates based on the reference position. (See the figure below.) The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental amount method. Select the method with "#4000 Pinc". Machine position between division points "n" and "n+1" is smoothly compensated by the linear approximation of the compensation amount.
n n+1 n+2 n+3
Actual machine position
Ideal machine position
: Division point
Commanded machine position
Commanded machine position
Commanded machine position
Compensation amount between two division points
Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
Actual machine position without compensation (When moving in the forward direction)
Actual machine position without compensation (When moving in the negative direction)
Compensation amount in the positive direction
Compensation amount in the negative direction
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
506IB-1501269-P
24.2.2 Setting Method 24.2.2.1 When the basic axis is a linear axis
This section describes how to set bidirectional pitch error data by taking the linear axis having a pitch error such as illustrated below as an example.
As shown in the figure below, compensation range is divided into equal intervals based on the reference position, and compensation data Nos. are allocated for each movement in positive and negative directions. For both positive and negative directions, numbers are allocated from the division point on the most negative side toward the positive side. (The figure shows an example of allocating #4101 to # 4106 in the positive direction and #4107 to #4112 in the negative direction.) No compensation data No. is allocated to the reference position.
Make sure to allocate the same number of compensation data to division points for positive and negative directions. When the odd number of compensation data are set, compensation points allocated to the positive direction become one point less than that of the negative direction. For example, in the following figure, the division point indicated with "(None)" has no allocated compensation No. Accordingly, the compensation data of the previous compensation No. (#4105) is also used for the division point indicated with "(None)".
Allocating compensation No.
#4101 #4103#4102 #4104 #4105 #4106
2
1
- 1
- 3
3
#4107 #4109#4108 #4110 #4111 #4112
- 2
Error
Bidirectional pitch error (linear axis)
Direction of reference position return
Interval between two division points
Error amount for the movement in the negative direction
Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation data No. in the negative direction
Compensation data No. in the positive direction
Error amount for the movement in the positive direction
#4101 #4103#4102 #4104 #4105
2
1
- 1
- 3
3
#4106 #4108#4107 #4109 #4110 #4111
- 2
(None)
Bidirectional pitch error having odd number of compensation points (linear axis)
ErrorDirection of reference position return
Interval between two division points
Error amount for the movement in the negative direction Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation data No. in the negative direction
Compensation data No. in the positive direction
Error amount for the movement in the positive direction
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
507 IB-1501269-P
(1) Set setting method for compensation amount to "#4000 Pinc".
(2) Set the axis name to be compensated to "#4001 cmpax". Set the same axis name to "#4002 drcax" as well. (3) Among the division points in the positive direction, set the compensation No. of the division point which is one point
far from the reference position in the negative direction to "#4003 rdvno". (4) Set the first and the last compensation Nos. allocated to division points to the parameters "#4004 mdvno" and
"#4005 pdvno". (5) Set the compensation magnification to "#4006 sc". (6) Set the interval between two division points to "#4007 spcdv". (7) Set "#4008 twopc" to "1". The function bidirectional pitch error compensation is enabled. (8) For "#4009 refcmp", set the following compensation amounts after the measuring the actual machine position in
"Setting pitch error compensation data". [When the parameter "#2023 dir (-)" is set to "0"]
Compensation amount = - (Actual machine position for the reference position when the direction of travel is negative) 2
[When the parameter "#2023 dir (-)" is set to "1"] Compensation amount = - (Actual machine position for the reference position when the direction of travel is positive) 2
In both cases, the unit of compensation amount depends on the setting of the machine error compensation unit (parameter "#1006 mcmpunit").
[Parameter setting]
Setting parameters
#4000 setting value Setting method
0 (absolute amount
method)
This method sets the difference between the commanded position and the actual machine position of each division point as the compensation amount.
1 (incremental
amount method)
This method sets the difference between the commanded travel amount and the actual travel amount when the axis moved from the adjacent division point as the compensation amount.
Parameter #4001 #4002 #4003 #4004 #4005 #4006 #4007 #4008 #4009 cmpax drcax rdvno mdvno pdvno sc spcdv twopc refcmp
Setting value X X 4103 4101 4112 1 10.000 1 4
#4101 #4103#4102 #4104 #4105 #4106
2
1
- 1
- 3
3
#4107 #4109#4108 #4110 #4111 #4112
- 2
Bidirectional pitch error (linear axis)
ErrorDirection of reference position return
Interval between two division points
Error amount for the movement in the negative direction
Basic axis machine coordinate
Compensation data No. in the negative direction
Compensation data No. in the positive direction
Error amount for the movement in the positive direction
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
508IB-1501269-P
(1) Move the axis to positive or negative direction, then measure and record actual machine position of each division point. Calculate compensation amount for each division point based on the actual machine position.
(*1) Compensation amount unit depends on the setting of the machine error compensation unit (parameter "#1006 mcmpunit").
(2) Set the calculated compensation amount to the parameter of compensation No. allocated to each division point.
[Compensation amount settings]
Setting pitch error compensation data
#4000 setting value Calculation method of compensation amount (*1)
0 (Absolute amount
method) Compensation amount = (Commanded machine position - Actual machine position) 2
1 (Incremental
amount method)
Calculate compensation amount at the division point "n" when the position moved by "interval between two division points" which was set to #4007. The calculation formula of the compensation amount differs depending on whether the division point "n" is on positive side or negative side from the reference position. [On the positive side] Actual travel amount = (Actual machine position of division point "n") - (Actual machine position of division point "n-1") Compensation amount = (Interval between two division points - Actual travel amount) 2 [On the negative side] Actual travel amount = (Actual machine position of division point "n") - (Actual machine position of division point "n+1") Compensation amount = (Interval between two division points + Actual travel amount) 2
Movement direction Positive Negative Compensation data No. #4101 #4102 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 #4107 #4108 #4109 #4110 #4111 #4112
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method -2 0 6 -4 -4 2 -8 -8 -2 -6 -8 -6
Absolute amount method 2 6 -6 -4 0 6 0 6 2 -6 -2 2
#4101 #4103#4102 #4104 #4105 #4106
2
1
- 1
- 3
(1) (3) (-3) (-2) (0) (3)
(3) (-2) (0) (-2)
(-1) (1)
3
#4107 #4109#4108 #4110 #4111 #4112
- 2
(0) (3) (1) (-3) (-1) (1)
(-4) (-4) (-4) (-3)
(-1) (-3)
Bidirectional pitch error (linear axis)
Error Direction of reference
position return
Compensation amount in positive direction (Absolute amount method)
Compensation amount in positive direction (Incremental amount method)
Error amount in negative direction
Basic axis machine coordinate
Error amount in positive direction
Compensation amount in negative direction (Incremental amount method)
Compensation amount in negative direction (Absolute amount method)
Reference when the movement direction is negative
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
509 IB-1501269-P
24.2.2.2 When the basic axis is a rotary axis This section describes how to set bidirectional pitch error data by taking a rotary axis having a pitch error such as illustrated below as an example. Set the pitch error compensation data for an rotary axis in the same way as a linear axis. However, note the following points.
- Set the interval between two division points so that the last division point will be 360 degrees. - The sum of compensation amount being set in the incremental amount method will always be "0". - The compensation amount of the last point in the absolute amount method (360 degrees) will always be "0".
[Parameter settings]
[Compensation amount settings]
Parameter #4001 #4002 #4003 #4004 #4005 #4006 #4007 #4008 #4009 cmpax drcax rdvno mdvno pdvno sc spcdv twopc refcmp
Setting value C C 4122 4123 4134 1 60.000 1 4
Division point No. #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 #4131 #4132 #4133 #4134
Compensation amount
Incremental amount method -4 -2 -2 4 6 0 -4 -2 -4 -6 -2 0
Absolute amount method -4 2 0 6 2 -6 -4 2 -2 -2 4 2
Movement direction Positive Negative
#4124#4123 #4126 #4127
2
1
- 1
- 2
- 3
( - 2) (1) (0) (3) (1)
( - 2) ( - 1)
( - 3)
3
#4125
( - 2)
( - 1)
( - 3)
#4128
(0)
( - 1)
(2) ( - 1)
(3) (0)
( - 2)
( - 2) (1) ( - 1) ( - 1) ( 2) ( 1)
#4130#4129 #4132 #4133#4131 #4134
Bidirectional pitch error (rotary axis)
Compensation amount in positive direction
(Incremental amount method)
Error Direction of reference
position return
Compensation amount in negative direction
(Incremental amount method)
Compensation amount in negative direction
(Absolute amount method)
Error amount in negative direction
Error amount in positive direction
Basic axis machine coordinate
Reference when the movement direction is negative
Compensation amount in positive direction
(Absolute amount method)
360 degrees
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
510IB-1501269-P
24.3 Cyclic Error Compensation 24.3.1 Outline
When the machine operation induces certain cyclic errors, this function compensates a series of cyclic errors by setting the compensation amount for a single cycle. Short-pitched compensation is possible for the errors occurring due to the tooth shape of the encoder. You can set the period of the error cycle, the number of steps in the cycle (up to 128 steps), and the compensation amount at each step by the parameter.
[Enabling Conditions] - The cyclic error compensation specifications must be enabled, and the parameter "#2585 Cyccmp" (Enable
cyclic error compensation) must be set to "1". - This function is only available in CNC-controlled axes. It is not available in PLC-controlled axes.
Switch to C axis mode for spindle position control when applying this function to the spindle. - This function is only available in rotary axes. It is not available in linear axes.
The parameters related to the rotary axis must be as follows;
Parameter Setting value #1017 rot (rotary axis) 1 #2218 PIT (ball screw pitch) 360 #2070 div_RT (rotational axis division count) 360 or 0
0.005
- 0.005
0.005
- 0.005
Repeats the compensation cycle
Sets the compensation amount for one cycle in
each step
1st cycle 2nd cycle 3rd cycle
1st cycle 2nd cycle 3rd cycle
1 cycle
Tooth shape
Tooth shape
Error amount
Errors after applying compensation
Encoder tooth
Errors occur in cycles.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
511 IB-1501269-P
24.3.2 Setting Method This function divides one error cycle into multiple steps and compensates at each step. Positions between steps are also compensated by the linear approximation of the values at each step. For example, as shown in the figure below, when similar errors occur at each tooth of a gear with 256 teeth, one tooth is regarded as one cycle, and the compensation amount at each step within a cycle is specified. Specify a value that counteracts the effect of the errors to the compensation amounts. By using the same compensation amounts for each tooth, the errors of the whole gear can be compensated.
Before setting parameters, refer to the next section "Error Measurement" for measuring errors. (1) The compensation amount is the value whose sign is reversed to counteract the effect of the errors. (2) Set compensation amounts as absolute values. Do not set relative values. (3) The compensation amounts stored in the locations specified from "Cyclic error compensation: initial number of
compensation" (#2586 Cycstnum) to "Cyclic error compensation: number of divisions" (#2587 Cycdv) are used. (Note) This parameter setting uses the parameters that are also used by memory-type pitch error compensation
(#4101-5999, #44001-47712). Ensure that no parameter overlapping occurs when choosing the number of the parameter.
(4) The unit of this compensation amount is 1/10000.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0.0003 0.0002 0.0001
-0.0003 -0.0002 -0.0001
0.0
61 2 3 4 5 7 8
. . .
Steps
A cycle 1st cycle 2nd cycle 3rd cycle
Error
256 teeth
+ direction
A period Error
+ direction
Steps
Up/down arrows : The compensation amount that counteracts the error.
When positioning is performed to a point between steps, the linear approximated value of the two adjacent steps will be used for compensation.
Cyclic error seen in each period (teeth).
[When one cycle is divided into 8 steps]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
512IB-1501269-P
This section takes the example shown in the figure on the previous page (When the gear has 256 teeth and one cycle is divided into 8 steps) to describe the parameter setting procedure.
< Axis specifications parameters >
< Error data >
< Compensation amount setting example (When one cycle is divided into 8 steps) >
Parameter Setting Example
Parameter Setting value Details #2585 Enable cyclic error compensation 1 Compensation enabled.
#2586 Cyclic error compensation: initial number of compensation 4201 Starts from the parameter #4201.
#2587 Cyclic error compensation: number of divisions 8 Occupies eight parameters.
(One-error cycle is divided into 8 steps.)
#2588 Cyclic error compensation: cycle constant 256 One gear has 256 cycles.
Step No. #4201 #4202 #4203 #4204 #4205 #4206 #4207 #4208 Value configured (Compensation
amount) 0 -2 -1 -3 0 1 1 2
0.0003
0.0002
0.0001
-0.0003
-0.0002
-0.0001
0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
#4201 #4202 #4203 #4204 #4205 #4206 #4207 #4208
Error amount () One cycle
+ direction
Steps
Compensation amount
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
513 IB-1501269-P
24.3.3 Error Measurement This function performs compensation based on the position deviation related to the machine zero. When you measure errors, disable all types of compensation (such as pitch error compensation, backlash compensation), and also the functions accompanied by the offset of the coordinate system such as workpiece coordinate system offset. Then start the measurement with the start point of the error cycle matching the machine zero. For machines that configure the reference position shift distance (#2027 G28sft), first set the value of #2027 prior to measuring the error.
24.3.4 Precautions (1) The updates regarding the compensation amount of this function are immediately reflected to the operation. Note
that large compensation amounts might cause sudden machine vibration. (2) This function starts compensating after the zero point is established.
When the zero point has not been established, this function is not available even if the parameter is set to Enabled. (3) As changing the reference position shift distance (#2027 G28sft) changes the position of the machine zero,
compensation amounts need to be configured again. When the coordinate system offset has been performed for functions such as workpiece coordinate system offset and reference position #1 (#2037 G53ofs), it is not necessary to configure the compensation amounts again if each of them have already been appropriately configured relative to the machine zero.
(4) This function uses the same parameters as functions such as memory-type pitch error compensation when configuring compensation amounts (#4101-#5999). Ensure that no parameters are set incorrectly.
(5) When the settings used exceed the parameter setting range in "Cyclic error compensation: initial number of compensation" (#2586 Cycstnum) and "Cyclic error compensation: number of divisions" (#2587 Cycdv), the compensation configured for the axis is not enabled. Example: Compensation start No. is 5995, and division No. is 16 . (exceeds the range of parameter number, #5999)
Error amount
One cycle
+ direction
Machine zero
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation
514IB-1501269-P
24.3.5 Relation with Other Functions (1) Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation
This function can be used simultaneously with the memory-type pitch error compensation. As shown in the figure below, when the error profile consists of both cyclic errors and non-cyclic errors, a higher accuracy of compensation can be achieved by combining the memory-type pitch error compensation and this function.
Error
Machine position
Non-cyclicCyclic
Error Error
Compensates in accordance with cyclic error.
Compensates by memory-type pitch error compensation.
515 IB-1501269-P
25 Setting the Position Switches
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 25 Setting the Position Switches
516IB-1501269-P
25.1 Outline Position switches (PSW) are used as alternatives for the dog switches provided on the machine axis. Virtual dog switches can be used by specifying axis names and conditions of virtual dog positions. This function outputs a signal to the PLC interface when the machine reaches the specified area. The virtual dog switches are called "position switches" (PSW).
Position switch Nos. of PSW1 to PSW24 and signal devices
Position switches (PSW1 - PSW24) are used to set virtual dog coordinates (dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate axes, whose names are preset with
Part system 1 Part system 2 PSW1 #7501 #7502 #7503 #7504 X1D00 X1D20 PSW2 #7511 #7512 #7513 #7514 X1D01 X1D21 PSW3 #7521 #7522 #7523 #7524 X1D02 X1D22 PSW4 #7531 #7532 #7533 #7534 X1D03 X1D23
: : : : : : : PSW24 #7731 #7732 #7733 #7734 X1D17 X1D37
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 25 Setting the Position Switches
517 IB-1501269-P
25.2 Setting and Operation Examples of dog1 and dog2
For rotary axes
Settings of dog1 and dog2 Positions of dog1 and dog2 Description
dog1 < dog2 A signal is output when the machine reaches between dog1 and dog2.
dog1 > dog2 A signal is output when the machine reaches between dog2 and dog1.
dog1 = dog2 A signal is output when the machine is at dog1 (dog2).
Settings of dog1 and dog2 Positions of dog1 and dog2 Description
dog1 < dog2 (Example) dog1 = 30.000 dog2 = 330.000
A signal is output when the machine reaches between dog1 and dog2.
(Example) dog1 = -30.000 dog2 = 30.000
Signal is output in the same manner even if dog1 is in the negative area.
dog1 > dog2 (Example) dog1 = 330.000 dog2 = 30.000
A signal is output when the machine reaches between dog2 and dog1.
dog1 0 and 360 dog2 (Example) dog1 = -30.000 dog2 = 390.000
A signal is always output when the angle of dog1 and dog2 is within a range of 0 to 360 degrees.
dog1
dog2
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Virtual dog
PSW range
dog1 dog2
dog2 dog1
dog1 = dog2
dog2 dog1
dog1 dog2
dog1 dog2
dog1 dog2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 25 Setting the Position Switches
518IB-1501269-P
25.3 Canceling the Position Switch Enter a position switch number to be canceled (#75*1) in "# ( )" and a slash in "DATA ( )" on the setting field, then press the [INPUT] key. Axis name of the specified position switch will be deleted, and the position switch is disabled. However, the data in
519 IB-1501269-P
26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
520IB-1501269-P
26.1 Backlash Compensation Travel amount of a machine table may become less than the commanded amount due to the error (backlash) caused by reversal of the direction of the axis. The backlash compensation is a function which automatically adds compensation amount to the travel amount when the direction of the axis is reversed.
There are two types of backlash compensation as follows.
(1) G0 backlash (#2011 G0back) Compensation amount that is used when an axis moved at the rapid traverse speed (G0). Compensation amount is also measured at rapid traverse speed.
(2) G1 backlash (#2012 G1back) Compensation amount that is used when an axis moved at cutting feedrate (G1, G2, G3). Compensation amount to be set is measured using the most commonly used feedrate.
+ -
Machine table
Backlash
Ball screw (Motor)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
521 IB-1501269-P
26.2 Backlash Compensation II This function reduces quadrant error caused by the backlash when the traversing direction is reversed in machines where semi-closed loop control is implemented.
Acceleration rate at axis direction reversal varies depending on the change of circular radius and commanded speed at machining. The most appropriate compensation amount also changes at the point. Accordingly, in the function "backlash compensation II", up to four compensation amounts are set for each axis for each different acceleration rate, and compensation amounts are calculated corresponding to each acceleration rate. Through the above procedures, quadrant projections are suppressed.
Compensation based on the acceleration rate at a direction reversal improves machining accuracy. For the range between the acceleration rates defined in parameters, the error is compensated using the compensation amount obtained through linear interpolation.
[Before the compensation] [After the compensation]
Compensation amount "c"
Compensation amount "d"
d
a b
c
Compensation amount according to acceleration rate
Compensation amount
Acceleration rate
Preset compensation amount/acceleration rate
a
b
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
522IB-1501269-P
26.2.1 Enabling Conditions for Backlash Compensation II Backlash compensation II is enabled when all the following conditions are satisfied.
(1) Backlash compensation II option is ON. (2) Parameter "#14360 valBL2" (backlash compensation II valid) is ON. (3) Parameter "#14361 BL2_a1" (backlash compensation II acceleration rate 1) is other than "0".
Backlash compensation II can be specified valid/invalid status for each axis.
26.2.2 Procedure of Setting Backlash Compensation II To set backlash compensation II parameters, measure up to four acceleration rates and quadrant projection sizes at axis direction reversal, changing settings such as circular radius and commanded speed. Set the compensation patterns measured when a direction of the axis reversed to backlash compensation II acceleration rate 1 to 4 and backlash compensation amount II 1 to 4.
Setting acceleration rate and compensation amount
26.2.2.1 Setting the backlash compensation II acceleration rate For the backlash compensation II acceleration rate, set the acceleration rate (m/s2) at reversal of direction of the axis on which compensation to be performed. Up to four backlash compensation II acceleration rates can be set for each axis.
Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 1: "#14361 BL2_a1" Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 2: "#14363 BL2_a2" Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 3: "#14365 BL2_a3" Backlash compensation II acceleration rate 4: "#14367 BL2_a4"
Set the backlash compensation II acceleration rate 1 to 4 in ascending order. When the number of compensation patterns is less than four, set "0" for the parameters of the acceleration rates which are not used. For example, when there are three compensation patterns, set the parameter "#14367 BL2_a4" to "0".
X
Y
Set as the quadrant projection compensation amount (Y axis).
Set as the quadrant projection compensation amount (X axis).
Set the acceleration rate at axis direction reversal as quadrant projection compensation acceleration rate for each axis.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
523 IB-1501269-P
26.2.2.2 Setting compensation amount of backlash compensation II For the backlash compensation II compensation amount, set the size of projection which is generated at axis direction reversal. For the unit of compensation amount, follow the setting of "#1006 mcmpunit" (Machine error compensation unit).
Backlash compensation II compensation amount 1: "#14362 BL2_c1" Backlash compensation II compensation amount 2: "#14364 BL2_c2" Backlash compensation II compensation amount 3: "#14366 BL2_c3" Backlash compensation II compensation amount 4: "#14368 BL2_c4"
Set compensation amounts corresponding to acceleration rates which have been set in the previous chapter "Setting the backlash compensation II acceleration rate" for the parameters above. For example, set a compensation amount which corresponds to backlash compensation II acceleration rate 2 for
"#14364 BL2_c2.".
When a positive value is set as the compensation amount, compensation is performed in the travel direction of the axis after axis reversal.
Compensation direction with a compensation amount set to a positive value
When a negative value is set as a compensation amount, compensation is performed in the travel direction of the axis before axis reversal.
Compensation direction with a compensation amount set to a negative value
X
Y
Travel direction after axis reversal:
negative direction for Y axis
Travel direction before axis reversal: positive direction for Y axis
Compensation direction
Travel direction after axis reversal:
positive direction for X axis
Compensation direction
Travel direction before axis reversal:
negative direction for X axis
X
Y
Travel direction after axis reversal:
negative direction for Y axis
Travel direction before axis reversal: positive direction for Y axis
Compensation direction
Travel direction after axis reversal:
positive direction for X axis
Compensation direction
Travel direction before axis reversal:
negative direction for X axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
524IB-1501269-P
26.2.2.3 Precautions for setting parameters For the backlash compensation II acceleration rates, set a value greater than "0" from acceleration rate 1 to 4 in ascending order. Parameters are enabled when the backlash compensation II acceleration rates are set in ascending order. The following describes the relationship between setting patterns and parameters to be enabled.
(1) When the value of acceleration rate 1 is greater than "0", and the values of acceleration rate 1 to 4 are in ascending order
The following shows the setting which has four measured compensation patterns. Acceleration rate 1 to 4 and compensation amount 1 to 4 are all valid, and these values are used for calculating the compensation amounts.
Note that compensation amount may not be in ascending order because the value increase or decrease depending on the acceleration rate. "0" and negative values can also be set as illustrated below.
When compensation amounts are not in ascending order
0
Compensation amount
Compensation amount 1
Compensation amount 2
Compensation amount 4
Compensation amount 3
Acceleration rate 1
Acceleration rate 4
Acceleration rate 3
Acceleration rate 2
Acceleration rate
0
Compensation amount
Compensation amount 1
Compensation amount 2
Compensation amount 4
Compensation amount 3
Acceleration rate 1
Acceleration rate 4
Acceleration rate 3
Acceleration rate 2
Acceleration rate
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
525 IB-1501269-P
(2) When the acceleration rate 1 is set to "0"
Backlash compensation II is disabled. Quadrant projection compensation is not performed on the axis, and the compensation amount is handled as "0".
(3) When part of setting values of acceleration rate 1 to 4 are set in ascending order
Parameters are enabled when the corresponding acceleration rates are set in ascending order. Parameters are disabled and not used for calculating compensation amount when the corresponding acceleration rates are not set in ascending order. For example, when acceleration rate 1 and 2 are set in ascending order but the value of acceleration rate 3 is smaller than that of acceleration rate 2, the settings will be as follows. - Acceleration rate 1 and 2, and compensation amount 1 and 2 are valid. - Acceleration rate 3 and 4, and compensation amount 3 and 4 are invalid.
When the number of measured compensation patterns are less than four, compensation is carried out for the compensation patterns which are measured by setting "0" to acceleration rates corresponding to compensation patterns which have not been measured yet. For example, when there are two compensation patterns, "0" is set to the acceleration rate 3.
0
Compensation amount
Compensation amount 1
Compensation amount 2
Compensation amount 4
Compensation amount 3
Acceleration rate 1
Acceleration rate 4
Acceleration rate 3
Acceleration rate 2
Acceleration rate
0
Compensation amount
Compensation amount 1
Compensation amount 2
Compensation amount 4
Compensation amount 3
Acceleration rate 1
Acceleration rate 4
Acceleration rate 2
Acceleration rate 3 Acceleration rate
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation
526IB-1501269-P
(4) When the same values are set to consecutive acceleration rates Ascending order in acceleration rate setting refers to the case where subsequent values become greater than the previous ones. Therefore, as same as (3), when the acceleration rates are no longer arranged in ascending order, corresponding parameters are disabled; accordingly, the compensation amounts are not calculated. For example, when acceleration rate 1 and 2 are in ascending order but acceleration rate 3 is equal to acceleration rate 2, the settings will be as follows. - Acceleration rate 1 and 2, and compensation amount 1 and 2 are valid. - Acceleration rate 3 and 4, and compensation amount 3 and 4 are invalid.
0
Compensation amount
Compensation amount 1
Compensation amount 2
Compensation amount 4
Compensation amount 3
Acceleration rate 1
Acceleration rate 4Acceleration
rate 3
Acceleration rate 2 Acceleration rate
527 IB-1501269-P
27 Confirming the Spindle Operation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 27 Confirming the Spindle Operation
528IB-1501269-P
Confirm that the spindle operates properly in manual/MDI operation. Confirm the spindle rotation speed as well.
27.1 In Manual Operation (with Manual Numerical Command) (1) Select [MST] on the Monitr screen. Enter a spindle rotation speed (ex. 100r/min) in "S" field.
(2) Enter "3" in "M" field to rotate the spindle.
(3) Check the rotation speed of the spindle motor while the spindle is rotating. Refer to the section of "Confirming the Rotation Speed".
(4) After checking the rotation speed, set "M" to "5" or press the spindle stop button to stop the spindle rotation.
CAUTION 1. Do not adjust the spindle when possible risks associated with adjustment procedures are not thoroughly taken
into consideration.
2. Be careful when touching spindle's rotating section, or your hand may be caught in or cut.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 27 Confirming the Spindle Operation
529 IB-1501269-P
27.2 In MDI Operation (1) Select MDI mode.
(2) Select [MDI] on the Setup screen. Enter a program to issue an S command.
Program example (to rotate the spindle at 100r/min for 5 seconds) S100 M03 ; G04 X5.0 ; M05 ;
Press the [INPUT] key after entering the program.
(3) Press the automatic start button.
(4) Check the rotation speed of the spindle motor while the spindle is rotating. Refer to the section of "Confirming the Rotation Speed".
27.3 Confirming the Rotation Speed (1) Select [Drv mon] and then [Spindle unit] on the Diagn screen.
(2) Check the rotation speed of the spindle motor. (To obtain the spindle rotation speed, apply the gear ratio to the motor's rotation speed.)
(Note) If the vibration is not reduced by the measure, refer to the manuals of the servo drive unit.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 27 Confirming the Spindle Operation
530IB-1501269-P
531 IB-1501269-P
28 Setting the Handy Terminal
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 28 Setting the Handy Terminal
532IB-1501269-P
It is necessary to customize the display part composition, the key input, the communication condition with NC, etc. to connect the handy terminal (HG1T-SB12UH-MK1346-L*). Create the customized data with "NC Designer HT" and download it to the handy terminal.
There are two methods to input customized data for the handy terminal. (1) Connecting a personal computer and the handy terminal and inputting the data from "NC Designer HT" (2) Connecting NC and the handy terminal and inputting the data from a SD card
28.1 Inputting the Data from a Personal Computer Create a project data (*.p1t), which is handled as customized data, with the customized data creation tool "NC Designer HT". Then download it to the handy terminal.
(1) Start the customized data creation tool "NC Designer HT" to create the project data (*.p1t).
(2) Connect a personal computer and the handy terminal via serial RS-232C.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 28 Setting the Handy Terminal
533 IB-1501269-P
(3) Select [Online] - [Communication setting] from the menu of "NC Designer HT" and confirm the communication condition is as follows.
Port: Personal computer port Transmission: 19200 [bps] Data length: 8 [bit] Stop bit: 2 Parity: None
(4) Select [Online] - [Download] from the menu of "NC Designer HT".
(5) The following dialog box is displayed. Select "Yes".
(6) If a password has been set to the downloaded customized data, the "Input password" dialog box will be displayed. Input the password and select "OK".
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 28 Setting the Handy Terminal
534IB-1501269-P
(7) The customized data will be downloaded to the handy terminal.
(8) When the download has been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 28 Setting the Handy Terminal
535 IB-1501269-P
28.2 Inputting the Data from NC Create a download data (handy.cod) from a project data (*.p1t) created with "NC Designer HT", then download it to the handy terminal.
(1) Start the customized data creation tool "NC Designer HT" to create a project data (*.p1t).
(2) Select [File] - [Writing download data] from the menu of "NC Designer HT" and save the data as download data named "handy.cod" in the root directory of the SD card.
(3) Insert the SD card used in (2) into the control unit.
(4) Set the password currently set in the handy terminal to the parameter "#11011 Handy TERM. PW.". (Note) When you download for the first time or the password for the present custom data of the handy terminal is
invalid, leave the parameter blank.
(5) Turn OFF the NC and then connect the handy terminal to SIO connector on the control unit.
(6) Set the rotary switch on the control unit to "5". Confirm that the DIP switches 1 and 2 are OFF. If they are ON, turn them OFF. (Normally, the DIP switches are OFF.)
(7) Turn ON the NC again. (*)
(8) When the display of LED on the control unit becomes "En", turn OFF the NC.
(9) Remove the SD card and return the rotary switch.
(a) LED (c) DIP switch 1 (b) Rotary switch (d) DIP switch 2
(a) (b) (d)(c)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 28 Setting the Handy Terminal
536IB-1501269-P
(*) Operating status is displayed by the LED on the control unit. Lo ... Loading En ... Complete without error n1 - n7 ... Complete with error
When the download is completed with error, possible causes are as listed below. Take measures and then perform the download procedure again.
LED Cause Measure n1
Alternately
2 - 20
Process was stopped due to communication error. LED displays "n1" and "detailed cause" alternately.
When the detailed cause is 2, 4, 10 or 15, Confirm the wiring. Confirm the communication parameters. When the detailed cause is other than the above, Contact the service center. (Note) The detailed cause is the output value (absolute value) of PLC signal R299. For details on R299, refer to "PLC Interface Manual".
n2 There is no version consistency between the custom data creation tool and the handy terminal.
Confirm the version of custom data creation tool.
n3 The passwords set in the handy terminal and the NC are not consistent with each other.
Specify the password for custom data of the handy terminal correctly in "#11011 Handy TERM. PW.".
n4 There is no custom data named "handy.cod" in the SD card root.
Confirm the content of the SD card.
n5 The size of customize data exceeds 512KB. The customize data cannot be downloaded unless the capacity is 512 KB or less.
n6 Process was stopped due to communication error (timeout error).
Set a longer timeout on the NC side.
n7 Process was stopped due to communication error (parameter error).
Confirm if Serial handy terminal communication valid (#6452 bit4) is ON. Confirm that "#6451/bit5" is OFF.
537 IB-1501269-P
29 Setting the Deceleration Check
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
538IB-1501269-P
29.1 Function The next block is executed after the axis is decelerated and stopped at the joint between the axis movement blocks. This is to reduce the machine shock and to prevent the corner roundness, at the time when the sudden change of the control axis feedrate occurs.
(1) Deceleration check during rapid traverse The deceleration check is always carried out at the block end (before executing the next block) during rapid traverse.
(2) Deceleration check during cutting feed The deceleration check is carried out at the block end (before executing the next block) during cutting feed when any one of the following conditions is valid. (a) When the error detect switch is ON. (b) When G09 (exact stop check) is commanded in the same block. (c) When G61 (exact stop check mode) has been selected.
(3) Selection of deceleration check method There are three methods for the deceleration check: command deceleration check method, smoothing check method and in-position check method. The deceleration check method can be set independently for each execution block with the rapid traverse command (G00) or the cutting feed command (G01/G02/G03).
(a) Operation list This table shows the operation list for each movement command set.
: Deceleration check is valid () : (1)The deceleration check is valid when the error detect signal is ON, or G09 or G61 is valid.
(2) When the block commands G01 -> G00 are executed, #1502 G0Ipfg is turned ON, and the opposite direction movement is reversed, the command deceleration check is performed.
(3) When the block commands G01 -> G01 are executed, #1503 G1Ipfg is turned ON, and the opposite direction movement is reversed, the command deceleration check is performed.
In the case other than the above conditions, the deceleration check is not performed. Refer to "Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal" for the details of opposite direction movement reversal.
: Deceleration check is invalid
Current block
Succeeding block G00 G01 G00/G01 without moving
G00 ( )(1)(2)
G01 ( )(1)(3) Other than the
above ( )(1)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
539 IB-1501269-P
(b) Selecting the deceleration check method There are three methods for the deceleration check, and the method is selected by the parameter. 1) For the execution block with the rapid traverse command (G00/G53)
2) For the execution block with the cutting feed command (G01/G02/G03)
When the parameter "#1306 InpsTyp" is "1", the deceleration check method will be the same as the method of 1) rapid traverse regardless of the value of the parameter "#1389 G1SmthChk".
Parameter Deceleration check method Determination condition
#1193 inpos
0 Command deceleration check Deceleration check time passed
1 In-position check method
Deceleration check time passed,
all axis smoothing zero and all axis in-position
2 Smoothing check method Deceleration check time
passed and all axis smoothing zero
Parameter Deceleration check method Determination condition#1306 InpsTyp
(G0/G1 common) #1389 G1SmthChk
#1223 aux07/BIT1
0 (cutting block)
0
0 Command deceleration check Deceleration check time passed
1 In-position check method
Deceleration check time passed,
all axis smoothing zero and all axis in-position
1 - Smoothing check method Deceleration check time
passed and all axis smoothing zero
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
540IB-1501269-P
29.2 Deceleration Check Method (1) Command deceleration check
After interpolation for one block has been completed, the completion of the command system deceleration is confirmed before execution of the next block. The required time for the deceleration check is equal to the longest one of the deceleration check time for the simultaneously commanded axes, which are determined according to the acceleration/deceleration mode and time constant. (a) For linear acceleration/deceleration
Ts : Liner acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = Ts + (0 to 10ms)
(b) For exponential acceleration/deceleration
Ts : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = Ts2 + (0 to 10ms)
(c) For soft acceleration/deceleration
Ts : Soft acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = Ts + (0 to 10ms)
The deceleration check time required during rapid traverse is the longest rapid traverse deceleration check time of all axes. This check time is determined by the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration mode and rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant of simultaneously commanded axes. The deceleration check time required during cutting feed is determined in the same manner. It is the longest cutting feed deceleration check time of all axes. This check time is determined by the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration mode and cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant of simultaneously commanded axes.
Td
Ts
Execution block Next block
Td
Ts
Execution block Next block
command
Td
Ts
Execution block Next block
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
541 IB-1501269-P
(2) Smoothing check method After the command deceleration check has been completed, the completion of all axes smoothing zero in the part system is confirmed before execution of the next block.
(Example) For exponential acceleration/deceleration
Ts : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Tp : Waiting time for block completion
(3) In-position check When the in-position check is valid, the command deceleration check is carried out. After that, it is confirmed that the servo system positional error is less than the parameter setting value, and the next block is executed. The in-position check width can be designated with the servo parameter in-position width (SV024). Note that G0 and G1 can be designated independently with the axis specification parameter G0 in-position check width (G0inps) and G1 in-position check width (G1inps). If both the servo parameter and axis specification parameter are set, the larger value will have the priority.
(Example) For linear acceleration/deceleration
Ts : Liner acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Tp : Waiting time for block completion
If the SV024 setting value is larger, in-position check will end when the SV024 setting value is established.
Td
Tp
Ts Smoothing zero for all axes
Execution block Next block
Command
Td
Tp
Ts
Execution block Next block
In-position width
Servo
Command
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
542IB-1501269-P
29.3 Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal Deceleration check cannot be designated for G01 -> G00 or G01 -> G01, but it can be designated in the following manner only when the movement reverses to the opposite direction in successive blocks. Deceleration check can also be executed if even one axis is moving in the opposite direction while several axes are interpolating.
(1) Designating deceleration check for G01 -> G00 opposite direction movement reversal If the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G01 to G00 successive block, the deceleration check for the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the base specification parameter G01 -> G00 deceleration check (#1502 G0Ipfg).
Same direction Opposite direction #1502 = 0
The acceleration rate is excessive due to the G01
and G00 composite speed.
Enlarged figure
(a) Commanded speed
(b) Resultant speed
G01 G00
G01 G00
G01
G00
(a) (b)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
543 IB-1501269-P
(2) Designating deceleration check for G01 -> G01 opposite direction movement reversal If the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G01 to G01 successive block, the deceleration check for the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the base specification parameter G01 -> G01 deceleration check (#1503 G1Ipfg).
#1502 = 1
Command deceleration
Enlarged figure
(a) Commanded speed
(b) Resultant speed (c) Command deceleration is completed.
Same direction Opposite direction #1503 = 0
The acceleration rate is excessive due to the G01
and G01 composite speed. #1503 = 1
Command deceleration
Same direction Opposite direction
G01 G00
G01 G00
G01
G00
(c)
(a) (b)
G01 G01
G01 G01
G01 G01
G01 G01
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
544IB-1501269-P
29.4 Parameter (1) Designating deceleration check
Base specification parameter
(2) Deceleration check during opposite direction travel Base specification parameter
# Item Details Setting range
1193 inpos The definitions are changed with the setting of "#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type". When Deceleration check method 1 is selected
Select the deceleration check method for G0. 0: Command deceleration check 1: In-position check 2: Smoothing check
0 to 2 When Deceleration check method 2 is selected
Select the deceleration confirmation method for the positioning or cutting command. 0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check 1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check 2: G0,G1+G9 Smoothing check
1223 aux07/bit1 Deceleration check method 2
Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9. 0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9 1: In-position check in G1+G9 The deceleration check is not performed for the commands except G1+G9. When "#1306 InpsTyp deceleration check specification type" is set to "1" (Deceleration check specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid.
0 / 1
1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type
Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or G1 deceleration check. 0: Deceleration check specification type 1 G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", and G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/bit1". 1: Deceleration check specification type 2 G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos".
0 / 1
1389 G1SmthChk Smoothing check method in cutting block
Select whether to apply smoothing check method to a cutting block for deceleration check, when deceleration check method is selected individually for G0 and G1 (when "#1306 InpsTyp"=0). 0: Follow the setting of "#1223 aux07/bit1" 1: Apply smoothing check method
0 / 1
# Item Details Setting range
1502 G0Ipfg G1 -> G0 deceleration check
Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G0. 0: Not perform 1: Perform
0 / 1
1503 G1Ipfg G1 -> G1 deceleration check
Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G1. 0: Not perform 1: Perform
0 / 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
545 IB-1501269-P
(3) Designation of in-position check width (a) Servo parameter
(b) Axis specification parameter
# Item Details Setting range
2224 SV024 INP
In-position detection width
Set the in-position detection width. Set the accuracy required for the machine. The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy gets; however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes longer. The standard setting value is "50".
0 to 32767 (m)
13024 SP024 INP In-position width
Set the in-position detection width. Set the positioning accuracy required to the machine. Lower setting value increases the positioning accuracy, but prolongs the cycle time (settling time). The standard setting is "875".
0 to 32767 (1deg/1000)
# Item Details Setting range
2077 G0inps G0 in-position width
Set the in-position width for G0. Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied. When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only SV024 will be available.
0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
2078 G1inps G1 in-position width
Set the in-position width for G1. Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied. When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only SV024 will be available.
0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
546IB-1501269-P
29.5 Relation with Other Functions (1) Tool compensation
When the tool compensation is performed, the deceleration check will be operated on the block after compensation. (2) Control axis synchronization (G125), control axis superimposition (G126), arbitrary axis exchange (G140), arbitrary
axis superimposition (G156) When control axis synchronization (G125), control axis superimposition (G126), arbitrary axis exchange (G140) or arbitrary axis superimposition (G156) is performed in the other part system, the succeeding block start timing may be delayed in the cutting block to which the axis related to these functions belongs.
(3) Automatic error detect The deceleration check is invalid in the block with the automatic error detect ON, the block complete condition follows the automatic error detect.
(4) High-speed machining mode When the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in G01 to G01 successive block during the high-speed machining mode, the commanded deceleration will not be performed even if G1Ipfg has been set to "1". When the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in G01 to G00 successive block, it follows the setting of G0Ipfg.
(5) High-speed simple program check The deceleration check is performed during the high-speed operation in the high-speed simple program check also. The deceleration check time is reduced according to the time reduction coefficient during the high-speed simple program check operation.
(6) Deceleration check in polar coordinate interpolation / milling interpolation / cylindrical start / cancel command - The deceleration check in polar coordinate interpolation / milling interpolation / cylindrical start / cancel
command are as follows.
Parameter: #1223 aux07 BIT1 Deceleration check method 0 Command deceleration check 1 In-position check
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
547 IB-1501269-P
29.6 Precautions (1) When in-position check is valid, set the servo in-position width of the servo parameter. (2) This function is invalid for the axes in the automatic machine lock. (3) When the MSTB is commanded to the next block of the cutting commanded block, the MSTB code is output before
the completion of the cutting command deceleration. Confirm the DEN (motion command completion) signal with PLC before the execution of the MSTB command which needs to be executed after the completion of the axis movement.
(4) When the control axis in the synchronous/superimposition control exists in the part system for which in-position check method has been set, the deceleration completion will be determined when the smoothing for all axes reaches zero. (Same as the smoothing check method)
(5) When the thread cutting commands are issued consecutively, the deceleration check will not be performed at the block joint.
(6) If the parameter "#1205 G0bdcc" is set to "1", the value set with the parameter "#2224 SV024" (in-position detection width) will be used as the in-position width. The setting of the parameter "#2077 G0inps" (G0 in-position width) and the programmable in-position check with ",I" address are disabled.
(7) When the operation with machine lock is performed and variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/ deceleration is enabled by the function such as high-accuracy control, "Each axis in-position" signal is always ON.
(8) "Each axis in-position" signal can not be used during the synchronous operation. (9) Deceleration check for opposite direction movement reversal
- When deceleration check is valid (#1502 G0Ipfg = 1), deceleration check will be executed when the axis reverses its movement to the opposite direction at the G1 -> G0 successive block regardless of whether G0 non-interpolation is ON or OFF.
- When deceleration check is valid (#1502 G0Ipfg = 1), deceleration check will be executed when the axis reverses its movement to the opposite direction at the G1 -> G0 successive block even in the fixed cycle.
- In the G1 -> G28, G1 -> G29 or G1 -> G30 successive blocks, deceleration check will always be executed when the G1 movement is completed, when movement to the intermediate point is completed and when movement to the return point is completed. Note that if the simple zero point return "#1222 aux06/bit7" is valid, G1 -> G0 deceleration check (#1502) will be followed when the G1 movement is completed and when movement to the intermediate point is completed. (Deceleration check will always be executed when movement to the return point is completed even in this case.)
(10) Deceleration check in movement including spindle/C-axis - The deceleration check for spindle/C-axis movement command is as described in the table below. That is
because a vibration and so on occurs in the machine when the position loop gain (#13002 PGN) is changed during the axis movement.
(Note 1) When G1 command is issued, the in-position check is performed regardless of the deceleration check parameter.
(Note 2) XX expresses all commands.
Parameter Rapid traverse command
Inpos(#1193) G0 XX (G0+G9 XX)
0 Command deceleration check 1 In-position check 2 Smoothing check
Parameter Parameter Other than rapid traverse command (G1: other than G0 command)
G1SmthChk(#1389) AUX07/BIT-1 (#1223/BIT-1)
G1 G0 (G1+G9 XX) G1 G1
0 0 In-position check
(Applicable only to SV024) No deceleration check
1
1 0
Smoothing check 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 29 Setting the Deceleration Check
548IB-1501269-P
549 IB-1501269-P
30 Synchronous Control and
Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
550IB-1501269-P
30.1 Synchronous Control This chapter describes position alignment that is required at the setup of the machine. Refer to "Synchronous Control Specifications Manual" (BNP-C3072-074) for details of parameter settings, operations, etc.
30.1.1 Outline The synchronous control is a control method that both master and slave axes are controlled with the same movement command by designated the movement command for the master axis also to the slave axis. This function is assumed to be used in the large machine tool, etc. which drives one axis with two servo motors. The axis for the base of the synchronization is called the master axis, and the axis according to the master axis is called the slave axis. (Note 1) The axis detachment function cannot be added to the axes used in the synchronous control. (Note 2) The control axis synchronization between part systems and the synchronous control cannot be used
simultaneously. (L system)
- The slave axis is controlled with the movement command for the master axis. - One slave axis can be set to one master axis. - Up to the following sets of the master axes/slave axes can be set for all the part systems in total. 8 sets for M800 Series, 3 sets for M80 Series
Y V
X
Z
Master axis Slave axis
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
551 IB-1501269-P
There are 3 types of synchronous control as follows:
(1) Position command synchronous control This is used when the machine's rigidity is low. This conforms the position command of the master axis to that of the slave axis using the synchronous control function of NC and drive those axes in parallel. This can be used only by changing the NC setting, without changing the settings in the servo drive unit.
Position command synchronous control diagram
The position command synchronous control has the following configuration:
CNC
M
M
Compensation
Position command
Drive unit
Master axis
Slave axis
Encoder
Compensation
Drive unit
Encoder
Synchronous operation
Position command synchronous control
Synchronous control mode
Correction mode Independent operation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
552IB-1501269-P
(2) Speed command synchronous control This is used when reducing the scale of the full-closed system or when the machine's rigidity, etc. cause the mutual interference to the axes positions. This drives the master axis and the slave axis in parallel using the common position feedback. Since the feedrate of each axis is controlled by the speed feedback of each axis, the stable control is available. This can be used when the settings of the NC and the servo drive unit are changed.
Speed command synchronous control diagram
(3) Current command synchronous control This drives the master and slave axes in parallel by reference to the speed feedback from the encoder onto the master axis side on the slave axis. Since that speed feedback is not the slave axis's itself, the slave axis easily vibrates. Also, as the slave axis is easily influenced by the disturbance, this is not appropriate for the machine tools which need the positioning accuracy or the interpolation accuracy. This can be used when the setting of the NC and the servo drive unit are changed.
Current command synchronous control diagram
The "compensation" in the (1), (2) and (3) diagrams indicates the pitch error compensation, the thermal expansion compensation, the backlash compensation and the external machine coordinate compensation. The axes which can set the compensation during the synchronous control differ according to the synchronous control type.
CNC
M
M
Drive unit
Master axis
Slave axis
Encoder
Encoder
Drive unit
Compensation
Position command
Position encoderCompensation
CNC
M
M
Drive unit
Master axis
Slave axis
Encoder
Drive unit
Encoder
Position command
Compensation
Compensation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
553 IB-1501269-P
30.1.1.1 Synchronous control mode
The following two operation methods are available in the synchronous control mode. (1) Synchronous operation
This is a method that both master and slave axes are moved simultaneously with the movement command for the master axis.
(2) Independent operation This is a method that either the master or slave axis is moved with the movement command for the master axis.
30.1.1.2 Correction mode The synchronization is temporary canceled to adjust the balance of the master and slave axes during the synchronous control mode in the machine adjustment. Each axis can be moved separately with the manual handle feed or the arbitrary feed in manual mode. If the operation mode other than the manual handle feed and arbitrary feed in manual mode is applied during the correction mode, the operation error will occur.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
554IB-1501269-P
30.1.2 Reference Position Establishment in Synchronous Operation Carry out the position alignment of the master and slave axes during machine's setup. The positions between the synchronous axes tend to deviate at power ON, thus this deviation needs to be adjusted. After position alignment, the position error between the synchronous axes is always checked while the synchronous operation method is selected. Perform the zero point establishment in the following steps for machines that perform synchronous operation at all times.
30.1.2.1 Zero Point Establishment in Relative Position Detection System/Dog-type Absolute Position Detection System
In machine setup, carry out the position alignment between the two synchronous axes. There are two types of position alignment methods as follows:
- Method using reference position adjustment value - Method without using reference position adjustment value
(1) Position alignment using reference position adjustment value This method is enabled when in a synchronous operation, and parameter "#1493 ref_syn" (synchronization at zero point establishment) is "1" (synchronous). This method is disabled when the parameter is set to "0" (Asynchronous).
There are following limitations in using the reference position adjustment value. - The grid intervals (#2029 grspc) of the master and slave axes must be the same. - Zero point return should start when the angle formed by the master and slave axes is smaller than [ Grid
interval / 2]. The zero point of the master axis is deviated from that of the slave axis by one grid, when zero point return is performed while the inclination is exceeding the allowance.
When the procedure on the next page is performed while the reference position adjustment value is other than "0", the remaining distance of the slave axis is compensated by the reference position adjustment value in step (e). Therefore, set the reference position adjustment value to "0" when starting position alignment after balancing. For speed command synchronization and current command synchronization, carry out "(2) Position alignment without using reference position adjustment value".
Position alignment at machine setup
Master axis
Slave axis Allowable inclination range
The same grid interval
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
555 IB-1501269-P
(a) From the PLC, turn ON the bits of the "synchronous control operation method" signal, which are corresponding to the master and slave axes, in order to select synchronous operation in "synchronous control mode".
(b) Carry out zero point return manually. (c) When the master axis reaches a dog, both axes decelerate at the same time. (d) After deceleration, both axes start traveling at a creep speed. (e) The master axis travels until reaching the second grid after dog OFF, and stops on the grid.
(If the deceleration after dog OFF goes over the 1st grid, the master axis stops on the 3rd grid) The slave axis moves in synchronization with the master axis, when the reference position adjustment value is "0". If the amount is other than "0", the slave axis moves asynchronously with the master axis after compensation by the reference position adjustment value.
(f) The master axis travels by the reference position shift distance (#2027 G28sft), and then stops. The slave axis travels in synchronization with the master axis.
(g) Switch to "Correction mode", and feed the slave axis by handle feed to the position to be defined as its zero point.
(h) At this point, the "zero point adjustment completion" signal is input from the PLC. (i) When the "zero point adjustment completion" signal is input, the NC automatically sets the reference position
adjustment value in the parameter "#2036 slv_adjust" (reference position adjustment value). Reference position adjustment value is a distance between the position obtained by subtracting the reference position shift distance from the current position and a near grid. Select a grid with which this vector becomes positive as the near grid. "#" that stands for the zero point return completion is not displayed, and the alarm "Z81" is not cleared.
(j) Enter back into synchronous control mode synchronous operation. (k) Carry out the normal manual zero point return. If necessary, adjust the position by the reference position shift
distancet (#2027 G28sft). Set the reference position shift distance to the master axis' parameter. If set to the slave axis' parameter, the setting is ignored.
Adjustment sequence
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(g)
G28sft
G28sft
(f)
Master axis start position
Slave axis start position
Reference position adjustment valueGrid
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Master axis
Slave axis
Near-point dog
zero point return completion signal ON
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
556IB-1501269-P
(2) Position alignment without using reference position adjustment value
[ When synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) is "0" (asynchronous) ] (a) Select the correction mode, and feed the master and slave axes using the manual handle to correct the error
between the two axes. Use an instrument such as a level to detect horizontal level errors between the synchronous axes.
(b) Adjust the dog position. Adjust the dog position so that the return position is always the same at reference position return.
(c) Change back to synchronous mode, and carry out manual dog-type reference position return. Make sure to decelerate enough before carrying out reference position return. When the master and slave axes individually decelerate and reach zero point after the master axis' dog ON, adjust each axis' reference position shift distance (#2027 G28sft) so that there is no error between the two axes.
[ When synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) is "1" (synchronous) ] (a) Set "#2036 slv_adjust" (reference position adjustment value) to "0". (b) From the PLC, turn ON the master and slave axis bits of the "synchronous control operation method" signal to
select "synchronous control mode" synchronous operation. (c) Carry out zero point return manually.
The master axis travels until reaching the second grid after dog OFF, and stops on the grid. (If the deceleration after dog OFF goes over the 1st grid, the master axis stops on the 3rd grid) The slave axis travels in synchronization with the master axis.
(d) When necessary, adjust the zero point using the reference position shift distance (#2027 G28sft). Set the reference position shift distance to the master axis' parameter. If set to the slave axis' parameter, the setting is ignored.
Normally, positions of the master and slave axes deviate at power ON, thus the position alignment for this deviation is required. This position alignment is automatically done at the first dog-type reference position return after power ON. However, the settings of the zero point return parameters such as the reference position shift distance must be adjusted correctly. Synchronous error check is not carried out until this position alignment is done.
Below is an example of reference position return.
Position alignment after power ON
(G28sft)
(G28sft) Basic point
Master axis
Slave axis
Reference position Grid
Master axis's reference position shift distance
Slave axis's reference position shift distance
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
557 IB-1501269-P
30.1.2.2 Zero Point Establishment in Dogless-type Absolute Position Detection System Zero point establishment in dogless-type absolute position detection system can be performed by combining "#1493 ref_syn" and "#1496 push_typ" in one of the three ways below.
(1) When synchronization is set to "0"
Master axis and slave axis determine their zero points individually.
(2) When synchronization is set to "1" and stopper method is set to "0"
The zero points of both master and slave axes are determined by establishing the master axis' zero point. During stopper method in zero point initial setting, push until either master or slave axis reaches the current limit.
(3) When synchronization is set to "1" and stopper method is set to "1"
The zero points of both master and slave axes are determined by establishing the master axis' zero point. During stopper method in zero point initial setting, push toward the machine end stopper until both master and slave axes reach the current limit and the droop is canceled when the current limit is reached.
During position command synchronous control, select (2) or (3) because zero points of both master and slave axes need to be established with synchronization at zero point establishment of the master axis.
In machine setup, carry out the position alignment of the synchronous axes in the following procedure.
(1) Select the correction mode, and feed the master and slave axes using the manual handle to correct the error between the two axes. Use an instrument such as a level to detect horizontal level errors between the synchronous axes.
(2) Change back to synchronous mode, and carry out the zero point initial setting. There are two types of zero point initial setting: stopper method and marked point alignment method. Moreover, there are two types of stopper methods: manual initialization and automatic initialization, and there are two types of marked point alignment methods: Marked point alignment method I and marked point alignment method II. When automatic initialization is selected, some part of the following operations are automated.
Parameter Setting value synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) 0
Parameter Setting value synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) 1 stopper method in zero point establishing operation (#1496 push_typ) 0
Parameter Setting value synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) 1 stopper method in zero point establishing operation (#1496 push_typ) 1
Position alignment at machine setup
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
558IB-1501269-P
[ When synchronization is set to "0" ]
Master axis and slave axis determine their zero points individually. (a) Set "1" to "#0 Absolute posn set" of master and slave axes individually. (b) For the marked point alignment method, align both axes to the machine basic position (marked point) and
set "1" to "#1 Origin-P". For the stopper method, push toward the machine end stopper until both axes reach the current limit.
(c) For the stopper method with #2059 set to "0", when each axis is pushed against machine end stopper and reaches the current limit, the absolute position is established. For the stopper method with #2059 set to "1", when each axis is pushed against machine end stopper and reaches the current limit, the axis moves to the opposite direction and the absolute position is established. For the marked point alignment method I, when each axis is moved toward basic Z direction with "Ret. Ref. P." displayed in the "State" item and reaches its grid point, the absolute position is established. For the marked point alignment method II, the absolute position is established without each axis moving to its grid point.
(d) Set "#2 Zero-P" to each axis.
- Synchronous error check is not performed during absolute position initial setting. - When initial setting is carried out for one of the two synchronous axes, do this in asynchronous mode. - During automatic initialization, the values set to push speed (#2055 pushf) for master and slave axes are valid
respectively. - "1" can be set to "#0 Absolute posn set" with PLC signal (AZSn).
The following is the operation example when synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) is set to "0" in zero point establishing operation:
(Note) In carrying out zero point initial setting, even when one axis has stopped on a grid, the other axis keeps traveling. Thus, decelerate enough before setting.
Parameter Setting value synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) 0
d c
a,b
d c
a,b #2037 G53ofs
[Machine end]"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
[Machine end]
Basic machine coordinate zero point
Grid point
Grid point
Master axis
Slave axis
Machine zero
Machine-end stopper position or mechanical basic position (marked point)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
559 IB-1501269-P
[ When synchronization is set to "1" and stopper method is set to "0" ]
The zero points of both master and slave axes are determined by establishing the master axis's zero point. Slave axis moves synchronously with master axis. At zero point establishment of stopper method, push until either master or slave axis reaches the current limit. Due to this, when slave axis reaches the stopper first, the stopper position may not be the basic point.
(a) Set "1" in "#0 Absolute posn set" of master axis. When "1" is set to "#0 Absolute posn set" of slave axis, "Setting error" occurs.
(b) For the marked point alignment method, align the master axis to the machine basic position (marked point) and set "1" to "#1 Origin-P". For the stopper method (with "#2059 zerbas" set to "1"), push toward the machine end stopper until either master or slave axis reaches the current limit.
(c) For the stopper method with #2059 set to "0", when the master axis or the slave axis is pushed against machine end stopper and either axis reaches the current limit, the absolute position is established. For the stopper method with #2059 set to "1", when the master axis or the slave axis is pushed against machine end stopper and either axis reaches the current limit, the axis moves in the opposite direction and the absolute position is established. For the marked point alignment method I, when the master axis is moved toward basic Z direction with "Ret. Ref. P." displayed in the "State" item and reaches its grid points, the absolute position is established. For the marked point alignment method II, the absolute position is established without each axis moving to its grid point.
(d) Set "#2 Zero-P" to master axis. When "#2 Zero-P" is set to master axis, the same value is set to "#2 Zero- P" of slave axis. "#2 Zero-P" of slave axis cannot be set.
- Synchronous error check is not performed during absolute position initial setting. If an operation error (M01 0051) occurs at the start of the initial setting, correct the error with correction mode before the initial setting is performed.
- During automatic initialization, the values set to push speed (#2055 pushf) and approach distance (#2056 aproch) for master axis are also valid for the slave axis.
- Set the same value to select zero point parameter and basic point(#2059 zerbas) for master and slave axes. - When different values are set to "#2 Zero-P" of master and slave axes, the automatic initial setting cannot be
started. - "1" can be set to "#0 Absolute posn set" with PLC signal (AZSn). - When "1" is set to "#0 Absolute posn set" in the following status, "setting error" occurs.
(*1) Synchronous control method is not selected. (*2) Setting to "#0 Absolute posn set" of slave axis was attempted. (*3) When the initial setting method is marked point alignment method I, "#2050 absdir" of the master and
slave axes is different.
Parameter Setting value synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) 1 stopper method in zero point establishing operation (#1496 push_typ) 0
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
560IB-1501269-P
The following is the operation example when synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) is set to "1" in zero point establishing operation:
The following is the operation example of stopper method when the slave axis reaches the stopper first:
d c
a,b
d c
a,b #2037 G53ofs
Upon stoppage of the master axis, the slave axis stops.
[Machine end]"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
[Machine end]
Basic machine coordinate zero point
Grid point
Grid point
Master axis
Slave axis
Machine zero
Machine-end stopper position or mechanical basic position (marked point)
Machine end stopper
Master axis
Slave axis
The current limit is reached.
Master axis
Slave axis
Grid point
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
561 IB-1501269-P
[ When synchronization is set to "1" and stopper method is set to "1" ]
The zero points of both master and slave axes are determined by establishing the master axis's zero point. Slave axis moves synchronously with master axis. At zero point establishment of stopper method, push toward the machine end stopper until both master and slave axes reach the current limit. Also, the droop is canceled when the current limit is reached, which enables correction of the deviation to establish the zero point. During automatic initialization, the above operation is performed by two pushing operations.
(a) Set "1" to "#0 Absolute posn set" of master axis. When "1" to "#0 Absolute posn set" of slave axis is set, "setting error" occurs.
(b) For the marked point alignment method, align the master axis to the machine basic position (marked point) and set "1" to "#1 Origin-P". The droop is canceled at this time. For the stopper method, push toward the machine end stopper until both axes reach the current limit. When the current limit is reached, the droop is canceled.
(c) For the stopper method with #2059 set to "0", when the master axis and the slave axis are pushed against machine end stopper and both axes reach the current limit, the absolute position is established. For the stopper method with #2059 set to "1", when the master axis and the slave axis are pushed against machine end stopper and both axes reach the current limit, the axes move in the opposite direction and the absolute position is established. For the marked point alignment method I, when the master axis is moved toward basic Z direction with "Ret. Ref. P." displayed in the "State" item and reaches its grid point, the absolute position is established. For the marked point alignment method II, the absolute position is established without each axis moving to its grid point.
(d) Set "#2 Zero-P" to master axis. When "#2 Zero-P" is set to master axis, the same value is set to "#2 Zero- P" of slave axis. "#2 Zero-P" of slave axis cannot be set.
- Synchronous error check is not performed during absolute position initial setting. - During automatic initialization, the values set to push speed (#2055 pushf) and approach distance (#2056
aproch) for master axis are also valid for the slave axis. - Set the same value to select zero point parameter and basic point(#2059 zerbas) for master and slave axes. - When different values are set to "#2 Zero-P" of master and slave axes, the automatic initial setting cannot be
started. - "1" can be set to "#0 Absolute posn set" with PLC signal (AZSn). - When "1" is set to "#0 Absolute posn set" in the following status, "setting error" occurs.
(*1) Synchronous control method is not selected. (*2) Setting to "#0 Absolute posn set" of slave axis was attempted. (*3) When the initial setting method is marked point alignment method I, "#2050 absdir" of the master and
slave axes is different.
Parameter Setting value synchronization at zero point establishment (#1493 ref_syn) 1 stopper method in zero point establishing operation (#1496 push_typ) 1
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
562IB-1501269-P
The following is the operation example of stopper method when the slave axis reaches the stopper first: Canceling the droop when the current limit is reached enables correcting the deviation of the master and slave axes with the stopper as positive.
Normally, positions of the master and slave axes deviate at power ON, thus the position alignment for this deviation is required. Below are the position alignment methods.
(1) When synchronous error automatic correction at servo ON is enabled (#1281 ext17/bit3 = 1) The position of the slave axis is automatically corrected to the position of the master axis at servo ON.
(2) When synchronous error automatic correction at servo ON is disabled Position alignment is done automatically by carrying out manual zero point return. But the zero point related parameters need to be correctly adjusted and set.
When zero point has been established, synchronous error check is carried out even before this position alignment.
Position alignment after power OFF-ON
Machine end stopper
Master axis
Slave axis
Master axis
Slave axis
Grid point
The current limit of both master and slave axes is reached, and the droop is canceled.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
563 IB-1501269-P
30.1.3 Simple Synchronous Control Simple synchronous control is an extension of the synchronous control function. This function enables an axis to be synchronized with the axis previously defined as master axis for the synchronous control, and another axis to be synchronized with the slave axis. Backlash can be restrained by distributing load torque imposed on one axis to two servo motors. When the synchronous control and the simple synchronous control are combined, one axis can be driven with four servo motors. An axis to be synchronized with is referred to as a "main axis" and an axis which follows the main axis is referred to as a "sub axis". This is a control method in which the main axis and the sub axis are controlled in the same position by executing a position command for the main axis to the sub axis as well. The main points of the method are as follows: - The sub axes can be set only for the master axis and the slave axis for the synchronous control. - The sub axis is controlled with the movement command for the main axis. - Only one sub axis can be set for the main axis. - The main axis and the sub axis are controlled at the same position. Therefore, the main axis and the sub axis can
only be used together, while either of the axes can be used singly for single operation and correction mode for the synchronous control.
- For simple synchronous control, synchronization error between the main axis and the sub axis is not monitored. - For the main axis and the sub axis, specify the speed command synchronous control or the current command
synchronous control.
(Example) Example of use of the simple synchronous control
30.1.3.1 Zero Point Establishment During Simple Synchronous Control There are following regulations and cautions regarding the zero point establishment during simple synchronous control.
- For the absolute position detection method (#2049 type), set "2: Marked point alignment method I" or "4: Marked point alignment method II".
- Apply the same absolute position detection method (#2049 type) to the main axis and the sub axis. - When the reference point establishment is performed for the master axis and the slave axis (main axis) in
accordance with the zero point initial setting, the reference point for the sub axis is established at the same position. - The absolute position setting is not available in the sub axis. If "1" is set to "#0 Abs pos set" of the sub axis in "ABS.
POSITION SET" screen, "setting error" will occur. - If either the main axis or sub axis issued absolute position detection alarm (Z70 0003), the, same error will occur to
the other axis.
30.1.4 Parameter Setting for Synchronous Control To carry out synchronous control, it is necessary to set the synchronous axes names and the allowable synchronization error value. There is a restriction in the settings of the slave axis's axis parameters. For details, refer to "Synchronous Control Specifications Manual" (BNP-C3072-074).
XU
V W
Drive unit
Movement commands
Synchronous control
Simple synchronous control
Master axis (Main axis)
Slave axis (Main axis)
Sub axis Sub axis
Servo motor
Table
Simple synchronous control
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control
564IB-1501269-P
30.2 Multiple-axis Synchronization Control Refer to "Multiple-Axis Synchronization Control Specifications Manual" (BNP-C3072-339) for details of parameter settings, operations, etc.
30.2.1 Outline Multiple-axis synchronization control is the function that enables multiple slave axes to be synchronized with commands to the master axis. This function can be used, for example, in multi-head machine configurations. The axis that serves as the reference of synchronization is called "master axis", whereas the axis that follows the master axis is called "slave axis". - The synchronized axes are controlled with travel commands to the master axis. - For one master axis, two or more slave axes can be set. - Up to three combinations of master axis and slave axes can be set for all the part systems.
Configuration example of multiple-axis synchronization control
The "compensation" in the figure indicates the pitch error compensation, the thermal expansion compensation, the backlash compensation and the external machine coordinate compensation. Even under the multiple-axis synchronization control, the compensation is performed independently for each axis.
Perform position alignment for the master axis and each slave axis at the setup of the machine. Also, position alignment between synchronous axes is required when power is turned ON. Perform automatic or manual reference position return, and start synchronous operation after and performing position alignment. Refer to "22. Setting the Position Detection System" for details of position alignment.
30.2.2 Synchronous Operation and Independent Operation Independent operation is unavailable for multiple-axis synchronization control. Make sure to include the master axis when configuring the setting of "synchronous control operation method" signal.
Synchronous operation This method allows both master and slave axes to move synchronously by the movement commands to the master axis. This method is valid in both automatic and manual operations. The synchronous operation is selected and cancelled when all axis components are in commanded positions.
Independent operation Independent operation is unavailable for multiple-axis synchronization control.
CNC
M
M
M
Position command
Compensation
Compensation
Compensation
Drive unit
Drive unit
Drive unit
Master axis
Encoder
Encoder
Encoder
Slave axis 1
Slave axis n
565 IB-1501269-P
31 OMR Control
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
566IB-1501269-P
31.1 OMR II OMR II is a function that estimates the machine or motor model (moment of inertia, clone friction, viscosity coefficient, etc.) that can cause a path error (error in actual tool path in respect to the path commanded with the program). High- accuracy machining is achieved by carrying out feed forward control based on that model. This allows error caused by quadrant protrusions during circular interpolation or quadrants on the inner side of the path to be greatly reduced. OMR-II is a function that focuses on the quadrant protrusions, and improves the path error with this. Quadrant path compensation is included in OMR-II.
The quadrant protrusion compensation function improves quadrant protrusions by issuing compensation to the backlash compensation amount to compensate the error when the machine system direction is reversed. By adding the compensated backlash compensation amount to the position command and sending it to the servo, the gradually increasing-type lost motion which occurs at quadrant changeover can be compensated.
+
+ Servo
Position command (Fdt)
Backlash compensation amount
Interpolation process
Machine error compensation
Quadrant protrusion compensation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
567 IB-1501269-P
31.1.1 Adjustment Procedure (1) Set "#2114 Blf fwdg" (Compensation FF gain) to "0". (2) Set values for "#2112 Blf motor inertia" (Motor inertia) and "#2115 Blf motor stl trq" (Motor stall torque) according to
the motor specifications. (For motor specifications, refer to the specifications manual of your drive unit.)
(3) Set "#2111 Blf valid" (Quadrant protrusion compensation valid) to "1". (4) Adjust the setting value of "#2113 Blf visc friction" (Viscous friction) while checking the machine end.
The following figures are examples of adjusting the Y axis parameter. Adjust the parameter while checking the part where the Y axis quadrant changeover occurs. When the setting value of #2113 is small, a recessed part is generated inside the circle, while when the setting value of #2113 is large, a recessed part is generated outside the circle. When a proper value is set, spike-shaped quadrant protrusions are generated with normal stepped backlash. This quadrant protrusion is adjusted in the next section.
(5) Adjust the setting value of #2114 while checking the machine end. The following figures are examples of adjusting the Y axis parameter. Adjust the parameter while checking the part where the Y axis quadrant changeover occurs. When the setting value of #2114 is small, a large quadrant protrusion is generated, while when the setting value of #2114 is large, a recessed part is generated inside the circle.
(Note) Even though #2111 is set to "1", if any of #2112, #2113, or #2115 is set to "0", the quadrant projection compensation is invalid.
#2113 Blf visc friction 0.8 D D: Proper value 1.2 D
#2114 Blf fwdg 60 80: Proper value 100
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30 SimKGK CW F500 R60 x6000(5u/div)
X position [mm]
Y po
si tio
n [m
m ]
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30 SimKGK CW F500 R60 x6000(5u/div)
X position [mm]
Y p
os iti
on [
m m
]
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30 SimKGK CW F500 R60 x6000(5u/div)
X position [mm]
Y p
os iti
on [
m m
]
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30 SimKGK CW F500 R60 x6000(5u/div)
X position [mm]
Y p
os iti
on [
m m
]
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30 SimKGK CW F500 R60 x6000(5u/div)
X position [mm]
Y p
os iti
on [
m m
]
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30 SimKGK CW F500 R60 x6000(5u/div)
X position [mm]
Y p
os iti
on [
m m
]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
568IB-1501269-P
31.2 OMR-FF OMR-FF is a function that estimates the causes (moment of inertia, clone friction, viscosity coefficient, etc.) of the path error (error in actual tool path in respect to the path commanded with the program) by making a model of the control target. Feed forward control is carried out based on that model.
With the OMR-FF control method, highly accurate machining can be achieved by using the command filter function to suppress vibration in addition to the reverse model feed forward function. The reverse model feed forward function estimates the control target's vibration characteristics using a reverse model. The feed forward command for the appropriate position, speed and current can be obtained from this estimation. This allows the machine position to be tracked to the commanded position without causing vibration when using machine tools with low rigidity. When the command filter function is also used, the high-range vibration elements in the command can also be suppressed.
New control method to bring out the full potential of a high-speed high-acceleration machine - High tracking ability for the command (Smaller path error) - Suppression of the machine vibration (Suppress low-range vibration without losing tracking ability)
[Setting parameters] - Scale model time constant - Machine system resonance frequency p, anti-resonance frequency z, attenuation rate , inertia J
For details on OMR-FF, refer to the "Instruction Manual" for the drive unit.
s
J . s2
Target path Scale
model
Scale model position
Determine response characteristics of machine end position
Trace load position to scale model position without causing vibration
OMR-FF control
Machine system reverse model
Notch filter
Torque FF
Speed FF
Position command
F/B controller
Motor torque
Motor position
Machine system
Machine end position
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
569 IB-1501269-P
31.2.1 OMR-FF Enabling Procedure (Servo) (1) Disable the OMR-FF function.
- Set "#2139 omrff_off" to "1". - Set "#2313 SV113/bit0" to "0".
(2) Use software such as NC Analyzer2 to adjust the feedback system (position loop gain, etc.) and inertia (# 2237 SV037 JL). (For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of NC Analyzer2 and the "Instruction Manual" of your drive unit.)
(3) Enable the OMR-FF function. - Set "#2139 omrff_off" to "0". - Set "#2313 SV113/bit0" to "1".
(4) Set the parameters related to the OMR-FF function. - Set the same value as "#2203 SV003 PGN" to "#2306 SV106 PGM". - Set "#2312 SV112 IFF" to "10000". To further adjust various gains, refer to the "Instruction Manual" for your drive unit.
31.2.2 OMR-FF Enabling Procedure (Spindle) (1) Disable the OMR-FF function.
- Set "#13229 SP229/bit0" to "0". (2) Use software such as NC Analyzer2 to adjust the feedback system (position loop gain, etc.) and inertia (# 13037
SP037 JL). (For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of NC Analyzer2 and the "Instruction Manual" of your drive unit.)
(3) Enable the OMR-FF function. - Set "#13229 SP229/bit0" to "1". Set the following parameters for OMR-FF according to the desired mode. - For spindle C-axis mode, set "#13035 SP035/bitD" to "1". - For spindle synchronization control mode, set "#13036 SP036/bit5" to "1".
(4) Set the parameters related to the OMR-FF function. - Set the same value as "#3203 SP003 PGN" to "#13106 SP106 PGM". - Set "#13112 SP112 IFF" to "10000". To further adjust various gains, refer to the "Instruction Manual" for your drive unit.
31.2.3 Precautions (1) While OMR-FF control is being performed, the conventional feed forward control parameter (#2010 fwd_g) is
disabled. (2) To perform the synchronous control, set the axis parameters and servo parameters of the axes related to OMR-FF
control of the master axis and slave axis to be the same. (3) For the spindle, OMR-FF control is valid only in C-axis mode or spindle synchronization mode. (4) To use the variable speed thread cutting function, set "#13036 SP036/bit5" to "0". However, in that case, OMR-FF
control is invalid while spindle synchronization control is being performed. (5) The OMR-FF control is disabled during the synchronous tapping, and the conventional feed forward control is
performed. (6) This function cannot be used in combination with a spindle type servo.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
570IB-1501269-P
31.3 High-speed Synchronous Tapping (OMR-DD) The servo axis directly detects and compensates of the spindle's delay in tracking by using the communication between drive unit over the high-speed optical servo network. By minimizing the synchronization error, the accuracy of the synchronous tapping is increased.
For details on the high-speed synchronous tapping, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of the drive unit.
Without OMR-DD control
Implement to increase the accuracy of the synchronous
tapping
With OMR-DD control
(sec)
4000 3000
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
2000 1000
1000 2000 3000 4000
0
Spindle rotation speed
Synchronization error
4000 3000
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
2000 1000
1000 2000 3000 4000
0
(sec)
Spindle rotation speed
Synchronization error
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
571 IB-1501269-P
31.3.1 Enabling Conditions of the Function The following conditions are required to enable this function.
- "#1281 ext17/bit5" (High-speed synchronous tapping valid) is set to "1". - "#3137 stap_ax_off" (High-speed synchronous tapping disabled axis) of the axis to which you want to apply the
high-speed synchronous tapping is set to "0". - "#3137 stap_ax_off" of the axis which does not use the high-speed synchronous tapping is set to "1". - The synchronized servo and spindle are connected to the same channel.
When they are not connected to the same channel, a normal synchronous tapping is performed. - One spindle rotates with respect to the drilling axis of the synchronous tapping.
When multiple spindles rotate at the same time, a normal synchronous tapping is performed.
31.3.2 Restrictions This function has the following restrictions.
- High-speed synchronous tapping can be performed on up to four spindles on the same channel. The normal synchronous tapping is performed for the 5th and subsequent spindles.
- For "#1223 aux07/bit2" to "#1223 aux07/bit5" (Synchronous tap in-position check expansion function), you can select whether to enable the in-position check only for the hole bottom (bit4) and the R-point after the tapping retract (bit5). For I-point -> R-point (bit2), the in-position check cannot be omitted.
- When one of the following functions is commanded while the synchronization control is being performed, a normal synchronous tapping is performed. Program coordinate system rotation (for lathes) 3-dimensional coordinate conversion Workpiece installation error compensation Inclined surface machining
- When the program coordinate system rotation is commanded while the inclined axis control is being performed, a normal synchronous tapping is performed.
- When the tapping axis is in the machine lock, a normal synchronous tapping is performed. - When any of the vertical and horizontal axes of the selected plane is in the machine lock during program coordinate
system rotation (for lathes), a normal synchronous tapping is performed. - When any of the orthogonal axes of the part system being processed is in the machine lock during 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion, workpiece installation error compensation, and inclined surface machining, a normal synchronous tapping is performed.
- High-speed synchronous tapping is not enabled while the tapping retract is being performed. - When 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is performed, high-speed synchronous tapping can only be performed
on the first part system. When it is commanded in the second part system or later, a normal synchronous tapping is performed.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 31 OMR Control
572IB-1501269-P
573 IB-1501269-P
32 Variable Torsion Compensation
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
574IB-1501269-P
32.1 Outline When the direction of the machine movement is reversed, a response delay (*1) causes protrusion on the path. (*1) The response delay occurs due to dead band, such as friction, torsion, and backlash.
The lost motion compensation and OMR-II provide certain compensation using the set compensation parameters regardless of the acceleration rate at the direction reversal to suppress the protrusion. However, the characteristics of the response delay at the reversal differs depending on the acceleration rate at the reversal; therefore, when the arc radius or command speed is changed, the compensation cannot be performed sufficiently. The variable torsion compensation enables compensation based on the acceleration rate at the reversal and machining with high accuracy by setting the compensation parameters for each acceleration rate at the reversal.
This function is valid only on the first part system. Also, this function is valid on the basic axis and the additional axis. This function is invalid on the rotary axis and spindle.
The compensation parameters are adjusted to provide certain compensation.
When the arc radius or command speed is changed
Quadrant protrusion can be reduced.
Quadrant protrusion may not be reduced completely.
The compensation parameters are adjusted for each acceleration rate at the reversal to provide compensation based on the acceleration rate.
Variable torsion compensation
Lost motion compensation, OMR-II
Quadrant protrusion can be reduced.
Circular command Position FB
Quadrant protrusion can be reduced even when the arc radius or command speed is changed.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
575 IB-1501269-P
32.2 Enabling Conditions This function is enabled when all the following conditions are met. - The optional specifications of variable torsion compensation are valid. - "#14301 valVDC" (Variable full-closed torsion compensation ON) is "1". - "#14311 VDCa1" (Variable full-closed torsion compensation acceleration 1) is not "0". - The variable torsion compensation is available for the drive unit.
32.3 Parameter Setting Procedure Set the parameters in the following order. (1) Set the acceleration rate. (Refer to "Setting the Acceleration Rate".) (2) Set the torsion compensation amount. (Refer to "Setting the Torsion Compensation Amount".) (3) Set the time constant. (Refer to "Setting the Time Constant".)
Yes
Yes
No
No Quadrant protrusion is reduced.
Start parameter setting of variable torsion compensation.
End parameter setting of variable torsion compensation.
Set the acceleration rate.
Set the torsion compensation amount.
Set the time constant.
Quadrant protrusion is reduced.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
576IB-1501269-P
32.3.1 Setting the Acceleration Rate Set the acceleration rate to which the variable torsion compensation is to be applied. Set the acceleration rate at reversal of direction of the axis on which compensation is to be performed. Set the acceleration rates by the 1st parameter to 8th parameter. Set the acceleration rates to be greater from the 1st parameter to the 8th parameter.
For the range between the acceleration rates set in the 1st to 8th parameters, compensation is performed using the compensation amount that is linearly approximated. For the acceleration rate smaller than that of the 1st parameter, compensation is performed using the 1st parameter. For the acceleration rate greater than that of the 8th parameter, compensation is performed using the 8th parameter.
The variable torsion compensation is invalid on the axis where "0" is set to the acceleration rate of the 1st parameter. When the size correlation of the acceleration rates is incorrectly set from the 1st to 8th parameters, the incorrectly set parameter and the subsequent parameters are invalid. (Example) When the acceleration rate of the 4th parameter is smaller than that of the 3rd parameter
The parameters up to the 3rd parameter are valid, and the 4th and subsequent parameters are invalid. For the acceleration rate greater than that of the 3rd parameter, compensation is performed using the 3rd parameter.
The acceleration rate parameters are as follows.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th Acceleration rate (VDCa1 to 8) #14311 #14316 #14321 #14326 #14331 #14336 #14341 #14346
1st parameter Acceleration rate 1 (VDCa1) Time constant 1 (VDCtex1)
8th parameter Acceleration rate 8 (VDCa8) Time constant 8 (VDCtex8)
2nd parameter Acceleration rate 2 (VDCa2) Time constant 2 (VDCtex2)
0 < Acceleration rate 1 < Acceleration rate 2 < Acceleration rate 3 < Acceleration rate 4 < Acceleration rate 5 < Acceleration rate 6 < Acceleration rate 7 < Acceleration rate 8
VDCa4 VDCa8VDCa7VDCa6VDCa5VDCa3VDCa2VDCa1
Compensation amount For the range between the set
acceleration rates, the compensation amount is linearly approximated.
Acceleration rate
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
577 IB-1501269-P
32.3.2 Setting the Torsion Compensation Amount Set the variable torsion compensation amounts in the (+) and (-) directions. Perform the setting for each acceleration rate. For the torsion compensation amount (+), set the protrusion size when the axis moves to the (+) direction and reverses to the (-) direction. For the torsion compensation amount (-), set the protrusion size when the axis moves to the (-) direction and reverses to the (+) direction.
The torsion compensation amount parameters are as follows.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th Torsion compensation amount (+) (VDCpex1 to 8) #14313 #14318 #14323 #14328 #14333 #14338 #14343 #14348
Torsion compensation amount (-) (VDCnex1 to 8) #14314 #14319 #14324 #14329 #14334 #14339 #14344 #14349
(+) direction
Set for the torsion compensation amount (+).
(-) direction Set for the torsion compensation amount (-).
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
578IB-1501269-P
32.3.3 Setting the Time Constant Set the time constant of the variable torsion compensation. Perform the setting for each acceleration rate.
When an appropriate value is set to the time constant, the quadrant protrusion is reduced.
When the quadrant protrusions are generated as follows, change the setting of the time constant.
When the outward protrusion from the arc is generated before the inward protrusion
When the outward protrusion from the arc is generated after the inward protrusion
The time constant parameters are as follows.
The compensation timing is late. Set a smaller value for the time constant.
The compensation timing is early. Set a greater value for the time constant.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th Time constant (VDCtex1 to 8) #14312 #14317 #14322 #14327 #14332 #14337 #14342 #14347
Circular command
Circular command
Circular command
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
579 IB-1501269-P
32.4 Relation with Other Functions - Relation with lost motion
When the variable torsion compensation is valid, the lost motion compensation is invalid. - Relation with OMR-II
It can be used with the variable torsion compensation. - Relation with OMR-FF
It can be used with the variable torsion compensation. - Relation with drilling cycle high-speed retract
It can be used with the variable torsion compensation. Even when the variable torsion compensation is valid, the lost motion compensation is valid during retract operation.
- Arbitrary axis exchange control When the arbitrary axis exchange control is performed while the variable torsion compensation is valid, the operation is as follows. When the axis of the part system 1 is moved in the 2nd part system, compensation is performed by the variable torsion compensation parameter set to the axis. When the axis of the part system 2 is moved in the 1st part system, the variable torsion compensation is not performed for the axis.
- Synchronous control It can be used with the variable torsion compensation. In the synchronous operation method, the same compensation is performed between the slave axis and the master axis. The compensation parameter set to the slave axis is ignored. In the independent operation method, the compensation is performed for the slave axis with the compensation parameter set to the slave axis.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 32 Variable Torsion Compensation
580IB-1501269-P
581 IB-1501269-P
33 Adjust S-analog Screen
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 33 Adjust S-analog Screen
582IB-1501269-P
The spindle analog output adjustment is carried out on this screen.
Display items
Display item Details
(1) Parameter No.
This is a number to be used when inputting/outputting the parameters. For manual adjustments, this uses the [ ] [ ] keys to move the cursor to the setting item to be adjusted. The cursor does not display during automatic adjustments.
(2) Adjustment item name This displays the names of the spindle analog adjustment items. (3) Adjustment data This displays the setting data for each adjustment item.
(4) Current adjust data This displays data which is being adjusted manually. (Display only during a manual adjustment.)
(5) Operation procedure This displays the operation procedures for automatic and manual adjustments.
Menus
Menu Details Reference
This carries out automatic adjustment of the spindle analog output. Performing Automatic Adjustments
This carries out manual adjustment of the spindle analog output.
Performing Manual Adjustments
This is used during manual adjustments to adjust downward in decrements of 10.
This is used during manual adjustments to adjust downward in decrements of 1.
This is used during manual adjustments to adjust upward in increments of 1.
This is used during manual adjustments to adjust upward in increments of 10.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Auto adjust
Manual adjust
Voltage -10
Voltage -1
Voltage +1
Voltage +10
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 33 Adjust S-analog Screen
583 IB-1501269-P
33.1 Adjustment Preparations The PLC must be stopped when performing spindle analog output adjustments by one of the following methods below:
33.2 Performing Automatic Adjustments Automatic adjustment will execute "0V offset adjustment" and "+ gain adjustment" for the remote I/O analog outputs (max. 4ch) connected to the main unit. The - gain will be handled as the + gain.
The manual adjustment related menu is displayed in gray during the automatic adjustment, and manual adjustments will be disabled. Switching to other screens is also disabled at this time.
When the automatic adjustment is completed, an operation message "Auto adjust complete" appears. The highlighting of the menu [Auto adjust] is cleared and the cursor is returned to where it was before the auto adjustment. The menu [Manual adjust] returns to the normal display and manual adjustment can be performed.
Operation methods (when stopping the PLC with the rotary switch)
(1) Set the rotary switch CS2 in the upper part of the unit to "1". The PLC is stopped.
Operation methods (when stopping the PLC on the maintenance screen)
(1) Press the function key [MAINTE] and then press the menu [MAINTE].
(2) Press the menu [Psswd input].
(3) Enter the machine tool builder password.
(4) Press the menu [PLC STOP] and then press [Y] key. The PLC is stopped.
Operation methods
(1) Press the menu [Auto adjust]. An operation message "Execute? (Y/N)" appears.
(2) Press the[Y] or [ INPUT] key. Automatic adjustment begins, and an operation message "Auto adjust execution" appears.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 33 Adjust S-analog Screen
584IB-1501269-P
33.3 Performing Manual Adjustments Adjusting the ch0 0V offset
(1) Use the [ ] [ ] keys to move the cursor to item "#10101", then press the [Manual adjust]menu button.
The current setting value is displayed at "Current adjust data". A 0V analog voltage is output to ch0 at this time.
(2) Monitor the analog voltage. Adjust the 0V offset until the analog voltage is 0V 3.5mV. The setting range -999 to 999.
(3)
Press the menu [Voltage +1] or [Voltage +10] "Current adjust data" is adjusted downward in decrements of 1 each time the menu [Voltage +1] is pressed. "Current adjust data" is adjusted downward in decrements of 10 each time the menu [Voltage +10] is pressed.
Press the menu [Voltage +1] or [Voltage +10]. "Current adjust data" is adjusted upward in increments of 1 each time the menu [Voltage +1] is pressed. "Current adjust data" is adjusted upward in increments of 10 each time the menu [ Voltage +10 ]is pressed.
(Note) "Current adjust data" range is -999 to 999. The adjustments cannot exceed this range.
(4) Press the [INPUT] key. "Current adjust data" is set as "ch0 0V offset", and the 0V offset result is enabled.
Adjusting the ch0 + gain
(1) Use the [ ] [ ] keys to move the cursor to item "#10102", then press the menu [Manual adjust].
The current setting value is displayed at "Current adjust data". A ch0 +10V analog voltage is output at this time.
(2) Monitor the analog voltage. Adjust the + gain until the monitor voltage is 10V 3.5mV. The setting range -999 to 999.
(3)
(4) Press the [INPUT] key. "Current adjust data" is set as "ch0 + gain", and the adjustment result is enabled.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 33 Adjust S-analog Screen
585 IB-1501269-P
Adjusting the ch0 - gain
(1) Use the [ ] [ ] keys to move the cursor to item "#10103", then press the menu [Manual adjust].
The current setting value is displayed at "Current adjust data". A ch0 -10V analog voltage is output at this time.
(2) Monitor the analog voltage. Adjust the - gain until the monitor voltage is -10V 3.5mV. The setting range -999 to 999.
(3)
(4) Press the [INPUT] key. "Current adjust data" is set as "ch0 - gain", and the adjustment result is enabled.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 33 Adjust S-analog Screen
586IB-1501269-P
587 IB-1501269-P
34 Device Open Parameter Screen
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 34 Device Open Parameter Screen
588IB-1501269-P
This function can set or change the user back up area of the PLC device from the NC screen. Divide the device area in accordance with the specifications of the machine tool builder and switch the display format or data type for each divided area (hereinafter called a group information).
(1)
(2) (3)
(4) (5)
(6)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 34 Device Open Parameter Screen
589 IB-1501269-P
Display items
Display items Details Setting range (1) Parameter No. Display the parameter No.(maximum of 100). -
(2) Device allocation
Set the head device which designates the divided area. - It is possible to designate the device allocation which overlaps with other groups. - When "0" is set to the device allocation, it clears the settings (data type, display format etc.) of the target group. - When an odd number address is set for the device allocation, DWORD cannot be designated for the data type.
R8300 to R9799 R18300 to R19799 R28300 to R29799 0
(3) Data type
Set the data type (BYTE, WORD, DWORD, WORD(BIT)) of the allocation area. BYTE: The area is secured per 1-byte. WORD: The area is secured per 2-byte. DWORD: The area is secured per 4-byte. WORD(BIT): The area is secured per 2-byte. DWORD cannot be designated when the device allocation is an odd number address. BIT format is valid for the display format when WORD(BIT) is designated. The data type can also be designated by pressing the menu [BYTE], [WORD], [DWORD], or [WORD(BIT)].
0:WORD 1:DWORD 2:BYTE 3:WORD(BIT)
(4) Number of data
Set the number of data in the allocation area. Number of data available to designate varies depending on the designated data type. (Note) When the number of data is "0", the target group will be invalid. (Example) Device allocation: R8400 Data type: DWORD Number of data: 100
0 to 3000 It depends on the device allocation and the data type.
400byte
R8400 DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
R8402
R8598
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 34 Device Open Parameter Screen
590IB-1501269-P
Display items Details Setting range
(5) Display format
Designate the display format of the data, the restriction of display, and the state of input protection.
(a) Cancellation of input protection 1: Not check Input protection check for the data protection key 2 will not be executed in the group detail screen. 0: Check Input protection check for the data protection key 2 will be executed in the group detail screen. (Note) The name of the data protection key varies depending on the machine tool builder. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder for details. (b) Cancellation of restriction on display 1: Display The group detail screen is displayed without entering the machine tool builder's password 0: Not display The group detail screen is not displayed when the password is not entered. (c) BCD fromat 1: Valid Display the group detail screen data in BCD format. 0: Invalid (d) BIT format 1: Display the group detail screen data in BIT format. 0: Invalid (e) HEX format (Hexadecimal format) 1: Valid Display the group detail screen data in HEX format. 0: Invalid (f) Sign (Decimal format only) 1: Without sign Display the group detail screen data in decimal format without sign. 0: With sign Display the group detail screen data in decimal format with sign. (Note) When "BCD format", "HEX format" and "BIT format" are all set to "0", the display format of the data is the decimal format.
-
(6) Group comment
Display a comment that is defined in the comment definition file for the device open or a comment of a head device of the group. a) When defining a group comment Comment of each group will be displayed. It will be displayed regardress of device allocation and the setting of number of data. b)When not define a group comment A comment of the device which is set with "(2) device allocation" will be displayed.
-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 34 Device Open Parameter Screen
591 IB-1501269-P
Menu for the device allocation/number of data input
Menu Details
Copy the data of a line where a cursor is placed.
Writes the contents of the data copied (one line) into a line where the cursor is placed. If the data of the line is changed after the [Line copy] is pressed, the data before change will be written when pasting it. Once the line is copied, it can be pasted many times until new area is copied.
Clears all allocation of the parameter in the device open parameter screen. -Data of the group detail will not be cleared.
When parameter No. is set and [INPUT] key is pressed, the group will be displayed with the parameter No. set is a top of the group. A cursor moves to the line of the target group.
The group detail screen corresponding to the group where a cursor is placed will be displayed. When the group where the cursor is placed is not set, it will be invalid.
Menu for inputting the display format
Menu Details
Change the display format to the decimal format with sign. When the data type is "WORD (BIT)", it will be changed to "WORD".
Change the display format to the decimal format without sign. When the data type is "WORD (BIT)", it will be changed to "WORD".
Change the display format to the HEX format. When the data type is "WORD (BIT)", it will be changed to "WORD".
Change the display format to the BIT format. The data type is changed to "WORD (BIT)".
Change the display format to the BCD format. When the data type is "WORD (BIT)", it will be changed to "WORD".
Select whether to display the target group infomation on the each group detail screen to users.
Select whether the input protection of the data protection key 2 is valid/invalid for setting of the target group information on the each group detail screen to users.
Copy the data of a line where a cursor is placed.
Writes the contents of the data copied (one line) into the line where the cursor is placed. If the data of the line is changed after [Line copy] is pressed, the data before change will be written when pasting it. Once the line is copied, it can be pasted many times until new area is copied.
Clears all allocation of the parameter in the device open parameter screen. (Note) Data of the group detail will not be cleared.
When parameter No. is set and [INPUT] key is pressed, the group will be displayed with the parameter No. set is a top of the group. A cursor moves to the line of the target group.
The group detail screen corresponding to the group where a cursor is placed will be displayed. When the group information, where a cursor is placed, is not set, it will be invalid.
Line copy
Line paste
All clear
Group search
Group details
W/ DEC sign
W/O DEC sign
HEX
BIT
BCD
Enable display
Cancel protect
Line copy
Line paste
All clear
Group search
Group details
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 34 Device Open Parameter Screen
592IB-1501269-P
Menu for inputting the data type
Menu Details
Input "BYTE" to the data type. When the display format is BIT format, it will be changed to the desimal format with sign.
Input "WORD" to the data type. When the display format is BIT format, it will be changed to the desimal format with sign.
Input "DWORD" to the data type. When the display format is BIT format, it will be changed to the desimal format with sign.
Input "WORD(BIT)" to the data type. Display format will be changed to the BIT format.
Copy the data of a line where a cursor is placed.
Writes the contents of the data copied (one line) into the line where the cursor is placed. If the data of the line is changed after the [Line copy] is pressed, the data before change will be written when pasting it. Once the line is copied, it can be pasted many times until new area is copied.
Clears all allocation of the parameter in the device open parameter screen. (Note) Data of the group detail will not be cleared.
When parameter No. is set and press [INPUT] key, the group will be displayed with the parameter No. set is a top of the group. A cursor moves to the line of the target group.
The group detail screen corresponding to the group where a cursor is placed will be displayed. When the group where a cursor is placed is not set, it will be invalid.
BYTE
WORD
DWORD
WORD (BIT)
Line copy
Line paste
All clear
Group search
Group details
593 IB-1501269-P
35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen
594IB-1501269-P
SRAM open area for a machine tool builder can be set or changed. It can be divided according to the machine tool builder's usage, and the display format and the data format can be switched for each divided area (hereinafter called a group).
(1)
(5) (2)
(3) (4)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen
595 IB-1501269-P
Display items
Display item Details Setting range (1) No. Display the parameter No.(maximum of 100). -
(2) Data type
Set the data type (CHAR, SHORT, LONG, DOUBLE) of the allocation area. CHAR: 1-byte integer type. The area is saved per 1-byte. SHORT: 2-byte integer type. The area is secured per 2-byte. LONG: 4-byte integer type. The area is secured per 4-byte. DOUBLE: 8-byte real type. The area is secured per 8-byte. Target group setting (No. of data, display format) will be cleared if "0" is designated. The data type can also be designated by pressing the menu [CHAR], [SHORT], [LONG] or [DOUBLE]. The data set will be valid after formatting and then turning the power ON again. If the power is turned ON without formatting after the setting, an error "Z40 Format mismatch" will be displayed. The error will be kept displayed even the power is turned ON again until the reformatting is completed.
0 1:CHAR 2:SHORT 3:LONG 4:DOUBLE
(3) Number of data
Set the number of data in the allocated area. Number of data available to designate varies depending on the unit and the free space designated by the data type. - Target group will be invalid if the number of data is "0". - The data set will be valid after formatting and then turning the power ON again. - If the power is turned ON without formatting after the setting, a error "Z40 Format mismatch" will be displayed. The error will be kept displayed even the power is turned ON again until the reformatting is completed.
0 to 9999999 Depends on the data type and the amount of free space.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen
596IB-1501269-P
Display item Details Setting range
(4) Display format
Designate the display format of the data, display limitation and the state of the input protection.
(a) Cancellation of input protection 1: Not check Input protection check for the data protection key 2 will not be executed in the group detail screen. 0: Check Input protection check for the data protection key 2 will be executed in the group detail screen. The name of the data protection key varies depending on the machine tool builder. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder for details. (b) Cancellation of restriction on display 1: Display The group detail screen is displayed without entering the machine tool builder's password. 0: Not display The group detail screen is not displayed when the password is not entered. (c) BCD fromat 1: Valid Display the group detail screen data in BCD format. 0: Invalid (d) BIT format 1: Display the group detail screen data in BIT format. 0: Invalid (e) HEX format (Hexadecimal format) 1: Valid Display the group detail screen data in HEX format. 0: Invalid (f) Sign (Decimal format only) 1: Without sign Display the group detail screen data in decimal format without sign. 0: With sign Display the group detail screen data in decimal format with sign. - This will be valid after the power is turned ON again. - When "BCD format", "HEX format" and "BIT format" are all set to "0" or more than one format is set to "1", the data display format will be decimal format with sign. - If the data type is "DOUBLE", it will be decimal format with sign.
-
(5) Amount of free space
Display the amount of free space of the SRAM open area. It will be updated each time the data type or the number of data is set. If the data input exceeds the amount of free space, it will be displayed in negative value. The area will not be allocated even it is formatted. Adjust the data type and the number of data to make it positive value. The format is ####.##XB (X: prefix ... K, M). When it is less than 1024 byte, it is ####B.
-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen
597 IB-1501269-P
Menu when inputting the data type
Menu Details
Input CHAR into the data type.
Input SHORT into the data type.
Input LONG into the data type.
Input DOUBLE into the data type.
Delete a group in a line where a cursor is placed.
Copy the data of a line where a cursor is placed.
Writes the contents of the data copied (one line) into the line where the cursor is placed. If the data of the line is changed after the [Line copy] is pressed, the data before change will be written when pasting it. Once the line is copied, it can be pasted many times until new area is copied.
Clears all allocation of the parameter in the SRAM open parameter screen. -Data of the group detail will not be cleared.
When parameter No. is set and [INPUT] key is pressed, the group will be displayed with the set parameter No. at top of the group. A cursor moves to the line of the target group.
The group detail screen corresponding to the group where a cursor is placed will be displayed. When the group information, where a cursor is placed, is not set, it will be invalid.
Menu when inputting the number of data
Menu Details
Delete a group in a line where a cursor is placed.
Copy the data of one line where a cursor is placed.
Writes the contents of the data copied (one line) into the line where the cursor is placed. If the data of the line is changed after the [Line copy] is pressed, the data before change will be written when pasting it. Once the line is copied, it can be pasted many times until new area is copied.
Clears all allocation of the parameter in the SRAM open parameter screen. -Data of the group detail will not be cleared.
When parameter No. is set and [INPUT] key is pressed, the group will be displayed with the set parameter No. at the top of the group. A cursor moves to the line of the target group.
The group detail screen corresponding to the group where a cursor is placed will be displayed. When the group information, where a cursor is placed, is not set, it will be invalid.
CHAR
SHORT
LONG
DOUBLE
Line clear
Line copy
Line paste
All clear
Group search
Group details
Line clear
Line copy
Line paste
All clear
Group search
Group details
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 35 SRAM Open Parameter Screen
598IB-1501269-P
Menu when inputting the display format
Menu Details
Change the display format to the decimal format with sign.
Change the display format to the decimal format without sign.
Change the display format to the hexadecimal format.
Change the display format to the BIT format.
Change the display format to the BCD format.
Change whether to show the group detail screen to the users.
Change whether the input protection check is valid or not.
Delete a group of the line where a cursor is placed.
Copy the data of a line where a cursor is placed.
Writes the contents of the data copied (one line) into the line where the cursor is placed. If the data of the line is changed after [Line copy] is pressed, the data before change will be written when pasting it. Once the line is copied, it can be pasted many times until new area is copied.
Clears all allocation of the parameter in the SRAM open parameter screen. (Note) Data of the group detail will not be cleared.
When parameter No. is set and [INPUT] key is pressed, the group will be displayed with the set parameter No. set at the top of the group. A cursor moves to the line of the target group.
The group detail screen corresponding to the group where a cursor is placed will be displayed. When the group information, where a cursor is placed, is not set, it will be invalid.
W/ DEC sign
W/O DEC sign
HEX
BIT
BCD
Enable display
Cancel protect
Line clear
Line copy
Line paste
All clear
Group search
Group details
599 IB-1501269-P
36 Data Backup and Restoration
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 36 Data Backup and Restoration
600IB-1501269-P
The following two functions are available for the data backup and restoration: all backup function for files in batch and input/output function for separate files. The following devices are available in all backup and restoration.
Memory card (Front-side SD card) DS (Back-side SD card of display unit) USB memory
The master data backup and restoration are used for backing up and restoring the initial state data set by MTB. The built- in memory is used for the master data backup and restoration regardless of the selected device.
Files to be backed up/ restored are as follows.
(*1) These data can be backed up only, cannot be restored. (*2) "XXX" indicates the abbreviation for each language.
For the input/output function for separate files, refer to the "Instruction Manual".
Screen display File name Data type
System data SRAM.BIN SRAM data (binary files)
Programs, parameters, R registers and so on ALL.PRM (*1) Parameters ASSEMBLY.INF (*1) System configuration
Ladder
USERPLC.LAD User PLC program EIPCONFDATA.BIN EtherNet/IP configuration file PLCMSG_XXX.TXT (*2) PLC message file for MTB PLCUMSG_XXX.TXT (*2) PLC message file for users MCRMSG_XXX.TXT (*2) Macro alarm message file
Safety parameter SAFEPARA.BIN Safety parameter (binary file) Safety ladder1 SAFEPLC1.LAD Safety PLC program1 Safety ladder2 SAFEPLC2.LAD Safety PLC program2 APLC data APLC.BIN C language module created by user
Custom data - Custom screen data (Custom screen modules, setting files (Config.ini/ customdef.ini/customload.txt) and PLC alarm messages)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 36 Data Backup and Restoration
601 IB-1501269-P
36.1 All Backup The following explains the procedure to backup the various NC data to the memory card in a batch.
[Note] (1) APLC data can be backed up only when the APLC release specification is valid.
Operation method
(1) Press the menu [Backup]. The all backup screen is displayed.
(2) Press [Y], [y] or [INPUT]. The backup starts. "Executing" and "*" are displayed for the state of file under processing.
confirmation message "Overwrite this file? (Y/N)" appears. Press [Y], [y] or [INPUT] to start the backup.
- If the tool data is being sorted, the operation message "File access error" is displayed and the backup cannot be executed.
- For the custom data, the backup cannot be canceled during its execution.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 36 Data Backup and Restoration
602IB-1501269-P
[Note] (1) If an error occurs during the backup execution, the display will be as follows:
- Operation message : "File access error" - Execution state : "Error" for the file on which an error has occurred - Selected area : Clear
(2) Even when the data protection key (for memory card or SD) is valid, the data can be backed up in the memory card or DS.
(3) The backup is completed without error.
The states of backup-complete files turn to "Complete", the date displayed in "Backup list" will be updated.
cannot be backed up and "Unexecute" is displayed.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 36 Data Backup and Restoration
603 IB-1501269-P
36.2 All Restoration The following explains the procedure to restore the various NC data backed up to memory card in a batch. The files which has been automatically backed up can be restored only when the device set by the parameter "#8919 Auto backup device" is selected.
[Note] (1) The presence/absence of each file (system data, ladder, APLC data and custom data (for M80 Series only)) for the
transfer destination is not checked when the restoration is executed. (2) Each file for the system data, ladder, APLC data and custom data are rewritten when the restoration is executed. (3) In the following cases, an error message appears and the restoration is not executed.
- During the automatic operation - One of the data protection key 1, 2 and 3 is valid. - The NC serial number does not match the manufacturing number of the backup data. - The "System data" file does not exist in the transfer source. - The ladder larger than 256 KB is stored and all backup is executed when the large-capacity PLC specification is
valid, and then the specification is switched to invalid. (4) APLC data can be restored only when the APLC release specification is valid. (5) When smart safety observation is valid, entering the safety password is required. If the safety password is not
entered, the safety parameters and the safety ladders are cannot be restored. Operate from the procedure (3) when the smart safety observation is invalid.
Operation method
(1) Press the menu [Psswd input] on the Mainte screen.
(2) Enter the safety password.
(3) Set the device to memory card on the all backup screen.
Memory card is selected as the restoration source device.
(4) Press the menu [Restore]. The all restoration screen is displayed.
currently selected device, "Manual" is highlighted as the initial display position of the cursor.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 36 Data Backup and Restoration
604IB-1501269-P
[Note] (1) When the restoration fails, perform the restoration again otherwise it may cause an abnormal operation. (2) Restored data writes over the previous absolute position data. Carry out the absolute position detection again after
restoration.
(5) Move the cursor to select the file. Press the [INPUT] key.
The operation message "OK? (Y/N)" appears.
The cursor moves as follows: [ ] key: Auto1 -> Auto2 -> Auto3 -> Manual -> Auto1 ... [ ] key: Auto1 -> Manual -> Auto3 -> Auto2 -> Auto1-> ...
to, the operation message "Select directory to restore" appears. Select the file again and then press the [INPUT] key.
(6) Press [Y], [y] or [Input]. The restoration starts. "Executing" and "*" are displayed for the state of file under processing.
N)" message is displayed. Press [Y], [y] or [INPUT] to continue the restoration.
- If the tool data is being sorted, the operation message "File access error" is displayed and the restoration cannot be executed.
- For the custom data, the restoration cannot be canceled during its execution.
(7) The restoration is completed without error.
The states of restoration-complete files turn to "Complete", the operation message "Restore complete" appears. "Unexecute" is displayed for the file which could not be restored, for instance, due to the nonexistence of the file.
605 IB-1501269-P
37 Appx.1: Setting the System Lock
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 37 Appx.1: Setting the System Lock
606IB-1501269-P
System lock is a function for a machine tool builder to set a valid term to use the machine that machine user is using. If a decryption code is not input by a specified limit, the servo ready finish signal will be forcibly turned OFF and the use of the machine will be disabled. Encryption key and decryption code need to be set in order to enable the system lock.
37.1 Setting the Encryption Key The system lock function is enabled by inputting an encryption key file while the system lock is disabled. While the system lock is enabled, the date and time of the CNC cannot be set to a past date and time. Make sure to set the date and time correctly before inputting the encryption key. (1) Set "#1249 set21/bit2" to "1". (2) Save the encryption key file on a SD card (or USB memory). (3) Insert the SD card (or USB memory) card into the control unit. (4) Select [Input/Output] on the Mainte screen. (5) Enter an encryption key in the Input/output screen.
(a) Set the device name, directory and file name in the "A:Dev" area. (b) Set "Memory" for the device section and "/CRE" for the directory section of the "B:Dev" area.
Contents in the directory and file name sections will be written over. Directory section: "Encryption Key" File name section: "ENCKEY.DAT"
(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A->B].
(d) When a confirmation message appears, press either [Y] or [INPUT]. If the encryption key has been set, "Setting complete normally" appears. If the encryption key has not been set, the message "Can't write file for dev B" appears. Check the encryption key file and set it correctly.
[Possible causes of this failure] - Length of the encryption key is wrong; not eight letters - You have entered the encryption key on two or more lines - Unavailable letter is included (non-ASCII character or lower-case alphabet)
If an encryption key not intended to be input has been input, it can be reset by setting the correct encryption key with the same process. Note that, however, an encryption key cannot be reset after an expiration date is set by inputting the decryption code. If the specification is not provided, an error occurs when an encryption key is input.
(6) If the encryption key has been set correctly, an alarm message "Z41 Decryption code is missing" appears. To enable the system lock, go on to the "Setting of Expiration Date" (next page). If you do not want to enable the system lock due to the miss entry of the encryption key, etc., the system lock will be invalid by turning the power OFF and ON again to clear the encryption key.
CAUTION
The setting of encryption key and decryption code are required only when the system lock is used.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 37 Appx.1: Setting the System Lock
607 IB-1501269-P
37.2 Setting of Expiration Date Inputting a decryption code while the system lock is disabled, the system lock function becomes enabled and the expiration date is being set. While the system lock is enabled, the date and time of the CNC cannot be set to a past date and time. Make sure to set the date and time correctly before inputting the decryption code. (1) Save the decryption code file in a SD card (or USB memory). (2) Insert the SD card (or USB memory) into the control unit. (3) Enter a decryption code in the Input/output screen.
(a) Set the device name, directory and file name in the "A:Dev" area. (b) Select "Memory" from "B:Dev" device section and press [Dir] to display [Decrypt code] on menu key of the
screen. Contents in the directory section and file name section will be written over by pressing [Decryption code].
Directory section: "Decryption Code" File name section: "PASSCODE.DAT"
Setting "Memory" in the device section and "/RLS" in the directory section of the "B:Dev" area will be the same. (c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A->B].
(d) When a confirmation message appears, press either [Y] or [INPUT]. If the decryption code has successfully been set, "Setting complete normally" appears. - If the warning message is on the screen, this message will be removed. - If an alarm is activated, the alarm message will be deleted but SA will not turn ON. Turn ON the NC power
again. - If the decryption code is wrong, the message "Can't write file for dev B" will appear. - The "Executing automatic operation" error occurs during program operation, and setting the code is
disabled. (4) Turn the power OFF and ON after the setting is completed. (5) Select [Selfdia] on the Diagn screen and confirm that the system lock expiration date is indicated.
If the encryption key is already input and the time limit is not set, the time limit will not display.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 37 Appx.1: Setting the System Lock
608IB-1501269-P
37.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification (1) When the indication period of warning is reached, the warning "Z64 Valid term soon to be expired" appears at the
bottom right of the screen. This warning appears at every cycle start after power ON until the expiry date comes. Cycle start operation can be performed before the warning and alarm indication reference time of the expiration date.
(2) If the warning and alarm indication reference time of the expiration date have passed, the alarm message "Z65 Valid term has been expired" appears, which disables cycle start operation. This alarm cannot be canceled with reset. Instead, enter the decryption code issued by a machine tool builder, and then turn OFF and ON the CNC power. If the expiry date is over during a cycle start operation, the operation continues until automatic operation pause, block stop or reset is input. If the expiry date is over during a cycle start operation and automatic operation or block stop occurred, cycle start operation cannot be performed.
37.4 Caution (1) The system lock function is enabled by setting an encryption key and an expiration date while the system lock is
disabled. Be careful that the date and time of the CNC cannot be set both to a past and to a future from the expiration date while the system lock is enabled. When you advance date and time to the expiration date, set "#1724 cfg24/bit2" (System lock date and time setting permission) to "1". This parameter is set to "0" when the power is turned ON or at the cycle start.
(2) MTBs need to manage the encryption dedicated tool and the encryption key not to be leaked to the users. The encryption key file must be created on a PC.
(3) If you turn OFF and ON the power after the time limit has expired, "EMG Emergency stop LINE" may appear at the same time.
(4) When the clock data is incorrect without a battery backup, the automatic start cannot be performed. Exchange the battery and set the current date and time.
(5) If you upgrade the M8 Series software version from C3 or older to C4, perform the upgrading work after canceling system lock.
(6) When you upgrade the M8 Series software version from C3 or older to C5 or later with system lock enabled, the password for the system lock is automatically expanded to 8 digits. To issue a decryption code, add "0000" to the head of the conventional encryption key. Moreover, use the "System Lock Pass Code Maker" (BND-2201W000-A0 or later) to issue the decryption code.
(7) When you downgrade the M8 Series software version from C4 or later to C3 or older, you cannot perform the downgrade work with system lock enabled. To downgrade from version C4 or later to version C3 or older, cancel system lock and then perform the downgrade work.
(8) When you temporarily disable the system lock function in version D6 or earlier of M8 CNC, set a past date and time on the integrated time screen, and then reset the expiration date, the expiration date may be set to "1970.1.1". The expiration date will be set correctly following the procedure below.
(a) Disable the System lock function. (b) Update the CNC to S/W version D7 or later. (c) Set the expiration date. (d) Turn the CNC power ON.
609 IB-1501269-P
38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
610IB-1501269-P
Operating the maintenance screen reduces a phenomenon in which defective workpieces run out due to an operation mistake, by implementing a restriction with seven operation levels. The operation level varies depending on the MTB specifications. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB for details.
38.1 Protect Setting Screen
Display items
Display items Details (1) Current opn. level Displays the current operation level. (2) Passwords at operation
levels 4 to 6 Displays the passwords at operation levels 4 to 6 with "****".
(3) Protection level of each data item
Displays the protection level of each data item. The data set below the current operation level can be changed as needed. Changing the protection level displays the message "Pro lev change" at the upper right. Change: Specify the protection level to change data (including a case to input a file). Output: Specify the protection level to output a file.
Menus
Menus Details
Changes the present authenticated password to the non-authenticated state and switches the operation level to 0 to 3. Which of the operation level between 0 and 3 being switched is followed by the PLC signal of the protection level.
Changes the operation levels.
Changes the password of the operation levels 4 to 6.
Changes the protection level of each data item.
Saves the protection level setting of each data item.
(1)
(2)
(3)
0-3 opn level
4-6 opn level
Change pasword
Setup pro lev
Save pro lev
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
611 IB-1501269-P
Data to be protected
Display items Objects to be protected Initial value Setting range
Change Output Change Output Change Output
Available level Table for protection level setting on this screen Table for protection level setting cannot be changed by the operation level which is lower than the set protection level.
- 4 - 4-6 -
Tool data
Tool management data Tool registration Tool life management data
-
0 0 0-6 0-6 All tool data files (TOOLALL.DAT) Tool life management data files (TLIFE.TLF) Tool management data files (TOOLMNG.DAT)
Tool offset data Tool compensation amount data Tool measurement data -
0 0 0-6 0-6 Tool offset data files (TOOL.OFS)
Workpiece offset data
Coordinate system offset data Workpiece installation error compensation data Workpiece position offset for rotary axis Workpiece measurement data
- 0 0 0-6 0-6
Workpiece offset data files (WORK.OFS)
Workpiece shift data Workpiece shift data -
0 0 0-6 0-6 All tool data files (TOOLALL.DAT)
User parameter data User parameter data Barrier data -
0 0 0-6 0-6 Parameter files (ALL.PRM)
Machine parameter data
Machine parameter data Device open parameter data SRAM open parameter data Spatial error compensation data file (POSTURE.DAT)
-
6 0 0-6 0-6Parameter files (ALL.PRM, AUXAXIS.PRM, SYSTEM.PRM, DEVOPEN.DAT, SRAMOPEN.DAT, DEVICENT.PRM) Interfering data (OBSTACL.DAT) R register data (RREG.REG) Spatial error compensation data file (POSTURE.BIN)
Pitch error compensation parameter
Error compensation parameter data Error data -
6 0 0-6 0-6 Parameter files (ALL.PRM)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
612IB-1501269-P
(Note 1) When the protection level set for "Chng" of "Setup parameter data" is any of 0 to 3, if all the following conditions are met, PLC on-board can be started but it cannot be edited. - Operation level is "3" or lower - Operation level is at the protection level or higher
(Note 2) When the set protection level for "Out." of "Program edit" is higher than the current operation level, any program cannot be opened on the Edit screen. The message "Data protect" appears.
(Note 3) The common variables protected in #12111 to #12114 cannot be configured or changed regardless of the operation level or the protection level.
(Note 4) For specifications on inputting and outputting files which are objects to be protected, refer to "Instruction Manual".
Setup parameter data
Automatic backup (Output) Batch backups (menu [Backup]) Batch backups (menu [Master Backup])
-
6 0 0-6 0-6
Batch backups (menu [Restore]) Batch backups (menu [Master Restore]) HMI environment setting Memory format All erasure of machining programs All erasure of machine macros All erasure of life data All erasure of tool data fixpro formatting HMI version-up System version-up Console execution Ladder monitoring (Note 1) Machine tool builder macro variables WE measurement macro writing Machine tool builder macro ROM write Security function
-
SRAM data files (SRAM.BIN) User PLC program files (USERPLC.LAD) User PLC program files per project (PROJECTxx.: 01 to available project No.) APLC data file (APLC.BIN) Custom folder (MSYS\CUSTOM) EtherNet/IP configuration file (EIPCONFDATA.BIN) Machine tool builder macro variables data file (MMACRO.VAR)
Program editing
Program editing (only for memory) Buffer correction (only for memory)
(Note 2)
0 0 0-6 0-6 Machining program files (PRG/USER) Fixed cycle program (PRG/FIX)
Common variable data
Common variable data (Note 3) - 0 0 0-6 0-6
Common variable data files (COMMON.VAR)
Origin set operation G92 set - 0 0 0-6 0-6
Operator mail notification data
Operator mail notification setting Email communication address file Email communication setting file
-
0 0 0-6 0-6 Email communication log file on input/output screen Email communication address file Email communication setting file
-
Display items Objects to be protected Initial value Setting range
Change Output Change Output Change Output
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
613 IB-1501269-P
(Note 5) Following operations are available to operate at the protection level 6 and over. - Modal output, one-shot output and modal clear - PLC-STOP - S analog adjustment - Absolute position setting - Servo diagnosis - Collection setting - HMI ending - Screen size change - PLC indexing test operation
38.2 Returning the Password to the Non-input State (Operation level 0 to 3)
38.3 Changing the Operation Level to One of 4 to 6
(Example) Change the operation level to "6"
Operation Methods (1) Press the menu [0-3 opn level]. The menu [0-3 opn level] is highlighted.
The operation message "Change opn. level back to 0 to 3? (Y/ N)" is displayed. When the protection level setting is not saved, the operation message "Save the protective level setting? (Y/N)" is displayed, and the above message appears after Y/N is entered.
(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The operation message "Operation level has returned to 0 to 3." is displayed, and the highlighted menu [0-3 opn level] returns to normal. The operation level returns to one of operation levels 0 to 3 in accordance with the current signal status. All menus are displayed in gray.
Operation Methods
(1) Press the menu [4-6 opn level]. The menu [4-6 opn level] is highlighted. The cursor appears on the current operation level. The operation message "Select the opn. level to be changed to." is displayed.
(2) Enter the operation level to be changed to with a number. (Example) 6 [INPUT]
The operation message "Type in your password." is displayed.
(3) Enter the password of the level to be changed.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
614IB-1501269-P
38.4 Changing the Password
(Example) Change the password of operation level 4 from "OLDPASS" to "NEWPASS"
(Note 1) Set a password with one-byte alphanumeric characters between 3 and 8 letters (only capital letters are acceptable for alphabet). In addition, "UPARA" is unavailable to set as the password.
(Note 2) Changing the password is available only for the lower operation level than the current one.
Operation Methods
(1) Press the menu [Change pasword]. The menu [Change pasword] is highlighted. The operation message "Enter the current password." is displayed. The cursor appears on the current operation level.
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] key to move the cursor to the operation level where you want to change the password. (Operation level 4 in this case)
The operation message "Enter the current password." is displayed.
(3) Enter the current password for the operation level of the cursor position. (Example) OLDPASS [INPUT]
(4) Enter a new password. (Example) NEWPASS [INPUT]
(5) Enter the new password again. (Example) NEWPASS [INPUT]
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
615 IB-1501269-P
38.5 Clearing the Password
(Example) Clear the password of operation level 4
(Note 1) Clearing the password is available only for the lower operation level than the current one.
Operation Methods
(1) Press the menu [Change pasword]. The menu [Change pasword] is highlighted. The operation message "Enter the current password." is displayed. The cursor appears on the current operation level.
(2) Use [ ] or [ ] key to move the cursor to the operation level where you want to change the password. (Operation level 4 in this case)
The operation message "Enter the current password." is displayed.
(3) Enter the current password for the operation level of the cursor position. (Example) OLDPASS [INPUT]
(4) Enter "0". (Example) 0 [INPUT]
The operation message "Clear the password? (Y/N)" is displayed.
(5) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 38 Appx.2: Protection Setting
616IB-1501269-P
38.6 Changing the Protection Level Changing the protection level is available only for the data being set in the lower level than a current operation level.
(Example) Change the "Available level" from "4" to "5"
(Note 1) When the value of "Available level" in the setup protection level is higher than the current operation level, the protection level is unable to change. (The menu [Setup pro lev] is grayed out.)
(Note 2) The higher protection level than the current operation level is unable to set. (When the current operation level is "5", the protection level is unable to be set to "6".)
(Note 3) When changing the protection level during input-output, an error may occur in the middle of the input-output.
38.7 Saving the Protection Level Setting
(Note 1) After changing the protection level, if the screen is switched without saving the change, the operation message "Save the protective level setting? (Y/N)" is displayed. If you switch the screen without saving the change, the changed setting is canceled.
(Note 2) After changing the protection level, if you turn the power OFF without saving the change, the changed protection level is canceled.
Operation Methods
(1) Press the menu [Setup pro lev]. The menu [Setup pro lev] is highlighted. The cursor appears on the "Chng" of "Available level".
(2) Move the cursor to the protection level to be changed, then enter the new protection level. (Example) 5 [INPUT]
"5" is set in the "Chng" field of "Available level". The cursor moves to the right when "Chng" is set. (The cursor moves downward when "Available level" is changed.) The cursor moves to the left below when [Out.] is set. "Pro lev change" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
(3) Press the menu [Setup pro lev]. The highlighted menu [Setup pro lev] turns to normal. The cursor disappears.
Operation Methods (1) Press the menu [Save pro lev]. The operation message "Save the protective level setting? (Y/
N)" is displayed.
(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The operation message "Protective level setting has been saved." is displayed. The displayed message "Pro lev change" on the upper right of the screen is disappeared.
617 IB-1501269-P
39 Appx.3: Displaying Original Logo On Standard
Screen
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 39 Appx.3: Displaying Original Logo On Standard Screen
618IB-1501269-P
A logo that machine tool builders create can be displayed on the upper left of the standard screen. In order to display the logo, create a logo file (JPG) and install it. When a logo file is prepared by machine tool builders, the unit name (Base common parameter #1135 unt_nm) is not displayed.
[Logo file specification]
(Note 1) Add the logo file to the installer as well as the customized screen module. (Refer to "18. Setting Up with M80/M800S SETUP INSTALLER" for details.)
(Note 2) When the size of the logo file is different from the specified size, the display image may differ from the actual logo as a result of scaling to fit in the display range.
(Note 3) When the logo file is other than 16-bit color, the display image may differ from the actual color because it is converted to 16-bit color.
File name logo.jpg
Storage location (Note 1)
Size (Note 2) VGA 2280 pixels XGA 32135 pixels
Number of colors (Note 3) 16 bits
Logo display position
\Custom\
619 IB-1501269-P
40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
620IB-1501269-P
For details of the drive section (servo/spindle drive unit), refer to the "EMC Installation Guidelines" of instruction manuals for each drive unit.
40.1 Introduction EMC Directives became mandatory in EU (European Union) as of January 1, 1996. The subject products must have a CE mark attached indicating that the product complies with the Directives. In United Kingdom, the subject products require the EMC Directives and will need to have a UKCA marking as of January 1, 2023. As the NC unit is a component designed to control machine tools, it is believed that it is not a direct EMC Directives subject. However, we would like to introduce the following measure plans to back up EMC Directives compliance of the machine tool as the NC unit is a major component of the machine tools.
(1) Methods of installation in control/operation panel (2) Methods of wiring cables to outside of panel (3) Introduction of members for measures
Mitsubishi Electric is carrying out tests to confirm the compliance to the EMC Directives under the environment described in this manual. However, the level of the noise will differ according to the equipment type and layout, control panel structure and wiring lead-in, etc. Thus, we ask that the final noise level be confirmed by the machine manufacturer.
40.2 EMC Directives The EMC Directives largely regulate the following two items.
- Emission: Capacity to prevent output of interference noise that adversely affects external devices - Immunity: Capacity to not malfunction due to interference noise from external source
The details of each level are classified in the table below. It is assumed that the standards and test details required for a machine tool are the same as these.
Class Name Details CE marking/UKCA marking Emission
Radiated noise Restriction of electromagnetic noise radiated through the air
EN61000-6-4 (General industrial machine) EN61800-3 (Motor control unit)
EN55011 (CLASS: A)
Conductive noise Restriction of electromagnetic noise discharged from power supply line
Immunity
Static electricity electrical discharge
(Example) Regulation of withstand level of static electricity electrical discharge accumulated in human body
EN61000-6-2 (General industrial machine) EN61800-3 (Motor control unit)
EN61000-4-2
Radiated noise immunity
(Example) Simulation of immunity from digital wireless telephones EN61000-4-3
Burst immunity (Example) Regulation of withstand level of noise from relay or plug and play EN61000-4-4
Conductive immunity (Example) Regulation of withstand level of noise flowed from power supply wires, etc. EN61000-4-6
Power supply frequency magnetic field
(Example) Regulation of electromagnetic noise of 50/ 60Hz power supply frequency EN61000-4-8
Power supply dip (fluctuation)
(Example) Regulation of power voltage drop withstand level EN61000-4-11
Surge (Example) Regulation of withstand level of noise caused by lightning EN61000-4-5
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
621 IB-1501269-P
40.3 EMC Measures The following items mainly need to be taken into account as a countermeasure for EMC.
(1) Store the device in a sealed metal panel. (2) Ground all conductors that are floating electrically. Decrease the impedance. (3) Increase the distance between the drive line and signal wire. (4) Use shielded cables for wiring outside of the panel. (5) Install a noise filter.
Pay attention to the following items to suppress the noise radiated outside of the panel. (1) Accurately ground the devices. (2) Use shielded cables. (3) Increase the electrical seal of the panel. Reduce the gaps and holes.
40.4 Panel Structure The design of the panel is a very important factor for the EMC measures. Take the following measures sufficiently into consideration when creating a panel.
40.4.1 Measures for Control Panel Body (1) Use metal for all members configuring the panel. (2) When joining the metal plate, treat the welded or contacting sections so that the impedance is reduced, and then fix
with screws.
(3) Be careful not to bend the plate by such as screwing work. If there is a gap, noise leaks out from that part. (4) Plate (nickel tin) the metal plate surface at the grounding plate, and connect the connection parts with the low
impedance. (5) If there is a large opening, such as ventilation holes, make sure to close the hole.
(Note 1) Using screws to fix the plates that have been painted is the same as an insulated state. Remove the paint and fix the screws.
Painting mask
Joining interval: approximately 20 cm
Mesh cover (conductive sponge)
Opening
Control panel
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
622IB-1501269-P
40.4.2 Measures for Door (1) Use metal for all members configuring the panel. (2) When joining the door, use a gasket to lower the impedance of the contacting sections, or use a structure with a
large contact area as shown below. (3) The EMI gasket or conductive packing must contact the metal surface uniformly and at the correct position.
(Note 1) When not using a gasket, ground the control panel grounding with a grounding wire to lower the door's impedance.
(Note 2) Using screws to fix the plates that have been painted (attachment of packing) is the same as an insulated state. Remove the paint and fix the screws.
40.4.3 Measures for Power Supply (1) Shield the power supply section and insert a filter to prevent the noise from flowing in or out. Selection of the noise
filter capacity varies depending on the drive unit and devices to be used.
(Note 1) The conductive noise can be suppressed by inserting a noise filter, but the radiated noise will flow out. (Note 2) The conductive and radiated noise can both be suppressed by adding a partition plate to the noise filter.
(a) (b)
EMI gasket
Use of gasket Large contact area
Control panel
Door
Cross-section drawing
Contact area
Control panel
Door
NFNF
Device
Radiated noise
AC input
Noise filter
Partition plate
Device
Radiated noise
AC input
Flow out
Conductive noise Conductive
noise Noise filter
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
623 IB-1501269-P
40.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel Cables act as antennas to propagate unnecessary noise, and thus must be appropriately shielded and treated. The following measures must be sufficiently considered for the cables (J210/J303) that carry out high-speed communication.
40.5.1 Precautions for Wiring in Panel (1) If the cables are led unnecessary in the panel, they will pick up noise. Pay attention to the device layout and wire
length so that the wiring length is as short as possible.
(2) Always connect the grounding wire to the FG terminal indicated on the device. (3) Keep the distance between the drive line and encoder cable to the drive section motor as far apart as possible
when wiring. (4) Do not lead the power supply wire around the panel without using a filter.
Noise
Device Device Device DeviceDevice Device
NFPartition plate
Device
Radiated noise
AC input Conductive noise
Flow out
Noise filter
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
624IB-1501269-P
40.5.2 Shield Treatment of Cables Use shielded cables for wiring outside the panel. Use a shield clamp within 10cm of the lead-out port from the panel. (Refer to "EMC Countermeasure Parts: Shield Clamp Fitting".)
(1) DC power supply cable [J070/J071 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units. - Always install a ferrite core (Refer to "EMC Countermeasure Parts: Ferrite Core".) on the general-purpose
stabilized power supply. The ferrite core may not be required depending on the selected power supply.
(2) Remote I/O cable [J210 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
(3) LAN cable [J303 cable]
- Use a shielded cable. Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
Operation panel Control panel Shield clamp
General-purpose stabilized power supply
J070/J071 cable
Ferrite core
Control unit
Control panel
Control unit
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
Remote I/O unit
J210 cable
Operation panel
Control panel
Control unit
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
Peripheral device
J303 cable
Operation panel
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
625 IB-1501269-P
(4) Manual pulse generator cable (5V) [J026/J027 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10 cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
(5) Cable between synchronous feed encoder and control unit [R050/R054 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10 cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
(6) RS-232C I/F cable [J030/J031 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10 cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
Control panel
Control unit
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
J026/J027 cable
Peripheral device Operation panel
Control panel
Control unit
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
R050/R054 cable
Peripheral device
Operation panel
Control panel
Control unit
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
R030/R031 cable
Peripheral device
Operation panel
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
626IB-1501269-P
(7) SKIP input cable [J100 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10 cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
(8) Emergency stop cable [J120 cable]
- Use a shield clamp within 10 cm from the panel's inlet/outlet. - When using a ferrite core, install it on both ends of the connected units.
Control panel
Control unit
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
J100 cable
Peripheral device
Operation panel
Emergency stop switchControl unit
Operation panel Control panel
Shield clamp
Ferrite core
J120 cable
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
627 IB-1501269-P
40.6 EMC Countermeasure Parts 40.6.1 Shield Clamp Fitting
The effect can be improved by directly connecting the cable's shield sheath to the grounding plate as shown below. Install the grounding plate near the outlet (within 10 cm) of each panel, and press against the grounding plate with the clamp fitting. If the cables are thin, several can be bundled and clamped together. To provide sufficient frame ground, install the grounding plate directly on the cabinet or connect with a grounding wire.
A B C Enclosed fittings Ground Plate #D 100 86 30 Clamp fitting A2 Ground Plate #E 70 56 - Clamp fitting B1
L1 (maximum dimension when it is open) L2 (reference dimension)
Clamp fitting A 25 (77) Clamp fitting B 12 (54)
+0 .3 0
24
40
35 6 22
17.5
AC 35
24 -0
.20
11
7 3 6
B 0.
3
30
L1
L2
2-
[Unit: mm]
(Note 1) Screw hole for wiring to earthing plate in cabinet. (Note 2) The earthing plate thickness is 1.6mm.
hole
(Fitting A, B)
Installation hole
Clamp fittingEarthing plate
Outline drawing
5
M4 screw
Shield sheath
Cable
Cable
Earthing plate
Remove the cable sheath from the clamp section.
View of clamp section
Clamp fitting
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
628IB-1501269-P
40.6.2 Ferrite Core The ferrite core is mounted integrally with the plastic case. This can be installed with one touch without cutting the interface cable or power supply cable. This ferrite core is effective for common mode noise, and countermeasures for noise can be taken without affecting the quality of the signal.
Recommended ferrite core: TDK ZCAT Series
(*1) The M stamp is attached. (*2) A fixing band is attached at shipment. (*3) The core is fixed with double-sided tape. (The tape is enclosed with the part.) ZCAT-B type: Cabinet fixing type installation hole 4.8 to 4.9 mm, plate thickness 0.5 to 2 mm ZCAT-AP, ZCAT-C type: Structure that prevents easy opening after case is closed.
Unit: mm
Part Name A B C D E Applicable cable outer diameter Mass (g)
ZCAT1518-0730-M(-BK) (*1) 221 181 71 151 - 7 maximum 6 ZCAT1518-0730(BK) (*2) 221 181 71 151 - 7 maximum 6 ZCAT2017-0930-M(-BK) 211 171 91 201 - 9 maximum 11 ZCAT2032-0930-M(-BK) (*1) 361 321 91 19.51 - 9 maximum 22 ZCAT2032-0930(-BK) (*2) 361 321 91 19.51 - 9 maximum 22 ZCAT2132-1130-M(-BK) (*1) 361 321 111 20.51 - 11 maximum 22 ZCAT2132-1130(-BK) (*2) 361 321 111 20.51 - 11 maximum 22 ZCAT3035-1330-M(-BK) (*1) 391 341 131 301 - 13 maximum 63 ZCAT3035-1330(-BK) (*2) 391 341 131 301 - 13 maximum 63 ZCAT1525-0430AP-M(-BK) 251 201 41 151 11.51 2.5 to 4 (USB) 7 ZCAT1325-0530A-M(-BK) (*1) 251 201 51 12.81 11.21 3 to 5 (USB) 7 ZCAT1325-0530A(-BK) 251 201 51 12.81 11.21 3 to 5 (USB) 7 ZCAT1730-0730A-M(-BK) 301 231 71 16.51 151 4 to 7 (USB) 12 ZCAT2035-0930A-M(-BK) (*1) 351 281 91 19.51 17.41 6 to 9 22 ZCAT2035-0930A(-BK) 351 281 91 19.51 17.41 6 to 9 22 ZCAT2235-1030A-M(-BK) 351 281 101 21.51 201 8 to 10 27 ZCAT2436-1330A-M(-BK) 361 291 131 23.51 221 10 to 13 29 ZCAT2017-0930B-M(-BK) 211 171 91 201 28.51 9 maximum 12 ZCAT2749-0430C-M(-BK) 491 271 4.51 19.51 - 4.5 maximum 26 ZCAT4625-3430D(-BK) 45.51 24.51 341 121 - 26 For core flat cable 32 ZCAT4625-3430DT(-BK) (*3) 45.51 24.51 341 131 - 26 For core flat cable 32 ZCAT6819-5230D(-BK) 67.51 18.51 521 161 - 40 For core flat cable 58 ZCAT6819-5230DT(-BK) (*3) 67.51 18.51 521 171 - 40 For core flat cable 58
ZCAT-A, ZCAT-AP typeShape and dimensions ZCAT type
ZCAT-C type
ZCAT-B type
ZCAT-D type
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
629 IB-1501269-P
40.6.3 Surge Absorber Make sure that the surge does not directly enter the AC line of the general-purpose stabilized power supply (user- prepared) supplying power to the control unit and DIO. Select a product equivalent to or higher than the following products for the surge absorber. Refer to the manufacturer catalog for detailed characteristics, outline and connection methods of the surge absorber.
(1) Part name: RSPD-250-U4 Manufacturer: OKAYA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES
Outline drawing
Circuit drawing
Rated Voltage (50/60Hz)
DC Breakdown voltage
Voltage protection level
Normal discharge current
Maximum discharge current Surge current life
250VAC (Three phase) 700V25% 1.3kV 8/20s
2.5kA 8/20s
5kA Approximately 300 times
8/20s-1kA
Resin
Extraction wire
Case
321
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
630IB-1501269-P
(2) Example of surge absorber installation An example of installing the surge absorber in the machine control panel is shown below. A short-circuit fault will occur in the surge absorber if a surge exceeding the tolerance is applied. Thus, install a circuit protection breaker in the stage before the surge absorber. Note that almost no current flows to the surge absorber during normal use. Therefore, a breaker installed as the circuit protection for another device can be used with the surge absorber.
Surge absorber installation
CAUTION 1. The wires from the surge absorber should be connected without extensions.
2. If the surge absorber cannot be installed just with the enclosed wires, keep the wiring length of A to 2m or less. If the wires are long, the surge absorber's performance may drop and inhibit protection of the devices in the panel.
3. Surge absorber to be selected varies depending on input power voltage.
4. Do not insert the surge absorber in the place with a lot of harmonic components.
A
MC Circuit protector
NC unit
Control panel
(relay panel, etc.)
Other device (panel power supply, etc.)
Other device (panel power supply, etc.)
Panel earth leakage breaker
Input power
Circuit protector
AC reactor
Transformer
Grounding Grounding plate
Factory power
Contactor
Circuit protector
Power supply unit and
drive unit
Surge absorber (Protection across phases/ Protection across each phases grounding)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
631 IB-1501269-P
40.6.4 Selection of Stabilized Power Supply Consider the following characteristics when selecting the stabilized power supply (prepared by machine manufacturer). Use a power supply that complies with CE Marking or that follows the safety standards given below.
Stabilized power supply selection items
Standards
Item Standard setting Remarks
Output
Voltage fluctuation 5% 5% or less of 24VDC output
Ripple noise 120 mV (maximum)
Spike noise 500 mV (maximum)
Output current Refer to the maximum current consumption of the unit in use and calculate. Output holding time 20 ms (min) Instantaneous power failure time (AC side)
Safety Standards UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 234 approved, IEC950 compliant Noise Terminal Voltage FCC Class A, VCCI Class A High Harmonics Current Restrictions IEC61000-3-2
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
632IB-1501269-P
633 IB-1501269-P
41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
634IB-1501269-P
41.1 Restriction for Packing When transporting lithium batteries with means such as by air transport, measures corresponding to the United Nations Dangerous Goods Regulations (hereafter called "UN Regulations") must be taken. The UN Regulations classify the batteries as dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods according to the lithium metal content. To ensure safety during transportation, lithium batteries (battery unit) directly exported from Mitsubishi are packaged in a dedicated container (UN package) for which safety has been confirmed. When the customer is transporting these products with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as air transport, the shipper must follow the details explained in the section "Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries: Handling by User". The followings are restrictions for transportation. Each restriction is specified based on the recommendation of the United Nations.
41.1.1 Target Products The following Mitsubishi NC products use lithium batteries. If the lithium metal content exceeds 1g for battery cell and 2g for battery, the battery is classified as dangerous good (Class9). In order to avoid an accidental actuation during the transportation, all lithium battery products incorporated in a machinery or device must be fixed securely and must be shipped with wrapped over the outer package as to prevent damage or short- circuits.
(1) Materials falling under Class 9
(2) Materials not falling under Class 9
(Note) If the number of batteries exceeds 24 batteries for the battery cell or 12 batteries for the battery, the dedicated packing (for materials falling under Class 9) is required.
Area Transportation method Restriction Special clause World Air ICAO, IATA - World Marine IMO 188
United States All (air, marine, land) DOT 49 CFR 173.185 Europe land RID, ADR -
Mitsubishi type (Type for arrangement) Battery type Lithium metal
content
Number of incorporated
batteries
Application (Data backup)
Battery class
Outline dimension drawing
CR23500SE-CJ5 CR23500SE-CJ5 1.52g - For NC SRAM (M500)
Battery cell
Refer to "Battery Option" in the specification manual for drive unit you are using for the outline dimension drawing for servo.
Mitsubishi type (Type for arrangement) Battery type Lithium metal
content
Number of incorporated
batteries
Application (Data backup)
Battery class
Outline dimension drawing
CR2032 (for built-in battery) CR2032 0.067g - For NC SRAM/
Battery cell
Refer to "Battery Option" in the specification manual for drive unit you are using for the outline dimension drawing for servo.
CR2450 (for built-in battery) CR2450 0.173g - For NC SRAM
ER6, ER6V series (for built-in battery) ER6, ER6V 0.65g - For NC SRAM/
servo encoder MR-BAT ER17330V 0.48g - For servo encoder Q6BAT Q6BAT 0.57g - For NC SRAM MDS-BAT6V1SET 2CR17335A 1.2g 2 For servo encoder BatteryMR-BAT6V1SET
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
635 IB-1501269-P
41.1.2 Handling by User The shipper must confirm the latest IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Codes and laws and orders of the corresponding export country. These should be checked by the company commissioned for the actual transportation.
IATA: International Air Transport Association http://www.iata.org/ IMDG Code: A uniform international code for the transport of dangerous goods by seas determined by IMO (International Maritime Organization). http://www.imo.org/
41.1.3 Reference Refer to the following materials for details on the regulations and responses. Guidelines regarding transportation of lithium batteries and lithium ion batteries
Battery Association of Japan http://www.baj.or.jp/e/
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
636IB-1501269-P
41.2 Products Information Data Sheet (ER Battery) MSDS system does not cover the product used in enclosed state. The ER battery described in this section applies to that product. This description is applied to the normal use, and is provided as reference but not as guarantee. This description is based on the lithium battery's (ER battery) hazardous goods data sheet (Products Information Data Sheet) which MITSUBISHI has researched, and will be applied only to the ER batteries described in "Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries: Restriction for Packing".
(1) Outline of hazard
(2) First-aid measure
(3) Fire-fighting measure
(4) Measure for leakage
(5) Handling and storage
Principal hazard and effect Not found.
Specific hazard
As the chemical substance is stored in a sealed metal container, the battery itself is not hazardous. But when the internal lithium metal attaches to human skin, it causes a chemical skin burn. As a reaction of lithium with water, it may ignite or forms flammable hydrogen gas.
Environmental effect Not found. Possible state of emergency Damages or short-circuits may occur due to external mechanical or electrical pressures.
Inhalation If a person inhales the vapor of the substance due to the battery damage, move the person immediately to fresh air. If the person feels sick, consult a doctor immediately.
Skin contact If the content of the battery attaches to human skin, wash off immediately with water and soap. If skin irritation persists, consult a doctor.
Eye contact In case of contact with eyes due to the battery damage, rinse immediately with a plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and then consult a doctor.
Ingestion If swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
Appropriate fire-extinguisher Dry sand, dry chemical, graphite powder or carbon dioxide gas Special fire-fighting measure Keep the battery away from the fireplace to prevent fire spreading. Protectors against fire Fire-protection gloves, eye/face protector (face mask), body/skin protective cloth
Environmental precaution Dispose of them immediately because strong odors are produced when left for a long time.
How to remove Get them absorbed into dry sand and then collect the sand in an empty container.
Handling Cautions for safety handling
Do not peel the external tube or damage it. Do not dispose of the battery in fire or expose it to heat. Do not immerse the battery in water or get it wet. Do not throw the battery. Do not disassemble, modify or transform the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery.
Storage Appropriate storage condition
Avoid direct sunlight, high temperature and high humidity. (Recommended temp. range: +5 to +35C, humidity: 70%RH or less)
Material to avoid Flammable or conductive material (Metal: may cause a short-circuit)
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
637 IB-1501269-P
(6) Physical/chemical properties
(7) Stability and reactivity
(8) Toxicological information As the chemical substance is stored in a sealed metal container, the battery has no harmfulness. Just for reference, the table below describes the main substance of the battery. < Lithium metal >
< Thionyl chloride >
< Aluminum chloride >
< Lithium chloride >
< Carbon black >
(9) Ecological information
(10) Caution for disposal Dispose of the battery following local laws or regulations. Pack the battery properly to prevent a short-circuit and avoid contact with water.
Appearance
Physical form Solid Shape Cylinder type Smell Odorless pH Not applicable (insoluble) Boiling point/Boiling range, Melting point, Decomposition temperature, Flash point
No information
Stability Stable under normal handling condition.
Condition to avoid Do not mix multiple batteries with their terminals uninsulated. This may cause a short- circuit, resulting in heating, bursting or ignition.
Hazardous decomposition products Irritative or toxic gas is emitted in the case of fire.
Acute toxicity No information Local effect Corrosive action in case of skin contact
Acute toxicity Lc50: 500ppm (inhaled administration to rat) Local effect The lungs can be damaged by chronic cough, dyspnea and asthma.
Acute toxicity LD50: 3700ppm (oral administration to rat) Local effect Not found.
Acute toxicity LD50: 526ppm (oral administration to rat) Local effect The central nerves and kidney can be influenced.
Acute toxicity LD50: 2,000mg/kg > (rat) Carcinogenicity LARC group 2 (suspected of being carcinogenic)
Mobility, Persistence/ Decomposability, Bio- accumulation potential, Ecological toxicity
Not found.
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
638IB-1501269-P
41.3 Forbiddance of Transporting Lithium Battery by Passenger Aircraft Provided in the Code of Federal Regulation
This regulation became effective from Dec.29, 2004. This law is a domestic law of the United States, however it also applies to the domestic flight and international flight departing from or arriving in the United States. Therefore, when transporting lithium batteries to the United State, or within the United State, the shipper must take measures required to transport lithium batteries. Refer to the Federal Register and the code of Federal Regulation for details. When transporting primary lithium battery by cargo aircraft, indicate that transportation by passenger aircraft is forbidden on the exterior box. "Lithium Metal batteries forbidden for transport aboard Passenger aircraft"
41.4 California Code of Regulation "Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials"
When any products that contain primary lithium batteries with perchlorate are shipped to or transported through the State of California, they are subject to the above regulation.The following information must be indicated on the package, etc. of the products that contain primary lithium batteries (with a perchlorate content of 6 ppb or higher). "Perchlorate Meterial-special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate"
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
639 IB-1501269-P
41.5 Restriction Related to EU Battery Directive EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) has been enforced since September 26th in 2008. Hereby, battery and machinery incorporating battery marketed in European Union countries must be in compliance with the EU Battery Directive. Lithium battery provided by MITSUBISHI are subjected to this restriction.
41.5.1 Important Notes Follow the instruction bellow as shipping products incorporating MITSUBISHI device. (1) When shipping products incorporating MITSUBISHI device any time later than September 26th, 2008, the symbol mark
shown as Figure 1 in section "Information for End-user" is required to be attached on the machinery or on the package. Also, the explanation of the symbol must be added.
(2) Machinery with battery and maintenance battery produced before the EU Battery Directive are also subjected to the restriction. When shipping those products to EU countries later than September 26th, 2008, follow the instruction explained in (1).
41.5.2 Information for End-user
Figure 1
Note: This symbol mark is for EU countries only. This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users and Annex II. Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows:Hg: mercury (0.0005% ), Cd: cadmium (0.002% ), Pb: lead (0.004% ) In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators. Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre. Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 41 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries
640IB-1501269-P
641 IB-1501269-P
42 Appx.6: Precautions for Compliance to UL/c-UL
Standards
M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual 42 Appx.6: Precautions for Compliance to UL/c-UL Standards
642IB-1501269-P
(1) Selection of external 24 VDC power supply unit (The unit shall be prepared by the machine tool builder.) This NC system complies with the UL Standards on the condition that the stabilized power supply unit supplying 24 VDC to each unit meets the requirements for SELV/limited power LPS or Class 2 power supplies and that supply voltage fluctuations do not exceed 5% of nominal voltage. The stabilized power supply unit supplying 24 VDC to each unit must comply with the requirements of international standards and national laws/standards required for stabilized power supplies.
(2) Unit's ambient environment This NC system complies with the UL Standards on the condition that the unit is used under the environmental conditions described in "Environment Conditions", including the maximum relative humidity of 95% (non- condensing) and the maximum altitude of 1000 m. To comply with UL Standards, each unit must be designed to be within the environmental conditions described in the "Environment Conditions" section. The product must be used under environmental conditions of Overvoltage category II or lower and Pollution degree 2 or lower.
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Apr. 2015 IB(NA)1501269-A First edition created. Aug. 2015 IB(NA)1501269-B - The following units were added.
FCU8-DU121-12 (8.4-type Display Unit) FCU8-KB026 (Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit) FCU8-KB083 (Keyboard for 15-type Display Unit) - The following chapters and sections were added. 3.5 Keyboard Unit [M800S] 3.6 Keyboard Unit [M80] 3.12 Cable Connector Sets 4.7.1 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB026) 7.4.11 MR-BT6V2CBL Cable 7.4.12 MR-D05UDL3M-B Cable 7.5 List of Cable Connector Sets 9.4 Connecting and Setting Drive Unit MDS-EM Series Appendix2 Restrictions for Lithium Batteries - Chapter number change Section 4.7.1to 4.7.3 were changed into 4.7.2 to 4.7.4 Chapter 8 was changed into Appendix 1. Chapter 9 was changed into Appendix 3. Chapter 10 to 21 were changed into chapter 8 to 19. - Mistakes were corrected.
Apr. 2016 IB(NA)1501269-C - The following units were added. FCU8-MU542 (Control Unit) FCU8-MA542 (Control Unit) FCU8-MU511 (Control Unit) FCU8-MU512 (Control Unit) FCU8-KB028 (Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit) FCU8-KB029 (Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit) FCU8-KB041 (Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit) FCU8-KB048 (Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit) FCU8-DX202 (Remote I/O Unit) FCU8-EX133 (Functional Safety Expansion Unit) FCU8-EX563 (PROFIBUS-DP Expansion Unit) - The following chapters and sections were added. 3.9 Function Expansion Unit [M80] 3.14 Genuine Memory Card 4.7.2 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB028) 4.7.3 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB029) 4.7.4 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB041) 4.7.7 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB048) 4.10 Function Expansion Unit 4.11.2 PROFIBUS-DP (FCU8-EX563) 4.14 Exclusive SD cards for MITSUBISHI CNC 5.3.5 Function Expansion Unit 7.11.2 Connecting I/O Device via PROFIBUS-DP 10.9 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX202) 13.2.12 J221 Cable 26 Appx.2: Protection Setting (Continue to the next page)
Apr.2016 IB(NA)1501269-C (Continued from the previous page) - Chapter composition change Title of chapter 6 was changed into "Precautions for Connecting" Former 6.3 to 6.9 were changed into independent chapters (Chapter 7 to 12) Explanations for connection of drive unit in former 9.3 to 9.5 were moved to a new chapter 7 Former chapter numbers 7 to 19 were changed into 13 to 24 due to the change of chapter 6 - Chapter number change Section 4.10.2 was changed into 4.11.3 Chapter 17 was changed into Chapter 25 Appendix 1 to 3 were changed into Chapter 27 to 29 - Mistakes were corrected.
Oct.2016 IB(NA)1501269-D The contents were corrected to correspond with the system software C1 version. - The following units were added. FCU8-DX760 (Operation Panel I/O Unit) FCU8-DX761 (Operation Panel I/O Unit) - The following chapters and sections were added. 9.2 Connecting with Frame Ground 9.7.4 Example of Wiring CJ42 (FCU8-DX760) 9.8 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX761) 13.2.13 J224 Cable 13.3.12 MR-BKS1CBL-A1-H/MR-BKS1CBL-A2-H Cable 13.3.15 MR-PWS1CBL-A1-H/MR-PWS1CBL-A2-H Cable 24 Adjust S-analog Screen 25 Device Open Parameter Screen 26 SRAM Open Parameter Screen - Chapter number change Due to addition of the chapters as above, the existing chapters were renumbered. - Chapter title change 4.8.2 FCU8-DX750/FCU8-DX760/FCU8-DX761 - Correspond with MDS-EMH. - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Mar. 2017 IB(NA)1501269-E The contents were corrected to correspond with the system software C3 version. - The following units were added. FCU8-DX213-1 (Remote I/O unit) FCU8-DX654-1 (Remote I/O unit) FCU8-DX408 (Remote I/O unit) FCU8-EX565 (Communication expansion unit) FCU8-EX703 (Option relay unit) FCU8-KB921 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) FCU8-KB923 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) FCU8-KB931 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) Handy terminal - The following chapters and sections were added. 3.13 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel 3.14 Handy Terminal 3.16 Thermistor Sets 4.11.3 EtherNet/IP (FCU8-EX565) 4.11.5 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX703) 4.14 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel 4.15 Handy Terminal 4.16 Thermistor 5.3.7 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel 7.11.3 Connecting I/O Device via EtherNet/IP 10.10 Connecting with Thermistor (FCU8-DX408) Chapter 13 Connection of MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel Chapter 14 Connection of Handy Terminal 15.2.2 G071 Cable 15.2.4 G430 Cable 15.2.5 G460 Cable 15.2.14 J121 Cable 22.1.6 Setting the Grid Interval and the Reference Encoder for Grid Interval Chapter 25 Setting Handy Terminal - Chapter number change Due to addition of the chapters as above, the existing chapters were renumbered. - Chapter title change Some of chapter titles were changed due to addition of the Remote I/O unit. - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Nov. 2017 IB(NA)1501269-F The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series were revised in response to S/W version C7. - The following units were added. FCU8-KB922 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) FCU8-KB924 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) - The following cable was deleted. CNV2E-MB (Cable for MBE405W/MBA405W) - The following chapter was deleted. 15.3.7 CNV2E-MB Cable - The following chapters were added. 17.6.5 Thermistor Input Interface 18.5 Install User Cycle 33 Appx.3: Displaying Original Logo On Standard Screen - The following contents were changed. 3.13 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel 3.20 List of Cables 4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.8.2 FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 4.12.2 12V Manual Pulse Generator (HD60C) 4.14.1 Main Panel A , B (FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 , FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924) 5.3.7 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel 10.2 Connecting with Power Supply 13.1 Machine Operation Panel Connection System Drawing 13.2 Connecting with Power Supply 13.3 Connecting with Frame Ground 13.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 16.2 Flow of Initial Setup 17.3.1 Setting the Rotary Switch 17.3.2 Setting the DIP Switch 17.7 Initializing the NC Internal Data (SRAM) 18.1 Activate M80/M800S SETUP INSTALLER 18.2 Install Custom Screen 18.3 Install Start-up Screen 18.4 Install APLC C Language Module 19.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications 20.5.2 Setting the Number of Device Points 31.1 Setting the Encryption Key 31.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification 31.4 Caution 32.1 Protect Setting Screen 34.4.3 Measures for Power Supply 35.1 Restriction for Packing 36 Appx.6: Precautions for Compliance to UL/c-UL Standards - The following chapter numbers were corrected. Due to addition of the chapters as above, the existing chapter numbers/chapter titles were corrected. 34 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines 35 Appx.5: Restrictions for Lithium Batteries 36 Appx.6: Precautions for Compliance to UL/c-UL Standards - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Mar. 2018 IB(NA)1501269-G The descriptions were revised in response to Mitsubishi Electric CNC E80 Series. - The following units were added. FCU8-MU513 (Control unit) FCU8-MU514 (Control unit) FCU8-DU121-13 (Display unit) FCU8-KB024 (Keyboard unit) FCU8-KB025 (Keyboard unit) FCU8-DX731 (Operation panel I/O unit) FCU8-DX409 (Remote I/O unit) FCU8-EX564 (Communication expansion unit) FCU8-KB925 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) FCU8-KB926 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) FCU8-KB941 (MITSUBISHI CNC Machine operation panel) - The following cable was added. J225 (Analog output cable) - The following chapters were added. 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] 3.3 Control Unit [E80] 3.6 Display Unit [E80] 3.9 Keyboard Unit [E80] 3.12 Remote I/O Unit [E80] 3.18 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel [E80] 4.3 Environment Conditions [E80] 4.6 Control Unit [E80] 4.9 Display Unit [E80] 4.10.9 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB024) 4.10.10 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB025) 4.14.3 CC-Link IE Field (FCU8-EX564) 7.11.3 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link IE Field 9.8 Connecting with Analog Output Signal (FCU8-DX731) 10.11 Connecting with Multi-analog Input Signal (FCU8-DX409) 15.2.18 J225 Cable - The following contents were changed. 2 General Connection Diagram 3.10 Operation Panel I/O Unit 3.11 Remote I/O Unit [M800S/M80] 3.14 Communication Expansion Unit 3.17 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel [M800S/M80] 3.20 Cable Connector Sets 3.25 List of Cables 4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.10 Keyboard Unit 4.11 Operation Panel I/O Unit 4.12 Remote I/O Unit 4.14.1 CC-Link (FCU8-EX561) 4.14.2 PROFIBUS-DP (FCU8-EX563) 4.14.4 EtherNet/IP (FCU8-EX565) 4.17.1 Main Panel A , B (FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925 , FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926) 4.17.2 Sub Panel A (FCU8-KB931 / FCU8-KB941) (Continue to the next page)
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Mar. 2018 IB(NA)1501269-G (Continued from the previous page) 5.3.2 Keyboard Unit 5.3.3 Operation Panel I/O Unit 5.3.4 Remote I/O Unit 5.3.6 Communication Expansion Unit 5.3.7 MITSUBISHI CNC Machine Operation Panel 7.1 Machine Operation Panel Connection System Drawing 7.6.2 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EM/EMH Series 7.9.1 Handle Numbers 7.11 Connecting I/O Device via Communication Expansion Unit 7.11.4 Connecting I/O Device via EtherNet/IP 9.1 Operation Panel I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 9.2 Connecting with Frame Ground 9.5 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit 9.6.1 Handle Numbers 9.7 Connecting with Machine Operation Panel 9.8 Connecting with Analog I/O Signal (FCU8-DX761) 10.1 Remote I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 10.2 Connecting with Power Supply 10.3 Connecting with Frame Ground 10.5 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 13.2 Connecting with Power Supply 13.3 Connecting with Frame Ground 13.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 13.6 Connecting with Sub Panel 15.2.20 J350 Cable 15.2.21 J351 Cable 16.1 Hardware Configuration 17.2.1 Setting the Rotary Switch 17.5 Connecting the Batteries 17.6.1 Outline of the Remote I/O Unit 17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit 17.6.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units 30 Data Backup and Restoration 32.1 Protect Setting Screen - The chapter numbers were corrected. Due to addition of the chapters as above, the existing chapter numbers/chapter titles were corrected. - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Mar. 2019 IB(NA)1501269-H The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series/E80 Series were revised in response to S/W version E0. - The following chapters and sections were added. 7.6.1.2 Drive Unit Arrangement - The following chapter titles were added. 7.6.1.1 Connection of Optical Communication Cables Due to addition of section 7.6.1.2, only the chapter title was added. - The following contents were changed. 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] 2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80] 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] 3.10 Operation Panel I/O Unit 3.14 Communication Expansion Unit 3.20 Cable Connector Sets 3.24 Replacements 4.11.1 List of Units 4.11.2 FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 7.6.1.1 Connection of Optical Communication Cables 7.6.2 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EM/EMH Series 7.6.3 Connecting with Drive Unit MDS-EJ/EJH Series 7.11 Connecting I/O Device via Communication Expansion Unit 9.5 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit 9.7.1 Wiring for 24V Common Input 9.7.2 Wiring for 0V Common Input 9.8 Connecting with Analog Output Signal (FCU8-DX731) 10.5 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 13.1 Machine Operation Panel Connection System Drawing 13.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 13.5 Connecting Emergency Stop Switch 15.4 List of Cable Connector Sets 16.2 Flow of Initial Setup 17.1.1 Setting the Rotary Switch 17.5.2 Servo Drive Unit Battery 17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit 17.6.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units 19.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications 20 PLC Program Writing 20.2.2 Setting the IP Address for PC Side 20.4 Setting the Communication with GX Developer 20.5.4 Setting the Program Execution Order 22.2.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures 31.4 Caution 34.6.3 Surge Absorber 35.1.1 Target Products - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Sep. 2019 IB(NA)1501269-J The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series/E80 Series were revised in response to S/W version E1. - The following units were added. FCU8-DX834 (Operation panel I/O unit) FCU8-EX568 (FL-net expansion unit) - The following cable was added. J012 (Operation panel I/O interface cable) - The following chapters were added. 2.3.1 Connecting a Spindle Drive Unit 2.3.2 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter 3.26 System Type 4.14.5 FL-net (FCU8-EX568) 7.7 Connecting with Pulse-controlled Inverter [E80] 7.12.5 Connecting I/O Device via FL-net 9.2 Connecting with Power Supply 9.8.5 Connection with the scan input signal (FCU8-DX834) 9.8.6 Connection with the scan output signal (FCU8-DX834) 15.2.7 J012 cable 20.8 Setting the Communication with GX Works2 20.9 Setting the Parameters on GX Works2 20.10 Writing a Sequence Program with GX Works2 20.11 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Works2 24 Setting the Machine Error Compensation 25 Setting the Position Switches 26 Setting the Backlash Compensation - The following contents were changed. 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] 2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80] 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] 3.1 Control Unit [M800S] 3.10 Operation Panel I/O Unit 3.14 Communication Expansion Unit 3.25 List of Cables 4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.3.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.4.1 FCU8-MU542 / FCU8-MA542 / FCU8-MU541 / FCU8-MA541 4.6.1 FCU8-MU513 / FCU8-MU514 4.7.1 10.4-type (FCU8-DU141-31) 4.7.2 15-type (FCU8-DU181-31) 4.8.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-12) 4.8.2 10.4-type (FCU8-DU141-32) 4.8.3 15-type (FCU8-DU181-32) 4.9.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-13) 4.11 Operation Panel I/O Unit 4.11.1 List of Units 4.11.2 FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750/ FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 / FCU8-DX834 4.12.2 FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX651 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409 (Continue to the next page)
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Sep. 2019 IB(NA)1501269-J (Continued from the previous page) 5.3.3 Operation Panel I/O Unit 5.3.6 Communication Expansion Unit 7.1 Control Unit Connection System Drawing 7.3 Connecting with Emergency Stop Signal 7.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 7.5 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit 7.12 Connecting I/O Device via Communication Expansion Unit 9.1 Operation Panel I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 9.6 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit 9.8 Connecting with Machine Operation Panel 9.8.3 Wiring for Source Type Output 10.5 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 10.11 Connecting with Multi-analog Input Signal (FCU8-DX409) 16.2 Flow of Initial Setup 17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit 17.6.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units 20 Sequence Program Writing 20.1 Writing Sequence Program using the SD Card 20.2.2 Setting the IP Address for PC Side 20.3 Connecting the Control Unit and a Personal Computer 20.4 Setting the Communication with GX Developer 20.6 Writing a Sequence Program with GX Developer 20.7 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Developer 33 Data Backup and Restoration 34.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification 34.4 Caution 35.1 Protect Setting Screen - The chapter numbers were corrected. Due to addition of the chapters as above, the existing chapter numbers were corrected. - The chapter titles were corrected. The expression "PLC Program" included in the titles in the chapter 20 was changed to "Sequence Program". - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Jun. 2020 IB(NA)1501269-K The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series/E80 Series were revised in response to S/W version F1. - The following chapters were added. 2.2.1 Connecting a Spindle Drive Unit 2.2.2 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter 23.2.9 Behavior in Prohibited Area 24.3 Cyclic Error Compensation 30 Synchronous Control and Multiple-axis Synchronization Control - The following contents were changed. 2.1 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] 2.2.1 Connecting a Spindle Drive Unit 2.3.1 Connecting a Spindle Drive Unit 2.3.2 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter 3.1 Control Unit [M800S] 3.2 Control Unit [M80] 3.3 Control Unit [E80] 3.22 Genuine Memory Card 3.25 List of Cables 4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.3.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.4.1 FCU8-MU542 / FCU8-MA542 / FCU8-MU541 / FCU8-MA541 4.6.1 FCU8-MU513 / FCU8-MU514 4.12.2 FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX651 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409 5.3.7 Machine Operation Panel 6.1.2 Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable 7.1 Control Unit Connection System Drawing 7.6.1.2 Drive Unit Arrangement 7.7 Connecting with Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] 9.1 Operation Panel I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 9.6 Connecting with Remote I/O Unit 10.1 Remote I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 10.5 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel 13.2 Connecting with Power Supply 13.4 Connecting with Operation Panel I/O Unit 13.5 Connecting Emergency Stop Switch 13.6 Connecting with Sub Panel 15.2.2 G071 Cable 15.2.5 G460 Cable 15.2.9 J023/J024/J025 Cable 15.2.10 J026/J027 Cable 15.2.14 J120 Cable 15.2.15 J121 Cable 15.2.18 J224 Cable 15.3.1 Cable Wire and Assembly 15.3.3 CNP3EZ-2P/CNP3EZ-3P Cable 17.4 Setting Up without Connecting to the Motor/Drive Units at the Setup of Drive Unit 17.6.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit 17.6.4.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment 20.4 Setting the Communication with GX Developer 20.8 Setting the Communication with GX Works2 20.11 Writing a Sequence Program to ROM with GX Works2 (Continue to the next page)
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Jun. 2020 IB(NA)1501269-K (Continued from the previous page) 22.1 Adjusting the Absolute Position Detection System 22.1.1 Basic Position Alignment Method I 22.1.2 Basic Position Alignment Method II 22.1.3 Machine End Stopper Method: Automatic Initialization 22.1.4 Machine End Stopper Method: Manual Initialization 22.1.5 Dog-type 22.1.6 Setting the Grid Interval and the Reference Encoder for Grid Interval 23 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range 23.2.10 Precautions 26.2.2.1 Setting the backlash compensation II acceleration rate 26.2.2.2 Setting compensation amount of backlash compensation II 29.2 Deceleration Check Method 29.3 Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal 29.6 Precautions 35.2 Setting of Expiration Date 35.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification 36.1 Protect Setting Screen - The chapter titles were corrected. 3.17 Machine Operation Panel [M800S/M80] 3.18 Machine Operation Panel [E80] 4.17 Machine Operation Panel 4.20 Exclusive SD Cards 5.3.7 Machine Operation Panel 7.7 Connecting with Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel 17.4 Setting Up without Connecting to the Motor/Drive Units at the Setup of Drive Unit 23.1 Stroke End 23.2 Stored Stroke Limit - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Mar. 2021 IB(NA)1501269-L The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series/E80 Series were revised in response to S/W version F4. - The following units were added. FCU8-EX744 (Vibration cutting expansion Unit) - The following chapters were added. 2.4 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter [M80/E80] 3.15 Function Expansion Unit [E80] 4.14.6 Vibration Cutting Expansion Unit (FCU8-EX744) - The following chapter was deleted. 2.2.2 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter 2.3.2 Connecting a Pulse-controlled Inverter - The following contents were changed. 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] 2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80] 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] 3.14 Function Expansion Unit [M800S/M80] 4.4.1 FCU8-MU542 / FCU8-MA542 / FCU8-MU541 / FCU8-MA541 4.5.1 FCU8-MU511 / FCU8-MU512 / FCU8-MU501 / FCU8-MU502 4.6.1 FCU8-MU513 / FCU8-MU514 4.7.1 10.4-type (FCU8-DU141-31) 4.7.2 15-type (FCU8-DU181-31) 4.8.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-12) 4.8.2 10.4-type (FCU8-DU141-32) 4.8.3 15-type (FCU8-DU181-32) 4.9.1 8.4-type (FCU8-DU121-13) 4.10.1 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB026) 4.10.2 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB028) 4.10.3 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB029) 4.10.4 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB041) 4.10.5 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB046) 4.10.6 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB047) 4.10.7 Keyboard for 10.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB048) 4.10.8 Keyboard for 15-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB083) 4.10.9 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB024) 4.10.10 Keyboard for 8.4-type Display Unit (FCU8-KB025) 4.11.2 FCU8-DX731 / FCU8-DX750 / FCU8-DX760 / FCU8-DX761 / FCU8-DX834 4.12.2 FCU8-DX220 / FCU8-DX230 / FCU8-DX231 / FCU8-DX202 / FCU8-DX213 / FCU8-DX213-1 / FCU8-DX654 / FCU8-DX654-1 / FCU8-DX651 / FCU8-DX408 / FCU8-DX409 4.15.1 5V Manual Pulse Generator (UFO-01-2Z9) 4.15.2 12V Manual Pulse Generator (HD60C) 4.17.1 Main Panel A , B (FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925 , FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926) 4.17.2 Sub Panel A (FCU8-KB931 / FCU8-KB941) 5.3.6 Function Expansion Unit 7.12 Connecting I/O Device via Function Expansion Unit 7.12.1 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link 7.12.2 Connecting I/O Device via PROFIBUS-DP 7.12.3 Connecting I/O Device via CC-Link IE Field 7.12.4 Connecting I/O Device via EtherNet/IP 7.12.5 Connecting I/O Device via FL-net (Continue to the next page)
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Mar. 2021 IB(NA)1501269-L (Continued from the previous page) 13 Connection of Machine Operation Panel 13.3 Connecting with Frame Ground 20.4 Setting the Communication with GX Developer 20.8 Setting the Communication with GX Works2 22.1.3 Machine End Stopper Method: Automatic Initialization 22.1.4 Machine End Stopper Method: Manual Initialization 29.6 Precautions 30.1.2.2 Zero Point Establishment in Dogless-type Absolute Position Detection System - The chapter titles were corrected. 3.13 Function Safety Expansion Unit [M80] 3.14 Function Expansion Unit [M800S/M80] 4.13 Functional Safety Expansion Unit 4.14 Function Expansion Unit 4.14.7 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX702) 4.14.8 Option Relay Unit (FCU8-EX703) 5.3.6 Function Expansion Unit 7.12 Connecting I/O Device via Function Expansion Unit - Chapter title deleted. 2.2.1 Connecting a Spindle Drive Unit 2.3.1 Connecting a Spindle Drive Unit - Mistakes were corrected.
Sep. 2021 IB(NA)1501269-M - The following contents were changed. 7.1 Control Unit Connection System Drawing 38.1 Introduction 38.2 EMC Directives - The chapter titles were corrected. 38.2 EMC Directives
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Jul. 2022 IB(NA)1501269-N The descriptions of M800 Series/M80 Series/E80 Series were revised in response to S/W version F8. - The following display units were added. FCU8-DU142-31 / FCU8-DU182-31 / FCU8-DU142-32 / FCU8-DU182-32 - The following chapters were added. 2.4 Difference in Connection Depending on the Display Unit 2.5 Connecting an Operation Panel I/O Unit (FCU8-DX834) 2.7 Connecting a BiSS Encoder 7.8 Connecting with a BiSS Encoder 31 OMR Control 32 Variable Torsion Compensation - The following contents were changed. 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] 2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80] 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] 3.4 Display Unit [M800S] 3.5 Display Unit [M80] 3.27 System Type 4.1.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.2.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.3.1 Installation Environment Conditions 4.4.1 FCU8-MU542 / FCU8-MA542 / FCU8-MU541 / FCU8-MA541 4.7.2 15-type (FCU8-DU182-31/FCU8-DU181-31) 4.7.3 Precautions 4.8.3 15-type (FCU8-DU182-32/FCU8-DU181-32) 4.8.4 Precautions 4.17.1 Main Panel A,B (FCU8-KB921 / FCU8-KB922 / FCU8-KB925, FCU8-KB923 / FCU8-KB924 / FCU8-KB926) 5.1 Heat Radiation Countermeasures 5.3.1 Display Unit 7.1 Control Unit Connection System Drawing 7.13.2 Connecting I/O Device via PROFIBUS-DP 9.1 Operation Panel I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 10.1 Remote I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 11.1 Manual Pulse Generator Connection System Drawing 12.1 Synchronous Feed Encoder Connection System Drawing 14.1 Handy Terminal Connection System Drawing 16.2 Flow of Initial Setup 18.1 Activate M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER 19.1 Selecting the NC System Type and Displayed Language 19.2 Setting the Parameters for the System Specifications 19.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications 38.5.2 Shield Treatment of Cables 40 Appx.6: Precautions for Compliance to UL/c-UL Standards - The chapter titles were changed. 4.7.1 10.4-type (FCU8-DU142-31/FCU8-DU141-31) 4.7.2 15-type (FCU8-DU182-31/FCU8-DU181-31) 4.8.2 10.4-type (FCU8-DU142-32/FCU8-DU141-32) 4.8.3 15-type (FCU8-DU182-32/FCU8-DU181-32) 18 Setting Up with M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER 18.1 Activate M80/800S SETUP INSTALLER - Mistakes were corrected.
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Dec. 2022 IB(NA)1501269-P - The following contents were corrected. 2.1 General Connection Diagram [M800S] 2.2 General Connection Diagram [M80] 2.3 General Connection Diagram [E80] 29.4 Parameter - The following contents were changed. 40 Appx.4: EMC Installation Guidelines
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Global Service Network
AMERICA EUROPE
.V.B EPORUE CIRTCELE IHSIBUSTIM)RETNEC AF ACIREMA( .CNI NOITAMOTUA CIRTCELE IHSIBUSTIM Central Region Service Center (Chicago) European Service Headquarters (Dusseldorf, GERMANY)
YNAMREG ,NEGNITAR 28804 1 ztalP-cirtcelE-ihsibustiM .A.S.U ,16006 SIONILLI ,SLLIH NONREV ,YAWKRAP SDOOW ETAROPROC 005 0195-684-2012-94+ :XAF / 0005-684-2012-94+ :LET 0562-874-748-1+ :XAF / 0052-874-748-1+ :LET
Minneapolis, MN Service Satellite Detroit, MI Service Satellite South Germany Service Center (Stuttgart) Grand Rapids, MI Service Satellite SCHELMENWASENSTRASSE 16-20, 70567 STUTTGART, GERMANY Milwaukee, WI Service Satellite TEL: + 49-711-770598-0 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141 Cleveland, OH Service Satellite Indianapolis, IN Service Satellite France Service Center (Paris) St. Louis, MO Service Satellite 2 RUE DE LUNION, 92565 RUEIL-MALMAISON CEDEX, FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 South/East Region Service Center (Georgia) 1845 SATELLITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. France Service Satellite (Lyon)
ECNARF TSEIRP TNIAS 00896 DONOM SEUQCAJ EELLA ,042 9154-852-876-1+ XAF / 9254-852-876-1+ LET Charleston, SC Service Satellite TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Charlotte, NC Service Satellite Raleigh, NC Service Satellite Italy Service Center (Milan) Dallas, TX Service Satellite VIA ENERGY PARK 14, VIMERCATE 20871 (MB) ITALY Houston, TX Service Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 Hartford, CT Service Satellite Knoxville, TN Service Satellite Italy Service Satellite (Padova) Nashville, TN Service Satellite VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY Baltimore, MD Service Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 Pittsburg, PA Service Satellite Tampa, FL Service Satellite U.K. Service Center Syracuse, NY Service Satellite TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. Orlando, FL Service Satellite TEL: +44-1707-288-780 / FAX: +44-1707-278-695 Lafayette, LA Service Satellite Philadelphia, PA Service Satellite Spain Service Center
CTRA. RUBI, 76-80 8174 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA, SPAIN Western Region Service Center (California) TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579 5900-B KATELLA AVE. - 5900-A KATELLA AVE. CYPRESS, CALIFORNIA 90630, U.S.A. TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Poland Service Center San Jose, CA Service Satellite UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND Seattle, WA Service Satellite TEL: +48-12-347-6500 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701 Denver, CO Service Satellite
Hungary Service Center Canada Region Service Center (Toronto) BUDARS OFFICE PARK, SZABADSG T 117., 2040 BUDARS, HUNGARY
1074-036-21-84+ :XAF / 0056-743-21-84+ :LET ADANAC ,2JO R3L OIRATNO ,MAHKRAM EUNEVA HT41 9924 TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Edmonton, AB Service Satellite Turkey Service Center Montreal, QC Service Satellite MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TURKEY ELEKTRK RNLER A.
SERIFALI MAHALLESI KALE SOKAK. NO.41 34775 Mexico Region Service Center (Queretaro) UMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY Parque Tecnolgico Innovacin Quertaro, Lateral Carretera Estatal 431, Km 2+200, Lote 91 Modulos 1 y 2 TEL: +90-216-969-2500 / FAX: +90-216-661-44-47 Hacienda la Machorra, CP 76246, El Marqus, Quertaro, Mxico TEL: +52-442-153-6050 Czech Republic Service Center Monterrey, NL Service Satellite AutoCont Control Systems s.r.o (Service Partner) Mexico City, DF Service Satellite KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC
TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
BRAZIL Russia Service Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC RUSSIA LLC
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DO BRASIL COMRCIO E SERVIOS LTDA. LETNIKOVSKAYA STREET 2, BLD.1, 5TH 115114 MOSCOW, RUSSIA Votorantim Office TEL: +7-495-721-2070 / FAX: +7-495-721-2071 AV. GISELE CONSTANTINO,1578, PARQUE BELA VISTA, VOTORANTIM-SP, BRAZIL CEP:18.110-650 TEL: +55-15-3023-9000 Sweden Service Center Blumenau, Santa Catarina Office HAMMARBACKEN 14, P.O.BOX 750 SE-19127, SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN
TEL: +46-8-6251200 / FAX: +46-8-6251014
Bulgaria Service Center AKHNATON Ltd. (Service Partner) 4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061
Ukraine Service Center (Kiev) CSC Automation Ltd. (Service Partner) 4 B, YEVHENA SVERSTYUKA STR., 02002 KIEV, UKRAINE TEL: +380-44-494-3344 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366
Belarus Service Center TECHNIKON Ltd. (Service Partner) NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
South Africa Service Center Adroit Technologies (Service Partner) 20 WATERFORD OFFICE PARK, WATERFORD DRIVE, CNR OF WITKOPPEN ROAD, FOURWAYS JOHANNESBURG SOUTH AFRICA TEL: +27-11-658-8100 / FAX: +27-11-658-8101
ASEAN CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER) Singapore Service Center CNC Call Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 TEL: +86-400-921-5130 TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439
Shanghai Service Center NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU, SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
PHILIPPINES TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-3000*8422 Qingdao Service Center
MELCO FACTORY AUTOMATION PHILIPPINES INC. Suzhou Service Center Head Office Wuhan Service Center 128 LOPEZ RIZAL STREET, BRGY., HIGHWAY HILLS, MANDALUYONG CITY , MM PHILIPPINES 1550 Ningbo Service Center TEL: +63-2-8256-8042 / FAX: +632-8637-2294 Hefei Service Center
Beijing Service Center Philippines Service Center Tianjin Service Center KM.23 WEST SERVICE ROAD SSH, CUPANG ,MUNTINLUPA CITY, PHILIPPINES Xian Service Center TEL: +63-2-8807-0420 / FAX: +63-2-8842-5202 Dalian Service Center
Chengdu Service Center
VIETNAM Shenzhen Service Center LEVEL8, GALAXY WORLD TOWER B, 1 YABAO ROAD, LONGGANG DISTRICT,
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO., LTD. SHENZHEN 518129, CHINA Vietnam Ho Chi Minh Service Center TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8229-3686 11TH & 12TH FLOOR, VIETTEL TOWER B, 285 CACH MANG THANG 8 STREET, WARD 12, DISTRICT 10, Dongguan Service Center HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM Xiamen Service Center TEL: +84-28-3910-5945 / FAX: +84-28-3910-5947
Vietnam Hanoi Service Center KOREA 14TH FLOOR, CAPITAL TOWER, 109 TRAN HUNG DAO STREET, CUA NAM WARD, HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HA NOI CITY, VIETNAM MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER) TEL: +84-24-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-24-3937-8076 Korea Service Center
8F GANGSEO HANGANG XI-TOWER A, 401 YANGCHEON-RO, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 07528 KOREA
INDONESIA TEL: +82-2-3660-9631 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668 Korea Daegu Service Satellite
PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA Indonesia Service Center (Cikarang) JL. KENARI RAYA BLOK G2-07A, DELTA SILICON 5, LIPPO CIKARANG - BEKASI 17550, INDONESIA TAIWAN TEL: +62-21-2961-7797 / FAX: +62-21-2961-7794
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER) Taiwan Taichung Service Center
MALAYSIA NO. 8-1, GONGYEQU 16th RD., XITUN DIST., TAICHUNG CITY 40768 , TAIWAN TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SALES MALAYSIA SDN. BHD. Malaysia Service Center (Kuala Lumpur Service Center) Taiwan Taipei Service Center LOT 11, JALAN 219, P.O BOX 1036, 46860 PETALING JAYA, SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA 11F, NO.88, SEC.6, ZHONGSHAN N. RD., SHILIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN TEL: +60-3-7626-5032 TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433 Johor Bahru Service Satellite Pulau Pinang Service Satellite Taiwan Tainan Service Center
11F.-1, NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. RD., YONGKANG DIST., TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
THAILAND
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO., LTD. OCEANIA Thailand Service Center (Bangkok) 101, TRUE DIGITAL PARK OFFICE, 5TH FLOOR, SUKHUMVIT ROAD, BANGCHAK, PHRA KHANONG, MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. BANGKOK, 10260 THAILAND Oceania Service Center TEL: +66-2-092-8600 / FAX: +66-2-043-1231-33 348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269/ FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
INDIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT., LTD. CNC Technical Center (Bangalore) PLOT NO. 56, 4TH MAIN ROAD, PEENYA PHASE 3, PEENYA INDUSTRIAL AREA, BANGALORE 560058, KARNATAKA, INDIA TEL : +91-80-4655-2121 Chennai Service Satellite Coimbatore Service Satellite Hyderabad Service Satellite
North India Service Center (Gurgaon) PLOT 517, GROUND FLOOR, UDYOG VIHAR PHASE-III, GURUGRAM 122008, HARYANA, INDIA TEL : +91-124-463-0300 Ludhiana Service Satellite Panthnagar Service Satellite Delhi Service Satellite Jamshedpur Service Satellite Manesar Service Satellite
West India Service Center (Pune) ICC-Devi GAURAV TECHNOLOGY PARK, UNIT NO.402, FOURTH FLOOR, NORTH WING, SURVEY NUMBER 191-192 (P), NEXT to INDIAN CARD CLOTHING COMPANY Ltd, OPP. VALLABH NAGAR, PIMPRI, PUNE- 411 018, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA TEL : +91-20-6819-2274 Kolhapur Service Satellite Aurangabad Service Satellite Mumbai Service Satellite
West India Service Center (Ahmedabad) 204-209, 2ND FLOOR, 31FIVE, CORPORATE ROAD PRAHLADNAGAR, AHMEDABAD -380015, GUJARAT, INDIA TEL : + 91-79-6777-7888 Rajkot Service Satellite
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
COPYRIGHT 2015-2022 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Related manuals for Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the E80 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Setup Manual for Mitsubishi E80 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Setup Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi E80. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi E80 Numerical Control Setup Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.